Help Print this page 
Title and reference
Council Directive 94/55/EC of 21 November 1994 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States with regard to the transport of dangerous goods by road

OJ L 319, 12.12.1994, p. 7–13 (ES, DA, DE, EL, EN, FR, IT, NL, PT)
Special edition in Finnish: Chapter 07 Volume 005 P. 165 - 171
Special edition in Swedish: Chapter 07 Volume 005 P. 165 - 171
Special edition in Czech: Chapter 07 Volume 002 P. 217 - 223
Special edition in Estonian: Chapter 07 Volume 002 P. 217 - 223
Special edition in Latvian: Chapter 07 Volume 002 P. 217 - 223
Special edition in Lithuanian: Chapter 07 Volume 002 P. 217 - 223
Special edition in Hungarian Chapter 07 Volume 002 P. 217 - 223
Special edition in Maltese: Chapter 07 Volume 002 P. 217 - 223
Special edition in Polish: Chapter 07 Volume 002 P. 217 - 223
Special edition in Slovak: Chapter 07 Volume 002 P. 217 - 223
Special edition in Slovene: Chapter 07 Volume 002 P. 217 - 223
Special edition in Bulgarian: Chapter 07 Volume 003 P. 128 - 135
Special edition in Romanian: Chapter 07 Volume 003 P. 128 - 135
Languages, formats and link to OJ
Multilingual display
Text

31994L0055

Council Directive 94/55/EC of 21 November 1994 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States with regard to the transport of dangerous goods by road

Official Journal L 319 , 12/12/1994 P. 0007 - 0013
Finnish special edition: Chapter 7 Volume 5 P. 0165
Swedish special edition: Chapter 7 Volume 5 P. 0165
L 275 28/10/1996 P. 0001


COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 94/55/EC of 21 November 1994 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States with regard to the transport of dangerous goods by road

THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,

Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 75 thereof,

Having regard to the proposal from the Commission (1),

Having regard to the opinion of the Economic and Social Committee (2),

Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 189c of the Treaty (3),

(1) Whereas, over the years, both the national and the international transport of dangerous goods by road have significantly increased, adding to the dangers in the event of an accident;

(2) Whereas all Member States except Ireland are Contracting Parties to the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR), the geographical scope of which extends beyond the Community and which lays down uniform rules for the safe international transport of dangerous goods by road; whereas it is consequently desirable that such rules be extended to cover national traffic in order to harmonize across the Community the conditions under which dangerous goods are transported by road;

(3) Whereas no Community legislation embraces the full range of measures required to ensure the safe transport of dangerous goods and the relevant national measures vary from one Member State to another; whereas those divergences are an obstacle to the free provision of transport services and, moreover, to the free movement of vehicles and transport equipment; whereas in order to overcome that obstacle uniform rules applicable to all intra-Community transport should be defined;

(4) Whereas an action of this nature must be carried out at Community level to ensure consistency with other Community legislation, to ensure a satisfactory degree of harmonization to facilitate the free movement of goods and services and to ensure a high level of safety for national and international transport operations;

(5) Whereas the provisions of this Directive are without prejudice to the commitment entered into by the Community and its Member States, in accordance with the goals set under Agenda 21, Chapter 19, at the Unced conference of June 1992 in Rio de Janeiro, to strive for the future harmonization of systems for the classification of dangerous substances;

(6) Whereas no specific Community legislation yet governs the safety conditions under which biological agents and genetically modified micro-organisms, regulated under Council Directives 90/219/EEC (4), 90/220/EEC (5) and 90/679/EEC (6), should be transported;

(7) Whereas this Directive takes account of other Community policies in the fields of worker safety, vehicle construction and environmental protection;

(8) Whereas the Member States remain free to regulate any operation for the transport of dangerous goods carried out within their territory by a vehicle not covered by the Directive regardless of where the vehicle is registered;

(9) Whereas the Member States must be able to apply specific road-traffic regulations to the transport of dangerous goods within their territories;

(10) Whereas the Member States must be able to maintain their quality-control requirements as regards certain national transport operations until the Commission reports to the Council on these matters;

(11) Whereas the provisions of the ADR authorize the conclusion of agreements derogating therefrom, and whereas the large number of agreements concluded bilaterally between Member States impedes the free provisions of dangerous-goods transport services; whereas including the necessary provisions in the Annexes to this Directive should overcome the need for such derogations; whereas provision should be made for a transitional period during which the Member States may continue to apply existing agreements amongst themselves;

(12) Whereas it is necessary to transpose into Community law the provisions of the ADR, including the requirements concerning the construction of vehicles transporting dangerous goods; whereas, in this context, provision should be made for a transitional period so that the Member States may temporarily maintain certain specific national provisions on construction requirements for nationally registered vehicles;

(13) Whereas existing information procedures in the field of related national legislative proposals must be used in order to increase transparency for all economical operators;

(14) Whereas as regards national transport, the Member States must retain the right to apply rules complying with the United Nations multimodal Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, in so far as the ADR is not yet harmonized with those rules, the purpose of which is to facilitate the inter-modal transport of dangerous goods;

(15) Whereas the Member States must be able to regulate or prohibit the transport by road of certain dangerous goods within their territories, but only for reasons other than transport safety; whereas in this context the Member States may retain the right in the case of certain transports of very dangerous substances to impose the use of transport by rail or inland waterway or may maintain very specific packaging for certain very dangerous substances;

(16) Whereas for the purposes of this Directive the Member States must be able to apply more stringent or more lenient rules to certain transport operations performed within their territories by means of vehicles registered there;

(17) Whereas the harmonization of conditions should take account of specific national circumstances and therefore this Directive must be sufficiently flexible in providing the Member States with the possibility of granting certain derogations; whereas the application of new technological and industrial developments must not be impeded and provision must therefore be made for temporary derogations;

(18) Whereas vehicles registered in non-member countries must be allowed to perform international transport within the territories of Member States if they comply with the ADR;

(19) Whereas it must be possible to adapt this Directive rapidly to technical progress, in order to take account of new provisions incorporated in the ADR and to decide upon the application and implementation of emergency measures in the event of accidents or incidents; whereas a committee should be created for that purpose and a procedure should be established for close cooperation between the Member States and the Commission within that committee;

(20) Whereas the Annexes to this Directive contain provisions covering the vocational training of certain drivers of vehicles transporting dangerous goods by road; whereas, therefore, Council Directive 89/684/EEC of 21 December 1994 on vocational training for certain drivers of vehicles carrying dangerous goods by road (7) should be repealed,

HAS ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:

CHAPTER I Scope, definitions and general provisions

Article 1

1. This Directive shall apply to the transport of dangerous goods by road within or between Member States. It shall not apply to the transport of dangerous goods by vehicles belonging to or under the responsibility of the armed forces.

2. This Directive shall not, however, affect the Member States' right, with due regard to Community law, to lay down requirements as regards:

(a) the national and international transport of dangerous goods within their territories performed by vehicles not covered by this Directive,

(b) road-traffic regulations specific to the national and international transport of dangerous goods;

(c) quality controls on undertakings, in accordance with ISO standards 9001 and 9002, where they carry out national transport operations involving:

(i) explosive substances and article in Class 1, where the quantity of explosive substance contained per transport unit exceeds:

- 1 000 kg for division 1.1, or

- 3 000 kg for division 1,2, or

- 5 000 kg for divisions 1.3 and 1.5;

(ii) the following very dangerous substances in tanks or in tank-containers of a total capacity exceeding 3 000 litres:

- substances of Class 2

- gas classified under

(at)

(bt)

(b)

(ct)

(c)

- deeply refrigerated liquified gases of 7° (b) and 8° (b),

- substances of Classes 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1 and 8

- not listed under (b) or (c) in those classes, or

- listed therein but having a hazard code with three or more significant digits (not including any zero);

(iii) the following packages of Class 7 (radioactive materials): packages of fissile materials, packages of type B (U), packages of type B (M).

The scope of the national provisions concerning these requirements may not be extended.

The provisions in question shall cease to apply if similar measures are made obligatory under Community provisions.

Before 31 December 1998 the Commission shall submit to the Council a report assessing the safety aspects covered by this provision together with an appropriate proposal for its continuation or repeal.

Article 2

For the purposes of this Directive:

- 'ADR` shall mean the European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road, concluded at Geneva on 30 September 1957, as amended,

- 'vehicle` shall mean any motor vehicle intended for use on the road, being complete or incomplete, having at least four wheels and a maximum design speed exceeding 25 km/h, and its trailers, with the exception of vehicles which run on rails, and of agricultural and forestry tractors and all mobile machinery,

- 'dangerous goods` shall mean those substances and articles the transport of which by road is prohibited or authorized only in certain circumstances by Annexes A and B to this Directive,

- 'transport` shall mean any road transport operation performed by a vehicle wholly or partly on public roads within the territory of a Member State, including the activity of loading and unloading, covered by Annexes A and B, without prejudice to the arrangements laid down by the laws of the Member States concerning liability in respect of such operations.

It shall not include transport wholly performed within the perimeter of an enclosed area.

Article 3

1. Without prejudice to Article 6, dangerous goods the transport of which is prohibited by Annexes A and B to this Directive shall not be transported by road.

2. Save as otherwise provided in this Directive, the transport of other dangerous goods listed in Annex A shall be authorized subject to compliance with the conditions imposed in Annexes A and B, in particular as regards:

(a) the packaging and labelling of the goods in question; and

(b) the construction, equipment and proper operation of the vehicle carrying the goods in question.

CHAPTER II Derogations, restrictions and exemptions

Article 4

Solely for the purposes of national transport operations performed by vehicles registered within its territory each Member State may retain provisions of its national law on the transport of dangerous goods by road which are consistent with the UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods until Anexes A and B to this Directive are revised to reflect those recommendations. The Member States concerned shall inform the Commission accordingly.

Article 5

1. Without prejudice to other Community legislation, in paticular that on market access, each Member State shall retain the right, strictly for reasons other than safety during transport, such as reasons of national security or environmental protection, to regulate or prohibit the transport of certain dangerous goods within its territory.

2. Any rules imposed by a Member State on vehicles performing internaitonal transport through its territory and authorized by Marginal 10 599 of Annex B shall be limited in scope locally, shall apply to both national and international transport and may not result in any discrimination.

3. (a) Each Member State may apply more stringent provisions concerning transport, with the exception of construction requirements, performed by vehicles registered or put into circulation within its territory.

(b) The Member States may, however, maintain specific national provisions on the centres of gravity of tank-vehicles registered within their territories until the amendment, if any, of Marginal 211 128 of Annex B to this Directive, but not, in any event, after 31 December 1998.

4. If a Member State considers that the safety provisions applicable have been found to be insufficient, on the occasion of an accident or an incident, to limit the hazards involved in transport and if there is an urgent need to take action, it shall notify the Commission, at the planning stage, of the measures which it proposes to take. Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 9, the Commission shall decide whether the implementation of those measures should be authorized and determine their duration.

5. The Member States may maintain any national provisions applicable on 31 December 1996 with regard to:

- the transport of Class 1.1 substances,

- the transport of toxic, unstable and/or flammable gases of Class 2,

- the transport of substances containing dioxins or furans,

- the transport in tanks or tank-containers of more than 3 000 litres of liquids of Classes 3, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1 or 8 which do not appear under (b) or (c) in these classes.

Such provisions may concern only:

- the prohibition of such transport operations by road where it is possible for them to be carried out by rail or by inland waterway,

- a requirement to follow certain preferred routes,

- any other provisions concerning the packaging of substances containing dioxins or furans.

These provisions may not be extended or made more stringent. The Member States shall communicate these national provisions to the Commission, which shall inform the other Member States accordingly.

Article 6

1. Each Member State may authorize the transport by road within its territory of dangerous goods classified, packaged and labelled in accordance with the international requirements for maritime or air transport whenever the transport operation involves a sea or air voyage.

2. Any provisions in Annexes A and B concerning the use of languages in relevant marking or documentation shall not apply to transport operations confined to the territory of a single Member State. Member States may authorize the use of languages other than those provided for in the Annexes for transport operations performed within their territories.

3. Within its territory each Member State may authorize the use of vehicles constructed before 1 January 1997 which do not comply with this Directive but were constructed in accordance with the national requirements in force on 31 December 1996 provided that such vehicles are maintained to the required safety levels.

4. Each Member State may maintain provisions of national legislation in force on 31 December 1996 relating to the construction, use and conditions of carriage of new receptacles within the meaning of Marginal 2 212 of Annex A and new tanks which do not comply with Annexes A and B, until references to standards for the construction and use of tanks and receptacles with the same binding force as the provisions of this Directive are added to Annexes A and B and in any event no later than 31 December 1998. Receptacles and tanks constructed before 1 January 1999 and maintained to the required safety levels may continue to be used under the original conditions.

5. Each Member State may maintain national provisions other than those set out in Annexes A and B with regard to the reference temperature for the transport within its territory of liquified gases or mixtures of liquified gases until provisions relating to appropriate reference temperatures for designated climatic areas are incorporated into European standards and references to those standards are added to Annexes A and B.

6. Each Member State may allow the use, for transport within its territory, of packagings constructed but not certified in accordance with the ADR before 1 January 1997 provided that such packaging shows the date of manufacture and is capable of passing the tests laid down in national legislation in force on 31 December 1996 and provided that all such packagings are maintained to the relevant safety levels (including testing and inspection where required), in accordance with the following scheme: intermediate metal bulk containers and metal drums exceeding 50 litres in capacity, for up to 15 years after their date of manufacture; other metal packagings and all plastics packagings, for up to five years after their date of manufacture; other metal packagings and all plastics packagings, for up to five years after their date of manufacture but not after 31 December 1998.

7. Each Member State may allow the transport within its territory of certain dangerous goods packaged before 1 January 1997 until 31 December 1998, provided that the goods are classified, packaged and labelled in accordance with the requirements of national legislation in force before 1 January 1997.

8. Each Member State may maintain provisions of national legislation in force on 31 December 1996 relating to the display of an emergency action code in place of the hazard identification number provided for in Annex B for transport operations performed within its territory by vehicles registered within that territory.

9. Each Member State may, after consulting the Commission, maintain provisions less stringent than those set out in Annexes A and B to this Directive for the transport within its territory of small quantities of certain dangerous goods, with the exception of substances having a medium or high level of radioactivity.

10. Provided that safety is not compromised, the Member States may grant temporary derogations from Annexes A and B for the purpose of carrying out within their territories the trials necessary before the amendment of those Annexes to adapt them to technological and industrial developments. The Commission shall be informed thereof and shall inform the other Member States accordingly.

A temporaty derogation agreed on between Member States' competent authorities on the basis of Marginals 2 010 and 10 602 of Annexes A and B shall take the form of a multilateral agreement proposed to all Member States' competent authorities by the authority taking the initiative in respect of the agreement. The Commission shall be informed accordingly.

Any derogation such as referred to in the first and second subparagraphs shall be applied without discrimination on grounds of the nationality or the place of establishment of the consignor, haulier or consignee; they may last for up to five years and shall not be renewable.

11. Each Member State may authorize single transports of dangerous goods which are either prohibited by Annexes A and B or performed under conditions different from those laid down in Annexes A and B.

12. Without prejudice to paragraph 2, each Member State may until 31 December 1998 at the latest apply existing agreements with other Member States that comply with the ADR, without discrimination on grounds of the nationality or the place of establishment of the consignor, haulier or consignee. Any other derogation authorized by Marginals 2 010 and 10 602 of Annexes A and B shall comply with paragraph 10.

Article 7

Subject to national or Community provisions on market access, vehicles registered or put into circulation in non-member countries shall be authorized to perform the international transport of dangerous goods within the Community if the transport in question complies with the ADR.

CHAPTER III Final privisions

Article 8

The amendments necessary to adapt Annexes A and B to scientific and technical progress in the fields covered by this Directive in order to take account of amendments to the Annexes to the ADR shall be adopted in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 9.

Article 9

1. The Commission shall be assisted by a committee on the transport of dangerous goods, hereinafter referred to as 'the Committee`, which shall consist of representatives of the Member States and be chaired by a representative of the Commission.

2. The Commission representative shall submit to the Committee a draft of the measures to be taken. The Committee shall deliver its opinion on the draft within a time limit which the chairman may lay down according to the urgency of the matter. The opinion shall be delivered by the majority laid down in Article 148 (2) of the Treaty in the case of decisions which the Council is required to adopt on a proposal from the Commission. The votes of the representatives of the Member States within the Committee shall be weighted in the manner set out in that Article. The chairman shall not vote.

3. (a) The Commission shall adopt the measures envisaged if they are in accordance with the Committee's opinion.

(b) If the measures envisaged are not in accordance with the Committee's opinion or if no opinion is delivered, the Commission shall, without delay, submit to the Council a proposal relating to the measures to be taken. The Council shall act by a qualified majority.

If the Council does not act within three months of the date of referral to the Council the Commission shall adopt the proposed measures.

Article 10

1. The Member States shall bring into force the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary for them to comply with this Directive before 1 January 1997. They shall forthwith inform the Commission thereof.

When the Member States adopt those measures they shall include references or shall accompany them with such references on their official publication. The Member States shall lay down the manner in which such references shall be made.

2. The Member States shall communicate to the Commission the texts of the main provisions of national law which they adopt in the field governed by this Directive.

Article 11

1. Directive 89/684/EEC is hereby repealed as from the deadline for the transposition of this Directive into national legislation.

2. Provisional certificates issued by the Member States in accordance with Article 4 (2) of that Directive for national transport only shall remain valid until 31 December 1996. Certificates issued in accordance with Article 4 (4) of that Directive may continue to be used until the end of their period of validity, but not later than 1 July 1997 for dangerous goods transported in tanks or for explosives and not later than 1 January 2000 for other dangerous goods.

Article 12

This Directive is addressed to the Member States.

Done at Brussels, 21 November 1994.

For the Council

The President

M. WISSMANN

(1) OJ No C 17, 20. 1. 1994, p. 6.

(2) OJ No C 195, 18. 7. 1994, p. 15.

(3) European Parliament opinion of 3 May 1994 (OJ No C 205, 25. 7. 1994, p. 54), Council common position of 19 September 1994 (OJ No C 301, 27. 10. 1994, p. 25) and European Parliament decision of 17 November 1994 (not yet published in the Official Journal).

(4) OJ No L 117, 8. 5. 1990, p. 1.

(5) OJ No L 117, 8. 5. 1990, p. 15.

(6) OJ No L 374, 31. 12. 1990, p. 1.

(7) OJ No L 398, 30. 12. 1989, p. 33.

ANNEX A

Provisions concerning dangerous substances and articles

TABLE OF CONTENTS OF ANNEX A

Part I. Definitions and general provisions

Marginals Page

Definitions 2000 and 2001 4

General Provisions 2002 to 2099 6

Part II. List of substances and special provisions for the various classes

Class 1 Explosive substances and articles 2100 et seq. 15

Class 2 Gases: compressed, liquefied or dissolved under pressure 2200 et seq. 52

Class 3 Flammable liquids 2300 et seq. 76

Class 4.1 Flammable solids 2400 et seq. 102

Class 4.2 Substances liable to spontaneous combustion 2430 et seq. 121

Class 4.3 Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases 2470 et seq. 133

Class 5.1 Oxidizing substances 2500 et seq. 143

Class 5.2 Organic peroxides 2550 et seq. 156

Class 6.1 Toxic substances 2600 et seq. 172

Class 6.2 Infectious substances 2650 et seq. 204

Class 7 Radioactive material 2700 et seq. 212

Class 8 Corrosive substances 2800 et seq. 258

Class 9 Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles 2900 et seq. 277

Part III. Appendices to annex A

Appendix A.1 A. Stability and safety conditions relating to explosive substances and articles, nitrated mixtures of nitrocellulose, self-reactive substances and organic peroxides 3100 et seq. 288

B. Glossary of names in marginal 2101 3170 et seq. 295

Appendix A.2 A. Provisions relating to the nature of aluminium-alloy receptacles for certain gases of Class 2 3200 et seq. 307

B. Requirements concerning the materials and construction of receptacles intended for the carriage of deeply-refrigerated liquefied gases of Class 2 3250 et seq. 310

C. Provisions relating to tests on aerosol dispensers and non-refillable containers for gases under pressure of Class 2, 10° and 11° 3291 et seq. 315

Appendix A.3 A. Tests relating to flammable liquids of Classes 3, 6.1 and 8 (Test for determining flash-point, test for determining peroxide content, test for determining combustibility) 3300 et seq. 315

B. Test for determining fluidity 3310 et seq. 319

C. Tests relating to flammable solids of Class 4.1 3320 et seq. 321

D. Tests relating to substances liable to spontaneous combustion of Class 4.2 3330 et seq. 324

E. Test relating to substances of Class 4.3 which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases 3340 et seq. 325

F. Test relating to solid oxidizing substances of Class 5.1 3350 et seq. 326

G. Tests for determining the ecotoxicity, persistence and bioaccumulation of substances in the aquatic environment for assignment to Class 9 3390 et seq. 327

Appendix A.4 (Reserved) 3400 et seq. 331

Appendix A.5 General packing conditions, types of packaging, requirements applicable to packagings, test requirements for packagings 3500 et seq. 331

Appendix A.6 Provisions relating to intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) 3600 et seq. 368

Appendix A.7 Provisions relating to radioactive material of Class 7 3700 et seq. 392

Appendix A.8 (Reserved) 3800 et seq. 419

Appendix A.9 Provisions relating to danger labels; explanation of symbols; danger labels 3900 et seq. 419

PART I

DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS

Definitions

2000 (1) For the purposes of this Annex:

- the term 'competent authority` means the authority designated as such in each country and in each specific case by the Government;

- the term 'fragile package` means a package containing a fragile receptacle, i.e. a receptacle made of glass, porcelain, stoneware or similar materials, which is not enclosed in a packaging with complete sides protecting it effectively against shock [see also marginal 2001 (7)];

- the term 'gas` means a gas or vapour;

- the term 'dangerous substances`, when used alone, means the substances and articles designated as being substances and articles of this Directive;

- the term 'carriage in bulk` means the carriage of a solid substance without packaging;

- the term 'RID` signifies Regulations concerning the international carriage of dangerous goods by rail, which are Annex I of COTIF - Convention concerning international carriage by rail, Appendix B - Uniform rules concerning the contract for international carriage of goods by rail (CIM).

(2) For the purposes of this Annex, tanks (see definitions in Annex B) are not placed on the same footing as receptacles, the term 'receptacle` being used in a restrictive sense. Provisions concerning receptacles are applicable to fixed tanks, batteries of receptacles, demountable tanks and tank-containers only if this is expressly stipulated.

(3) The term 'full load` means any load originating from one sender for which the use of a vehicle or of a large container is exclusively reserved and all operations for the loading and unloading of which are carried out in conformity with the instructions of the sender or of the consignee.

(4) For the purposes of this Directive, 'n.o.s. (not otherwise specified) entry` means a collective entry to which substances, mixtures, solutions or articles may be assigned if they:

a) are not mentioned by name under the items of the lists of substances, and

b) exhibit chemical, physical and/or dangerous properties corresponding to the class, item, letter and name of the n.o.s. entry.

(5) Wastes are substances, solutions, mixtures or articles for which no direct use is envisaged but which are transported for reprocessing, dumping, elimination by incineration or other methods of disposal.

2001 >TABLE>

The decimal multiples and sub-multiples of a unit may be formed by prefixes or symbols, having the following meanings, placed before the name or symbol of the unit:

>TABLE>

Note: 109 = 1 billion is United Nations usage in English. By analogy, so is 10-9 = 1 billionth.

(2) Whenever the word 'weight` is used in this Annex and in Annex B, it means 'mass`.

(3) Whenever the weight of a package is mentioned in this Annex and in Annex B, the gross mass is meant unless otherwise stated. The mass of containers or tanks used for the carriage of goods is not included in the gross mass.

(4) Unless expressly stated otherwise, the sign ' %` in this Annex and in Annex B represents:

a) in the case of mixtures of solids or of liquids, and also in the case of solutions and of solids wetted by a liquid: a percentage mass based on the total mass of the mixture, the solution or the wetted solid;

b) in the case of mixtures of compressed gases: the proportion of the volume indicated as a percentage of the total volume of the gaseous mixture; in the case of mixtures of liquefied gases and gases dissolved under pressure: the proportion of the mass indicated as a percentage of the total mass of the mixture.

(5) Pressures of all kinds relating to receptacles (such as test pressure, internal pressure, safety-valve opening pressure) are always indicated in gauge pressure (pressure in excess of atmospheric pressure); however, the vapour pressure of substances is always expressed in absolute pressure.

(6) Where this Annex or Annex B specifies a degree of filling for receptacles or tanks, that degree of filling is always referred to a temperature of the substances of 15 °C unless some other temperature is indicated.

(7) Fragile receptacles secured, either singly or in groups, by cushioning materials in a strong receptacle are not regarded as fragile receptacles if the strong receptacle is leakproof and so designed that in the event of breakage or leakage of the fragile receptacles their contents cannot escape from the strong receptacle and the mechanical strength of the latter is not impaired by corrosion during carriage.

(8) The following approximate conversion formula is authorized until SI units have been incorporated throughout the texts of this Annex and Annex B.

1 kg/mm2 = 10 N/mm2,

1 kg/cm2 = 1 bar.

General provisions

2002 (1) This Annex specifies the dangerous goods to be excluded from international carriage by road and the dangerous goods to be accepted for such carriage under certain conditions. It groups the dangerous goods in restrictive and non-restrictive classes.

Of the dangerous goods covered by the headings of the restrictive classes (Classes 1, 2 and 7), those which are listed in the clauses concerning these classes (marginals 2101, 2201 and 2701) are to be accepted for carriage only under the conditions specified in these clauses, and others are to be excluded from carriage. Some of the dangerous goods covered by the headings of the non-restrictive classes (Classes 3, 4.1, 4.2,4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2, 8 and 9) are, by notes inserted in the clauses concerning the various Classes, excluded from carriage; of the other goods covered by the headings of the non-restrictive classes, those which are mentioned in the clauses concerning these classes (marginals 2301, 2401, 2431, 2471, 2501, 2551, 2601, 2651, 2801 and 2901) are to be accepted for carriage only under the conditions specified in these clauses; those which are not mentioned or covered by one of the collective headings are not deemed to be dangerous goods for the purposes of this Agreement and are to be accepted for carriage without any special conditions.

(2) The classes of this Annex are as follows:

>TABLE>

(3) Any carriage of goods governed by this Annex shall be accompanied by both the following documents:

a) a transport document containing at least the following information (for Class 7, see also marginal 2709):

- a description of the goods including the substance identification number (where available) ();

- the class ();

- the item number together with any letter ();

- the initials ADR or RID ();

- the number and a description of the packages or IBCs;

- the total quantity of dangerous goods (as a volume or as a gross mass or as a net mass and, in addition, in the case of explosive substances and articles of Class 1, as a total net mass of explosive contents).

Note: 1. This information is not required in the case of uncleaned empty packagings, containers or tanks.

2. In the case of the application of marginal 10 011, the quantities of dangerous goods carried per transport unit shall be expressed as a gross mass.

- the name and address of the consignor;

- the name and address of the consignee(s);

- a declaration as required by the terms of any special agreement.

The document containing this information may be that already required by other regulations in force for carriage by another mode of transport. The consignor shall communicate this information to the carrier in writing.

The particulars to be entered in the document shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding country, and also, if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German, unless international road transport tariffs, if any, or agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation, provide otherwise.

b) instructions to be implemented in the event of an accident (see Annex B, marginal 10 385), (unless exempted under marginal 10 011).

(4) If by reason of the size of the load a consignment cannot be loaded in its entirety on a single transport unit, at least as many separate documents, or copies of the single document, shall be made out as transport units loaded. Furthermore, in all cases separate transport documents shall be made out for consignments or parts of consignments which may not be loaded together on the same vehicle by reason of the prohibitions set forth in Annex B.

(5) Outer packagings additional to those specified in this Annex may be used providing that they do not contravene the spirit of the provisions of this Annex relating to outer packagings. If such additional packagings are used, the prescribed marking and labels shall be applied to them.

(6) If the mixed packing of several dangerous substances with one another or with other goods is allowed by the provisions of section A.3 of the provisions applicable to the various classes, the inner packagings containing different dangerous substances shall be carefully and effectively separated from one another in the collective packagings if dangerous reactions, such as the production of dangerous heat, combustion, the formation of mixtures sensitive to friction or shock, and the release of flammable or toxic gases, are liable to occur as a result of damage to or destruction of the inner packagings. In particular, if fragile receptacles are used, and especially if the said receptacles contain liquids, the danger of the formation of dangerous mixtures shall be avoided and to this end all appropriate measures shall be taken, such as the use of suitable cushioning materials in sufficient quantity, securing of the receptacles in a second, strong packaging, and subdivision of the collective packaging into several compartments. For mixed packing of material of Class 7, see marginal 3711 of Appendix A.7.

(7) If mixed packing is used, the provisions of this Annex concerning the particulars in the transport document shall apply in respect of each of the different kinds of dangerous substance contained in the collective package, and the collective package shall bear all the inscriptions and all the danger labels prescribed in this Annex for the dangerous substances the collective package contains.

(8) The following provisions shall apply to substances, solutions and mixtures [such as preparations and wastes ()] not mentioned by name in the lists of substances of the various classes:

Note: 1. Solutions and mixtures comprise two or more components. These components may be either substances of this Directive or substances which are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

2. Solutions and mixtures containing one or more components of a restrictive Class are not to be accepted for carriage unless those components are listed by name in the list of substances of the restrictive class.

3. Solutions and mixtures having a specific activity exceeding 70 kBq/kg (2nCi/g) are substances of Class 7 [see marginal 2700 (1)].

a) A solution or mixture containing a dangerous substance listed by name in this Directive together with one or more non-dangerous substances, shall be regarded as the dangerous substance listed by name, unless:

1. The solution or mixture is specifically listed by name elsewhere in this Directive; or

2. It is quite clear from the item for the dangerous substance that it is applicable only to the pure or technically pure substance; or

3. The class, physical state or packing group (letter), of the solution or mixture is different from that of the dangerous substance.

For such solutions and mixtures, the word 'solution` or 'mixture` shall then be added as part of the name in the transport document for the purposes of clarity in the description, for example, 'acetone solution`.

If the class, physical state or packing group are different from that of the pure substance, the solution or mixture shall be assigned to an appropriate n.o.s. entry, depending on the degree of danger.

b) Substances having more than one danger characteristic and solutions and mixtures containing two or more components subject to this Directive shall be placed under an item and letter of the appropriate Class in accordance with their danger characteristics. Such classification according to the danger characteristics shall be carried out as follows:

1.1 The physical and chemical characteristics and physiological properties shall be determined by measurement or calculation and be classified according to the criteria of the various classes.

1.2 If this determination is not possible without disproportionate cost or effort (as for some kinds of wastes), the solutions or mixtures shall be placed in the class of the component presenting the predominant danger.

2. If a substance presents more than one danger characteristic or if a mixture or solution contains more than one component of the classes or groups of substances listed below, it shall be classified in the class or the group of substances presenting the predominant danger.

2.1 If there is no predominant danger, classification shall be based on the following order of precedence:

- substances and articles of Class 1

- substances and articles of Class 2

- self-reactive and related substances and explosive substances in non-explosive state (wetted or phlegmatized explosive substances) of Class 4.1

- pyrophoric substances of Class 4.2

- substances of Class 5.2

- substances of Class 6.1 or Class 3 which, on the basis of their inhalation toxicity, are to be classified under letter (a) of the various items (excluding substances, solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) meeting the classification criteria of Class 8 and having an inhalation toxicity of dust and mists (LC50) in the range of group (a) and toxicity through oral ingestion or dermal contact only in the range of group (c) or less; such substances, solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) shall be assigned to Class 8)

- infectious substances of Class 6.2.

2.2 If the danger characteristics fall within more than one class or group of substances not listed in 2.1, the substances, mixtures or solutions shall be classified in the class or group of substances presenting the predominant danger.

2.3 If there is no predominant danger, the substance, solution or mixture shall be classified as follows:

2.3.1 Assignment to a class shall be on the basis of the various danger characteristics or components in accordance with the table below. For Classes 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, 8 and 9, account shall be taken of the degree of danger indicated by letters (a), (b) or (c) of the various items [see marginals 2300 (3), 2400 (3), 2430 (3), 2470 (3), 2500 (3), 2600 (1), 2800 (1) and 2900].

Note: Example to explain the use of the table ():

Description of the Mixture:

Mixture consisting of a flammable liquid classified under Class 3, letter (c), a toxic substance classified under Class 6.1, letter (b), and a corrosive substance classified under Class 8, letter (a).

Procedure:

The intersection of line 3(c) with column 6.1(b) gives 6.1(b). The intersection of line 6.1(b) with column 8(a) gives 8(a). This mixture is therefore to be classified under Class 8, letter (a).

>TABLE>

2.3.2 Classification under an n.o.s. entry of an item of a class determined in accordance with 2.3.1 on the basis of the danger characteristics of the various components of the solution or mixture. Classification under a general n.o.s. entry is permitted only when classification under a specific n.o.s. entry is not possible.

Note: Examples for the classification of mixtures and solutions under classes and items:

A phenol solution of Class 6.1, 14°(b), in benzene of Class 3, 3°(b) is to be classified in Class 3, 3°(b); this solution is to be classified under the entry 1992 flammable liquid, toxic, n.o.s., Class 3, 19°(b), by virtue of the toxicity of the phenol.

A solid mixture of sodium arsenate of Class 6.1, 51°(b) and sodium hydroxide of Class 8, 41°(b) is to be classified under the entry 1557 arsenic compound, solid, n.o.s. in Class 6, 51°(b).

A solution of crude or refined naphthalene of Class 4.1, 6° (c) in petrol of Class 3, 3°(b), is to be classified under the entry 3295 hydrocarbons, liquid, n.o.s. in Class 3, 3°(b).

A mixture of hydrocarbons of Class 3, 31°(c), and of polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) of Class 9, 2°(b), is to be classified under the entry 2315 polychlorinated biphenyls in Class 9, 2°(b).

A mixture of propyleneimine of Class 3, 12°, and polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) of Class 9, 2°(b), is to be classified under the entry 1921 propyleneimine, inhibited in Class 3, 12°.

(9) The consignor, either in the transport document or in a separate declaration incorporated into or combined with it, shall certify that the substance presented may be carried by road in conformity with the provisions of this Directive and that its condition, treatment and, as appropriate its packaging, the intermediate bulk container or tank container and the labelling conform to the provisions of this Directive. Furthermore, if several dangerous goods are packed together in a collective package or in a single container, the consignor is required to declare that this mixed packing is not prohibited.

(10) A non-radioactive substance [see the definition of radioactive material in marginal 2700 (1)] which is covered by a collective heading of any class shall be excluded from carriage if, in addition, it is covered by the heading of a restrictive class in which it is not listed.

(11) A non-radioactive substance [see the definition of radioactive material in marginal 2700 (1)] which is not listed by name in a class, but is covered by two or more collective headings of different classes, shall be subject to the conditions of carriage laid down:

a) in the restrictive class, if one of the classes concerned is a restrictive class;

b) in the class corresponding to the predominant danger exhibited by the substance during carriage, if none of the classes concerned is a restrictive class.

(12) Radioactive material whose specific activity exceeds 70 kBq/kg (2 nCi/g) and which

a) meets the criteria for carriage under Schedule 1 of Class 7; and

b) has hazardous properties covered by the title of any other class or classes,

shall be excluded from carriage if it is covered by the title of a restrictive class in which it is not listed.

(13) Radioactive material whose specific activity exceeds 70 kBq/kg (2 nCi/g) and which

a) meets the criteria for carriage under Schedule 1 of Class 7; and

b) has hazardous properties covered by the title of any other class or classes

shall, in addition to meeting the requirements of Schedule 1 of Class 7, be subject to the conditions of carriage laid down:

- in the restrictive class, if one of the classes concerned is a restrictive class, and the substance is listed in it; or

- in the class corresponding to the predominant danger exhibited by the substance during carriage, if none of the classes concerned is a restrictive class.

(14) For the purposes of this Directive, substances, solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be assigned to Classes 1 to 8 or 9, 1° to 8°, 13° and 14°, but which may be assigned to Class 9, 11° or 12°, on the basis of the test methods and criteria according to Appendix A.3, section G, marginals 3390 to 3396, shall be considered to be pollutant to the aquatic environment.

Solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) for which classification values conforming to the classification criteria are not available shall be considered to be pollutant to the aquatic environment if the LC50 () evaluated according to the following formula:

LC50 = >NUM>LC50 of the pollutant x 100

>DEN>percentage of the pollutant (by mass)

is equal to or lower than:

a) 1 mg/l,

b) 10 mg/l if the pollutant is not readily degradable or, being degradable, has a log Pow ≥ 3,0.

Note: For substances of Classes 1 to 8 and Class 9, 1° to 8°, 13° and 14°, which are pollutant to the aquatic environment according to the criteria of Appendix A.3, section G, marginals 3390 to 3396, no additional condition of carriage is applicable.

2003 (1) This Annex contains for each class other than Class 7:

a) a list of the dangerous substances constituting the class and, where applicable, under a marginal ending with the letter 'a`, the exemptions allowed from the provisions of this Directive for some of these substances if they comply with certain conditions;

b) provisions sub-divided as follows:

A. Packages:

1. General conditions of packing;

2. Special conditions of packing;

3. Mixed packing;

4. Marking and danger labels on packages.

B. Particulars in the transport document.

C. Empty packagings.

D. (where appropriate) Other provisions.

(2) Provisions concerning:

- consignment in bulk, in containers and in tanks,

- method of despatch and restrictions on forwarding,

- prohibitions on mixed loading, and

- transport equipment,

are to be found in Annex B and its appendices, which also contain all other pertinent provisions applying specifically to carriage by road.

(3) For Class 7 the provisions are summarized in the form of schedules containing the following headings:

1. Materials.

2. Packaging Package.

3. Package maximum radiation level.

4. Contamination on packages, vehicles, containers, tanks and overpacks.

5. Decontamination and use of vehicles, equipment or parts thereof.

6. Mixed packing.

7. Mixed loading.

8. Marking and danger labels on packages, containers, tanks and overpacks.

9. Marking and danger labels on vehicles other than tank-vehicles.

10. Transport documents.

11. Storage and despatch.

12. Carriage of packages, containers, tanks and overpacks.

13. Other provisions.

(4) The appendices to this Annex contain:

Appendix A.1: Stability and safety conditions relating to explosive substances and articles, nitrated mixtures of nitrocellulose, self-reactive substances and organic peroxides, together with glossary of names in marginal 2101;

Appendix A.2: Provisions relating to the nature of aluminium-alloy receptacles for certain gases of Class 2; provisions relating to the materials and construction of receptacles, intended for the carriage of deeply-refrigerated liquefied gases of Class 2; and provisions relating to tests on aerosol dispensers and non-refillable containers for gases under pressure of Class 2, 10° and 11°;

Appendix A.3: Tests relating to flammable liquids of Classes 3, 6.1 and 8; test for determining fluidity; tests relating to flammable solids of Class 4.1; tests relating to substances liable to spontaneous combustion of Class 4.2; test relating to substances of Class 4.3 which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases; test relating to oxidizing solids of Class 5.1; tests for determining the ecotoxicity, persistence and bioaccumulation of substances in the aquatic environment for assignment to Class 9;

Appendix A.5: General packing conditions, types of packaging, requirements applicable to packagings, test requirements for packagings;

Appendix A.6: General conditions for the use of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), types of IBCs, requirements relating to the construction of IBCs and test specifications for IBCs;

Appendix A.7: Provisions relating to radioactive material of Class 7;

Appendix A.9: Provisions relating to danger labels, and explanation of the symbols.

A.4 and A.8 are reserved.

2004

2005 Where the provisions relating to carriage as a 'full load` are applied, the competent authorities may require the vehicle or large container used for the transport operation concerned to be loaded at only one point and unloaded at only one point.

2006 (1) If the vehicle carrying out a transport operation subject to the provisions of this Directive is conveyed over a section of the journey otherwise than by road haulage, then any national or international regulations which, on the said section, govern the carriage of dangerous goods by the mode of transport used for conveying the road vehicle shall alone be applicable to the said section of the journey.

(2) In cases where a transport operation subject to the provisions of this Directive is likewise subject over the whole or a part of its road journey to the provisions of an international convention which regulates the carriage of dangerous goods by a mode of transport other than road carriage by virtue of clauses extending the applicability of the said convention to certain motor-vehicle services, then the provisions of that international convention shall apply, over the journey in question, concurrently with those of this Directive which are not incompatible therewith; the other clauses of this Directive shall not apply over the journey in question.

2007 Packages, including intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), which do not entirely meet the packing, mixed packing and labelling requirements of this Directive but are in conformity with the requirements for maritime or air transport of dangerous goods (), shall be accepted for carriage prior to or following maritime or air carriage subject to the following conditions:

a) If the packages are not labelled in accordance with this Directive, they shall be labelled in accordance with the provisions for maritime or air transport ();

b) The provisions for maritime or air transport () shall be applicable to mixed packing within a package;

c) In addition to the particulars prescribed for ADR, the words 'Carriage under marginal 2007 of ADR` shall be entered in the transport document.

2008-

2009

2010 For the purpose of carrying out the trials necessary with a view to amending the provisions of this Annex in order to adapt them to technological and industrial developments, the competent authorities of the Member States may agree directly among themselves to authorize certain transport operations in their territories by temporary derogation from the provisions of this Annex. The period of validity of the temporary derogation shall be not more than five years from the date of its entry into force. The temporary derogation shall automatically come to an end from the date of the entry into force of a corresponding amendment to this annex. The authority which has taken the initiative with respect to the temporary derogation so granted shall notify the competent service of the European Commission of the derogation, which service shall bring it to the attention of the Member States.

2011-

2099

PART II

LIST OF SUBSTANCES AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR THE VARIOUS CLASSES

CLASS 1 EXPLOSIVE SUBSTANCES AND ARTICLES

1. List of substances and articles

2100 (1) Among the substances and articles covered by the title of Class 1, only those listed in marginal 2101 or assigned to an n.o.s. entry in marginal 2101 are to be accepted for carriage. These substances and articles are only to be accepted for carriage subject to conditions set out in marginals 2100 (2) to 2116, Appendix A.1 and Annex B. They are then considered as substances and articles of this Directive.

(2) Class 1 comprises:

(a) - Explosive substances: solid or liquid substances (or mixtures of substances) capable by chemical reaction of producing gases at such a temperature and pressure and at such a speed as to cause damage to the surroundings.

- Pyrotechnic substances: substances or mixtures of substances designed to produce an effect by heat, light, sound, gas or smoke or a combination of these as the result of non-detonating self-sustaining exothermic chemical reactions.

Note: 1. Explosive substances which are unduly sensitive or are liable to spontaneous reaction are not to be accepted for carriage.

2. Substances which are not themselves explosive but which may form an explosive mixture of gas, vapour or dust are not substances of Class 1.

3. Also excluded from Class 1 are: water- or alcohol-wetted explosives of which the water or alcohol content exceeds the limits indicated in marginal 2101 and those containing plasticizers - these explosives are assigned to Class 4.1 (marginal 2401, 21°, 22° and 24°) - and those explosives which, on the basis of their predominant hazard, are assigned to Class 5.2.

(b) Explosive articles: articles containing one or more explosive substances and or pyrotechnic substances.

Note: Devices containing explosive and or pyrotechnic substances in such small quantity or of such a character that their inadvertent or accidental ignition or initiation during carriage would not cause any manifestation external to the device by projection, fire, smoke, heat or loud noise are not subject to the requirements of Class 1.

(c) Substances and articles not mentioned under (a) or (b) above which are manufactured with a view to producing a practical effect by explosion or a pyrotechnic effect.

(3) Explosive substances and articles shall have been assigned to a name in marginal 2101 in accordance with the test methods for the determination of explosive properties and the classification procedures set out in Appendix A.1 and they shall meet the conditions appropriate to that name or shall be assigned to an n.o.s. entry in marginal 2101 in accordance with these test methods and classification procedures.

Assignment of substances and articles not mentioned by name to an n.o.s. entry shall be made by the competent authority of the country of origin.

Substances and articles which are assigned to an n.o.s. entry shall be carried only with the approval of the competent authority of the country of origin and under the conditions laid down by that authority.

The approval shall be issued in writing.

(4) Substances and articles of Class 1, other than empty packagings, uncleaned, of 51°, shall have been assigned to a division in accordance with paragraph (6) and to a compatibility group in accordance with paragraph (7). The division shall be based on the results of the tests described in Appendix A.1 applying the definitions in paragraph (6). The compatibility group shall be determined in accordance with the definitions in paragraph (7). The classification code shall consist of the division number and the compatibility group letter.

(5) Substances and articles of Class 1 are assigned to packing group II (see Appendix A.5).

(6) Definition of divisions

1.1. Substances and articles which have a mass explosion hazard. (A mass explosion is an explosion which affects almost the entire load virtually instantaneously).

1.2. Substances and articles which have a projection hazard but not a mass explosion hazard.

1.3. Substances and articles which have a fire hazard and either a minor blast hazard or a minor projection hazard or both, but not a mass explosion hazard,

(a) combustion of which gives rise to considerable radiant heat; or

(b) which burn one after another, producing minor blast or projection effects or both.

1.4. Substances and articles which present only a slight risk of explosion in the event of ignition or initiation during carriage. The effects are largely confined to the package and no projection of fragments of appreciable size or range is to be expected. An external fire shall not cause virtually instantaneous explosion of almost the entire contents of the package.

1.5. Very insensitive substances having a mass explosion hazard which are so insensitive that there is very little probability of initiation or of transition from burning to detonation under normal conditions of carriage. As a minimum requirement they must not explode in the external fire test.

1.6. Extremely insensitive articles which do not have a mass explosion hazard. The articles contain only extremely insensitive detonating substances and demonstrate a negligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation.

Note: The risk from articles of Division 1.6 is limited to the explosion of a single article.

(7) Definition of compatibility groups of substances and articles:

A Primary explosive substance

B Article containing a primary explosive substance and not having two or more effective protective features. Some articles, such as detonators for blasting, detonator assemblies for blasting and primers, cap-type, are included, even though they do not contain primary explosives.

C Propellant explosive substance or other deflagrating explosive substance or article containing such explosive substance

D Secondary detonating explosive substance or black powder or article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance, in each case without means of initiation and without a propelling charge, or article containing a primary explosive substance and having two or more effective protective features

E Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance, without means of initiation, with a propelling charge (other than one containing an inflammable liquid or gel or hypergolic liquids)

F Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance with its own means of initiation, with a propelling charge (other than one containing an inflammable liquid or gel or hypergolic liquids) or without a propelling charge

G Pyrotechnic substance, or article containing a pyrotechnic substance, or article containing both an explosive substance and an illuminating, incendiary, tearor smoke-producing substance (other than a water-activated article or one which contains white phosphorus, phosphides, a pyrophoric substance, a flammable liquid or gel or hypergolic liquids)

H Article containing both an explosive substance and white phosphorus

J Article containing both an explosive substance and an inflammable liquid or gel

K Article containing both an explosive substance and a toxic chemical agent

L Explosive substance or article containing an explosive substance and presenting a special risk (e.g. due to water activation or the presence of hypergolic liquids, phosphides or a pyrophoric substance) necessitating isolation of each type

N Articles containing only extremely insensitive detonating substances

S Substance or article so packed or designed that any hazardous effects arising from accidental functioning are confined within the package unless the package has been degraded by fire, in which case all blast or projection effects are limited to the extent that they do not significantly hinder or prevent fire-fighting or other emergency response efforts in the immediate vicinity of the package.

Note: 1. Each substance or article, packed in a specified packaging, may be assigned to one compatibility group only. Since the criterion of compatibility group S is empirical, assignment to this group is necessarily linked to the tests for assignment of a classification code.

2. Articles of compatibility groups D or E may be fitted or packed together with their own means of initiation provided that such means have at least two effective protective features designed to prevent an explosion in the event of accidental functioning of the means of initiation. Such packages shall be assigned to compatibility groups D or E.

3. Articles of compatibility groups D or E may be packed together with their own means of initiation, which do not have two effective protective features (i.e. means of initiation assigned to compatibility group B), provided that they comply with the requirements of marginal 2104 (6). Such packages shall be assigned to compatibility groups D or E.

4. Articles may be fitted or packed together with their own means of ignition provided that the means of ignition cannot function during normal conditions of carriage.

5. Articles of compatibility groups C, D and E may be packed together. Such packages shall be assigned to compatibility group E.

(8) Substances of compatibility group A and articles of compatibility group K, in accordance with paragraph (7), shall not be accepted for carriage.

(9) For the purposes of the requirements of this Class and by derogation from marginal 3510 (3), the term 'package` shall also include an unpackaged article in so far as that article is accepted for carriage unpackaged.

2101 The substances and articles of Class 1 to be accepted for carriage are listed in Table 1 below. Explosive substances and articles listed in marginal 3170 can be assigned to the various names in marginal 2101 only if their properties, composition, construction and anticipated use correspond to one of the descriptions contained in Appendix A.1.

>TABLE>

2. Conditions of carriage

A. Packages

1. General conditions of packing

2102 (1) Outer packagings shall conform to the requirements of Appendix A.5.

(2) In accordance with the provisions of marginals 2100 (5) and 3511, packagings of packing group II or I, marked with the letter 'Y` or 'X` shall be used for substances and articles of Class 1.

(3) The requirements of marginal 3500 (2), shall apply to the parts of packagings which are in direct contact with the contents.

(4) Nails, staples and other closure devices made of metal having no protective coating shall not penetrate to the inside of the outer packaging unless the inner packaging adequately protects the explosive substances and articles against contact with the metal.

(5) The closure device of receptacles containing liquid explosives shall ensure a double protection against leakage.

(6) Inner packagings, fittings and cushioning materials and the positioning of explosive substances or articles in packages shall be such that no dangerous movement may occur within packages during carriage.

(7) Where significant internal pressure is likely to develop in receptacles, such receptacles shall be so constructed that detonation is not possible by reason of increase in internal pressure from internal or external causes.

(8) Cushioning materials shall be suited to the nature of the contents; in particular, they must be absorbent if the contents are liquid or might exude liquid.

2. Special conditions of packing

2103 (1) Substances and articles shall be packed as indicated in marginal 2101, Table 1, columns 4 and 5, and as set out in detail in paragraphs (5), Table 2 and (6), Table 3.

(2) If the body of steel drums is double-seamed, steps shall be taken to prevent the ingress of explosive substances into the recesses of the seams. The closure device of steel or aluminium drums shall include a suitable gasket. If the closure device includes a screw thread, the ingress of explosive substances into the screw thread shall not be possible.

(3) If metal-lined boxes are used for packing explosive substances, these boxes shall be made in such a way that the explosive substance carried cannot get between the liner and the sides or bottom of the box.

(4) Only hoops in hardwood shall be authorized for wooden barrels intended for the carriage of explosive substances.

(5) Plastics packagings shall not be liable to generate or accumulate sufficient static electricity that a discharge could cause the packaged explosive to ignite or the packaged article to function.

>TABLE>

(7) TABLE 3

Special packing requirements

Note: For the special packing requirements applicable to the various substances and articles, see marginal 2101, Table 1, column 5.

>TABLE>

3. Mixed packing

2104 (1) Substances and articles covered by the same identification number (), with the exception of substances and articles of Compatibility Group L and substances and articles assigned to an n.o.s. entry, may be packed together.

(2) Except where otherwise specially provided below, substances and articles having different identification numbers may not be packed together.

(3) Substances and articles of Class 1 may not be packed together with substances of other Classes or with goods which are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

(4) Articles of compatibility groups C, D and E may be packed together.

(5) Articles of compatibility groups D or E may be packed together with their own means of initiation provided that such means have at least two effective protective features which prevent explosion of an article in the event of accidental functioning of the means of initiation.

(6) Articles of compatibility groups D or E may be packed together with their own means of initiation which do not have two effective protective features (i.e. means of initiation assigned to compatibility group B), provided that, in the opinion of the competent authority of the country of origin, the accidental functioning of the means of initiation does not cause the explosion of an article under normal conditions of carriage.

(7) Substances and articles of compatibility group L may not be packed together with a different type of substance or article of that compatibility group.

(8) Articles may be packed together with their own means of ignition provided that the means of ignition will not function under normal conditions of carriage.

(9) Goods with the identification numbers shown in table 4 may be included in the same package under the conditions indicated.

(10) For mixed packing, account must be taken of a possible amendment of the classification of packages in accordance with marginal 2100.

(11) For the description of goods in the transport document in the case of the mixed packing of substances and articles of Class 1, see marginal 2110 (4).

>TABLE>

4. Marking and danger labels on packages (see Appendix A.9)

Marking

2105 (1) Packages shall carry the identification number and one of the names of the substance or article printed in italics, in marginal 2101, Table 1, column 2. For substances and articles assigned to an n.o.s. entry, as well as for other articles of 25° and 34°, the technical name of the goods shall be given in addition to the name of the n.o.s. entry. For substances of 4°, Nos. 0081, 0082, 0083, 0084 and 0241, and substances of 48°, Nos. 0331 and 0332, the commercial name of the particular explosive shall be specified in addition to the type. For other substances and articles, the commercial or technical name may be added. The marking, which shall be clearly legible and indelible, shall be in an official language of the country of origin and also, if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German, unless any agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise.

Danger labels

(2) Packages containing substances or articles of 1° to 34° shall bear a label conforming to model No 1. The classification code according to marginal 2101, Table 1, column 3, shall be shown on the lower part of the label. Packages containing substances or articles of 35° to 47° shall bear a label conforming to model No 1.4 and packages containing substances of 48° and articles of 49° shall bear a label conforming to model No 1.5 and those containing articles of item 50° shall bear a label conforming to model No 1.6. The compatibility group according to marginal 2101, Table 1, column 3, shall be shown on the lower part of the label.

(3) Packages containing substances and articles of

4°, Nos. 0076 and 0143,

21°, No. 0018,

26°, No. 0077,

30°, No. 0019 and

43°, No. 0301

shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 6.1.

Packages containing articles of

21°, Nos. 0015 and 0018,

30°, Nos. 0016 and 0019 and

43°, No. 0301 and 0303

shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 8.

2106-

2109

B. Particulars in the transport document

2110 (1) The description of the goods in the transport document shall conform to one of the identification numbers and one of the names printed in italics in marginal 2101, Table 1, column 2. For substances and articles assigned to an n.o.s. entry, as well as for other articles of 25° and 34°, the technical name of the goods shall be given in addition to the name of the n.o.s. entry. The description of the goods shall be followed by the classification code and Item No. (marginal 2101, Table 1, columns 3 and 1) and completed by the net mass in kg of the explosive substance and the initials 'ADR` (or 'RID`) (e.g.: 0160 Powder, smokeless, 1.1 C, 2°, 4,600 kg, ADR).

(2) For substances of 4°, Nos. 0081, 0082, 0083, 0084 and 0241 and for substances of 48°, Nos. 0331 and 0332, the commercial name of the explosive shall be specified as well as the type of explosive. For other substances and articles, the commercial name or technical name may be added.

(3) For full loads, the transport document shall indicate the number of packages, the mass of each package in kg and the total net mass in kg of explosive substance.

(4) For mixed packing of two different goods, the description of the goods in the transport document shall include the identification numbers and names printed in italics in marginal 2101, Table 1, column 2 of both substances or articles. If more than two different goods are contained in the same package in conformity with marginal 2104, the transport document shall indicate under the description of the goods the identification numbers of all the substances and articles contained in the package, in the form, 'Goods of Nos `.

(5) For the carriage of substances and articles assigned to an n.o.s. entry, a copy of the competent authority approval with the conditions of carriage shall be attached to the transport document. It shall be in an official language of the forwarding country and also, if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German unless agreements, if any, concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise.

2111-

2114

C. Empty packagings

2115 (1) Empty packagings, uncleaned, of 51° shall be securely closed and be leakproof to the same degree as if they were full.

(2) Empty packagings, uncleaned, of 51° shall bear the same danger labels as if they were full.

(3) The entry in the transport document shall be: 'Empty packagings, 1, 51° ADR`.

D. Special provisions

2116 Substances and articles of Class 1, belonging to the armed forces of a Member State, that were packaged prior to 1 January 1990 in accordance with the provisions of ADR in effect at that time may be carried after 1 January 1990 provided the packagings maintain their integrity and are declared in the transport document as military goods packaged prior to 1 January 1990. The other provisions applicable as from 1 January 1990 for this Class shall be complied with.

2117-

2199

CLASS 2 GASES: COMPRESSED, LIQUEFIED OR DISSOLVED UNDER PRESSURE

1. List of substances

2200 (1) Among the substances and articles covered by the title of Class 2, only those listed in marginal 2201 are to be accepted for carriage, and then only subject to the requirements of this Annex and to the provisions of Annex B. These substances and articles to be accepted for carriage under certain conditions are to be considered as substances and articles of this Directive.

(2) Substances having a critical temperature lower than 50 °C or, at 50 °C, a vapour pressure greater than 300 kPa (3 bar) are deemed to be substances of Class 2.

Note: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) containing one or more components listed in marginal 2201, see also marginal 2002 (8).

(3) The substances and articles of Class 2 are classified as follows:

A. Compressed gases having a critical temperature below P10 °C;

B. Liquefied gases having a critical temperature of P10 °C or above:

a. Liquefied gases having a critical temperature of 70 °C or above;

b. Liquefied gases having a critical temperature of P10 °C or above, but below 70 °C;

C. Deeply-refrigerated liquefied gases;

D. Gases dissolved under pressure;

E. Aerosol dispensers and non-refillable containers of gas under pressure;

F. Gases subject to special requirements; and

G. Empty receptacles and empty tanks.

The substances and articles of Class 2 are subdivided according to their chemical properties, as follows:

(a)

non-flammable;

(at)

non-flammable, toxic;

(b)

flammable;

(bt)

flammable, toxic;

(c)

chemically unstable;

(ct)

chemically unstable, toxic.

Unless otherwise specified, chemically unstable substances shall be considered to be flammable.

The names of corrosive and oxidizing gases and of articles containing such gases shall be followed respectively by the words 'corrosive` or 'oxidizing` in brackets.

(4) Substances of Class 2 which are listed among the chemically unstable gases are to be accepted for carriage only if the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition, dismutation or polymerization during carriage. To this end, care should in particular be taken to ensure that receptacles and tanks do not contain any substances liable to promote these reactions.

A. Compressed gases

[see also marginal 2201a under (a). For gases of 1° (a) and (b) and 2° (a) in aerosol dispensers or in non-refillable containers for gases under pressure, see under 10° and 11°]

2201 Gases having a critical temperature below P10 °C are considered to be compressed gases for the purposes of this Directive.

Pure gases and technically-pure gases

(a)

Non-flammable

Argon; helium; krypton; neon; nitrogen; oxygen (oxidizing); tetrafluoromethane (R 14).

(at)

Non-flammable, toxic

Boron trifluoride; fluorine (oxidizing); nitrogen trifluoride; silicon tetrafluoride (corrosive).

(b)

Flammable

Deuterium; hydrogen; methane.

(bt)

Flammable, toxic

Carbon monoxide.

(ct)

Chemically unstable, toxic

Nitric oxide (nitrogen monoxide) NO (non-flammable).

Mixtures of gases

(a)

Non-flammable

Mixtures of two or more of the following gases: rare gases (containing not more than 10 % xenon by volume), nitrogen, oxygen, carbon dioxide (not more than 30 % by volume); non-flammable mixtures of two or more of the following gases: hydrogen, methane, nitrogen, rare gases (containing not more than 10 % xenon by volume), not more than 30 % carbon dioxide by volume; nitrogen containing not more than 6 % ethylene by volume; air.

Note: Mixtures containing more than 25 % (volume) oxygen are regarded as oxidizing.

(b)

Flammable

Mixtures of not less than 90 % methane by volume with hydrocarbons of 3° (b) and 5° (b); flammable mixtures of two or more of the following gases: hydrogen, methane, nitrogen, rare gases (containing not more than 10 % xenon by volume), not more than 30 % carbon dioxide by volume; natural gas mixtures containing not more than 10 % silane by volume with one or more of the following gases: hydrogen, nitrogen, argon, helium, krypton, neon, denterium and methane.

(bt)

Flammable, toxic

Town gas; mixtures of hydrogen with not more than 10 % hydrogen selenide or phosphine or germane by volume or with not more than 15 % arsine by volume; mixtures of nitrogen or rare gases (containing not more than 10 % xenon by volume) with not more than 10 % hydrogen selenide or phosphine or germane by volume or with not more than 15 % arsine by volume; water gas; synthesis gas (e.g. from the Fischer-Tropsch process); mixtures of carbon monoxide with hydrogen or with methane.

(ct)

Chemically unstable, toxic

Mixtures of hydrogen with not more than 10 % diborane by volume; mixtures of nitrogen or rare gases (containing not more than 10 % xenon by volume) with not more than 10 % diborane by volume.

B. Liquefied gases

[see also marginal 2201a under (b) and (e). For gases of 3° to 6° in aerosol dispensers or in non-refillable containers of gases under pressure, see under 10° and 11°]

Gases having a critical temperature of P10 °C or above are considered to be liquefied gases for the purposes of this Directive

a. Liquefied gases having a critical temperature of 70 °C or above:

Pure gases and technically-pure gases

(a)

Non-flammable

Bromochlorodifluoromethane (R 12 B 1); chlorodifluoromethane (R 22); chloro-pentafluoroethane (R 115); 1-chloro-1,2,2,2-tetrafluoroethane (R 124); 1-chloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane (R 133a); dichlorodifluoromethane (R 12); dichlorofluoromethane (R 21); 1,2-dichloro-1,1,2,2,-tetrafluoroethane (R 114); octafluorobut-2-ene (R 1318); octafluorocyclobutane (RC 318); octafluoropropane; 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane (R 134a).

(at)

Non-flammable, toxic

Ammonia; boron trichloride (corrosive); chlorine (corrosive); chlorine tri-fluoride (corrosive); hexafluoroacetone; hexafluoropropylene (R 1216); hydrogen bromide (corrosive); methyl bromide; nitrosyl chloride (corrosive); nitrogen dioxide NO2 (nitrogen peroxide, nitrogen tetroxide N2O4) (oxidizing); phosgene (corrosive); sulphur dioxide; sulphuryl fluoride; tungsten hexafluoride.

(b)

Flammable

Butane; 1-butylene (1-butene); 1-chloro-1,1-difluoroethane (R 142b); cis-2-butylene (cis-2-butene); cyclopropane; 1,1-difluoroethane (R 152a); dimethyl ether; 2,2-dimethylpropane; isobutane; isobutylene (isobutene); methylsilane; propane; propylene; trans-2-butylene (trans-2-butene); 1,1,1-trifluoroethane.

(bt)

Flammable, toxic

Arsine; carbonyl sulphide (corrosive); dichlorosilane; dimethylamine; dimethylsilane; ethylamine; ethyl chloride; hydrogen selenide; hydrogen sulphide; methylamine; methyl chloride; methyl mercaptan; trimethylamine; trimethylsilane.

(c)

Chemically unstable

1,2-butadiene; 1,3-butadiene; propadiene, inhibited; vinyl chloride.

Note: In receptacles containing 1,2-butadiene, the oxygen concentration in the gaseous phase shall not exceed 50 ml/m3.

(ct)

Chemically unstable, toxic

Cyanogen; cyanogen chloride (non-flammable) (corrosive); ethylene oxide; hydrogen iodide, anhydrous (non-flammable) (corrosive); methyl vinyl ether; trifluorochloroethylene (R 1113); vinyl bromide.

Note: In the case of halogenated hydrocarbons, the use of names customary in the trade, such as the following, is also permitted: Algofrene, Arcton, Edifren, Flugene, Forane, Freon, Fresane, Frigen, Isceon, Kaltron, followed by the substance identification number without the letter R.

Mixtures of gases

(a)

Non-flammable

Mixtures of substances listed under 3° (a) with or without hexafluoropropylene of 3° (at), which as:

mixture F 1, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 1,3 MPa (13 bar) and a density at 50 °C not lower than that of dichlorofluoromethane (1,30);

mixture F 2, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 1,9 MPa (19 bar) and a density at 50 °C not lower than that of dichlorodifluoromethane (1,21);

mixture F 3, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 3 MPa (30 bar) and a density at 50 °C not lower than that of chlorodifluoromethane (1,09);

Notes: 1. Trichlorofluoromethane (R 11), trichlorotrifluoroethane (R 113) and chlorotrifluoroethane (R 133) are not liquefied gases within the meaning of ADR and thus are not subject to the provisions of ADR. They may, however, enter into the composition of mixtures F 1 to F 3.

2. See Note under 3°.

The azeotropic mixture of dichlorodifluoromethane (R 12) and 1,1-difluoro-ethane (R 152a), known as R 500;

the azeotropic mixture of chloropentafluoroethane (R 115) and chlorodifluoromethane (R 22), known as R 502;

the mixture of 19 to 21 % by mass dichlorodifluoromethane (R 12) and 79 to 8l % by mass bromochlorodifluoromethane (R 12 B1).

(at)

Non-flammable, toxic

Mixtures of methyl bromide and chloropicrin having a vapour pressure above 300 kPa (3 bar) at 50 °C. Mixtures of dichlorodifluoromethane and ethylene oxide containing not more than 12 % (mass) ethylene oxide.

(b)

Flammable

Mixtures of hydrocarbons listed under 3° (b) and of ethane and ethylene of 5° (b), which as:

mixture A, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 1,1 MPa (11 bar) and a relative density at 50 °C not lower than 0,525;

mixture A O, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 1,6 MPa (16 bar) and a relative density at 50 °C not lower than 0,495;

mixture A 1, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 2,1 MPa (21 bar) and a relative density at 50 °C not lower than 0,485;

mixture B, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 2,6 MPa (26 bar) and a relative density at 50 °C not lower than 0,450;

mixture C, have a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 3,1 MPa (31 bar) and a relative density at 50 °C not lower than 0,440.

Note: In the case of the foregoing mixtures, the use of the following names customary in the trade is permitted for describing these substances:

Name given under 4° (b) Name customary in the trade

Mixture A, mixture A O butane

Mixture C propane

Mixtures of hydrocarbons of 3° (b) and 5° (b) containing methane.

(bt)

Flammable, toxic

Mixtures of two or more of the following gases: methylsilane, dimethylsilane, trimethylsilane; methyl chloride and methylene chloride in mixtures having a vapour pressure above 300 kPa (3 bar) at 50 °C; mixtures of methyl chloride and chloropicrin and mixtures of methyl bromide and ethylene bromide having in either case a vapour pressure above 300 kPa (3 bar) at 50 °C.

(c)

Chemically unstable

Mixtures of 1,3-butadiene and hydrocarbons of 3° (b) having a vapour pressure at 70 °C not exceeding 1,1 MPa (11 bar) and a density at 50 °C not lower than 0,525; propadiene with 1 % to 4 % methylacetylene, stabilized;

mixtures of methylacetylene and propadiene with the hydrocarbons of 3° (b), which as:

mixture P 1, contain not more than 63 % methylacetylene and propadiene by volume and not more than 24 % propane and propylene by volume, the percentage of C4-saturated hydrocarbons being not less than 14 % by volume; and as

mixture P 2, contain not more than 48 % methylacetylene and propadiene by volume and not more than 50 % propane and propylene by volume, the percentage of C4-saturated hydrocarbons being not less than 5 % by volume.

(ct)

Chemically unstable, toxic

Ethylene oxide containing not more than 10 % carbon dioxide by mass; ethylene oxide containing not more than 50 % methyl formate by mass, with nitrogen up to a total pressure not exceeding 1 MPa(10 bar) at 50 °C; ethylene oxide with nitrogen up to a total pressure of 1 MPa(10 bar) at 50 °C.

b. Liquefied gases having a critical temperature of P10 °C or above, but below 70 °C:

Pure gases and technically-pure gases

(a)

Non-flammable

Bromotrifluoromethane (R 13 B 1); carbon dioxide; chlorotrifluoromethane (R 13); hexafluoroethane (R 116); nitrous oxide N2O (oxidizing); pentafluoroethane (R 125); sulphur hexafluoride; trifluoromethane (R 23); xenon.

With regard to carbon dioxide, see also marginal 2201a under (c).

Notes: 1. Nitrous oxide is to be accepted for carriage only if it is not less than 99 % pure.

2. See Note under 3°.

(at)

Non-flammable, toxic

Hydrogen chloride (corrosive).

(b)

Flammable

Ethane; ethylene; silane.

(bt)

Flammable, toxic

Germane; phosphine.

(c)

Chemically unstable

1,1-difluoroethylene; vinyl fluoride.

(ct)

Chemically unstable, toxic

Diborane.

Mixtures of gases

(a)

Non-flammable

Carbon dioxide containing not less than 1 % and not more than 10 % nitrogen, oxygen, air or rare gases by mass;

the azeotropic mixture of chlorotrifluoromethane (R 13) and trifluoromethane (R 23) known as R 503.

Note: Carbon dioxide containing less than 1 % nitrogen, oxygen, air or rare gases by mass is a substance of 5° (a).

(c)

Chemically unstable

Carbon dioxide containing not more than 35 % ethylene oxide by mass.

(ct)

Chemically unstable, toxic

Ethylene oxide containing more than 10 % but not more than 50 % carbon dioxide by mass.

C. Deeply-refrigerated liquefied gases

Pure gases and technically-pure gases

(a)

Non-flammable

Argon; carbon dioxide; helium; krypton; neon; nitrogen; nitrous oxide N2O (oxidizing); oxygen (oxidizing); xenon.

(b)

Flammable

Ethane; ethylene; hydrogen; methane.

Mixtures of gases

(a)

Non-flammable

Air; mixtures of substances of 7° (a).

Note: Mixtures of 8° (a) containing more than 32 % (mass) nitrous oxide, air and mixtures containing more than 20 % (mass) oxygen are regarded as oxidizing.

(b)

Flammable

Mixtures of substances of 7° (b); natural gas, mixture of at least 71,5 % ethylene (volume) with not more than 22,5 % acetylene (volume) and not more than 6 % propylene (volume).

D. Gases dissolved under pressure

Pure gases and technically-pure gases

(at)

Non-flammable, toxic

Ammonia dissolved in water with more than 35 % but not more than 40 % ammonia by mass; ammonia dissolved in water with more than 40 % but not more than 50 % ammonia by mass.

Note: 2672 Ammonia solution, relative density between 0,880 and 0,957 at 15 °C in water, with more than 10 % but not more than 35 % ammonia, is a substance of Class 8 [see marginal 2801, 43° (c)].

(c)

Chemically unstable

Acetylene dissolved in a solvent (e.g. acetone) absorbed by porous substances.

E. Aerosol dispensers and non-refillable containers of gas under pressure

[see also marginal 2201a under (d)]

Notes: 1. Aerosol dispensers are receptacles which can be used only once, are equipped with a release valve or dispersal device, and contain, under pressure, a gas or mixture of gases listed in marginal 2208 (2) or contain an active substance (insecticide, cosmetic, etc.) together with such a gas or mixture of gases as a propellent.

2. Non-refillable containers of gas under pressure are receptacles which can be used only once and contain a gas or a mixture of gases listed in marginal 2208 (2) and (3) (e.g. butane for camp-cookers, refrigerant gases, etc.), but are not equipped with a release valve.

3. The term 'flammable substances` means:

(i) gases (propellent in aerosol dispensers; contents of non-refillable containers of gas under pressure) whose mixtures with air can be ignited and have a lower and an upper flammability limit;

(ii) liquids (active substances in aerosol dispensers) of Class 3.

4. The term 'chemically unstable` is applied to contents which in the absence of special precautions undergo dangerous decomposition or self- polymerization at a temperature of not more than 70 °C.

10°

Aerosol dispensers

(a)

Non-flammable

With non-flammable contents.

(at)

Non-flammable, toxic

With non-flammable toxic contents.

(b)

Flammable

1. With not more than 45 % of flammable contents by mass.

2. With more than 45 % of flammable contents by mass.

(bt)

Flammable, toxic

1. With toxic contents and not more than 45 % of flammable contents by mass.

2. With toxic contents and more than 45 % of flammable contents by mass.

(c)

Chemically unstable

With chemically-unstable contents.

(ct)

Chemically unstable, toxic

With chemically-unstable toxic contents.

11°

Non-refillable containers of gas under pressure

(a)

Non-flammable

With non-flammable contents.

(at)

Non-flammable, toxic

With non-flammable toxic contents.

(b)

Flammable

With flammable contents.

(bt)

Flammable, toxic

With flammable toxic contents.

(c)

Chemically unstable

With chemically-unstable contents.

(ct)

Chemically unstable, toxic

With chemically-unstable toxic contents.

F. Gases subject to special requirements

12°

Various mixtures of gases

Mixtures containing gases listed under other item numbers of this Class, and mixtures of one or more gases listed under other item numbers of this Class with one or more vapours of substances not excluded from carriage under this Directive, on condition that during carriage:

1. the mixture remains entirely gaseous; and

2. all possibility of a dangerous reaction is excluded.

13°

Test gases

Gases and mixtures of gases not listed under other item numbers of this Class and used only in laboratory tests, on condition that during carriage:

1. the gas or mixture of gases remains entirely gaseous; and

2. all possibility of a dangerous reaction is excluded.

G. Empty receptacles and empty tanks

14°

Empty receptacles, empty tank-vehicles or empty tank-containers uncleaned, which have contained substances of Class 2.

Note: Receptacles and tanks which after being emptied of substances of Class 2 still contain small residual amounts are regarded as empty receptacles or empty tanks, uncleaned.

2201a Gases and articles handed over for carriage in conformity with the following provisions are not subject to the requirements or provisions relating to this Class set out elsewhere in this Annex or in Annex B:

(a) compressed gases which are neither flammable nor toxic nor corrosive and whose pressure in the receptacle, referred to a temperature of 15 °C, does not exceed 200 kPa (2 bar); the same rule applies to mixtures of gases containing not more than 2 % flammable components;

(b) liquefied gases contained, in quantities not exceeding 60 l, or in quantities of less than 5 l with not more than 25 g hydrogen, in freezing appliances (refrigerators, ice machines, etc.) and necessary for their operation. These freezing appliances shall be protected and loaded in such a way as to prevent any change to their freezing circuit;

(c) carbon dioxide and nitrous oxide (N2O) of 5° (a) in metal capsules (sodors, sparklets, cream capsules), if the carbon dioxide and nitrous oxide in the gaseous state do not contain more than 0.5 % air and the capsules contain not more than 25 g carbon dioxide or nitrous oxide per cm3 of capacity;

(d) articles of 10° and 11° of a capacity not exceeding 50 cm3. A package of such articles shall not weigh more than 10 kg;

(e) liquefied petroleum gases contained in motor-vehicle tanks firmly secured to the vehicles; the fuel cock between tank and engine must be closed and the electrical contact open.

2. Provisions

A. Packages

1. General conditions of packing

2202 (1) The materials of which the receptacles and their closures are made must not be liable to attack by the contents or form harmful or dangerous compounds therewith.

Note: Care must be taken not to allow any moisture to enter receptacles when they are being filled, and to dry receptacles completely after hydraulic pressure tests (see marginal 2216) carried out with water or with aqueous solutions.

(2) Packagings, including their closures, shall be sufficiently rigid and strong in all their parts to prevent any loosening during carriage and to meet the normal requirements of carriage. When outer packagings are prescribed, the receptacles shall be firmly secured therein. Unless otherwise specified in the section entitled 'Packing of a single substance or of articles of the same kind`, inner packagings may be enclosed in outer packagings either singly or in groups.

(3) Metal receptacles intended for the carriage of gases of 1° to 6° and 9° shall contain only the gas for which they have been tested and whose name is inscribed on the receptacle [see marginal 2218 (1) (a)].

Derogations are allowed:

1. for metal receptacles tested for one of the substances of 3° (a) or 4° (a) or for bromotrifluoromethane, chlorotrifluoromethane or trifluoromethane of 5° (a). These receptacles may also be filled with some other substance of the aforesaid items on condition that the minimum test pressure prescribed for that substance does not exceed the test pressure of the receptacle and that the name of the substance and its permissible maximum filling mass are inscribed on the receptacle;

2. for metal receptacles tested for hydrocarbons of 3° (b) or 4° (b). These receptacles may also be filled with some other hydrocarbon on condition that the minimum test pressure prescribed for that substance does not exceed the test pressure of the receptacle and that the name of the substance and its permissible maximum filling mass are inscribed on the receptacle.

For 1. and 2., see also marginals 2215, 2218 (1) (a) and 2220, (1) to (3).

(4) A change in the use to which a receptacle is assigned is allowed in principle if it does not conflict with national regulations; it requires, however, the approval of the competent authority and replacement of the former markings by markings relating to the new use.

2. Packing of a single substance or of articles of the same kind

Note: or carbon dioxide and nitrous oxide of 7° (a), mixtures containing carbon dioxide and nitrous oxide of 8° (a) and the gases of 7° (b) and 8° (b), see Annex B, marginal 21 105.

a. Nature of receptacles

2203 (1) Receptacles intended for the carriage of gases of 1° to 6°, 9°, 12° and 13° shall be so closed and leak proof as to prevent any escape of the gases.

(2) These receptacles shall be made of carbon steel or of alloy steel (special steels).

The following may, however, be used:

(a) copper receptacles for:

1. compressed gases of 1°, (a), (b) and (bt), and 2°, (a) and (b), whose filling pressure referred to a temperature of 15 °C does not exceed 2 MPa (20 bar); and

2. liquefied gases of 3° (a); sulphur dioxide of 3° (at); dimethyl ether of 3° (b); ethyl chloride and methyl chloride of 3° (bt); vinyl chloride of 3° (c); vinyl bromide of 3° (ct); mixtures F 1, F 2 and F 3 of 4° (a); and ethylene oxide containing not more than 10 % carbon dioxide by mass of 4° (ct);

(b) aluminium-alloy receptacles (see Appendix A.2) for:

1. compressed gases of 1°, (a), (b) and (bt); nitric oxide (nitrogen monoxide) NO of 1° (ct); and compressed gases of 2°, (a), (b) and (bt);

2. liquefied gases of 3° (a); sulphur dioxide of 3° (at); liquefied gases of 3° (b) other than methylsilane; hydrogen selenide, and methyl mercaptan of 3° (bt); ethylene oxide of 3° (ct); liquefied gases of 4°, (a) and (b); ethylene oxide containing not more than 10 % carbon dioxide by mass, of 4° (ct); and liquefied gases of 5°, (a) and (b), and 6°, (a) and (c). Sulphur dioxide of 3° (at) and substances of 3° (a) and 4° (a) shall be dry; and

3. dissolved acetylene of 9° (c).

All gases which are to be carried in aluminium-alloy receptacles shall be free from alkaline impurities.

2204 (1) Receptacles for dissolved acetylene of 9° (c) shall be entirely filled with a porous material, uniformly distributed, of a type approved by the competent authority and which:

(a) does not attack the receptacles or form harmful or dangerous compounds either with acetylene or with the solvent;

(b) does not shake down, even after prolonged use or through jolting, at temperatures up to 60 °C;

(c) is capable of preventing the spread of decomposition of the acetylene in the mass.

(2) The solvent must not attack the receptacles.

2205 (1) The following liquefied gases may, in addition, be carried in thick-walled glass tubes on condition that the quantity of substance in each tube and the degree of filling of the tubes do not exceed the figures indicated below:

>TABLE>

(2) The glass tubes shall be flame-sealed and secured separately by infusorial-earth cushioning in closed sheet-metal capsules which shall be placed in a wooden case or in some other outer packaging of sufficient strength (see also marginal 2222).

(3) For sulphur dioxide of 3° (at) stout glass siphons containing not more than 1,5 kg of substance and filled to not more than 88 % of their capacity are also allowed. The siphons shall be secured by infusorial earth, sawdust or powdered carbonate of lime, or by a mixture of the two latter, in strong wooden cases or in some other outer packaging of sufficient strength. A package shall not weigh more than 100 kg. If it weighs more than 30 kg, it shall be fitted with means of handling.

2206 (1) Gases of 3° (a); 3° (b) other than methylsilane; 3° (bt) other than arsine, dichlorosilane, dimethylsilane, hydrogen selenide and trimethylsilane; 3° (c); 3° (ct) other than cyanogen chloride; and mixtures of 4° (a) and 4° (b), may also, on condition that the mass of liquid per litre of capacity does not exceed either the maximum mass of contents indicated in marginal 2220 or 150 g per tube, be contained in thick-walled glass tubes, or in thick-walled metal tubes made of a metal allowed by marginal 2203 (2). The tubes shall be free from faults liable to impair their strength; in particular, internal stresses in glass tubes shall have been suitably relieved and the thickness of the tube walls shall not be less than 2 mm. The leakproofness of the closure system shall be ensured by an additional device (cap, crown, seal, binding, etc.) capable of preventing any loosening of the closure system during carriage. The tubes shall be secured by cushioning material in small boxes made of wood or fibreboard, the number of tubes per box being such that the mass of the liquid contained in a box does not exceed 600 g. These small boxes shall be placed in wooden cases or in some other outer packaging of sufficient strength; if the liquid contents of a case weigh more than 5 kg, the case shall be lined with soft-soldered sheet-metal.

(2) A package shall not weigh more than 75 kg.

2207 (1) Gases of 7° and 8° shall be enclosed in metal receptacles which are so insulated that they cannot become coated with dew or hoar-frost. The receptacles shall be fitted with safety valves.

(2) Gases of 7° (a) other than carbon dioxide and 8° (a) other than mixtures containing carbon dioxide may also be enclosed in receptacles which are not hermetically closed and which are:

(a) double-walled vacuum-jacketed glass receptacles surrounded by an absorbent insulating material; these receptacles shall be protected by iron-wire baskets and placed in metal cases; or

(b) metal receptacles protected against heat transmission in such a way that they cannot become coated with dew or hoar-frost; the capacity of these receptacles shall not exceed 100 litres.

(3) The metal cases referred to in subparagraph (2) (a) and the receptacles referred to in subparagraph (2) (b) above shall be fitted with means of handling. The openings of the receptacles referred to in subparagraphs (2) (a) and (b) shall be fitted with devices allowing gases to escape, preventing any splashing out of the liquid, and so fixed that they cannot fall out. In the case of oxygen of 7° (a) and mixtures containing oxygen of 8° (a), the devices referred to above and the absorbent insulating material surrounding the receptacles referred to in subparagraph (2) (a) shall be made of incombustible materials.

2208 (1) Aerosol dispensers (10°) and non-refillable containers for gas under pressure (11°) shall satisfy the following requirements:

(a) aerosol dispensers containing only a gas or a mixture of gases, and non-refillable containers for gas under pressure, shall be made of metal. This requirement shall not apply to non-refillable containers for gas under pressure with a maximum capacity of 100 ml for butane. Other aerosol dispensers shall be made of metal, a plastics material or glass. Receptacles made of metal and having an outside diameter of not less than 40 mm shall have a concave bottom;

(b) receptacles made of materials liable to shatter, such as glass or certain plastics materials, shall be enclosed in a device (close-mesh wire netting, flexible cover made of a plastics material, etc.) affording protection against fragments and their dispersal. Receptacles whose capacity does not exceed 150 cm3 and whose internal pressure at 20 °C is below 150 kPa (1,5 bar) are exempted from this requirement;

(c) the capacity of receptacles made of metal shall not exceed 1 000 cm3; that of receptacles made of a plastics material or of glass shall not exceed 500 cm3;

(d) each model of receptacle shall, before being put into service, satisfy a hydraulic pressure test carried out in conformity with Appendix A.2, marginal 3291. The internal pressure to be applied (test pressure) shall be 1,5 times the internal pressure at 50 °C, with a minimum pressure of 1 MPa (10 bar);

(e) the release valves of aerosol dispensers, and their dispersal devices, shall ensure that the dispensers are so closed as to be leak proof and shall be protected against accidental opening. Valves and dispersal devices which close only by the action of the internal pressure are not to be accepted.

(2) The following gases shall be accepted as propellants, or as constituents of propellants, or as filler gases, for aerosol dispensers: gases of 1°, (a) and (b); 2°, (a) and (b); 3°, (a) and (b) other than methylsilane; ethyl chloride of 3° (bt); l,3-butadiene of 3° (c); trifluorochloroethylene of 3° (ct); gases of 4°, (a), (b) and (c); gases of 5°, (a) and (b) other than silane; gases of 5° (c) and 6° (a) and (c).

(3) All the gases listed under (2) and, in addition, the following gases shall be accepted as filling gases for non-refillable containers for gas under pressure; methyl bromide of 3° (at); dimethylamine, ethylamine, methylamine, methyl mercaptan and trimethylamine of 3° (bt); ethylene oxide, methyl vinyl ether and vinyl bromide of 3° (ct); ethylene oxide containing not more than 10 % carbon dioxide by mass, of 4° (ct).

2209 (1) The internal pressure at 50 °C of aerosol dispensers and of non-refillable containers of gas under pressure shall exceed neither two-thirds of the test pressure of the receptacle nor 1,2 MPa (1,2 bar).

(2) Aerosol dispensers and non-refillable containers of gas under pressure shall be so filled that at 50 °C the liquid phase does not exceed 95 % of their capacity. The capacity of aerosol dispensers is the available volume in a closed dispenser fitted with the valve support, the valve and the dip tube.

(3) All aerosol dispensers and non-refillable containers for gas under pressure shall satisfy a tightness (leakproofness) test in conformity with Appendix A.2, marginal 3292.

2210 (1) Aerosol dispensers and non-refillable containers of gas under pressure shall be placed in wooden cases or strong fibreboard or metal boxes; aerosol dispensers made of glass or a plastics material and liable to shatter shall be separated from one another by interposed sheets of fibreboard or of another suitable material.

(2) A package shall not weigh more than 50 kg if fibreboard boxes are used or more than 75 kg if other packagings are used.

(3) In the case of carriage by full load, metal aerosol dispensers may also be packed as follows: the aerosol dispensers shall be grouped together in units on trays and held in position with an appropriate plastics cover; these units shall be stacked and suitably secured on pallets.

b. Conditions governing metal receptacles

(These conditions are not applicable to the metal tubes referred to in marginal 2206, to the receptacles referred to in marginal 2207 (2) (b), or to the aerosol dispensers or non-refillable metal containers for gas under pressure referred to in marginal 2208.)

1. Construction and fittings (see also marginal 2238).

2211 (1) At the test pressure, the stress in the metal at the most severely stressed point of the receptacle (marginals 2215, 2219 and 2220) shall not exceed three-quarters of the guaranteed minimum yield stress (Re). By 'yield stress` is meant the stress at which a permanent elongation of 2 % (i.e. 0,2 %) or, for austenitic steels, 1 % of the gauge length on the test-piece, has been produced.

Note: In the case of sheet-metal the axis of the tensile test-piece shall be at right angles to the direction of rolling. The permanent elongation at fracture (l = 5 d) shall be measured on a test-piece of circular cross-section in which the gauge length l is equal to five times the diameter d; if test-pieces of rectangular cross-section are used, the gauge length shall be calculated by the formula l = 5,65 F° where F° indicates the initial cross-sectional area of the test-piece.

(2) (a) Steel receptacles whose test pressure exceeds 6 MPa (60 bar) shall be of seamless construction or welded. For welded receptacles, steels (carbon or alloy) of fully satisfactory weldability shall be used.

(b) Receptacles whose test pressure does not exceed 6 MPa (60 bar) shall either conform to the provisions of subparagraph (a) above, or be riveted or hard-soldered on condition that the manufacturer guarantees the workmanship of the riveting and hard-soldering and that the competent authorities of the country of origin have given their approval.

(3) Aluminium-alloy receptacles shall be seamless or welded.

(4) Welded receptacles are to be accepted only on condition that the manufacturer guarantees the workmanship of the welding and that the competent authorities of the country of origin have given their approval.

2212 (1) A distinction is made between the following types of receptacles:

(a) cylinders of a capacity not exceeding 150 litres;

(b) receptacles of a capacity of not less than 100 litres [with the exception of cylinders in conformity with subparagraph (a)] and not more than 1 000 litres (e.g. cylindrical receptacles equipped with rolling hoops, and receptacles on skids), with the exception of receptacles in conformity with (e);

(c) tanks (see Annex B);

(d) assemblies, known as 'frames`, of cylinders in conformity with subparagraph (1) (a), the cylinders being interconnected by a manifold and held firmly together by a metal fitting.

(e) receptacles in conformity with marginal 2207, of a capacity of not more than 1 000 litres.

(2) (a) If under the regulations of the country of departure the cylinders referred to in subparagraph (1) (a) are required to be fitted with a device to prevent rolling, this device shall not be integral with the valve cap [marginal 2213 (2)];

(b) Receptacles in conformity with subparagraph (1) (b) which are capable of being rolled shall be equipped with rolling hoops or be otherwise protected against damage due to rolling (e.g. by corrosion-resistant metal sprayed on to the receptacle's outer surface). Receptacles in conformity with subparagraphs (1) (b) and (1) (c) which are not capable of being rolled shall be fitted with devices (skids, rings, straps) ensuring that they can be safely handled by mechanical means and so arranged as not to impair the strength of, nor cause undue stresses in, the wall of the receptacle.

(c) Frames of cylinders in conformity with subparagraph (1) (d) shall be fitted with devices ensuring that they can be handled safely. The manifold and the master cock shall be situated within the frame and be so mounted as to be protected against any damage.

(3) (a) With the exceptions of gases of 7° and 8°, gases of Class 2 may be carried in cylinders in conformity with subparagraph (1) (a).

Note: For possible limitations on the capacity of cylinders for certain gases, see marginal 2219.

(b) With the exception of fluorine, nitrogen trifluoride and silicon tetrafluoride of 1° (at); nitric oxide (NO) of 1° (ct); mixtures of hydrogen with not more than 10 % hydrogen selenide or phosphine or germane by volume or with not more than 15 % arsine by volume; mixtures of nitrogen or rare gases (containing not more than 10 % xenon by volume) with not more than 10 % hydrogen selenide or phosphine or germane by volume or with not more than 15 % arsine by volume of 2° (bt); mixtures of hydrogen with not more than 10 % diborane by volume; mixtures of nitrogen or rare gases (containing not more than 10 % xenon by volume) with not more than 10 % diborane by volume of 2° (ct); octafluorobut-2-ene (R 1318) and octafluoropropane of 3° (a); boron trichloride, chlorine trifluoride, hexafluoroacetone, nitrosyl chloride, sulphuryl fluoride and tungsten hexafluoride of 3° (at); 2,2-dimethylpropane and methylsilane of 3° (b); arsine, carbonyl sulphide, dichlorosilane, dimethylsilane, hydrogen selenide and trimethylsilane of 3° (bt); propadiene, inhibited, of 3° (c); cyanogen chloride, cyanogen, ethylene oxide and hydrogen iodide, anhydrous, of 3° (ct); mixtures of methylsilanes of 4° (bt); propadiene with 1 % to 4 % methylacetylene, stabilized, of 4° (c); ethylene oxide containing not more than 50 % methyl formate by mass, of 4° (ct); nitrous oxide of 5° (a); silane of 5° (b); and substances of 5° (bt), 5° (ct), 7°, 8°, 12° and 13°, gases of Class 2 may be carried in receptacles in conformity with subparagraph (1) (b).

(c) With the exception of nitrogen trifluoride and silicon tetrafluoride of 1° (at); nitric oxide of 1° (ct); mixtures of hydrogen with not more than 10 % hydrogen selenide or phosphine or germane by volume or with not more than 15 % arsine by volume; mixtures of nitrogen or rare gases (containing not more than 10 % xenon by volume) with not more than 10 % hydrogen selenide or phosphine or germane by volume or with not more than 15 % arsine by volume of 2° (bt); mixtures of hydrogen with not more than 10 % diborane by volume; mixtures of nitrogen or rare gases (containing not more than 10 % xenon by volume) with not more than 10 % diborane by volume of 2° (ct); octafluorobut-2-ene (R 1318) and octafluoropropane of 3° (a); boron trichloride, chlorine trifluoride, nitrosyl chloride, hexafluoroacetone, sulphuryl fluoride and tungsten hexafluoride of 3° (at); 2,2-dimethylpropane and methylsilane of 3° (b); arsine, carbonyl sulphide, dichlorosilane, dimethylsilane, hydrogen selenide and trimethylsilane of 3° (bt); propadiene, inhibited, of 3° (c); cyanogen chloride, cyanogen, ethylene oxide and hydrogen iodide, anhydrous of 3° (ct); mixtures of methylsilanes of 4° (bt); substances of 4° (c) and 4° (ct); nitrous oxide of 5° (a); silane of 5° (b); and substances of 5° (bt), 5° (ct), 7°, 8°, 12° and 13°, gases of Class 2 may be carried in frames of cylinders in conformity with subparagraph (1) (d). The individual cylinders in a frame of cylinders shall contain only one and the same compressed gas, liquefied gas or gas dissolved under pressure. Each cylinder in a frame of cylinders for fluorine of 1° (at) or dissolved acetylene of 9° (c) shall, however, be fitted with a cock. The cylinders in a frame of cylinders for acetylene shall all contain the same porous material (marginal 2204).

(d) For receptacles conforming to (1) (e), see marginal 2207.

2213 (1) Openings for filling and emptying receptacles shall be fitted with flap valves or needle-valves. Valves of other types may, however, be allowed if they present equivalent guarantees of safety and have been approved in the country of origin. Nevertheless, whatever the type of valve adopted, its system of attachment shall be strong and such that its satisfactory condition can be verified easily before each filling.

Apart from a manhole, which if provided shall be closed by an effective closure, and from the necessary orifice for the removal of deposits, receptacles and tanks in conformity with marginal 2212 (1) (b) and (c) shall not be equipped with more than two openings, for filling and discharge respectively. Nevertheless, receptacles of a capacity of not less than 100 litres intended for the carriage of dissolved acetylene of 9° (c) may have more than two openings for filling and discharge.

Similarly, receptacles and tanks in conformity with marginal 2212 (1), (b) and (c), intended for the carriage of substances of 3° (b) and 4° (b) may be provided with other openings intended in particular for verifying the level of the liquid and the gauge pressure.

(2) Valves (cocks) shall be effectively protected by caps or fixed flanges. Caps shall possess vent-holes of sufficient cross-sectional area to evacuate gases if leakage occurs at the valves. The caps or flanges shall adequately protect the valve if the cylinder falls and during carriage and stacking. Valves placed inside the neck of the receptacles and protected by a screw-threaded plug, and receptacles carried packed in protective cases, shall not require a cap. Likewise, no protective cap shall be required for valves (cocks) on frames of cylinders.

(3) Receptacles containing fluorine of 1° (at); chlorine trifluoride of 3° (at); or cyanogen chloride of 3° (ct) shall, whether or not they are carried packed in protective cases, be fitted with steel caps. These caps shall have no openings and shall, throughout carriage, be fitted with a gasket ensuring gas-tightness and made of a material not liable to attack by the contents of the receptacle.

2214 (1) In the case of receptacles containing boron trifluoride or fluorine of 1° (at); chlorine trifluoride or liquefied ammonia of 3° (at); ammonia dissolved in water of 9° (at); nitrosyl chloride of 3° (at); or dimethylamine, ethylamine, methylamine or trimethylamine of 3° (bt), valves made of copper or of any other metal liable to be attacked by these gases are not to be accepted.

(2) The use of substances containing grease or oil for ensuring the leakproofness of joints (seams) or for maintaining the closure devices of receptacles used for oxygen of 1° (a); fluorine of 1° (at); mixtures with oxygen of 2° (a); nitrogen dioxide, chlorine trifluoride of 3° (at); nitrous oxide of 5° (a); or mixtures of 12° containing more than 10 % oxygen by volume is prohibited.

(3) The following requirements shall apply to the construction of the receptacles referred to in marginal 2207 (1):

(a) The materials and construction of the receptacles shall be in conformity with the requirements of Appendix A.2, B, marginals 3250 to 3254. All the mechanical and technological characteristics of the material used shall be established for each receptacle at the first test; with regard to the impact strength and the bending coefficient, see Appendix A.2, B, marginals 3265 to 3285.

(b) Receptacles shall be fitted with a safety valve which shall be capable of opening at the working pressure shown on the receptacle. The valves shall be so constructed as to work perfectly even at their lowest working temperature. Their reliability of functioning at that temperature shall be established and checked by testing each valve or a sample of valves of the same type of construction.

(c) The vents and safety valves of receptacles shall be so designed as to prevent the liquid from splashing out.

(d) The closing devices shall be so arranged that they cannot be opened by unqualified persons.

(e) Receptacles whose filling is measured by volume shall be provided with a level indicator.

(f) The receptacles shall be thermally insulated. The thermal insulation shall be protected against impact by means of continuous metal sheathing. If the space between the receptacle and the metal sheathing is airless (vacuum insulation), the protective sheathing shall be designed to withstand without deformation an external pressure of at least 100 kPa (1 bar). If the sheathing is so closed as to be gas-tight (e.g. in the case of vacuum insulation), a device shall be provided to prevent any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulating layer in the event of inadequate gas-tightness of the receptacle or its fittings. The device shall prevent moisture from penetrating into the insulation.

(4) In the case of receptacles containing mixtures P1 or P2 of 4° (c), mixture of ethylene with acetylene and propylene of 8° (b) or dissolved acetylene of 9° (c), metal parts of closing devices in contact with the contents shall not contain more than 70 % copper. Receptacles for dissolved acetylene of 9° (c) may also have stop-valves taking yoke connectors.

(5) Receptacles containing oxygen of 1° (a) or 7° (a) and fitted in fish-tanks are likewise to be accepted if they are provided with appliances enabling the oxygen to escape gradually.

2. Official test of receptacles (for aluminium-alloy receptacles, see also Appendix A.2)

2215 (1) Metal receptacles shall be subjected to initial and periodic tests under the supervision of an expert approved by the competent authority. The nature of these tests is specified in marginals 2216 and 2217.

(2) In order to ensure compliance with the requirements of marginals 2204 and 2221 (2), tests of receptacles intended to contain dissolved acetylene of 9° (c) shall include, in addition, examination of the nature of the porous material and of the quantity of solvent.

2216 (1) The initial test of new or unused receptacles shall comprise:

A. On an adequate sample of receptacles:

(a) testing of the material of construction in respect at least of yield stress, tensile stength, and permanent elongation at fracture; the values yielded by these tests shall comply with national regulations;

(b) measurement of wall thickness at the thinnest point, and calculation of the stress;

(c) checking the homogeneity of the material for each manufacturing batch, and inspection of the external and internal condition of the receptacles;

B. For all receptacles:

(d) a hydraulic pressure test in conformity with the provisions of marginals 2219 to 2221;

Note: With the agreement of the expert approved by the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger.

(e) an inspection of the markings on the receptacles (see marginal 2218);

C. In addition, for receptacles intended for the carriage of dissolved acetylene of 9° (c):

(f) an inspection as required by national regulations.

(2) Receptacles shall withstand the test pressure without undergoing permanent deformation or exhibiting cracks.

(3) At the periodic inspections the following shall be repeated: the hydraulic pressure test; check of the external and internal condition of the receptacle (e.g. by weighing, internal inspection, checks of wall thickness); verification of the equipment and markings and, if necessary, verification of the characteristics of the material by suitable tests.

Note: With the agreement of the expert approved by the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by an equivalent method based on ultrasound.

Periodic inspections shall be carried out:

(a) every 2 years in the case of receptacles intended for the carriage of gases of 1° (at) and 1° (ct); town gas of 2° (bt); gases of 3° (at) other than ammonia, hexafluoropropylene and methyl bromide; cyanogen chloride of 3° (ct); and substances of 5° (at);

(b) every 5 years in the case of receptacles intended for the carriage of other compressed and liquefied gases (subject to the provisions of subparagraph (c) below) and of receptacles for the carriage of ammonia dissolved under pressure of 9° (at);

(c) every 10 years in the case of receptacles intended for the carriage of gases of 1° (a) other than oxygen; of mixtures of nitrogen with rare gases, of 2° (a); of gases of 3° (a) and 3° (b) other than 1-chloro-1,1-difluoroethane, 1,1-difluoroethane, dimethyl ether, methylsilane and 1,1,1-trifluoroethane, and of mixtures of gases of 4° (a) and 4° (b), if the receptacles have a capacity of not more than 150 litres and the country of origin does not prescribe a shorter interval;

(d) in the case of receptacles intended for the carriage of dissolved acetylene of 9° (c), marginal 2217 (1) shall apply, and in that of receptacles conforming to marginal 2207 (1), marginal 2217 (2) shall apply.

2217 (1) The external condition (corrosion, deformation) of, and the condition (loosening, settlement) of the porous material in, receptacles intended for the carriage of dissolved acetylene of 9° (c) shall be examined every 5 years. Sampling shall be performed by cutting up, if considered necessary, a suitable number of receptacles and inspecting them internally for corrosion and for any changes that may have occurred in the constituent materials and in the porous material.

(2) Receptacles conforming to marginal 2207 (1) shall be subjected every 5 years to external inspection and to a tightness (leakproofness) test. The tightness (leakproofness) test shall be carried out with the gas contained in the receptacle or with an inert gas at a pressure of 200 kPa (2 bar). Checking shall be performed by means of a pressure gauge or by vacuum measurement. The thermal insulation shall not be removed. The pressure shall not decline during the 8-hour test period. Changes resulting from the nature of the test gas or from variations in temperature shall be taken into account.

(3) The cylinders referred to in marginal 2212 (1) (a) may be carried after the expiry of the time-limit set for the periodic test prescribed in marginal 2215 for the purpose of undergoing the test.

3. Marks on receptacles

2218 (1) Metal receptacles shall bear the following particulars in clearly legible and durable characters:

(a) one of the names of the gas or of the mixture of gases in full, as given in marginal 2201, 1° to 9°; the name or mark of the maker or owner; and the number of the receptacle [see also marginal 2202 (3)]. In the case of halogenated hydrocarbons of 1° (a), 3° (a), 3° (at), 3° (b), 3° (ct), 4° (a), 5° (a) and 6° (a), the use of the letter R followed by the substance identification number is also permitted;

(b) the tare of the receptacle without fittings and accessories;

(c) in addition, in the case of receptacles intended for liquefied gases, the tare of the receptacle including such fittings and accessories as valves, metal plugs, etc., but excluding the protective cap;

Note to (b) and (c): Those particulars of the mass, in so far as they are not already marked on the receptacle, shall be so marked at the next periodic test.

(d) the test pressure (see marginals 2219 to 2221) and the date (month, year) of the last test undergone (see marginals 2216 and 2217);

(e) the stamp of the expert who carried out the tests and inspections; and, in addition;

(f) in the case of compressed gases or mixtures of compressed gases of 1°, 2°, 12° and 13°: the maximum filling pressure at 15 °C allowed for the receptacle in question (see marginal 2219);

(g) in the case of boron trifluoride of 1° (at), liquefied gases of 3° to 6° and ammonia dissolved in water of 9° (at): the maximum filling allowed, and the capacity. In the case of deeply-refrigerated gases of 7° and 8°: the capacity;

(h) in the case of acetylene dissolved in a solvent of 9° (c): the permitted filling pressure [see marginal 2221 (2)], and the mass of the empty receptacle, including the mass of the fittings and accessories, of the porous material, and of the solvent;

(i) in the case of mixtures of gases of 12° and test gases of 13°, the words 'mixtures of gases` or 'test gases`, as the case may be, shall be engraved on the receptacle as a general indication of the contents. An exact description of the contents shall be shown in a durable form throughout carriage;

(k) in the case of metal receptacles which, under marginal 2202 (3), are accepted for the carriage of a number of different gases (multi-purpose receptacles), an exact description of the contents shall be shown in a durable form during carriage.

(2) The marks shall be engraved either on a reinforced part of the receptacle, or on a ring, or on a data plate, immovably affixed to the receptacle. In addition, the name of the substance may be indicated on the receptacle by an adherent and clearly-visible inscription applied by painting or by any other, equivalent process.

c. Test pressure, degree of filling, and limitation of capacity, of receptacles (see also marginals 2238, 211 180, 211 184 and 212 180)

2219 (1) In the case of receptacles intended for the carriage of compressed gases of 1°, 2° and 12°, the internal pressure (test pressure) to be applied in the hydraulic pressure test shall be at least one and one-half times the filling pressure at 15 °C indicated on the receptacle, but shall not be less than 1 MPa (10 bar).

(2) In the case of receptacles used for the carriage of substances of 1° (a) other than tetrafluoromethane; of deuterium and hydrogen of 1° (b); or of gases of 2° (a), the filling pressure shall not exceed 30 MPa (300 bar) referred to a temperature of 15 °C. In the case of tanks, the filling pressure shall not exceed 25 MPa (250 bar) referred to a temperature of 15 °C.

In the case of receptacles and tanks intended for the carriage of other gases of 1° and 2°, the filling pressure shall not exceed 20 MPa (200 bar) referred to a temperature of 15 °C.

(3) In the case of receptacles intended for the carriage of fluorine of 1° (at), the internal pressure (test pressure) to be applied in the hydraulic pressure test shall be 20 MPa (200 bar) and the filling pressure shall not exceed 2,8 MPa (28 bar) at a temperature of 15 °C; in addition, no receptacle may contain more than 5 kg fluorine.

In the case of receptacles intended for the carriage of boron trifluoride of 1° (at), the hydraulic pressure to be applied in the test (test pressure) shall be either 30 MPa (300 bar), in which case the maximum mass of the contents per litre of capacity shall not exceed 0,86 kg, or 22,5 MPa (225 bar), in which case the maximum mass of the contents per litre of capacity shall not exceed 0,715 kg.

(4) In the case of receptacles intended for the carriage of nitric oxide NO of 1° (ct), the capacity shall be limited to 50 l; the hydraulic pressure to be applied in the test (test pressure) shall be 20 MPa (200 bar); and the filling pressure shall not exceed 5 MPa (50 bar) at a temperature of 15 °C.

(5) In the case of receptacles intended for the carriage of mixtures of hydrogen with not more than 10 % hydrogen selenide or phosphine or germane by volume or with not more than 15 % arsine by volume; of mixtures of nitrogen or rare gases (containing not more than 10 % xenon by volume) with not more than 10 % hydrogen selenide or phosphine or germane by volume or with not more than 15 % arsine by volume, of 2° (bt); of mixtures of hydrogen with not more than 10 % diborane by volume; or of mixtures of nitrogen or rare gases (containing not more than 10 % xenon by volume) with not more than 10 % diborane by volume, of 2° (ct), the capacity shall be limited to 50 l; the hydraulic pressure to be applied in the test (test pressure) shall be not less than 20 MPa (200 bar); and the filling pressure shall not exceed 5 MPa (50 bar) at a temperature of 15 °C.

(6) The degree of filling of receptacles in conformity with marginal 2207 (1) intended for the carriage of gases of 7° (b) and 8° (b) shall remain below the level at which, if the contents were raised to the temperature at which the vapour pressure equalled the valve-opening pressure, the volume of the liquid would reach 95 % of the capacity of the receptacle at that temperature. Receptacles intended for the carriage of gases of 7° (a) and 8° (a) may be filled to 98 % at the 2219 loading temperature and the loading pressure. Where oxygen of 7° (a) is carried, steps shall be taken to prevent any spillage of the liquid phase.

(7) Where dissolved acetylene of 9° (c) is carried in receptacles in conformity with marginal

2212 (1) (b), the capacity of the receptacles shall not exceed 150 l.

(8) The capacity of receptacles intended for the carriage of mixtures of gases of 12° shall not exceed 50 l. The pressure of the mixture shall not exceed 15 MPa (150 bar) at a temperature of 15 °C.

(9) The capacity of receptacles intended for the carriage of test gases of 13° shall not exceed 50 l. The filling pressure at a temperature of 15 °C shall not exceed 7 % of the test pressure of the receptacle.

(10) In the case of tungsten hexafluoride of 3° (at), the capacity of the receptacles shall be limited to 60 l.

The capacity of receptacles for silicon tetrafluoride of 1° (at); boron trichloride, nitrosyl chloride and sulphuryl fluoride of 3° (at); methylsilane of 3° (b); arsine, dichlorosilane, dimethylsilane, hydrogen selenide and trimethylsilane, of 3° (bt); cyanogen chloride and cyanogen of 3° (ct); mixtures of methylsilanes of 4° (bt); ethylene oxide containing not more than 50 % methyl formate by mass, of 4° (ct); silane, of 5° (b); and substances of 5° (bt) and (ct), shall be limited to 50 l.

(11) In the case of receptacles intended for chlorine trifluoride of 3° (at), the capacity shall be limited to 40 l. After filling, a receptacle containing chlorine trifluoride of 3° (at) shall, before being handed over for carriage, be held back for not less than seven days in order to verify that it is leak proof.

2220 (1) In the case of receptacles intended for the carriage of liquefied gases of 3° to 6°, and of receptacles intended for the carriage of gases dissolved under pressure of 9°, the hydraulic pressure to be applied in the test (test pressure) shall be not less than 1 MPa (10 bar).

(2) In the case of liquefied gases of 3° and 4°, the following values shall be complied with for the hydraulic pressure to be applied to the receptacles in the test (test pressure) and for the maximum degree of filling allowed ():

>TABLE>

(3) In the case of receptacles intended to contain liquefied gases of 5° and 6°, the degree of filling shall be such that the internal pressure at 65 °C does not exceed the test pressure of the receptacles. The following values shall be complied with, see also paragraph (4):

>TABLE>

>TABLE>

(4) For substances of 5° other than hydrogen chloride of 5° (at); germane and phosphine of 5° (bt); and diborane of 5° (ct), and for substances of 6°, the use of receptacles tested at a lower pressure than that indicated in paragraph (3) for the substance in question is allowed, but the quantity of substance per receptacle shall not exceed that which at 65 °C would produce inside the receptacle a pressure equal to the test pressure. In such a case the permissible maximum load shall be prescribed by the expert approved by the competent authority.

2221 (1) In the case of gases dissolved under pressure, of 9°, the following values shall be complied with for the hydraulic pressure to be applied to the receptacles in the test (test pressure), and for the maximum degree of filling allowed:

>TABLE>

(2) In the case of dissolved acetylene of 9° (c), once equilibrium has been achieved at 15 °C the cylinder-filling pressure shall not exceed the value prescribed by the competent authority for the porous mass, which value shall be engraved on the cylinder. The quantity of solvent and the quantity of acetylene shall likewise correspond to the figures specified in the approval.

3. Mixed packing

2222 (1) Substances of this Class other than substances of 7° and 8° may be enclosed in the same package with one another if they are contained:

(a) in metal pressure-receptacles of a volume not exceeding 10 litres;

(b) in thick-walled glass tubes or glass syphons in accordance with marginals 2205 and 2206, on condition that these fragile receptacles are secured in accordance with the provisions of marginal 2001 (7). The cushioning materials shall be suited to the properties of the contents. Inner packagings shall be placed in an outer packaging in which they shall be effectively kept apart from one another.

(2) Articles of 10° and 11° may be enclosed in the same package with one another under the conditions prescribed in marginal 2210.

(3) In addition, substances packed in accordance with marginal 2205 and 2206 may be enclosed in the same package with one another subject to the following special conditions.

(4) A package which meets the requirements of (1) and (3) shall not weigh more than 100 kg, or more than 75 kg if it contains fragile receptacles.

Special conditions:

>TABLE>

4. Markings and labels on packages (see Appendix A.9)

Marking

2223 (1) Every package containing receptacles holding gases of 1° to 9°, 12° or 13° or non-refillable containers of gas under pressure of 11° shall be marked legibly and indelibly with an indication of its contents, with the addition: 'Class 2`. This marking shall be in an official language of the Member State of departure, and also, if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German, unless any agreements concluded between the Member States concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise. This provision need not be complied with if the receptacles and their markings are clearly visible.

(2) Packages containing aerosol dispensers of 10° shall be marked with the word 'AEROSOL` in clearly legible and indelible characters.

(3) Where a consignment constitutes a full load, the markings referred to in paragraph (1) are not mandatory.

Danger labels

2224 Note: A package is any packaging containing receptacles, aerosol dispensers or non-refillable containers of gas under pressure, or any receptacle without outer packaging.

(1) Packages containing substances and articles of Class 2 other than those mentioned in paragraph (2), Table 2 and in paragraph (3) of this marginal, shall bear the labels indicated below:

>TABLE>

(2) Packages containing substances and articles described in Table 2 below shall bear the labels indicated:

>TABLE>

(3) In conformity with the dangerous properties of the substances, packages containing substances of 12° and 13° shall bear:

- a label conforming to model No 3 for flammable gases,

- a label conforming to model No 6.1 for toxic gases,

- labels conforming to model Nos 6.1 and 8 for corrosive gases,

- labels conforming to model Nos 2 and 05 for oxidizing gases,

- labels conforming to model Nos 6.1 and 3 for flammable toxic gases,

- labels conforming to model Nos 3, 6.1 and 8 for flammable corrosive gases,

- a label conforming to model No 2 for gases which are not flammable, toxic, corrosive or oxidizing,

- labels conforming to model Nos 6.1 and 05 for mixtures containing fluorine and those containing nitrogen dioxide.

(4) Packages which contain receptacles made of materials liable to shatter, such as glass or certain plastics materials, shall bear a label conforming to model No 12,

(5) Every package containing gases of 7° or 8° shall bear, on two opposite sides, labels conforming to model No 11, and if the substances it contains are enclosed in glass receptacles [marginal 2207 (2) (a)], it shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 12,

(6) Labels on gas cylinders may be attached to the shoulder of the cylinder and may have smaller dimensions accordingly, provided that they remain clearly visible.

2225

B. Particulars in the transport document

2226 (1) The description of the goods in the transport document must be:

(a) in the case of pure and technically-pure gases of 1°, 3°, 5°, 7° or 9°, of aerosol dispensers of 10°, of non-refillable containers of gas under pressure of 11°: one of the names printed in italics in marginal 2201;

(b) in the case of mixtures of gases of 2°, 4°, 6°, 8°, 12° or 13°: 'mixture of gases`. This description must be supplemented by an indication of the composition of the mixture of gases in volume per cent or mass per cent. Constituents below 1 % need not be indicated. In the case of mixtures of gases of 2° (a), 2° (b), 2° (bt), 4° (a), 4° (b), 4° (c), 4° (ct), 6° (a), 8° (a) or 8° (b), the descriptions or names customary in the trade which are printed in italics in marginal 2201 may likewise be used, without indication of the composition.

In the case of mixtures A, AO and C of 4° (b) carried in tanks or tank-containers, however, the names customary in the trade mentioned in the Note may be used only as a complement.

These descriptions must be followed by particulars of the class, the item number (together with the letter, if any), and the initials 'ADR` (or 'RID`) e.g. 2, 5° (at), ADR.

(2) In the case of tanks containing gases of 7° (a) or 8° (a), other than carbon dioxide and nitrous oxide, the transport document shall bear the following entry:

'The tank is in permanent communication with the atmosphere`.

(3) For the carriage of cylinders in conformity with marginal 2212 (1) (a) under the conditions of marginal 2217 (3), the following entry shall be included in the transport document:

'Carriage in conformity with marginal 2217 (3)`.

2227-

2236

C. Empty packagings

2237 (1) Receptacles and tanks of 14° shall be closed in the same manner as if they were full.

(2) Uncleaned empty receptacles of l4° shall bear the same danger labels as if they were full.

(3) The description in the transport document shall conform to one of the names given in 14°, e.g. 'Empty receptacle, uncleaned, 2, 14°, ADR`. The description shall be completed by adding the words 'Last load`, together with the name and item number of the goods last loaded e.g. 'Last load: chlorine, 3° (at)`.

(4) The receptacles of 14° referred to in marginal 2212 (1) (a), (b) and (d) may be transported after the expiry of the time-limit set for the periodic test prescribed in marginal 2215, for the purpose of undergoing the tests.

D. Transitional provisions

2238 The following transitional provisions shall apply to receptacles for compressed or liquefied gases or gases dissolved under pressure:

(a) receptacles already in service shall, subject to the following exceptions, be accepted so long as the requirements of the Member States in which the tests in accordance with marginal 2216 were carried out so permit and as the intervals prescribed in marginals 2216 (3) and 2217 for the periodic inspections are observed;

(b) in the case of receptacles manufactured under the previous system (permissible stress two-thirds, instead of three-quarters, of the yield stress), no increase in either the test pressure or the filling pressure shall be permitted [see marginal 2211 (1)];

(c) transitional measures for tanks: see marginals 211 180 and 211 184.

(d) transitional measures for tank-containers: see marginal 212 180.

2239-

2299

CLASS 3 FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS

1. List of substances

2300 (1) Among the substances and mixtures covered by the heading of Class 3, those listed in marginal 2301 or which fall under a collective heading of that marginal, and articles containing such substances, are subject to the conditions prescribed in marginals 2300 (2) to 2322 and to the provisions of this Annex and of Annex B and are consequently substances of this Directive.

Note: For the quantities of substances listed in marginal 2301 which are not subject to the provisions for this Class, either in this Annex or in Annex B, see marginal 2301a.

(2) The heading of Class 3 covers substances and articles containing substances of this Class which:

- are liquid at a maximum temperature of 20 °C, or for viscous substances for which a specific melting point cannot be determined, are highly viscous according to the criteria of the penetrometer test (see Appendix A.3, marginal 3310), or are liquid according to the ASTM D 4359-90 test method;

- have at 50 °C a vapour pressure of not more than 300 kPa (3 bar);

- have a flashpoint of not more than 61 °C.

The heading of Class 3 also covers flammable liquid substances and molten solid substances with a flashpoint of more than 61 °C and which are carried or handed over for carriage whilst heated at temperatures equal to or higher than their flashpoint.

Substances having a flashpoint above 35 °C, non-toxic and non-corrosive, which, under the test conditions given, do not sustain combustion (see Appendix A.3, marginal 3304) are excluded; if however these substances are handed over for carriage and carried whilst heated at temperatures equal to or higher than their flashpoint, they are substances of this Class.

Flammable liquids which, because of supplementary dangerous properties, are listed in, or assigned to, other classes are also excluded. The flashpoint shall be determined as indicated in Appendix A.3, marginals 3300 to 3302.

Notes: 1. For gasoil, diesel fuel, heating oil (light) (identification number 1202) having a flashpoint above 61 °C see, however, note under marginal 2301, 31° (c).

2. For substances having a flashpoint above 61 °C which are carried or handed over for carriage at or above their flashpoint, see however marginal 2301, 61° (c).

(3) The substances and articles of Class 3 are subdivided as follows:

A. Substances having a flashpoint below 23 °C not toxic, not corrosive;

B. Substances having a flashpoint below 23 °C and toxic;

C. Substances having a flashpoint below 23 °C and corrosive;

D. Substances having a flashpoint below 23 °C, toxic and corrosive and articles containing those substances;

E. Substances having a flashpoint between 23 °C and 61 °C inclusive which might be slightly toxic and/or slightly corrosive;

F. Substances and preparations used as pesticides having a flashpoint below 23 °C;

G. Substances having a flashpoint above 61 °C which are carried or handed over for carriage at or above their flashpoint;

H. Empty packagings.

Substances and articles of Class 3, other than those of 6°, 12°, 13°, and 28° classified under the various item numbers of marginal 2301 shall be assigned to one of the following groups designated by the letter (a), (b) or (c) according to their degree of danger:

letter (a): very dangerous substances: flammable liquids having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C, and flammable liquids having a flash-point below 23 °C, which are either highly toxic according to the criteria of marginal 2600 or highly corrosive according to the criteria of marginal 2800;

letter (b): dangerous substances: flammable liquids having a flash-point below 23 °C which are not classified under letter (a), with the exception of substances of marginal 2301, 5° (c);

letter (c): substances presenting a minor danger: flammable liquids having a flashpoint of 23 °C to 61 °C inclusive and substances of marginal 2301, 5° (c).

(4) If substances of Class 3, as a result of admixtures, come into different categories of risk from those to which the substances specifically named in marginal 2301 belong, these mixtures or solutions shall be assigned to the items and letters to which they belong on the basis of their actual degree of danger.

Note: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), see also marginal 2002 (8).

(5) On the basis of the test procedures in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3300 to 3302, 3304 and 3310, and the criteria set out in (2), it may also be determined whether the nature of a solution or a mixture specifically named or containing a specifically named substance is such that the solution or mixture is not subject to the provisions for this Class.

(6) Certain highly toxic flammable liquid substances having a flashpoint below 23 °C are substances of Class 6.1 (marginal 2601, 1° to 10°).

(7) Substances of Class 3 which are liable to form peroxides easily (as happens with ethers or with certain heterocyclic oxygenated substances) are to be accepted for carriage only if their peroxide content, calculated as hydrogen peroxide (H2O2), does not exceed 0,3 %. The peroxide content shall be determined as indicated in Appendix A.3, marginal 3303.

(8) The chemically unstable substances of Class 3 are to be accepted for carriage only if the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition or polymerization during carriage. To this end, it shall in particular be ensured that receptacles do not contain any substance liable to promote these reactions.

A. Substances having a flashpoint below 23 °C, not toxic, not corrosive

2301 1° Substances, solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) having a vapour pressure at 50 °C of more than 175 kPa (1,75 bar):

(a) 1089 acetaldehyde (ethanal), 1108 1-pentene (n-amylene), 1144 crotonylene (2-butyne), 1243 methyl formate, 1265 pentanes, liquid (isopentane), 1267 petroleum crude oil, 1303 vinylidene chloride, inhibited (1,1-dichloroethylene, inhibited), 1308 zirconium suspended in a flammable liquid, 1863 fuel, aviation, turbine engine, 2371 isopentenes, 2389 furan, 2456 2-chloropropene, 2459 2-methyl-1-butene, 2561 3-methyl-1-butene (1-isoamylene) (isopropylethylene), 2749 tetramethylsilane, 1268 petroleum distillates, n.o.s. or 1268 petroleum products, n.o.s, 3295 hydrocarbons, liquid, n.o.s., 1993 flammable liquid, n.o.s.

2° Substances, solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) having a vapour pressure at 50 °C of more than 110 kPa (1,10 bar) but not more than 175 kPa (1,75 bar):

(a) 1155 diethyl ether (ethyl ether), 1167 divinyl ether inhibited, 1218 isoprene, inhibited, 1267 petroleum crude oil, 1280 propylene oxide, inhibited, 1302 vinyl ethyl ether, inhibited, 1308 zirconium suspended in a flammable liquid, 1863 fuel, aviation, turbine engine, 2356 2-chloropropane, 2363 ethyl mercaptan, 1268 petroleum distillates, n.o.s. or 1268 petroleum products, n.o.s., 3295 hydrocarbons, liquid, n.o.s., 1993 flammable liquid, n.o.s.;

(b) 1164 dimethyl sulphide, 1234 methylal (dimethoxymethane), 1265 pentanes, liquid (n-pentane), 1267 petroleum crude oil, 1278 1-chloropropane (propyl chloride), 1308 zirconium suspended in a flammable liquid, 1863 fuel, aviation, turbine engine, 2246 cyclopentene, 2460 2-methyl-2-butene, 2612 methyl propyl ether, 1224 ketones, n.o.s., 1987 alcohols, flammable, n.o.s., 1989 aldehydes, flammable, n.o.s., 1268 petroleum distillates, n.o.s. or 1268 petroleum products, n.o.s., 3295 hydrocarbons, liquid, n.o.s., 1993 flammable liquid n.o.s.

3° Substances, solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) having a vapour pressure at 50 °C of not more than 110 kPa (1,10 bar):

(b) 1203 motor spirit, 1267 petroleum crude oil, 1863 fuel aviation, turbine engine, 1268 petroleum distillates, n.o.s. or 1268 petroleum products, n.o.s.

Note: While in some climatic conditions petrol (gasoline) may have a vapour pressure at 50 °C of more than 110 kPa (1,10 bar) but not more than 150 kPa (1,50 bar), it is to continue to be classified under this item number.

Hydrocarbons:

1114 benzene, 1136 coal tar distillates, 1145 cyclohexane, 1146 cyclopentane, 1175 ethylbenzene, 1206 heptanes, 1208 hexanes, 1216 isooctenes, 1262 octanes, 1288 shale oil, 1294 toluene, 1300 turpentine substitute (white spirit), 1307 xylenes 2301 (o-xylene; dimethylbenzenes), 2050 diisobutylene, isomeric compounds, 2057 tripropylene (propylene trimer), 2241 cycloheptane, 2242 cycloheptene, 2251 bicyclo-(2.2.1) -hepta-2,5-diene, inhibited (2,5-norbornadiene, inhibited), 2256 cyclohexene, 2263 dimethylcyclohexanes, 2278 n-heptene, 2287 isoheptenes, 2288 isohexenes, 2296 methylcyclohexane, 2298 methylcyclopentane, 2309 octadienes, 2358 cyclooctatetraene, 2370 1-hexene, 2457 2,3-dimethylbutane, 2458 hexadienes, 2461 methylpentadienes, 3295 hydrocarbons, liquid, n.o.s.;

Halogenated substances:

1107 amyl chlorides, 1126 1-bromobutane, (n-butyl bromide), 1127 chlorobutanes (butyl chlorides), 1150 1,2-dichloroethylene, 1279 1,2-dichloropropane, (propylene dichloride) 2047 dichloropropenes, 2338 benzotrifluoride, 2339 2-bromobutane, 2340 2-bromoethyl ethyl ether, 2342 bromomethylpropanes, 2343 2-bromopentane, 2344 bromopropanes, 2345 3-bromopropyne, 2362 1,1-dichloroethane (ethylidene chloride), 2387 fluorobenzene, 2388 fluorotoluenes, 2390 2-iodobutane, 2391 iodomethylpropanes, 2554 methylallyl chloride;

Alcohols:

1105 amyl alcohols, 1120 butanols, 1148 diacetone alcohol technical, 1170 ethanol (ethyl alcohol) or 1170 ethanol (ethyl alcohol) in aqueous solution containing more than 70 % alcohol by volume, 1219 isopropanol (isopropyl alcohol), 1274 n-propanol (propyl alcohol, normal), 3065 alcoholic beverages containing more than 70 % alcohol by volume, 1987 alcohols, flammable, n.o.s.;

Note: Alcoholic beverages containing more than 24 % and not more than 70 % alcohol by volume are substances of 31° (c).

Ethers:

1088 acetal (1,1-diethoxyethane), 1159 diisopropyl ether, 1165 dioxane, 1166 dioxolane, 1179 ethyl butyl ether, 1304 vinyl isobutyl ether, inhibited, 2056 tetrahydrofuran, 2252 1,2-dimethoxyethane, 2301 2-methylfuran, 2350 butyl methyl ether, 2352 butyl vinyl ether, inhibited, 2373 diethoxymethane, 2374 3,3-diethoxypropene, 2376 2,3-dihydropyran, 2377 1,1-dimethoxyethane, 2384 di-n-propyl ether, 2398 methyl tert-butyl ether, 2536 methyltetrahydrofuran, 2615 ethyl propyl ether, 2707 dimethyldioxanes, 3022 1,2-butylene oxide, stabilized, 3271 ethers, n.o.s.;

Aldehydes:

1129 butyraldehyde, 1178 2-ethylbutyraldehyde, 1275 propionaldehyde, 2045 isobutyraldehyde (isobutyl aldehyde), 2058 valeraldehyde, 2367 alpha-methylvaleraldehyde, 1989 aldehydes, flammable, n.o.s.;

Ketones:

1090 acetone, 1156 diethyl ketone, 1193 methyl ethyl ketone (ethyl methyl ketone), 1245 methyl isobutyl ketone, 1246 methyl isopropenyl ketone, inhibited, 1249 methyl propyl ketone, 1251 methyl vinyl ketone, 2346 butanedione (diacetyl), 2397 3-methylbutan-2-one, 1224. ketones, n.o.s.;

Esters:

1123 butyl acetates, 1128 n-butyl formate, 1161 dimethyl carbonate, 1173 ethyl acetate, 1176 ethyl borate, 1190 ethyl formate, 1195 ethyl propionate, 1213 isobutyl acetate, 1220 isopropyl acetate, 1231 methyl acetate, 1237 methyl butyrate, 1247 methyl methacrylate monomer, inhibited, 1248 methyl propionate, 1276 n-propyl acetate, 1281 propyl formates, 1301 vinyl acetate, inhibited, 1862 ethyl crotonate, 1917 ethyl acrylate, inhibited, 1919 methyl acrylate inhibited, 2277 ethyl methacrylate, 2385 ethyl isobutyrate, 2393 isobutyl formate, 2394 isobutyl propionate, 2400 methyl isovalerate, 2403 isopropenyl acetate, 2406 isopropyl isobutyrate, 2409 isopropyl propionate, 2416 trimethyl borate, 2616 triisopropyl borate, 2838 vinyl butyrate, inhibited, 3272 esters, n.o.s.;

Substances containing sulphur:

1111 amyl mercaptans, 2347 butyl mercaptans, 2375 diethyl sulphide, 2381 dimethyl disulphide, 2402 propanethiols (propyl mercaptans), 2412 tetrahydrothiophene s(thiolanne), 2414 thiophene, 2436 thioacetic acid;

Substances containing nitrogen:

1113 amyl nitrites, 1222 isopropyl nitrate, 1261 nitromethane, 1282 pyridine, 1648 acetonitrile (methyl cyanide), 1865 n-propyl nitrate, 2351 butyl nitrites, 2372 1,2 di-(dimethylamino) ethane (tetramethylethylenediamine), 2410 1, 2, 3, 6-tetrahydropyridine;

Other flammable substances and mixtures and preparations containing flammable liquids:

1091 acetone oils, 1201 fusel oil, 1293 tinctures, medicinal, 1308 zirconium suspended in a flammable liquid, 2380 dimethyldiethoxysilane, 1993 flammable liquid, n.o.s.

Note: For viscous substances, mixtures and preparations, see 5°.

4° Solutions of nitrocellulose in mixtures of substances of 1° to 3° containing more than 20 % but not more than 55 % nitrocellulose with a nitrogen content not exceeding 12,6 % (by dry mass):

(a) 2059 nitrocellulose solution, flammable;

(b) 2059 nitrocellulose solution, flammable.

Notes: 1. Mixtures having a flashpoint below 23 °C and containing:

- more than 55 % nitrocellulose, whatever its nitrogen content, or

- containing not more than 55 % nitrocellulose with a nitrogen content above 12,6 % (by dry mass),

are substances of Class 1, (see marginal 2101, 4°, identification number 0340, or 26°, identification number 0342), or of Class 4.1 (see marginal 2401, 24°).

2. Mixtures containing 20 % or less nitrocellulose with a nitrogen content not exceeding 12.6 % (by dry mass) are substances of 5°.

5° Liquid or viscous mixtures and preparations, including those containing 20 % or less nitrocellulose with a nitrogen content not exceeding 12,6 % (by dry mass):

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C provided that they do not come under (c):

1133 adhesives, 1139 coating solution, 1169 extracts, aromatic, liquid, 1197 extracts, flavouring, liquid, 1210 printing ink, 1263 paint (including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base) or 1263 paint related material (including paint thinning or reducing compound), 1266 perfumery products, 1286 rosin oil, 1287 rubber solution, 1866 resin solution;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C provided that they do not come under (c):

1133 adhesives, 1139 coating solution, 1169 extracts, aromatic, liquid, 1197 extracts, flavouring, liquid, 1210 printing ink, 1263 paint (including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base) or 1263 paint related material (including paint thinning or reducing compound), 1266 perfumery products, 1286 rosin oil, 1287 rubber solution, 1306 wood preservatives, 1866 resin solution, 1999 tars, liquid including road asphalt and oils, bitumen and cut backs, 3269 polyester resin kit;

(c) 1133 adhesives, 1139 coating solution, 1169 extracts, aromatic, liquid, 1197 extracts, flavouring, liquid, 1210 printing ink, 1263 paint (including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base) or 1263 paint related material (including paint thinning or reducing compound), 1266 perfumery products, 1286 rosin oil, 1287 rubber solution 1306 wood preservatives liquid, 1866 resin solution, 1999 tars, liquid including road asphalt and oils, bitumen and cut backs, 3269 polyester resin kit, 1993 flammable liquid, n.o.s.

Classification under letter (c) is only possible if the following requirements are met:

1. that the height of the separated layer of solvent is less than 3 % of the total height in the solvent-separation test; () and

2. that the viscosity () and flash-point are in accordance with the following table:

>TABLE>

Notes: 1. Mixtures containing more than 20 % but not more than 55 % nitrocellulose with a nitrogen content not exceeding 12,6 % by dry mass are substances of 4°.

Mixtures having a flashpoint below 23 °C and containing:

- more than 55 % nitrocellulose, whatever their nitrogen content; or

- not more than 55 % nitrocellulose with a nitrogen content above 12,6 % by dry mass,

are substances of Class 1 (see marginal 2101, 4°, No 0340, or 22°, No 0342) or of Class 4.1 (see marginal 2401, 24°).

2. No substances of this Directive listed by name under other entries may be carried under the entry 1263 Paint or 1263 Paint related material. Substances carried under identification number 1263 may contain not more than 20 % nitrocellulose provided that the nitrogen content does not exceed 12,6 % by dry mass.

3. 3269 Polyester resin kits have two components: a basic product [Class 3, Group (b) or (c)], and an activator (organic peroxide), each packed separately in an inner packaging. The organic peroxide shall be of types D, E or F, not requiring temperature regulation and restricted to 125 ml liquid and 500 g solid per inner packaging. The components may be placed in the same outer packaging, provided that they do not react dangerously with each other in the event of leakage.

6° 3064 nitroglycerin solution in alcohol with more than 1 % but not more than 5 % nitroglycerin.

Note: Special packing conditions are applicable for this substance (see marginal 2303); see also Class 1, marginal 2101, 4°, identification number 0144.

7° (b) 1204 nitroglycerin solution in alcohol with not more than 1 % nitroglycerin.

B. Substances having a flashpoint below 23 °C and toxic

Notes: 1. Toxic substances having a flashpoint of 23 °C or above, and some substances listed by name in 1° to 10° of marginal 2601 are substances of Class 6.1.

2. For toxicity criteria, see marginal 2600.

11° Nitriles or isonitriles (isocyanides):

(a) 1093 acrylonitrile, inhibited, 3079 methacrylonitrile, inhibited, 3273 nitriles, flammable, toxic, n.o.s.;

(b) 2284 isobutyronitrile, 2378 2-dimethyl-aminoacetonitrile, 2404 propionitrile, 2411 butyronitrile, 3273 nitriles, flammable, toxic, n.o.s.

12° 1921 propyleneimine, inhibited.

Note: Special packing conditions are applicable for this substance (see marginal 2304).

13° 2481 Ethyl isocyanate.

Note: Special packing conditions are applicable for this substance (see marginal 2304).

14° Other isocyanates:

(a) 2483 isopropyl isocyanate, 2605 methoxymethyl isocyanate;

(b) 2486 isobutyl isocyanate, 2478 isocyanates, flammable, toxic, n.o.s., or 2478 isocyanates solution, flammable, toxic, n.o.s.

Note: Solutions of isocyanates having a flashpoint of not less than 23 °C are substances of Class 6.1 (see marginal 2601, 18° or 19°).

15° Other substances containing nitrogen:

(a) 1194 ethyl nitrite, solution.

16° Halogenated organic substances:

(a) 1099 allyl bromide, 1100 allyl chloride, 1991 chloroprene, inhibited;

(b) 1184 ethylene dichloride (1,2-dichloroethane), 2354 chloromethyl ethyl ether.

17° Oxygenated organic substances:

(a) 2336 allyl formate, 2983 ethylene oxide and propylene oxide mixture, with not more than 30 % ethylene oxide, 1986 alcohols, flammable, toxic, n.o.s., 1988 aldehydes, flammable, toxic, n.o.s.;

(b) 1230 methanol, 2333 allyl acetate, 2335 allyl ethyl ether, 2360 diallyl ether, 2396 methacrylaldehyde, inhibited, 2622 glycidaldehyde, 1986 alcohols, flammable, toxic, n.o.s., 1988 aldehydes, flammable, toxic, n.o.s.

18° Organic substances containing sulphur:

(a) 1131 carbon disulphide (carbon sulphide);

(b) 1228 mercaptans, liquid, flammable, toxic, n.o.s., or 1228 mercaptan mixture, liquid, flammable, toxic, n.o.s.

19° Substances, solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), having a flashpoint below 23 °C and toxic which cannot be classified under another collective heading:

(a) 1992 flammable liquid, toxic, n.o.s.;

(b) 2603 cycloheptatriene, 3248 medicine, liquid, flammable, toxic, n.o.s., 1992 flammable liquid, toxic, n.o.s.

Note: Pharmaceutical products ready for use, e.g. cosmetics, drugs and medicines, which are substances manufactured and packed in packagings of a type intended for retail sale or distribution for personal or household consumption, which would otherwise be substances of item 19° (b), are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

C. Substances having a flashpoint below 23 °C and corrosive

Notes: 1. Corrosive liquids having a flashpoint of 23 °C or above are substances of Class 8 (see marginal 2801).

2. Certain flammable corrosive liquids having a flashpoint below 23 °C and a boiling point above 35 °C are substances of Class 8 [see marginal 2800 (7) (a)].

3. For corrosivity criteria, see marginal 2800.

21° Chlorosilanes:

(a) 1250 methyltrichlorosilane, 1305 vinyltrichlorosilane, inhibited;

(b) 1162 dimethyldichlorosilane, 1196 ethyltrichlorosilane, 1298 trimethylchlorosilane, 2985 chlorosilanes, flammable, corrosive, n.o.s.

Note: Chlorosilanes which give off flammable gases on contact with water are substances of Class 4.3, 1° (a) [see marginal 2471, 1° (a)].

22° Amines and their solutions:

(a) 1221 isopropylamine, 1297 trimethylamine, aqueous solution containing 30 % to 50 % trimethylamine (by mass), 2733 amines, flammable, corrosive, n.o.s. or 2733 polyamines, flammable, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(b) 1106 amylamines (n-amylamine, tert-amylamine), 1125 n-butylamine, 1154 diethylamine, 1158 diisopropylamine, 1160 dimethylamine aqueous solution, 1214 isobutylamine, 1235 methylamine, aqueous solution, 1277 propylamine, 1296 triethylamine, 1297 trimethylamine, aqueous solution with not more than 30 % trimethylamine by mass, 2266 N,N-dimethylpropylamine (dimethyl-N-propylamine), 2270 ethylamine aqueous solution with not less than 50 % but not more than 70 % ethylamine (by mass), 2379 1, 3- dimethylbutylamine, 2383 dipropylamine, 2945 N-methylbutylamine, 2733 amines, flammable, corrosive, n.o.s. or 2733 polyamines, flammable, corrosive, n.o.s.

Note: Anhydrous dimethylamine, ethylamine, methylamine and trimethylamine are substances of Class 2 [see marginal 2201, 3° (bt)].

23° Other substances containing nitrogen:

(b) 1922 pyrrolidine, 2386 1-ethylpiperidine, 2399 1-methylpiperidine, 2401 piperidine, 2493 hexamethyleneimine, 2535 4-methylmorpholine (N-methylmorpholine).

24° Solutions of alcoholates:

(b) 1289 sodium methylate solution in alcohol, 3274 alcoholates solution, n.o.s. in alcohol.

25° Other halogenated corrosive substances:

(b) 1717 acetyl chloride, 1723 allyl iodide, 1815 propionyl chloride, 2353 butyryl chloride, 2395 isobutyryl chloride.

26° Substances, solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) having a flashpoint below 23 °C and highly corrosive, corrosive or slightly corrosive which cannot be classified under another collective heading:

(a) 2924 flammable liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(b) 2924 flammable liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.

D. Substances having a flashpoint below 23 °C, toxic and corrosive

and articles containing those substances

27° (a) 3286 flammable liquid, toxic, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(b) 2359 diallylamine, 3286 flammable liquid, toxic, corrosive, n.o.s.

28° 3165 aircraft hydraulic power unit fuel tank containing a mixture of anhydrous hydrazine and methylhydrazine.

Note: Special packing conditions are applicable for these tanks (see marginal 2309).

E. Substances having a flashpoint between 23 °C and 61 °C inclusive

which might be slightly toxic or slightly corrosive

Note: Non-toxic and non-corrosive solutions and homogeneous mixtures having a flashpoint of 23 °C or above (viscous substances, such as paints or varnishes, excluding substances containing more than 20 % nitrocellulose) packed in receptacles of less than 450 litres capacity, are subject only to the requirements of marginal 2314 if, in the solvent-separation test, as described in footnote (¹) to 5°, the height of the separated layer of solvent is less than 3 % of the total height, and if the substances at 23 °C have, in the flow cup conforming to ISO 2431:1984 having a jet 6 mm in diameter, a flow time of:

(a) not less than 60 seconds, or

(b) not less than 40 seconds and contain not more than 60 % of substances of Class 3.

31° Substances, solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) having a flashpoint between 23 °C and 61 °C inclusive, not slightly toxic and not slightly corrosive:

(c) 1202 diesel fuel or 1202 gasoil or 1202 heating oil (light), 1223 kerosene, 1267 petroleum crude oil, 1863 fuel, aviation, turbine engine, 1268 petroleum distillates, n.o.s. or 1268 petroleum products, n.o.s.

Note: By derogation from marginal 2300 (2), diesel fuel, gasoil and heating oil (light) having a flashpoint above 61 °C shall be deemed substances of 31° (c), substance identification number 1202.

Hydrocarbons:

1136 coal tar distillates, 1147 decahydronaphthalene (decalin), 1288 shale oil, 1299 turpentine, 1300 turpentine substitute (white spirit), 1307 xylenes (m-xylene, p-xylene, dimethylbenzenes), 1918 isopropylbenzene (cumene), 1920 nonanes, 1999 tars, liquid including road asphalt and oils, bitumen and cut backs, 2046 cymenes (o-,m-,p-) (methyl isopropyl benzenes), 2048 dicyclopentadiene, 2049 diethyl benzenes (o-,m-,p-), 2052 dipentene (limonene), 2055 styrene monomer, inhibited (vinylbenzene monomer inhibited), 2057 tripropylene (propylene trimer), 2247 n-decane, 2286 pentamethylheptane (isododecane), 2303 isopropenylbenzene, 2324 triisobutylene, 2325 1,3,5-trimethylbenzene (mesitylene), 2330 undecane, 2364 n-propylbenzene, 2368 alpha-pinene, 2520 cyclooctadienes, 2541 terpinolene, 2618 vinyltoluenes, inhibited (o-,m-,p-),2709 butylbenzenes, 2850 propylene tetramer (tetrapropylene), 2319 terpene hydrocarbons, n.o.s., 3295 hydrocarbons, liquid, n.o.s.;

Halogenated substances:

1134 chlorobenzene (phenyl chloride), 1152 dichloropentanes, 2047 dichloropropenes, 2234 chlorobenzotrifluorides (o-,m-,p-), 2238 chlorotoluenes (o-,m-,p-), 2341 1-bromo-3-methylbutane, 2392 iodopropanes, 2514 bromobenzene, 2711 m-dibromobenzene;

Alcohols:

1105 amyl alcohols, 1120 butanols, 1148 diacetone alcohol chemically pure, 1170 ethanol solution (ethyl alcohol solution) containing more than 24 % and not more than 70 % alcohol, 1171 ethylene glycol monoethyl ether (2-ethoxyethanol), 1188 ethylene glycol monomethyl ether (2-methoxyethanol), 1212 isobutanol (isobutyl alcohol), 1274 n-propanol, (propyl alcohol, normal), 2053 methyl isobutyl carbinol (methyl amyl alcohol), 2244 cyclopentanol, 2275 2-ethylbutanol, 2282 hexanols, 2560 2-methylpentan-2-ol, 2614 methallyl alcohol, 2617 methylcyclohexanols, flammable, 2686 diethylaminoethanol, 3065 alcoholic beverages containing not more than 24 % and not more than 70 % alcohol by volume, 3092 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 1987 alcohols, flammable, n.o.s.;

Notes: 1. Aqueous solutions of ethyl alcohol and alcoholic beverages containing not more than 24 % alcohol by volume are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

2. Alcoholic beverages containing more than 24 % and not more than 70 % alcohol by volume are subject to the provisions of this Directive only if carried in receptacles with a capacity of more than 250 litres or in tank-vehicles, tank-containers or demountable tanks.

Ethers:

1149 dibutyl ethers, 1153 ethylene glycol diethyl ether (1, 2-diethoxyethane), 2219 allyl glycidyl ether, 2222 anisole (phenyl methyl ether), 2707 dimethyldioxanes, 2752 1,2-epoxy-3-ethoxypropane, 3271 ethers, n.o.s.;

Aldehydes:

1191 octyl aldehydes (ethylhexaldehydes) (2-ethylhexaldehyde) (3-ethylhexaldehyde), 1199 furfural (furfuraldehyde), 1207 hexaldehyde, 1264 paraldehyde, 2498 1,2,3,6-tetrahydrobenzaldehyde, 2607 acrolein dimer, stabilized, 3056 n-heptaldehyde, 1989 aldehydes, flammable, n.o.s.;

Ketones:

1110 n-amyl methyl ketone, 1157 diisobutyl ketone, 1229 mesityl oxide, 1915 cyclohexanone, 2245 cyclopentanone, 2271 ethyl amyl ketones,2293 4-methoxy-4 methylpentan-2-one, 2297 methylcyclohexanones, 2302 5-methylhexan-2-one, 2310 pentan-2,4-dione (acetylacetone), 2621 acetyl methyl carbinol, 2710 dipropyl ketone, 1224 ketones, n.o.s.;

Esters:

1104 amyl acetates, 1109 amyl formates, 1123 butyl acetates, 1172 ethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (2-ethoxyethyl acetate), 1177 ethylbutyl acetate, 1180 ethyl butyrate, 1189 ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 1192 ethyl lactate, 1233 methylamyl acetate, 1292 tetraethyl silicate, 1914 n-butyl propionate, 2227 n-butyl methacrylate, inhibited, 2243 cyclohexyl acetate, 2283 isobutyl methacrylate, inhibited, 2323 triethyl phosphite, 2329 trimethyl phosphite, 2348 n-butyl acrylate inhibited, 2366 diethyl carbonate (ethyl carbonate), 2405 isopropyl butyrate, 2413 tetrapropyl orthotitanate, 2524 ethyl orthoformate, 2527 isobutyl acrylate inhibited, 2528 isobutyl isobutyrate, 2616 triisopropyl borate, 2620 amyl butyrates, 2708 butoxyl (3-methoxy-1-acetoxybutane), 2933 methyl 2-chloropropionate, 2934 isopropyl 2-chloropropionate, 2935 ethyl 2-chloropropionate, 2947 isopropyl chloroacetate, 3272 esters, n.o.s;

Substances containing nitrogen:

1112 amyl nitrates, 2054 morpholine, 2265 N,N-dimethylformamide, 2313 picolines (methylpyridines) 2332 acetaldehyde oxime, 2351 butyl nitrites, 2608 nitropropanes, 2840 butyraldoxime, 2842 nitroethane,2906 triisocyanatoisocyanurate of isophoronediisocyanate, solution (70 % by mass), 2943 tetrahydrofurfurylamine;

Substances containing sulphur:

3054 cyclohexyl mercaptan;

Other flammable substances, mixtures and preparations containing flammable liquids:

1130 camphor oil, 1133 adhesives, 1139 coating solution, 1169 extracts, aromatic, liquid, 1197 extracts, flavouring, liquid, 1201 fusel oil, 1210 printing ink, 1263 paint (including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base) or 1263 paint related material (including paint thinning or reducing compound), 1266 perfumery products, 1272 pine oil, 1286 rosin oil, 1287 rubber solution, 1293 tinctures, medicinal, 1306 wood preservatives, liquid, 1308 zirconium suspended in a flammable liquid, 1866 resin solution, 3269 polyester resin kits, 1993 flammable liquid, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. Mixtures containing more than 20 % but not more than 55 % nitrocellullose with a nitrogen content not exceeding 12,6 % (by dry mass) are substances of 34° (c).

2. For 3269 polyester resin kits, see 5° note 3.

32° Substances, solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) having a flashpoint between 23 °C and 61 °C inclusive, slightly toxic:

(c) 2841 di-n-amylamine, 1228 mercaptans, liquid, flammable, toxic, n.o.s. or 1228 mercaptan mixture, liquid, flammable, toxic, n.o.s., 1986. alcohols flammable, toxic, n.o.s., 1988 aldehydes flammable, toxic, n.o.s., 2478 isocyanates, flammable, toxic, n.o.s. or 2478 isocyanate solution, flammable, toxic, n.o.s., 3248 medicine, liquid, flammable, toxic, n.o.s., 1992 flammable, liquid, toxic, n.o.s.

Note: Pharmaceutical products ready for use, e.g. cosmetics, drugs and medicines, which are substances manufactured and packed in packagings of a type intended for retail sale or distribution for personal or household consumption, which would otherwise be substances of 32° (c) are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

33° Substances, solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) having a flashpoint between 23 °C and 61 °C inclusive, slightly corrosive:

(c) 1106 amylamine (sec-amylamine), 1198 formaldehyde solution, flammable, 1289 sodium methylate solution in alcohol, 1297 trimethylamine, aqueous solution (not more than 30 % trimethylamine, by mass), 2260 tripropylamine, 2276 2-ethylhexylamine, 2361 diisobutylamine, 2526 furfurylamine, 2529 isobutyric acid, 2530 isobutyric anhydride, 2610 triallylamine, 2684 diethylaminopropylamine, 2733 amines, flammable, corrosive, n.o.s. or 2733 polyamines, flammable, corrosive, n.o.s., 2924 flammable liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.

34° Solutions of nitrocellulose in mixtures of substances of 31° (c) containing more than 20 % but not more than 55 % nitrocellulose with a nitrogen content not exceeding 12.6 % (by dry mass):

(c) 2059 nitrocellulose solution, flammable.

Note: Mixtures containing more than 55 % nitrocellulose, whatever its nitrogen content, or containing not more than 55 % nitrocellulose with a nitrogen content above 12.6 % (by dry mass), are substances of Class 1 (see marginal 2101, 4°, identification number 0340 or 26°, identification number 0342) or of Class 4.1 (see marginal 2401, 24°).

F. Substances and preparations used as pesticides having a flashpoint below 23 °C

Notes: 1. Flammable liquid substances and preparation, used as pesticides, which are highly toxic, toxic or slightly toxic and have a flashpoint of 23 °C or above are substances of Class 6.1 (see marginal 2601, 71° to 87°).

2. In the tables, pesticides are subdivided into items 41° to 57° as follows:

- highly toxic substances and preparations

- toxic substances and preparations

- slightly toxic substances and preparations.

3. All active substances and their preparations used as pesticides shall be classified under 41° to 57° highly toxic, toxic and slightly toxic in accordance with marginal 2600 (3).

4. If only the LD50 value of the active substance is known and not that of the preparations of the active substance, the preparations may be classified under 41° to 57° highly toxic, toxic and harmful using the following tables, where the figures shown in columns 'highly toxic`, 'toxic` and 'slightly toxic` of 41° to 57° represent the percentage of active pesticide substance in the preparations.

5. For substances which are not named in the list, and for which only the LD50 value of the active substance is known and not the LD50 values of the various preparations, the classification of a preparation may be determined from the table in marginal 2600(3), using an LD50 value obtained by multiplying the LD50 value of the active substance by 100, × being the percentage of active substance by mass according to the following formula:

LD50 value of the active substance × 100

LD50 value = ------------------

percentage of active substance by mass

6. The classification according to notes 4 and 5 above shall not be used when the preparations contain additives which affect the toxicity of the active substance or when a preparation contains more than one active substance. In such cases the classification shall be based on the LD50 value of the preparation in question according to the criteria in marginal 2600 (3). If the LD50 value is not known, the substance shall be classified under highly toxic of 41° to 57°.

41° 2784 organophosphorus pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic; such as:

>TABLE>

42° 2762 organochlorine pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

43° 2766 phenoxy pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

44° 2758 carbamate pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

45° 2778 mercury based pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

46° 2787 organotin pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or slightly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

47° 3024 coumarin derivative pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

48° 2782 bipyridilium pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

49° 2760 arsenical pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

50° 2776 copper based pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

51° 2780 substituted nitrophenol pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

52° 2764 triazine pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

53° 2770 benzoic derivative pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

54° 2774 phthalimide derivative pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

55° 2768 phenyl urea pesticides, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

56° 2772 dithiocarbamate pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

such as:

>TABLE>

57° 3021 pesticide, liquid, flammable, toxic, n.o.s., flashpoint less than 23 °C

(a) having a boiling point or initial boiling point not exceeding 35 °C and/or highly toxic;

(b) having a boiling point or initial boiling point exceeding 35 °C and toxic or slightly toxic;

Nitrogenated organic compounds, such as:

>TABLE>

Alkaloids, such as:

>TABLE>

Other organo-metallic compounds, such as:

>TABLE>

Inorganic compounds of fluorine, such as:

>TABLE>

Inorganic compounds of thallium, such as:

>TABLE>

Other pesticides, such as:

>TABLE>

Pyrethrinoids, such as:

>TABLE>

G. Substances having a flashpoint above 61 °C which are carried or handed

over for carriage at or above their flashpoint

61° (c) 3256 elevated temperature liquid, flammable, n.o.s., with a flashpoint above 61 °C, at or above its flashpoint.

H. Empty packagings

71° Empty packagings including empty intermediate bulk containers, (IBCs), empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks, empty tank-containers, uncleaned having contained substances of Class 3.

2301a Neither the provisions for this Class contained in this Annex nor those contained in Annex B are applicable to:

(1) Substances of 1° to 5°, 21° to 26° and 31° to 34° and slightly toxic substances of 41° to 57° carried in conformity with the following provisions:

(a) Substances classified under (a) of each item: not more than 500 ml per iner packaging and not more than 1 litre per package;

(b) Substances classified under (b) of each item except 5° (b) and alcoholic beverages of 3° (b): not more than 3 litres per inner packaging and not more than 12 litres per package;

(c) Alcoholic beverages of 3° (b): not more than 5 litres per inner packaging;

(d) Substances classified under 5° (b): not more than 5 litres per inner packaging and not more than 20 litres per package;

(e) Substances classified under (c) of each item: not more than 5 litres per inner packaging and not more than 45 litres per package.

These quantities of substances shall be carried in combination packagings conforming at least to the conditions of marginal 3538.

The 'General conditions of packing` of marginal 3500 (1), (2) and (5) to (7) shall be observed.

Note: In the case of homogeneous mixtures containing water, the quantities specified relate only to the substance of this Class contained in those mixtures.

(2) Alcoholic beverages of 31° (c) in packagings containing not more than 250 litres.

(3) The motor-fuel contained in the tanks of transport vehicles for their propulsion or the operation of their specialized equipment (refrigerators, for example). The fuel cocks between the engine and the fuel tank of motor cycles and motor-assisted pedal cycles whose tanks contain fuel, shall be closed during transport; in addition, these motor cycles and motor-assisted pedal cycles shall be loaded upright and secured against falling.

2. Provisions

A. Packages

1. General conditions of packing

2302 (1) Packagings shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.5, unless special conditions for the packing of certain substances are prescribed in marginals 2303 to 2310.

(2) Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.6.

(3) In accordance with the provisions of marginals 2300 (3) and 3511 (2) or 3611 (2) the following shall be used:

- packagings of packing group I, marked with the letter 'X`, for the very dangerous substances classified under the letter (a) of each item;

- packagings of packing group II or I, marked with the letter 'Y`, or 'X`, or IBCs of packing group II, marked with the letter 'Y`, for the dangerous substances classified under the letter (b) of each item;

- packagings of packing group III, II or I, marked with the letter 'Z`, 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs of packing group III or II, marked with the letter 'Z` or 'Y`, for the less dangerous substances classified under the letter (c) of each item.

Note: For the carriage of substances of Class 3 in tank-vehicles, demountable tanks or tank-containers, see Annex B.

2. Special conditions for packing of certain substances

2303 Nitroglycerine, solution in alcohol, of 6° shall be packed in metal cans of not more than 1 litre capacity each, overpacked in a wooden box capable of containing not more than 5 litres of solution. Metal cans shall be completely surrounded with absorbent cushioning material. Wooden boxes shall be completely lined with suitable material impervious to water and nitroglycerine.

Packages of this kind shall satisfy the test requirements for combination packagings in accordance with Appendix A.5 for packing group II.

2304 (1) Propyleneimine of 12° shall be packed:

(a) in steel receptacles of sufficient thickness, which shall be closed by a screw-threaded bung or plug rendered leakproof both to liquid and to vapour by means of a suitable gasket. The receptacles shall initially and periodically, at least every five years, be tested at a pressure of not less than 0,3 MPa (3 bar) gauge pressure in accordance with marginals 2215 (1) and 2216. Each receptacle shall be secured by absorbent cushioning materials in a strong leakproof protective metal packaging. The protective packaging shall be hermetically closed and its closure shall be secured against any inadvertent opening. The mass of the contents shall not exceed 0,67 kg per litre of capacity. A package shall not weigh more than 75 kg. Packages weighing more than 30 kg, other than those forwarded as a full load, shall be fitted with means of handling; or

(b) in steel receptacles of sufficient thickness, which shall be closed by a screw-threaded bung and a screw-threaded protective cap or equivalent device leakproof both to liquid and to vapour. The receptacles shall initially and periodically, at least every five years, be tested at a pressure of at least 1 MPa (10 bar) gauge pressure in accordance with marginals 2215 (1) and 2216. The mass of the contents shall not exceed 0,67 kg per litre of capacity. A package shall not weigh more than 75 kg.

(c) Receptacles in conformity with (a) and (b) shall bear, in clearly legible and durable characters:

- the name or mark of the manufacturer and the number of the receptacle;

- the word 'propyleneimine`;

- the tare of the receptacle and its maximum permitted mass when filled;

- the date (month and year) of the initial test and of the most recent test undergone;

- the stamp of the expert who carried out the tests and examinations.

(2) Ethyl isocyanate of 13° shall be packed:

(a) in hermetically closed receptacles made of pure aluminium and having a capacity not exceeding 1 litre, which shall not be filled beyond 90 % of their capacity. The receptacles shall be secured, not more than 10 to a box, with appropriate cushioning material in a wooden box. Packages of this kind shall satisfy the test requirements for combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538 for packing group I, and shall not weigh more than 30 kg; or

(b) in receptacles made of pure aluminium having a wall thickness of not less than 5 mm or in receptacles of stainless steel. The receptacles shall be fully welded and shall initially and periodically, at least every five years, be tested at a pressure of at least 0,5 MPa (5 bar) gauge pressure in accordance with marginals 2215 (1) and 2216. They shall be so closed as to be leakproof by means of two closures one above the other, one of which shall be screw-threaded or secured in an equally effective manner. The degree of filling shall be not more than 90 %.

Drums weighing more than 100 kg shall be fitted with rolling hoops or stiffening ribs;

(c) Receptacles in conformity with (b) shall bear, in clearly legible and durable characters:

- the name or mark of the manufacturer and the number of the receptacle;

- the words 'ethyl isocyanate`;

- the tare of the receptacle and its maximum permitted mass when filled;

- the date (month and year) of the initial test and of the most recent test undergone;

- the stamp of the expert who carried out the tests and examinations.

2305 Substances classified under (a) of the various items shall be packed:

(a) in non-removable head steel drums conforming to marginal 3520; or

(b) in non-removable head aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521; or

(c) in non-removable head steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522; or

(d) in non-removable head plastics drums of a capacity not exceeding 60 litres or nonremovable head plastics jerricans conforming to marginal 3526; or

(e) in composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537; or

(f) in combination packagings with inner packagings of glass, plastics material or metal conforming to marginal 3538.

2306 (1) Substances classified under (b) of the various items shall be packed:

(a) in steel drums conforming to marginal 3520; or

(b) in aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521; or

(c) in steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522; or

(d) in plastics drums or jerricans conforming to marginal 3526; or

(e) in composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537; or

(f) in combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538.

Note 1 to (a), (b), (c) and (d): Nitromethane of 3° (b) shall not be carried in removable head packagings.

Note 2 to (a), (b), (c) and (d): Simplified conditions are applicable to removable-head drums or jerricans for viscous substances having a viscosity above 200 mm2/s at 23 °C (see marginals 3512, 3553, 3554 and 3560).

(2) Substances classified under (b) of 3°, 15°, 17°, 22°, 24° and 25° as well as the slightly toxic substances classified under (b) of 41° to 57° may also be packed in composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539.

(3) Substances classified under (b) of the various items with the exception of nitromethane of 3° (b) which have a vapour pressure at 50 °C of not more than 110 kPa (1.10 bar) may also be packed in metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622, in rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624 or in composite IBCs with rigid plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625.

2307 (1) Substances classified under (c) of the various items shall be packed:

(a) in steel drums conforming to marginal 3520; or

(b) in aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521; or

(c) in steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522; or

(d) in plastics drums or jerricans conforming to marginal 3526; or

(e) in composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537; or

(f) in combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538; or

(g) in composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539.

Note to (a), (b), (c) and d): Simplified conditions are applicable to removable-head drums and jerricans for viscous substances having a viscosity of more than 200 mm2/s at 23 °C (see marginals 3512, 3553, 3554 and 3560).

(2) Substances classified under (c) of the various items may also be packed in metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622, in rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624 or in composite IBCs with rigid plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625.

2308 (1) Ethyl alcohol and its aqueous solutions and alcoholic beverages of 3° (b) and 31° (c) may also be packed in bung-type wooden barrels conforming to marginal 3524.

(2) Alcoholic beverages containing more than 24 % alcohol but not more than 70 % by volume, when transported as part of the manufacturing process, may be transported in wooden casks with a capacity of not more than 500 litres, deviating from the provisions of Appendix A.5 on the following conditions:

(a) the casks shall be checked and tightened before filling;

(b) sufficient ullage (not less than 3 %) shall be left to allow for the expansion of the liquid;

(c) the casks shall be transported with the bungholes pointing upwards and,

(d) the casks shall be transported in containers meeting the requirements of the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC), () as amended. Each cask shall be secured in custom made cradles and be wedged by appropriate means to prevent them from being displaced in any way during transport.

(3) Substances of 3° (b), 4° (b), 5° (b) and (c), 31° (c), 32° (c), 33° (c), 34° (c) and the slightly toxic substances classified under (b) of 41° to 57° may also be packed in light gauge metal packagings conforming to marginal 3540. Simplified conditions are applicable to removable-head light gauge metal packagings for viscous substances having a viscosity of more than 200 mm2/s at 23 °C and for substances of 5° (c). (See marginals 3512 and 3552 to 3554).

Note: Nitromethane of 3° (b) shall not be carried in removable-head packagings.

(4) The following substances: 1133 adhesives, 1210 printing ink, 1263 paint, 1263 paint-related material, 1866 resin solution and 3269 polyester resin kit of 5° (b), 5° (c) and 31° (c) may be carried in quantities not exceeding 5 litres in metal or plastics packagings meeting only the requirements of marginal 3500 (1), (2) and (5) to (7), provided the packagings are secured on pallets by straps, by shrink or stretch-wrapping or by other suitable means, or provided the packagings are inner packagings of a combination packaging with a maximum total gross mass of 40 kg. The information in the transport document shall conform to marginal 2314 (1) and (3).

2309 Aircraft hydraulic power unit fuel tanks of 28° are admitted subject to either of the following conditions.

(a) the unit shall consist of an aluminium pressure vessel made from tubing and having welded heads. Primary containment of the fuel within this vessel shall consist of a welded aluminium bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 litres. The outer vessel shall have a minimum design gauge pressure of 1,275 kPa and a minimum burst gauge pressure of 2,755 kPa. Each vessel shall be leak-checked during manufacture and before shipment and shall be found leakproof. The complete inner unit shall be securely packed in non-combustible cushioning material, such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which shall adequately protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per unit and package is 42 litres; or

(b) the unit shall consist of an aluminium pressure vessel. Primary containment of the fuel within this vessel shall consist of a welded hermetically sealed fuel compartment with an elastomeric bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 litres. The pressure vessel shall have a minimum design gauge pressure of 2,860 kPa and a minimum burst gauge pressure of 5,170 kPa. Each vessel shall be leak-checked during manufacture and before shipment and shall be found leakproof. The complete inner unit shall be securely packed in non-combustible cushioning material, such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which shall adequately protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per unit and package is 42 litres.

2310 Receptacles or IBCs, containing preparations of 31° (c), 32° (c), and 33° (c), which give off small quantities of carbon dioxide and/or nitrogen, shall be vented, in accordance with marginals 3500 (8) or 3601 (6).

3. Mixed packing

2311 (1) Substances covered by the same item number may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538.

(2) Substances or articles of different items of this Class in quantities not exceeding 5 litres per inner packaging, may be packed together and/or with goods not subject to the provisions of this Directive in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538, provided they do not react dangerously with one another.

(3) Substances of 6°, 7°, 12° and 13° shall not be packed with other goods.

(4) Substances classified under (a) of the various items shall not be packed together with substances and articles of classes 1 and 5.2 (other than hardeners and compound systems) and material of class 7.

(5) Except as otherwise specially provided, substances classified under (a) of the various items, in quantities not exceeding 0,5 litre per inner packaging and 1 litre per package, and substances classified under (b) or (c) of the the various items, in quantities not exceeding 5 litres per inner packaging may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538 with substances or articles of other classes, provided that mixed packing is also permitted for substances or articles of these classes, and/or with goods which are not subject to the provisions of this Directive, provided they do not react dangerously with one another.

(6) The following are considered dangerous reactions:

(a) combustion and/or giving off considerable heat;

(b) emission of flammable and/or toxic gases;

(c) formation of corrosive liquids;

(d) formation of unstable substances.

(7) The mixed packing of acid substances with basic substances in a package shall not be permitted if the two substances are packed in fragile receptacles.

(8) The provisions of marginals 2001 (7), 2002 (6) and (7) and 2302 shall be complied with.

(9) If wooden or fibreboard boxes are used, a package shall not weigh more than 100 kg.

4. Marking and danger labels on packages (see Appendix A9)

Marking

2312 (1) Each package shall be clearly marked with the identification number of the goods to be entered in the transport document, preceded by the letters 'UN`.

Danger labels

(2) Packages containing substances or articles of this Class shall bear a label conforming to model No 3.

(3) Packages containing substances of 11° to 19°, 32° and 41° to 57° shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 6.1.

(4) Packages containing substances of 21° to 26° and 33° shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 8.

(5) Packages containing substances or articles of 27° and 28° shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 6.1 and a label conforming to model No 8.

(6) Packages containing fragile receptacles not visible from the outside shall in addition bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 12.

(7) Packages containing receptacles, the closures of which are not visible from the outside and packages containing vented receptacles or vented receptacles without outer packaging shall in addition bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 11.

2313

B. Particulars in the transport document

2314 (1) The description of the goods in the transport document shall conform to one of the identification numbers and names printed in italics in marginal 2301.

If the substance is not mentioned by name, but is assigned to an n.o.s. entry, or to another collective entry the description of the goods shall consist of the identification number and the n.o.s. designation or the collective entry designation, followed by the chemical or technical name. ()

The description of the goods shall be followed by particulars of the class, the item number, if applicable, the letter, and the initials 'ADR` (or 'RID`), (e.g. '3, 1° (a), ADR`).

For substances and preparations of 41° to 57°, the name shall be entered for the most dangerous component, both of the pesticide element () and of the flammable liquid element (e.g 'parathion in hexane`).

For the carriage of wastes (see marginal 2000 (5)), the description of the goods shall be: 'Waste containing `, the component(s) used for the classification of the waste under marginal 2002 (8) to be entered under its/their chemical name(s), e.g. 'Waste, containing 1230 methanol, 3, 17° (b)`.

For the carriage of solutions or mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) containing several components subject to the provisions of this Directive, it will not in general be necessary to refer to more than two components which most predominantly contribute to the danger or dangers of the solutions and mixtures.

For the carriage of solutions or mixtures containing only one component subject to the provisions of this Directive, the words 'solution` or 'mixture` should be added as part of the name in the transport document [see marginal 2002 (8)].

If a solution or mixture specifically named or containing a specifically named substance is not subject to the conditions of this Class in accordance with marginal 2300 (5), the consignor may enter in the transport document: 'Not goods of Class 3`.

(2) For consignments in accordance with the Note under E of marginal 2301, the consignor shall enter in the transport document 'Transport in accordance with note under E of marginal 2301`.

(3) For consignments in accordance with marginal 2308 (4), the consignor shall enter in the transport document 'Transport in accordance with marginal 2308 (4)`.

2315-

2321

C. Empty packagings

2322 (1) Empty packagings, including empty IBCs, uncleaned, of 71°, shall be closed in the same way and with the same degree of leakproofness as if they were full.

(2) Empty packagings, including empty IBCs, uncleaned, of 71°, shall bear the same danger labels as if they were full.

(3) The description in the transport document shall conform to one of the names printed in italics in 71°, e.g. 'Empty packaging 3, 71°, ADR`.

In the case of empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks and empty tank-containers, uncleaned, this description shall be completed by adding the words 'Last load`, together with the name and item number of the goods last loaded, e.g. 'Last load 1089 acetaldehyde, 1° (a)`.

2323-

2324

D. Transitional measures

2325 Substances of class 3 may be carried until 30 June 1995 in accordance with the requirements for class 3 applicable until 31 December 1994. The transport document shall, in such cases, bear the inscription 'Carriage in accordance with the ADR in force before 1 January 1995`.

2326-

2399

CLASS 4.1 FLAMMABLE SOLIDS

1. List of substances

2400 (1) Among the substances and articles covered by the title of Class 4.1, those which are listed in marginal 2401 or are covered by a collective entry in that marginal are subject to the conditions set out in marginals 2400 (2) to 2422 and to the provisions of this Annex and of Annex B. They are then considered as substances and articles of this Directive.

Note: For the quantities of substances listed in marginal 2401 which are not subject to the provisions for this Class, either in this Annex or in Annex B, see marginal 2401a.

(2) The title of Class 4.1 covers substances and articles which have a melting-point greater than 20 °C or are pasty, according to the criteria of the penetrometer test (see Appendix A.3, marginal 3310) or are not liquid according to the ASTM D 4359-90 test method, or which are selfreactive liquids. The following are assigned to Class 4.1:

- readily flammable solid substances and articles, and those which can be ignited by flying sparks or can cause fire through friction;

- self-reactive substances which (at normal or elevated temperatures), are liable to undergo strongly exothermal decomposition caused by excessively high carriage temperatures or by contact with impurities;

- substances related to self-reactive substances, which are distinguished from the latter by having a self-accelerating decomposition temperature greater that 75 °C, and are liable to undergo a strongly exothermic decomposition and may, in certain packagings, meet the criteria for explosive substances of Class 1;

- explosives, which are wetted with such a quantity of water or alcohol or which contain such a quantity of plasticizing or inerting agent, that their explosive properties are neutralized.

Notes: 1. Self-reactive substances and formulations of self-reactive substances are not considered to be self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 if:

- they are explosives according to the criteria of Class 1;

- they are oxidizing substances according to the assignment procedure of Class 5.1;

- they are organic peroxides according to the criteria of Class 5.2;

- their heat of decomposition is less than 300 J/g;

- their self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) is greater than 75 °C for a 50 kg package;

- tests have proved that they are exempted as type G [see Appendix A.1, marginal 3104 (2) (g)].

2. The heat of decomposition can be determined using any internationally recognized method e.g. Differential Scanning Calorimetry and adiabatic calorimetry.

3. The self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) is the lowest temperature at which self-accelerating decomposition may occur with a substance in the packaging as used during carriage. Requirements for the determination of the SADT are given in Appendix A.1, marginal 3103.

(3) The substances and articles of Class 4.1 are subdivided as follows:

A. Solid organic flammable substances and articles

B. Solid inorganic flammable substances and articles

C. Explosive substances in non-explosive state

D. Substances related to self-reactive substances

E. Self-reactive substances not requiring temperature control

F. Self-reactive substances requiring temperature control

G. Empty packagings

Substances and articles of Class 4.1, with the exception of substances of 5° and 15°, classified under the various items of marginal 2401, shall be assigned to one of the following groups designated by the letter (a), (b) or (c) according to their degree of danger:

(a) very dangerous

(b) dangerous

(c) less dangerous

All solid substances, normally wetted, which, if in the dry state, would be classified as explosives, are assigned to letter (a) of the various items.

Self-reactive substances are assigned to letter (b) of the various items.

Substances related to self-reactive substances are assigned to letters (b) or (c) of the various items.

(4) The assignment of substances and articles not specifically named to 3° to 8° of marginal 2401, as well as within these items to the letters, can be based on experience or on the results of the test procedures in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3320 and 3321. Assignment to 11° to 14°, 16° and 17° as well as within these items to the letters, shall be based on the results of the test procedure in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3320 and 3321; experience shall also be taken into account when it leads to a more strictly-based assignment.

(5) When substances or articles not specifically named are assigned to the items of marginal 2401 on the basis of the test procedures in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3320 and 3321, the following criteria apply:

(a) Readily flammable powdery, granular or pasty substances of 1°, 4°, 6° to 8°, 11°, 12°, 14°, 16° and 17°, shall be assigned to Class 4.1 if they can be easily ignited by brief contact with an ignition source (e.g a burning match), or if, in the event of ignition, the flame spreads rapidly, the combustion time is less than 45 seconds for a measured distance of 100 mm or the speed of combustion is greater than 2,2 mm/s.

(b) Metal powders or powders of metal alloys of 13° shall be assigned to Class 4.1 if they can be ignited by a flame and the reaction spreads over the whole sample in less than 10 minutes.

(6) When substances and articles not specifically named are assigned to the letters of the items of marginal 2401 on the basis of test procedures in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3320 and 3321, the following criteria apply:

(a) Flammable solids of 4°, 6° to 8°, 11°, 12°, 14°, 16° and 17°, which, when tested, have a combustion time of less than 45 seconds over a measured distance of 100 mm shall be assigned to:

(i) letter (b) if the flame passes the wetted zone;

(ii) letter (c) if the wetted zone stops the flame for at least four minutes;

(b) Metal powders or powders of metal alloys of 13° in which, when tested, the reaction:

(i) spreads over the whole length of the sample in five minutes or less, shall be assigned to letter (b);

(ii) spreads over the whole length of the sample in more than five minutes shall be assigned to letter (c).

(7) If substances of Class 4.1, as a result of admixtures, come into different categories of risk from those to which the substances of marginal 2401 belong, these mixtures shall be assigned to the items and letters to which they belong on the basis of their actual degree of danger.

Note: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) see also marginal 2002 (8).

(8) When substances and articles are specifically named under more than one letter of the same item of marginal 2401, the relevant letter may be determined on the basis of the results of the test procedures in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3320 and 3321 and the criteria set out in (6).

(9) On the basis of the test procedures in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3320 and 3321 and the criteria set out in (6), it may also be determined whether the nature of a specifically named substance is such that the substance is not subject to the provisions for this Class (see marginal 2414).

(10) The chemically unstable substances of Class 4.1 are to be accepted for carriage only if the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition or polymerization during carriage. To this end, it shall in particular be ensured that receptacles do not contain any substance liable to promote these reactions.

(11) Flammable solids, oxidizing, assigned to identification number 3097 of the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, are not to be accepted for carriage (see, however, marginal 2002 (8), footnote (¹) to the table in paragraph 2.3.1).

Self-reactive substances

(12) The decomposition of self-reactive substances can be initiated by heat, contact with catalytic impurities (e.g. acids, heavy-metal compounds, bases), friction or impact. The rate of decomposition increases with temperature and varies with the substance. Decomposition, particularly if no ignition occurs, may result in the evolution of toxic gases or vapours. For certain self-reactive substances, the temperature should be controlled. Some self-reactive substances may decompose explosively, particularly if confined.

This characteristic may be modified by the addition of diluents or by the use of appropriate packagings. Some self-reactive substances burn vigorously. Self-reactive substances are, for example, some compounds of the types listed below:

aliphatic azo compounds (-C-N=N-C-);

organic azides (-C-N3);

diazonium salts (-CN2+ Z P);

N-nitroso compounds (-N-N=O); and

aromatic sulphohydrazides (-SO2-NH-NH2).

This list is not exhaustive and substances with other reactive groups and some mixtures of substances may have similar properties.

(13) Self-reactive substances are classified into seven types according to the degree of danger. The principles to be applied to the classification of substances not listed in marginal 2401 are set out in Appendix A.1, marginal 3104. The types of self-reactive substance range from type A, which is not accepted for carriage in the packaging in which it is tested, to type G, which is not subject to the provisions for self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 [see marginal 2414 (5)]. The classification of types B to F is directly related to the maximum quantity allowed in one packaging.

(14) The following self-reactive substances shall not be permitted for carriage:

- self-reactive substances type A [see Appendix A.1, marginal 3104 (2) (a)];

(15) Self-reactive substances and formulations of self-reactive substances listed in marginal 2401 are assigned to 31° to 50°, identification numbers 3221 to 3240.

The classifications for substances of 31° to 50° are based on the technically pure substance (except where a concentration of less than 100 % is specified). For other concentrations, the substance may be classified differently following the procedures in Appendix A.1, marginal 3104.

The collective entries specify:

- self-reactive substances types B to F, see paragraph (13) above;

- physical state (liquid-solid); and

- temperature control (when required), see paragraph (20) below.

(16) Classification of self-reactive substances or formulations of self-reactive substances not listed in marginal 2401 and assignment to a collective entry shall be made by the competent authority of the Member State.

(17) Activators, such as zinc compounds, may be added to some self-reactive substances to change their reactivity. Depending on both the type and the concentration of the activator, this may result in a decrease in thermal stability and a change in explosive properties. If either of these properties is altered, the new formulation shall be assessed in accordance with the classification procedure.

(18) Samples of self-reactive substances or formulations of self-reactive substances not listed in marginal 2401, for which a complete set of test results is not available and which are to be carried for further testing or evaluation, shall be assigned to one of the appropriate entries for self-reactive substances type C provided the following conditions are met:

- the available data indicates that the sample would be no more dangerous than selfreactive substances type B;

- the sample is packaged in accordance with packing method OP2A or OP2B and the quantity per transport unit is limited to 10 kg;

- the available data indicate that the control temperature, if any, is sufficiently low to prevent any dangerous decomposition and sufficiently high to prevent any dangerous phase separation.

(19) In order to ensure safety during carriage, self-reactive substances are in many cases desensitized by use of a diluent. Where a percentage of a substance is stipulated, this refers to the percentage by mass, rounded to the nearest whole number. If a diluent is used, the self-reactive substance shall be tested with the diluant present in the concentration and form used in carriage. Diluents which may allow a self-reactive substance to concentrate to a dangerous extent in the event of leakage from a packaging shall not be used. Any diluent shall be compatible with the selfreactive substance. In this regard, compatible diluents are those solids or liquids which have no detrimental influence on the thermal stability and hazard type of the self-reactive substance. Liquid diluents in formulations requiring temperature control [see paragraph (20)] shall have a boiling point of at least 60 °C and a flashpoint not less than 5 °C. The boiling point of the liquid shall be at least 50 °C higher than the control temperature of the self-reactive substance.

(20) The control temperature is the maximum temperature at which the self-reactive substance can be safely carried. It is assumed that the temperature of the immediate surroundings of a package only exceeds 55 °C during carriage for a relatively short time in a 24 hours period. In the event of loss of temperature control, it may be necessary to implement emergency procedures. The emergency temperature is the temperature at which such procedures shall be implemented.

The control and emergency temperatures are derived from the SADT (see Table 1). The SADT shall be determined in order to decide whether a substance shall be subjected to temperature control during carriage. Provisions for the determination of the SADT are given in Appendix A.1, marginal 3103.

>TABLE>

Self-reactive substances with an SADT not greater than 55 °C shall be subject to temperature control during carriage. Where applicable, control and emergency temperatures are listed in marginal 2401. The actual temperature during carriage may be lower than the control temperature but shall be selected so as to avoid dangerous separation of phases.

A. Solid organic flammable substances and articles

2401 1° Substances obtained from the processing of rubber in flammable form:

(b) 1345 rubber scrap, ground or 1345 rubber shoddy, powdered or granulated.

2° Flammable articles in commercial form:

(c) 1331 matches, 'strike anywhere`, 1944 matches, safety (book, card or box), 1945 matches, wax, 2254 matches, fusee, 2623 firelighters, solid, with flammable liquid.

3° Articles made from weakly nitrated nitrocellulose:

(c) 1324 films, nitrocellulose base, gelatin-coated, except scrap, 2000 celluloid in block, rods, rolls, sheets, tubes, etc., except scrap, 1353 fibres impregnated with weakly nitrated nitrocellulose, n.o.s. or 1353 fabrics impregnated with weakly nitrated nitrocellulose, n.o.s.

Note: 2006 plastics, nitrocellulose-based, self-heating, n.o.s., and 2002 celluloid scrap are substances of Class 4.2 (see marginal 2431, 4°).

4° (c) 3175 solids or mixtures of solids (such as preparations and wastes) containing flammable liquid n.o.s. having a flash-point up to 100 °C.

5° Organic flammable substances in the molten state:

2304 naphthalene, molten,

3176 flammable solid, organic, molten, n.o.s.

Note: 1334 naphthalene, crude or refined, is a substance of 6°.

6° Organic flammable solids, non-toxic and non-corrosive, and mixtures of organic flammable solids, non-toxic and non-corrosive (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective entries:

(b) 1325 flammable solid, organic, n.o.s.;

(c) 1312 borneol, 1328 hexamethylenetetramine, 1332 metaldehyde, 1334 naphthalene, crude or 1334 naphthalene, refined, 2213 paraformaldehyde, 2538 nitronaphthalene, 2717 camphor, synthetic, 1325 flammable solid, organic, n.o.s.

Note: 2304 naphthalene, molten, is a substance of 5°.

7° Organic flammable solids, toxic, and mixtures of organic flammable solids, toxic (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(b) 2926 flammable solid, toxic, organic, n.o.s.;

(c) 2926 flammable solid, toxic, organic, n.o.s.

Note: For toxicity criteria, see marginal 2600 (3).

8° Organic flammable solids, corrosive, and mixtures of organic flammable solids, corrosive (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(b) 2925 flammable solid, corrosive, organic, n.o.s.;

(c) 2925 flammable solid, corrosive, organic, n.o.s.

Note: For corrosivity criteria see marginal 2800 (3).

B. Solid inorganic flammable substances and articles

11° Inorganic non-metallic substances in flammable form:

(b) 1339 phosphorus heptasulphide (P4S7) free from yellow and white phosphorus, 1341 phosphorus sesquisulphide (P4S3) free from yellow and white phosphorus, 1343 phosphorus trisulphide (P4S6) free from yellow and white phosphorus, 2989 lead phosphite, dibasic, 3178 flammable solid, inorganic, n.o.s.;

Note: Phosphorus sulphides which are not free from yellow and white phosphorus are not to be accepted for carriage.

(c) 1338 phosphorus, amorphous, 1350 sulphur (also flowers of sulphur), 2989 lead phosphite, dibasic, 2687 dicyclohexylammonium nitrate, 3178 flammable solid, inorganic, n.o.s.

Note: 2448 sulphur, molten, is a substance of 15°.

12° Flammable metal salts of organic compounds:

(b) 3181 metal salts of organic compounds, flammable, n.o.s.;

(c) 1313 calcium resinate, 1314 calcium resinate, fused, 1318 cobalt resinate, precipitated, 1330 manganese resinate, 2001 cobalt naphthenates, powder, 2714 zinc resinate, 2715 aluminium resinate, metal salts of organic compounds, flammable, n.o.s.

13° Metals and metal alloys in powdered or other flammable form:

Notes: 1. Metals and metal alloys in powdered or other flammable form, liable to spontaneous combustion, are substances of Class 4.2 (see marginal 2431, 12°).

2. Metals and metal alloys in powdered or other flammable form which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases are substances of Class 4.3 (see marginal 2471, 11° to 15°).

(b) 1309 aluminium powder, coated, 1323 ferrocerium, 1326 hafnium powder, wetted with not less than 25 % (mass) water, 1333 cerium, slabs, rods, ingots, 1352 titanium powder, wetted with not less than 25 % (mass) water, 1358 zirconium powder, wetted with not less than 25 % (mass) water, 3089 metal powder, flammable, n.o.s.;

Notes: 1. Hafnium, titanium and zirconium powders shall contain a visible excess of water.

2. Hafnium, titanium and zirconium powders, wetted, mechanically produced, of a particle size of 53 microns and over, or chemically produced, of a particle size of 840 microns and over, are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

(c) 1309 aluminium powder, coated, 1346 silicon powder, amorphous, 1869 magnesium or 1869 magnesium alloys, pellets, turnings or ribbons, 2858 zirconium, dry, coiled wire, finished metal sheets, strip (thinner than 254 microns but not thinner than 18 microns), 2878 titanium sponge granules or 2878 titanium sponge powder, 3089 metal powder, flammable, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. Magnesium alloys with not more than 50 % magnesium are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

2. Silicon powder in any other form is not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

3. 2009 zirconium, dry, finished sheets, strip or coiled wire, in thicknesses of less than 18 microns, is a substance of Class 4.2 [see marginal 2431, 12° (c)]. Zirconium, dry, finished sheets, strip or coiled wire, in thicknesses of 254 microns or more, is not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

14° Flammable metal hydrides:

(b) 1437 zirconium hydride, 1871 titanium hydride, 3182 metal hydrides, flammable, n.o.s.;

(c) 3182 metal hydrides, flammable, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. Metal hydrides which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases are substances of Class 4.3 (see marginal 2471, 16°).

2. 2870 aluminium borohydride or 2870 aluminium borohydride in devices is a substance of Class 4.2 [see marginal 2431, 17° (a)].

15° The following inorganic flammable substance in molten form:

2448 sulphur, molten.

Notes: 1. 1350 solid sulphur is a substance of 11° (c).

2. Other inorganic flammable substances in molten form are not to be accepted for carriage.

16° Inorganic flammable solids, toxic, and mixtures of inorganic flammable solids, toxic (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(b) 1868 decaborane, 3179 flammable solid, toxic, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3179 flammable solid, toxic, inorganic, n.o.s.

Note: For toxicity criteria, see marginal 2600 (3).

17° Inorganic flammable solids, corrosive, and mixtures of inorganic flammable solids, corrosive (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(b) 3180 flammable solid, corrosive, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3180 flammable solid, corrosive, inorganic, n.o.s.

Note: For corrosivity criteria, see marginal 2800 (3).

C. Explosive substances in the non-explosive state

Notes: 1. Explosive substances in the non-explosive state, other than those listed in 21° to 25°, are not to be accepted for carriage as substances of Class 4.1.

2. Special packing requirements are applicable for substances of 21° to 26° (see marginal 2404).

21° The following water-wetted explosive substances:

(a) 1310 ammonium picrate, wetted with not less than 10 % (mass) water, 1322 dinitroresorcinol, wetted with not less than 15 % (mass) water, 1336 nitroguanidine (picrite), wetted with not less than 20 % (mass) water, 1337 nitrostarch, wetted with not less than 20 % (mass) water, 1344 trinitrophenol, wetted with not less than 30 % (mass) water, 1347 silver picrate, wetted with not less than 30 % (mass) water, 1349 sodium picramate, wetted with not less than 20 % (mass) water, 1354 trinitrobenzene, wetted with not less than 30 % (mass) water, 1355 trinitrobenzoic acid, wetted with not less than 30 % (mass) water, 1356 trinitrotoluene, wetted with not less than 30 % (mass) water, 1357 urea nitrate, wetted with not less than 20 % (mass) water, 1517 zirconium picramate, wetted with not less than 20 % (mass) water, 2852 dipicryl sulphide, wetted with not less than 10 % (mass) water.

22° The following toxic water-wetted explosive substances:

(a) 1320 dinitrophenol, wetted with not less than 15 % (mass) water, 1321 dinitrophenolates, wetted with not less than 15 % (mass) water, 1348 sodium dininitro-o-cresolate, wetted with not less than 15 % (mass) water.

Notes to 21° and 22°: 1. Explosive substances with a water content lower than the stated limits are substances of Class 1.

2. The water shall be homogeneously distributed over the entire explosive substance. During carriage there shall not be any separation of the mixture which reduces the inerting effect.

3. Water-wetted explosives shall not be capable of being brought to detonation by the action of the standard detonator (), and they shall not be capable of being brought to mass explosion by the effect of a powerful booster.

23° The following explosive substance rendered inert:

(b) 2907 isosorbide dinitrate mixture with not less than 60 % lactose, mannose, starch or calcium hydrogen phosphate or with other phlegmatizers, provided that such phlegmatizer has inerting properties which are at least as effective.

24° The following nitrated cellulose mixtures:

(a) 2555 nitrocellulose with not less than 25 % (mass) water, 2556 nitrocellulose with not less than 25 % (mass) alcohol and not more than 12.6 % nitrogen in the dry mass, 2557 nitrocellulose, with not more than 12.6 % nitrogen, by dry mass, mixture with or without platicizer, with or without pigment.

Notes: 1. 2556 nitrocellulose with not less than 25 % (mass) alcohol, or 2557 nitrocellulose with not more than 12.6 % nitrogen, by dry mass, mixture with or without plasticizer, with or without pigment, shall be packed in receptacles so constructed that explosion by reason of increased internal pressure is not possible.

2. Nitrocellulose mixtures with a water content, alcohol content or plasticizer content lower than the stated limits are substances of Class 1 (see marginal 2101, 4° and 26°).

25° The following toxic azide:

(a) 1571 barium azide, wetted with not less than 50 % (mass) water.

Note: Barium azide with a water content lower than the stated limit is not to be accepted for carriage.

D. Substances related to self-reactive substances

26° The following substances related to self-reactive substances:

(b) 3242 azodicarbonamide

(c) 2956 5-tert-butyl-2,4,6-trinitro-m-xylene (musk xylene), 3251 isosorbide-5-mononitrate.

Notes: 1. Special packing requirements are applicable for substances of 26° [see marginal 2404 (3)].

2. Isosorbide-5-mononitrate or formulations of this substance which have been shown by the performance of tests series 2 of the Class 1 assignment procedure [see Appendix A.1, marginal 3101 (1)] to be too insensitive for inclusion in Class 1 are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

E. Self-reactive substances not requiring temperature control

31° (b) 3221 self-reactive liquid type B ()

32° (b) 3222 self-reactive liquid type B, such as:

>TABLE>

33° (b) 3223 self-reactive liquid type C, such as

>TABLE>

34° (b) 3224 self-reactive solid, type C, such as:

>TABLE>

35° (b) 3225 self-reactive liquid type D ().

36° (b) 3226 self-reactive solid type D, such as:

>TABLE>

37° (b) 3227 self-reactive liquid type E ().

38° (b) 3228 self-reactive solid type E ().

39° (b) 3229 self-reactive liquid type F ().

40° (b) 3230 self-reactive solid type F ().

F. Self-reactive substances requiring temperature control

Note: Substances of 41° to 50° are self-reactive substances which decompose easily at normal temperatures and shall therefore be carried only under conditions of adequate refrigeration. For these self-reactive substances, the maximum temperature during carriage shall not exceed the control temperature indicated.

41° (b) 3231 self-reactive liquid type B, temperature controlled (),

42° (b) 3232 self-reactive solid type B, temperature controlled, such as:

>TABLE>

43° (b) 3233 self-reactive liquid type C, temperature controlled, such as:

>TABLE>

44° (b) 3234 self-reactive solid type C, temperature controlled, such as:

>TABLE>

45° (b) 3235 self-reactive liquid type D, temperature controlled, such as:

>TABLE>

46° (b) 3236 self-reactive solid type D, temperature controlled, such as:

>TABLE>

47° (b) 3237 self-reactive liquid type E, temperature controlled (),

48° (b) 3238 self-reactive solid type E, temperature controlled (),

49° (b) 3239 self-reactive liquid type F, temperature controlled (),

50° (b) 3240 self-reactive solid type F, temperature controlled (),

G. Empty packagings

51° Empty packagings, including empty intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks, and empty tank-containers, uncleaned, as well as empty vehicles for carriage in bulk and empty small bulk containers, uncleaned which have contained substances of Class 4.1.

2401a Substances of 1° to 4°, 6° and 11° to 14°, carried in accordance with the following provisions shall not be subject to the conditions for this Class contained in this Annex and in Annex B):

(a) Substances classified under (b) of each item, up to 3 kg per inner packaging and 12 kg per package;

(b) Substances classified under (c) of each item, up to 6 kg per inner packaging and 24 kg per package.

These quantities of substances shall be carried in combination packagings which at least meet the conditions of marginal 3538.

The 'General packing conditions` of marginal 3500 (1) and (2) as well as (5) to (7) shall be observed.

2. Provisions

A. Packages

1. General conditions of packing

2402 (1) Packagings shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.5, unless special conditions are prescribed in marginals 2403 to 2405 and 2408 for the packing of certain substances.

Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) shall conform to the conditions of Appendix A.6.

(2) In accordance with the provisions of marginals 2400 (3) and 3511 (2) or 3611 (2) respectively, the following shall be used:

packagings of packing group I, marked with the letter 'X`, for very dangerous substances classified under (a) of each item;

packagings of packing groups II or I, marked with the letter 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs of packing group II, marked with the letter 'Y`, for dangerous substances classified under (b) of each item;

packagings of packing groups III, II or I, marked with the letter 'Z`, 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs of packing groups III or II, marked with the letter 'Z` or 'Y`, for less dangerous substances classified under (c) of each item.

Note: For the carriage of substances of Class 4.1 in tank-vehicles, demountable tanks and tank-containers, as well as for carriage in bulk, see Annex B.

2. Special conditions for packing of certain substances

2403 Substances of 5° and molten sulphur of 15° may be carried only in tank-vehicles (see Appendix B.1a) or in tank-containers (see Appendix B.1b).

2404 (1) Substances of 21°, 22°, 23° and 25° shall be packed:

(a) in drums conforming to marginal 3523 for plywood, marginal 3525 for fibreboard or marginal 3526 for plastics material, in each case with one or more moisture-proof inner bags, or

(b) in combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538 with moisture-proof inner packagings. However, no inner or outer packagings of metal shall be permitted.

The packagings shall be so designed that the water content or the content of phlegmatizer, which is added to the substance to render it inert, cannot diminish during carriage.

(2) Substances of 24° shall be packed in:

(a) removable-head steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) removable-head aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) removable-head steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) plywood drums conforming to marginal 3523, or

(e) fibre drums conforming to marginal 3525, or

(f) fibreboard boxes conforming to marginal 3530, or

(g) steel or aluminium boxes conforming to marginal 3532, or

(h) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538; however, no inner or outer packagings of metal shall be permitted.

Metal receptacles shall be so constructed and closed that they yield to an internal pressure of not more than 300 kPa (3 bar).

2555 nitrocellulose with not less than 25 % (mass) water may also be packed in plastics drums and jerricans conforming to marginal 3526.

If 2557 nitrocellulose, with not more than 12,6 % nitrogen, by dry mass, mixture with or without plasticizer, with or without pigment is packed in metal receptacles, an inner bag of multi-wall paper shall be used.

If 2555 nitrocellulose with not less than 25 % (mass) water or 2556 nitrocellulose with not less than 25 % (mass) alcohol is packed in plywood drums, fibre drums or fibreboard boxes, a moisture-proof inner bag, a plastics film lining or an inner coating of plastics material shall be used.

All packagings shall be so designed that the water, alcohol or phlegmatizer content cannot diminish during carriage.

(3) (a) Substances of item 26° shall be packed in fibre drums conforming to marginal 3525 with plastics lining or an equally effective inner coating. A package shall not weigh more than 50 kg.

(b) 3242 azodicarbonamide of 26° (b) may also be packed:

- an inner packaging of a single plastics bag in a fibreboard box, of maximum contents 50 kg, or

- inner packagings of plastics bottles, jars, bags or boxes, of maximum contents 5 kg each, within an outer packaging of a fibreboard box or a fibre drum of maximum contents 25 kg.

2405 (1) Substances of 31° shall be packed using packing methods listed in Table 2 and designated OP1A to OP8A for liquids and OP1B to OP8B for solids. Substances shall be packed as indicated in marginal 2401 and as set out in detail in Table 2 (A) and 2 (B). A packing method corresponding to a smaller package size (i.e. with a lower OP number) may be used but a packing method corresponding to a larger package size (i.e. with a higher OP number) shall not be used. Metal packagings meeting the test criteria of packing group I shall not be used. For combination packagings, cushioning materials shall not be readily combustible and shall not cause decomposition of the self-reactive substance if leakage occurs.

(2) Packages bearing a label conforming to model No 01 in accordance with marginal 2412 (5) shall comply with the provisions of marginal 2102 (4) and (6).

(3) For self-reactive substances or formulations of self-reactive substances not listed in marginal 2401, the following procedure shall be used to assign the appropriate packing method:

(a) self-reactive substances type B:

Substances shall be assigned packing method OP5A or OP5B provided that they satisfy the criteria of Appendix A.1, marginal 3104 (2) (b) in one of the packagings indicated. If the self-reactive substance can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging than those listed for packing method OP5A or OP5B (i.e. one of the packagings listed for OP1A to OP4A or OP1B to OP4B), then the corresponding packing method with the lower OP number shall be assigned.

(b) self-reactive substances type C:

Substances shall be assigned packing method OP6A or OP6B provided that they satisfy the criteria of Appendix A.1, marginal 3104 (2) (c) in one of the packagings indicated. If the self-reactive substance can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging than those listed for packing method OP6A or OP6B then the corresponding packing method with the lower OP number shall be assigned.

(c) self-reactive substances type D:

Packing method OP7A or OP7B shall be used.

(d) self-reactive substances type E:

Packing method OP8A or OP8B shall be used.

(e) self-reactive substances type F:

Packing method OP8A or OP8B shall be used.

(4) Substances of 39° (b), 40° (b), 49° (b) or 50° (b) may be carried in IBCs under conditions laid down by the competent authority of the country of origin when, on the basis of testing, the competent authority is satisfied that such carriage may be safely conducted. The tests shall include those necessary:

- to prove that the self-reactive substance complies with the principles for classification given in Appendix A.1, marginal 3104 (2) (f);

- to prove the compatibility with all materials normally in contact with the substance during carriage;

- to determine, when applicable, the control and emergency temperatures associated with the carriage of the substance in the IBC concerned as derived from the SADT;

- to design, when applicable, emergency-relief devices; and

- to determine if any special requirements are necessary.

(5) To prevent explosive rupture of metal IBCs or composite IBCs with full wall metal casing, the emergency-relief devices shall be designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during a period of not less than one hour of fire engulfment (heat load 110 kW/m2) or self-accelerating decomposition.

(6) Receptacles or IBCs, containing substances of 31° (b), 33° (b), 35° (b), 37° (b), 39° (b), 41° (b), 43° (b), 45° (b), 47° (b) or 49° (b), which give off small quantities of gases, shall be vented, in accordance with marginal 3500 (8) or 3601 (6).

>TABLE>

>TABLE>

2406 (1) Substances classified under (b) of 1° to 17° shall be packed in:

(a) steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) plastics drums and jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537, or

(f) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538, or

(g) composite packagings (glass, porcelain, stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539, or

(h) metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622.

(2) Substances classified under (b) of 1° to 17° with a melting-point above 45 °C or are pasty according to the criteria of the penetrometer test (see Appendix A.3 marginal 3310), or are not liquid according to the ASTM D 4359-90 test method may also be packed in:

(a) plywood drums conforming to marginal 3523 or fibre drums conforming to marginal 3525, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags, or

(b) boxes conforming to marginal 3532 for steel or aluminium, marginal 3527 for natural wood, marginal 3528 for plywood, marginal 3529 for reconstituted wood, marginal 3530 for fibreboard, or marginal 3531 for plastics, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags, or

(c) sift-proof bags conforming to marginal 3533 for textiles, marginal 3534 for woven plastics, marginal 3535 for plastics film or marginal 3536 for paper, provided that the goods are carried as a full load or the bags are loaded on pallets.

(3) Substances classified under (b) of 1°, 6°, 7°, 8°, 12°, 13°, 16° and 17° may also be packed in:

(a) rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624, or

(b) composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625, excluding types 11HZ2 and 31HZ2.

(4) Substances classified under (b) of 1°, 6°, 12° and 13° with a melting-point above 45 °C or are pasty according to the criteria of the penetrometer test (see Appendix A.3, marginal 3310), or are not liquid according to the ASTM D 4359-90 test method may also be packed in:

(a) fibreboard IBCs conforming to marginal 3626, or

(b) wooden IBCs conforming to marginal 3627.

(5) Substances classified under (b) of 1°, 6°, and 12° with a melting-point above 45 °C or are pasty according to the criteria of the penetrometer test (see Appendix A.3, marginal 3310), or are not liquid according to the ASTM D 4359-90 test method may be packed in flexible IBCs conforming to marginal 3623, excluding types 13H1, 13L1 and 13M1, provided that the goods are carried as a full load or the flexible IBCs are loaded on pallets.

2407 (1) Substances classified under (c) of 1° to 17° shall be packed in:

(a) steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) plastics drums and jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537, or

(f) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538, or

(g) composite packagings (glass, porcelain, stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539, or

(h) light-gauge metal packagings conforming to marginal 3540, or

(i) metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622, or

(j) rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624, or

(k) composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625, excluding types 11HZ2 and 31HZ2.

(2) Substances classified under (c) of 1° to 17° with a melting-point above 45 °C or are pasty according to the criteria of the penetrometer test (see Appendix A.3, marginal 3310), or are not liquid according to the ASTM D 4359-90 test method may also be packed in:

(a) plywood drums conforming to marginal 3523 or fibre drums conforming to marginal 3525, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags, or

(b) boxes conforming to marginal 3532 for steel and aluminium, marginal 3527 for natural wood, marginal 3528 for plywood, marginal 3529 for reconstituted wood, marginal 3530 for fibreboard, or marginal 3531 for plastics, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags, or

(c) sift-proof bags conforming to marginal 3533 for textiles, marginal 3534 for woven plastics, marginal 3535 for plastics film or marginal 3536 for paper.

(3) Substances classified under (c) of 6°, 11° to 14°, 16° and 17° with a melting-point above 45 °C or are pasty according to the criteria of the penetrometer test (see Appendix A.3, marginal 3310), or are not liquid according to the ASTM D 4359-90 test method may also be packed in:

(a) flexible IBCs conforming to marginal 3623, excluding types 13H1, 13L1 and 13M1, or

(b) fibreboard IBCs conforming to marginal 3626, or

(c) wooden IBCs conforming to marginal 3627, or

(d) composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle of type 11HZ2 conforming to marginal 3625.

2408 Celluloid in sheets of 3° (c) may also be carried unpackaged on pallets, wrapped in plastics film and secured by appropriate means, such as steel bands, as a full load in closed vehicles. A pallet shall not weigh more than 1 000 kg.

2409-

2410

3. Mixed packing

2411 (1) Substances which come under the same item may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538.

(2) Substances of 21° to 26° and 31° to 50° shall not be packed with other goods.

(3) Except for the substances mentioned in paragraph (2) and unless special conditions to the contrary are prescribed under paragraph (7), substances of Class 4.1 in quantities not exceeding 5 kg per receptacle may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538 with substances or articles of other classes - provided that mixed packing is also permitted for substances and articles of these classes - and or with goods not subject to the provisions of this Directive, provided they do not react dangerously with one another.

(4) The following shall be considered dangerous reactions:

(a) combustion and or giving off considerable heat,

(b) emission of flammable and/or toxic gases,

(c) formation of corrosive liquids,

(d) formation of unstable substances.

(5) The provisions of marginals 2001 (7), 2002 (6) and (7) and 2402 shall be observed.

(6) Where a wooden or fibreboard box is used, a package shall not weigh more than 100 kg.

(7) Substances classified under (b) or (c) of 1° to 5° and 11° to 14° shall not be packed together with substances of Class 5.1 classified under (a) or (b) of the various items of marginal 2501.

4. Marking and danger labels on packages (see Appendix A.9)

Marking

2412 (1) Each package shall be clearly and durably marked with the identification number of the goods to be entered in the transport document, preceded by the letters 'UN`.

Danger labels

(2) Packages containing substances of Class 4.1 shall bear a label conforming to model No 4.1.

(3) Packages containing substances of 7°, 16°, 22° or 25° shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 6.1 and packages containing substances of 8° and 17° a label conforming to model No 8.

(4) Packages containing self-reactive substances of items 31°, 32°, 41° and 42° shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 01 unless the competent authority has permitted this label to be dispensed with for the type of packaging tested because the results have proved that the selfreactive substance in such a packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour [see marginal 2414 (4)].

(5) Packages containing fragile receptacles not visible from the outside shall bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 12.

(6) Packages containing liquids in packagings the closures of which are not visible from the outside, packages containing vented packagings or vented packagings without outer packagings shall in addition bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 11.

2413

B. Particulars in the transport document

2414 (1) The description of the goods in the transport document shall conform to one of the identification numbers and names printed in italics in marginal 2401.

If the substance is not mentioned by name, but is assigned to an n.o.s. entry or collective entry, the description of the goods shall consist of the identification number and the n.o.s. designation or collective entry, followed by the chemical or technical name of the substance ();.

The description of the goods shall be followed by particulars of the class, the item number, if applicable, the letter, and the initials 'ADR` (or 'RID`), e.g. '4.1, 6°(b), ADR`.

For the carriage of wastes [see marginal 2000 (4)] the description of the goods shall be: 'Waste containing `, the component(s) used for the classification of the waste under marginal 2002 (8) to be entered under its/their chemical name(s), e.g. 'Waste, earth containing toluene 4.1, 4° (c), ADR`.

For the carriage of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) containing several components subject to the provisions of this Directive, it will not in general be necessary to refer to more than two components which most predominantly contribute to the danger or dangers of the solutions and mixtures.

If a named substance in accordance with marginal 2400 (9) is not subject to the conditions of this Class, the consignor may enter in the transport document: 'Not goods of Class 4.1.`

(2) When substances are carried under conditions fixed by the competent authority (see marginals

2400 (16) and 2405 (4), the following statement shall be included in the transport document:

'Carriage in accordance with marginal 2414 (2).`

(3) When a sample of a self-reactive substance is carried in accordance with marginals 2400 (18) and 2405 (6), the following statement shall be included in the transport document:

'Carriage in accordance with marginal 2414 (3).`

(4) When, by permission of the competent authority in accordance with marginal 2412 (4), a label conforming to model No 01 is not required, the following statement shall be included in the transport document:

'The danger label conforming to model No 01 is not required.`

(5) When self-reactive substances type G [see Appendix A.1 marginal 3104 (2) (g)] are carried, the following statement may be given in the transport document:

'Not a self-reactive substance of Class 4.1.`

(6) For self-reactive substances requiring temperature control during carriage, the following statement shall be given in the transport document:

'Control temperature: °C Emergency temperature: °C`

(7) For the solutions and mixtures containing only one component subject to the provisions of this Directive, the word 'solution` or 'mixture` shall be added as part of the name in the transport document [see marginal 2002 (8) (a)].

(8) When a solid is handed over for carriage in the molten state the description of the goods shall further specify 'molten`, unless the term already appears in the name.

2415-

2421

C. Empty packagings

2422 (1) Uncleaned empty packagings, including empty IBCs, except those referred to in paragraph (2), uncleaned, of 51°, shall be closed in the same way and present the same degree of leakproofness as if they were full.

(2) Uncleaned empty packagings, including empty IBCs, of 51°, to the outside of which residues of their previous contents have adhered, shall be carried in leakproof packagings.

(3) Uncleaned empty packagings, including empty IBCs, which have contained water-wetted substances of 13° (b) or substances of 21° to 25° are not to be accepted for carriage unless the residues are so packed that the content of water or other phlegmatizers added to the substances to render them inert cannot diminish.

Uncleaned empty packagings which have contained substances of 31° to 50° are not to be accepted for carriage unless steps have been taken to prevent dangerous decomposition.

(4) Uncleaned empty packagings, including empty IBCs, of 51°, and packagings conforming to (2) shall bear the same danger labels as if they were full.

(5) The description of the goods in the transport document shall conform to one of the names printed in italics in 51°, e.g. 'Empty packaging, 4.1, 41°, ADR`. In the case of uncleaned empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks, empty tank-containers and empty small containers, the description shall be completed by adding the words 'Last load` together with the name and item number of the goods last loaded, e.g. 'Last load: 2304 naphthalene, molten, 5°`.

2423-

2424

D. Transitional measures

2425 Substances and articles of Class 4.1 may be carried until 30 June 1995 in accordance with the provision of Class 4.1 applicable until 31 December 1994. The transport document shall, in such cases, bear the inscription: 'Carriage in accordance with the ADR in force before 1 January 1995`.

2426-

2429

CLASS 4.2 SUBSTANCES LIABLE TO SPONTANEOUS COMBUSTION

1. List of substances

2430 (1) Among the substances and articles covered by the title of Class 4.2, those which are listed in marginal 2431 or are covered by a collective heading in that marginal are subject to the conditions set out in marginals 2430 (2) to 2452 and to the provisions of this Annex and of Annex B. They are then considered as substances and articles of this Directive.

(2) The title of Class 4.2 covers:

- substances, including mixtures and solutions (liquids or solids), which even in small quantities ignite on contact with air within five minutes. They are described as substances liable to spontaneous combustion (pyrophoric substances);

- substances and articles, including mixtures and solutions, which, on contact with air, are liable to heat up without any energy input. These substances can ignite only in large quantities (kilograms) and after a long period of time (hours or days). They are described as self-heating substances.

(3) The substances and articles of Class 4.2 are subdivided as follows:

A. Organic substances liable to spontaneous combustion.

B. Inorganic substances liable to spontaneous combustion.

C. Organometallic compounds liable to spontaneous combustion.

D. Empty packagings.

Substances and articles of Class 4.2 classified under the various items of marginal 2431, shall be assigned to one of the following groups designated by letters (a), (b) or (c), according to their degree of danger:

(a) liable to spontaneous combustion (pyrophoric),

(b) self-heating,

(c) slightly self-heating.

(4) The assignment of substances and articles not specifically named to 3° to 5°, 12°, 15°, 16°, 31° and 32° of marginal 2431, as well as within these items to the letters, can be based on experience or the results of the test procedure in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3330 to 3333.

Assignment to 6° to 10°, 14°, 17° to 21° and 33°, as well as within these to the letters, shall be based on the results of the test procedure in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3330 to 3333; experience shall also be taken into account when it leads to a more strictly based assignment.

(5) When substances or articles not specifically named are assigned to the items of marginal 2431 on the basis of test procedures in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3330 to 3333, the following criteria apply:

(a) Solids liable to spontaneous combustion (pyrophoric) shall be assigned to Class 4.2 when they ignite on falling from a height of 1 m or within five minutes;

(b) Liquids liable to spontaneous combustion (pyrophoric) shall be assigned to Class 4.2 when:

(i) on being poured on an inert carrier, they ignite within five minutes, or

(ii) in the event of a negative result of the test according to (i), when poured on a dry, indented filter paper (Whatman No 3 filter), they ignite or carbonize it within five minutes;

(c) Substances in which, in a 10 cm sample cube, at 140 °C test temperature, spontaneous combustion or a rise in temperature to over 200 °C is observed within 24 hours shall be assigned to Class 4.2. This criterion is based on the temperature of the spontaneous combustion of charcoal, which is at 50 °C for a sample cube of 27 m3. Substances with a temperature of spontaneous combustion higher than 50 °C for a volume of 27 m3 are not to be assigned to Class 4.2.

(6) When substances and articles not specifically named are assigned to the letters of the items of marginal 2431 on the basis of test procedures in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3330 to 3333, the following criteria shall apply:

(a) Substances liable to spontaneous combustion (pyrophoric) shall be assigned to letter (a);

(b) Self-heating substances and articles in which, in a 2.5 cm sample cube, at 140 °C test temperature, spontaneous combustion or a rise in temperature to over 200 °C is observed within 24 hours, shall be assigned to letter (b);

(c) Slightly self-heating substances in which, in a 2.5 cm sample cube, the phenomena referred to under (b) are not observed, in the given conditions, but in which in a 10 cm sample cube at 140 °C test temperature spontaneous combustion or a rise in temperature to over 200 °C is observed within 24 hours, shall be assigned to letter (c).

(7) If substances of Class 4.2, as a result of admixtures, come into different categories of risk from those to which the substances of marginal 2431 belong, these mixtures shall be assigned to the items and letters to which they belong on the basis of their actual degree of danger.

Note: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), see also marginal 2002 (8).

(8) When substances are specifically named under more than one letter of the same item in marginal 2431, the relevant letter may be determined on the basis of the results of the test procedure in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3330 to 3333, and the criteria set out in (6).

(9) On the basis of the test procedure in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3330 to 3333, and the criteria set out in (6), it may also be determined whether the nature of a specifically named substance is such that the substance is not subject to the provisions for this Class (see marginal 2444).

(10) Substances and mixtures of substances having a melting point higher than 45 °C shall be considered to be solids as defined in the packaging requirements of marginals 2435 (2), 2436 (2) and 2437 (3) and (4).

(11) Self-heating solids, oxidizing, assigned to identification number 3127 of the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, shall not be accepted for carriage (see, however, marginal 2002 (8), footnote (¹) to the table in paragraph 2.3.1).

A. Organic substances liable to spontaneous combustion

2431 1° Carbon, powdered, in grains or in pieces

(b) 1361 carbon or 1361 carbon black, animal or vegetable origin

(c) 1361 carbon or 1361 carbon black, animal or vegetable origin, 1362 carbon, activated.

Notes: 1. Carbons made by a steam activation process and non-activated carbon black of mineral origin are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

2. Non-activated carbons of mineral origin and carbon dust in a state not liable to self-heating are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

2° Animal and vegetable substances:

(b) 1374 fishmeal, (fish scrap), unstabilized;

(c) 1363 copra, 1386 seedcake containing more than 1,5 % (mass) oil and with not more than 11 % (mass) moisture, 2217 seedcake containing not more than 1,5 % (mass) oil and having not more than 11 % (mass) moisture.

3° Industrially-produced fibres, fabrics and similar products:

(c) 1364 cotton waste, oily, 1365 cotton, wet, 1379 paper, unsaturated oil treated, incompletely dried (including carbon paper), 1373 fibres, animal or vegetable or synthetic, n.o.s. impregnated with oil, or 1373 fabrics, animal or vegetable or synthetic, n.o.s. impregnated with oil.

4° Substances made from weakly nitrated cellulose:

(c) 2002 celluloid, scrap, 2006 plastics, nitrocellulose-based, self-heating, n.o.s.

Note: 1353 fibres or fabrics impregnated with weakly nitrated cellulose, non-self heating, and 2000 celluloid are articles of Class 4.1 [see marginal 2401, 3° (c)].

5° Solid organic spontaneously combustible non-toxic and non-corrosive substances, and mixtures of solid organic spontaneously combustible non-toxic and non-corrosive substances (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 2846 pyrophoric solid, organic, n.o.s.;

(b) 1369 p-nitrosodimethylaniline, 2940 9-phosphabicyclononanes (cyclooctadiene phosphines), self-heating solid, organic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3088 self-heating solid, organic, n.o.s.

6° Liquid organic spontaneously combustible non-toxic and non-corrosive substances, and solutions of organic spontaneously combustible non-toxic and non-corrosive substances (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 2845 pyrophoric liquid, organic, n.o.s.;

Note: Special packing conditions are applicable to this substance (see marginal 2433).

(b) 3183 self-heating liquid, organic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3183 self-heating liquid, organic, n.o.s.

7° Solid organic spontaneously combustible toxic substances, and mixtures of solid organic spontaneously combustible toxic substances (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(b) 3128 self-heating solid, toxic, organic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3128 self-heating solid, toxic, organic, n.o.s.

Note: For toxicity criteria, see marginal 2600 (3).

8° Liquid organic spontaneously combustible toxic substances, and solutions of organic spontaneously combustible toxic substances (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(b) 3184 self-heating liquid, toxic, organic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3184 self-heating liquid, toxic, organic, n.o.s.

Note: For toxicity criteria, see marginal 2600 (3).

9° Organic spontaneously combustible corrosive solids, and mixtures of organic spontaneously combustible corrosive solids (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(b) 3126 self-heating solid, corrosive, organic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3126 self-heating solid, corrosive, organic, n.o.s.

Note: For corrosivity criteria, see marginal 2800 (3).

10° Organic spontaneously combustible corrosive liquids, and solutions of organic spontaneously combustible corrosive substances (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(b) 3185 self-heating liquid, corrosive, organic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3185 self-heating liquid, corrosive, organic, n.o.s.

Note: For corrosivity criteria, see marginal 2800 (3).

B. Inorganic substances liable to spontaneous combustion

11° Phosphorus

(a) 1381 phosphorus, white or yellow, dry or 1381 phosphorus, white or yellow, under water or 1381 phosphorus, white or yellow, in solution.

Note: 2447 phosphorus, white or yellow, molten is a substance of 22°.

12° Metals and metal alloys in powder, dust or granular form or in another spontaneously combustible form:

(a) 1854 barium alloys, pyrophoric, 1855 calcium, pyrophoric or 1855 calcium alloys, pyrophoric, 2008 zirconium powder, dry, 2545 hafnium powder, dry, 2546 titanium powder, dry, 2881 metal catalyst, dry, 1383 pyrophoric metal, n.o.s. or 1383 pyrophoric alloy, n.o.s.;

(b) 1378 metal catalyst, wetted with a visible excess of liquid, 2008 zirconium powder, dry, 2545 hafnium powder, dry, 2546 titanium powder, dry, 2881 metal catalyst, dry, 3189 self-heating metal powder, n.o.s.;

Note to (a) and (b): The identification numbers 1378 and 2881 include only metal catalysers with a base of nickel, cobalt, copper, manganese or their compounds.

(c) 1932 zirconium scrap, 2008 zirconium powder, dry, 2009 zirconium, dry, finished sheets, strip or coiled wire (less than 18 ìm thick), 2545 hafnium powder, dry, 2546 titanium powder, dry, 2793 ferrous metal borings, shavings, turnings or cuttings in a self-heating form, 2881 metal catalyst, dry, 3189 self-heating metal powder, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. 2858 finished zirconium products of a thickness of 18 ìm or more are substances of Class 4.1 [see marginal 2401, 13° (c)].

2. 1326 hafnium powders, 1352 titanium powders or 1358 zirconium powders, wetted, with not less than 25 % water, are substances of Class 4.1 (see marginal 2401, 13°).

3. Dust and powder of metals in non-spontaneously combustible form, which nevertheless, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, are substances of Class 4.3 (see marginal 2471, 13°).

13° Sulphides, hydrosulphides and dithionites in spontaneously combustible form:

(b) 1382 potassium sulphide, anhydrous or 1382 potassium sulphide with less than 30 % water of crystallization, 1384 sodium dithionite (sodium hydrosulphite), 1385 sodium sulphide, anhydrous or 1385 sodium sulphide with less than 30 % water of crystallization, 1923 calcium dithionite (calcium hydrosulphite), 1929 potassium dithionite (potassium hydrosulphite), 2318 sodium hydrosulphide with less than 25 % water of crystallization;

Note: 1847 potassium sulphide, hydrated with not less than 30 % water of crystallization and 2949 sodium hydrosulphide with not less than 25 % water of crystallization are substances of Class 8 [see marginal 2801, 45° (b) 1.].

(c) 3174 titanium disulphide

14° Metallic salts and alcoholates, non-toxic and non-corrosive, in spontaneously combustible form:

(b) 3205 alkaline earth metal alcoholates, n.o.s.;

(c) 3205 alkaline earth metal alcoholates, n.o.s.

15° Metallic salts and alcoholates, corrosive, in spontaneously combustible form:

(a) 2441 titanium trichloride, pyrophoric or 2441 titanium trichloride mixtures, pyrophoric;

(b) 1431 sodium methylate, 3206 alkali metal alcoholates, self-heating, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(c) 3206 alkali metal alcoholates, self-heating, corrosive, n.o.s.

Note: 2869 titanium trichloride or titanium trichloride mixture, not pyrophoric, is a substance of Class 8 [see marginal 2801, 11° (b) or (c)].

16° Spontaneously combustible, non-toxic and non-corrosive inorganic solids and mixtures of spontaneously combustible non-toxic and non-corrosive inorganic solids (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3200 pyrophoric solid, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(b) 2004 magnesium diamide, 3190 self-heating solid, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(c) 1376 iron oxide, spent, or 1376 iron sponge, spent, obtained from coal gas purification, 2210 maneb (manganese ethylene 1,2-bis (dithiocarbamate)) or 2210 maneb preparation with not less than 60 % maneb, 3190 self-heating solid, inorganic, n.o.s.

Note: 2968 maneb or 2968 maneb preparations which are stabilized against self-heating and which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, are substances of Class 4.3 [see marginal 2471, 20° (c)].

17° Inorganic spontaneously combustible, non-toxic and non-corrosive liquids, and solutions of spontaneously combustible inorganic non-toxic and non-corrosive substances (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 2870 aluminium borohydride or 2870 aluminium borohydride contained in devices, 3194 pyrophoric liquid, inorganic, n.o.s.;

Notes: 1. Special packing conditions are applicable to these substances (see marginal 2433).

2. Other metal hydrides in flammable form are substances of Class 4.1 (see marginal 2401, 14°).

3. Metal hydrides which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, are substances of Class 4.3 (see marginal 2471, 16°).

(b) 3186 self-heating liquid, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3186 self-heating liquid, inorganic, n.o.s.

18° Inorganic spontaneously combustible toxic solids and mixtures of inorganic spontaneously combustible toxic solids (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(b) 3191 self-heating solid, toxic, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3191 self-heating solid, toxic, inorganic, n.o.s.

Note: For toxicity criteria, see marginal 2600 (3).

19° Inorganic spontaneously combustible toxic liquids and solutions of inorganic spontaneously combustible toxic substances (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 1380 pentaborane;

Note: Special packing conditions are applicable to this substance (see marginal 2433).

(b) 3187 self-heating liquid, toxic, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3187 self-heating liquid, toxic, inorganic, n.o.s.

Note: For toxicity criteria, see marginal 2600 (3).

20° Inorganic spontaneously combustible corrosive solids and mixtures of inorganic spontaneously combustible corrosive solids (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(b) 3192 self-heating solid, corrosive, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3192 self-heating solid, corrosive, inorganic, n.o.s.

Note: For corrosivity criteria, see marginal 2800 (3).

21° Inorganic spontaneously combustible corrosive liquids and solutions of inorganic spontaneously combustible corrosive substances (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(b) 3188 self-heating liquid, corrosive, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3188 self-heating liquid, corrosive, inorganic, n.o.s.

Note: For corrosivity criteria, see marginal 2800 (3).

22° 2447 phosphorus, white molten.

C. Organometallic compounds liable to spontaneous combustion

Notes: 1. Organometallic compounds and their solutions which are not liable to spontaneous combustion but, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, are substances of Class 4.3 (see marginal 2471, 3°).

2. Flammable solutions with organometallic compounds which are not liable to spontaneous combustion and, in contact with water, do not emit flammable gases, are substances of Class 3.

3. Special packing conditions are applicable to the substances of 31° to 33° (see marginal 2433).

31° Spontaneously combustible metal alkyls and metal aryls

(a) 1366 diethylzinc, 1370 dimethylzinc, 2005 magnesium diphenyl, 2445 lithium alkyls, 3051 aluminium alkyls, 3053 magnesium alkyls, 2003 metal alkyls, n.o.s. or 2003 metal aryls, n.o.s.,

32° Other spontaneously combustible organometallic compounds

(a) 3052 aluminium alkyl halides, 3076 aluminium alkyl hydrides, 3049 metal alkyl halides, n.o.s. or 3049 metal aryl halides, n.o.s., 3050 metal alkyl hydrides, n.o.s. or 3050 metal aryl hydrides, n.o.s.

33° Spontaneously combustible organometallic compounds

(a) 3203 pyrophoric organometallic compound, n.o.s.

D. Empty packagings

41° Empty packagings, including empty intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks, empty vehicles and empty tank-containers, uncleaned, as well as empty vehicles for carriage in bulk and empty small bulk containers, uncleaned, which have contained substances of Class 4.2.

Note: Uncleaned empty packagings, including empty intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks, empty tank-containers and empty small containers which have contained substances of 4° (c), identification No 2002, of 12° (c), identification Nos. 1932, 2009 and 2793, and of 16° (c), identification No 1376, are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

2. Provisions

A. Packages

1. General conditions of packing

2432 (1) Packagings shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.5, unless special conditions for the packing of certain substances are prescribed in marginal 2433. Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.6.

(2) With the exception of the packagings referred to in marginal 2436 (2) (a) and (b) and (3) and in marginal 2437 (3) (a) and (b), (4) and (5), (inner) packagings shall be hermetically closed.

(3) In accordance with the provisions of marginals 2430 (3) and 3511 (2) or 3611 (2) respectively, the following shall be used:

- packagings of packing group I, marked with the letter 'X`, for substances liable to spontaneous combustion (pyrophoric) classified under (a) of each item,

- packagings of packing group II or I, marked with the letter 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs of packing group II, marked with the letter 'Y`, for self-heating substances classified under (b) of each item,

- packagings of packing groups III, II or I, marked with the letter 'Z`, 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs of packing groups III or II, marked with the letter 'Z` or 'Y`, for self-heating substances classified under (c) of each item.

Note: For the carriage of substances of Class 4.2 in tank-vehicles, demountable tanks and tank-containers, as well as for carriage in bulk, see Annex B.

2. Packing of individual substances

2433 (1) Pyrophoric liquids of 6° (a), 17° (a) with the exception of aluminium borohydride in devices, 19° (a) and 31° to 33°, shall be packed in hermetically closing metal receptacles which are not affected by the contents and have a capacity of not more than 450 litres. The receptacles shall be subjected to the initial test and periodic tests every five years at a pressure of not less than 1MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure). The receptacles shall not be filled to more than 90 % of their capacity; however, a space of at least 5 % shall remain empty for safety when the liquid is at an average temperature of 50 °C. During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas the gauge pressure of which shall be not less than 50 kPa (0,5 bar). The receptacles shall carry a data plate with the following particulars entered in a durable form:

- substance or substances () accepted for carriage;

- tare () of the receptacle, including accessories;

- test pressure () (gauge pressure);

- date (month, year) of the last test undergone;

- stamp of the expert who carried out the test;

- capacity () of the receptacle;

- maximum mass of filling allowed ().

(2) These substances may also be packed in combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538 with a glass inner packaging and a steel or aluminium outer packaging conforming to marginal 3532. Receptacles shall not be filled to more than 90 % of their capacity. A package shall contain only a single inner packaging. Such combination packagings shall conform to a design type which has been tested and approved in accordance with Appendix A.5 for packing group I.

2434 Phosphorus of 22° shall be carried only in tank-vehicles and demountable tanks (see Appendix B.1a) or in tank-containers (see Appendix B.1b).

2435 (1) Substances classified under (a) of 5°, 12°, 15° and 16° shall be packed in:

(a) non-removable head steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) non-removable head aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) non-removable head steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) non-removable head plastics drums with a maximum capacity of 60 litres and in non-removable head plastics jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537, or

(f) combination packagings with glass, plastics material or metal inner packagings conforming to marginal 3538.

(2) Solids as defined in marginal 2430 (10) may also be packed: in removable head drums conforming to marginal 3520 for steel, marginal 3521 for aluminium, or marginal 3526 for plastics material, or in removable head jerricans conforming to marginal 3522 for steel or marginal 3526 for plastics material.

(3) White or yellow phosphorus of 11° (a) shall be packed in:

(a) non-removable head steel drums conforming to marginal 3520;

(b) non-removable head steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522;

(c) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538 with metal inner packagings.

(4) Aluminium borohydride contained in devices of 17° (a) shall be packed in:

(a) removable-head steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) removable-head aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) removable-head plastics drums conforming to marginal 3526, or

(d) steel or aluminium boxes conforming to marginal 3532.

2436 (1) Substances classified under (b) of the various items shall be packed in:

(a) steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) plastics drums and jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537, or

(f) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538, or

(g) composite packagings (glass, porcelain, stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539, or

(h) metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622, or

(i) rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624, or

(j) composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625, with the exception of types 11HZ2 and 31HZ2.

(2) Solids as defined in marginal 2430 (10) may also be packed in:

(a) plywood drums conforming to marginal 3523 or in fibre drums conforming to marginal 3525, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags, or

(b) plastics film bags conforming to marginal 3535, provided that they make up a full load or are loaded on pallets.

(3) Fishmeal of 2° (b) may also be packed in flexible IBCs conforming to marginal 3623, with the exception of types 13H1, 13L1 and 13M1, provided that they make up a full load or the flexible IBCs are loaded on pallets.

2437 (1) Substances classified under (c) of the various items shall be packed in:

(a) steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) plastics drums and jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537, or

(f) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538, or

(g) composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539, or

(h) light-gauge metal packagings conforming to marginal 3540.

Note: Metal packagings for substances of 4° shall be so constructed and closed as to yield when the internal pressure reaches a value not greater than 300 kPa (3 bar).

(2) With the exception of substances of 4°, substances may also be packed in:

(a) metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622, or

(b) rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624, or

(c) composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625 with the exception of types 11HZ2 and 31HZ2.

(3) Solids as defined in marginal 2430 (10) may also be packed in:

(a) plywood drums conforming to marginal 3523, or in fibre drums conforming to marginal 3525, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags, or

(b) plastics film bags conforming to marginal 3535.

(4) With the exception of substances of 4°, solids as defined in marginal 2430 may also be packed in flexible IBCs conforming to marginal 3623, with the exception of types 13H1, 13L1 and 13M1.

(5) Substances of 2° (c) and 3° (c) may also be packed in untested packagings, which need only meet the provisions of marginal 3500 (1), (2) and (4) to (7). Cotton waste with an oil content less than 5 % (mass) and cotton of 3° (c) may also be carried in firmly secured balls.

2438 (1) The openings of receptacles for the carriage of liquids having a viscosity, at 23 °C, of less than 200 mm2/s, with the exception of glass ampoules and pressure cylinders, shall be hermetically sealed by means of two devices in series, one of which shall be screwed shut or secured in an equivalent manner.

Note: For IBCs, however, see marginal 3621 (8).

(2) Steel drums conforming to marginal 3520 containing wetted metal catalyst of 12° (b) shall be fitted with a vent in accordance with marginal 3500 (8).

2439-

2440

3. Mixed packing

2441 (1) Substances classified under the same item may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538.

(2) Substances of 6° (a), 11°, 17° (a), 19° (a), and 31° to 33° shall not be packed together with substances or articles of other items of Class 4.2, with substances or articles of other classes or with goods which are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

(3) With the exception of the substances referred to in (2) above, substances of Class 4.2, in quantities not exceeding 3 litres for liquids and/or 6 kg for solids, per receptacle, may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538, with substances or articles of other classes - provided that mixed packing is also permitted for substances and articles of those classes - and/or with goods which are not subject to the provisions of this Directive, provided they do not react dangerously with one another.

For substances classified in group (a), the net quantity per package shall not exceed 3 kg for solids 3 litres for liquids.

(4) The following shall be considered dangerous reactions:

(a) combustion and/or giving off considerable heat,

(b) emission of flammable and/or toxic gases,

(c) formation of corrosive liquids,

(d) formation of unstable substances.

(5) The provisions of marginals 2001 (7), 2002 (6) and (7) and 2432 shall be observed.

(6) A package shall not weigh more than 100 kg when wooden or fibreboard cases are used.

4. Marking and danger labels on packages (see Appendix A.9)

Marking

2442 (1) Each package shall be clearly and durably marked with the identification number of the goods to be entered in the transport document, preceded by the letters 'UN`.

Danger labels

(2) Packages containing substances of Class 4.2 shall bear a label conforming to model No 4.2.

(3) Packages containing substances of 17° (a), maneb or maneb preparations of 16° (c), and substances of 31° to 33° shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 4.3.

(4) Packages containing substances of 7°, 8°, 11°, 18° and 19° shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 6.1.

(5) Packages containing substances of 9°, 10°, 15°, 20° and 21° shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 8.

(6) Packages containing fragile receptacles not visible from the outside shall bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 12.

(7) Packages containing liquids, the closures of which are not visible from the outside, packages containing receptacles fitted with vents or receptacles fitted with vents without outer packaging and packages containing phosphorus covered with water of 11° (a) shall bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 11.

2443

B. Particulars in the transport document

2444 The description of the goods in the transport document shall conform to one of the identification numbers and names printed in italics in marginal 2431.

If the substance is not mentioned by name, but is assigned to an n.o.s. entry, the description of the goods shall consist of the identification number and the n.o.s designation, followed by the chemical or technical name of the substance ().

The description of the goods shall be followed by particulars of the class, the item number, if applicable, the letter, and the initials 'ADR` (or 'RID`), e.g. '4.2. 13° (b), ADR`.

For the carriage of wastes [see marginal 2000 (5)] the description of the goods shall be: 'Waste containing `, the component(s) used for the classification of the waste under marginal 2002 (8) to be entered under its/their chemical name(s), e.g. 'Waste earth containing 1381 white phosphorus under water 4.2, 11° (a) ADR`.

For the carriage of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) containing several components subject to the provisions of this Directive, it will not in general be necessary to refer to more than two components which predominantly contribute to the danger or dangers of the solutions and mixtures.

If a named substance in accordance with marginal 2430 (9) is not subject to the conditions of this Class, the consignor may enter in the transport document: 'Not goods of Class 4.2`.

For the solutions and mixtures containing only one component subject to the provisions of this Directive, the word 'solution` or 'mixture` shall be added as part of the name in the transport document [see marginal 2002 (8) (a)].

When a solid is handed over for carriage in the molten state the description of the goods shall further specify 'molten`, unless the term already appears in the name.

2445-

2451

C. Empty packagings

2452 (1) Uncleaned empty packagings, including empty IBCs of 41° shall be closed in the same manner and be leakproof to the same degree as if they were full.

(2) Uncleaned empty packagings, including empty IBCs of 41° shall bear the same danger labels as if they were full.

(3) The description of the goods in the transport document shall conform to one of the names printed in italics in 41°, e.g. 'Empty packaging, 4.2, 41°, ADR`. In the case of empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks, empty tank-containers or empty small containers, uncleaned, this description shall be accompanied by the words 'Last load` and the name and item number of the goods last loaded e.g. 'Last load: 1381 white phosphorus, dry, 11° (a)`.

2453-

2469

CLASS 4.3 SUBSTANCES WHICH, IN CONTACT WITH WATER, EMIT FLAMMABLE GASES

1. List of substances

2470 (1) Among the substances covered by the title of Class 4.3, those which are listed in marginal 2471 or covered by a collective heading of that marginal are subject to the conditions set out in marginals 2470 (2) to 2492 and to the provisions of this Annex and of Annex B. They are then considered as substances of this Directive.

Note: For the quantities of substances listed in marginal 2471 which are not subject to the provisions for this Class, either in this Annex or in Annex B, see marginal 2471a.

(2) The title of Class 4.3 covers substances which react with water to emit flammable gases liable to form explosive mixtures with air.

Note: The term 'water-reactive` used in the n.o.s. entries of marginal 2471 denotes a substance which in contact with water emits flammable gases.

(3) Substances of Class 4.3 are subdivided as follows:

A. Organic substances, organometallic compounds and substances in organic solvents, which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases;

B. Inorganic substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases;

C. Empty packagings.

Substances of Class 4.3 classified under the various items of marginal 2471 shall be assigned to one of the following groups, designated by the letter (a), (b) or (c), according to their degree of danger:

(a) very dangerous,

(b) dangerous,

(c) less dangerous.

(4) Assignment of substances not mentioned by name to marginal 2471, 1°, 3°, 11°, 13°, 14°, 16° and 20° to 25°, and within these items to the letters, shall be based on the results of the test procedure in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3340 and 3341; experience shall also be taken into account when it leads to a more strictly based assignment.

(5) When substances not specifically named are assigned to the items of marginal 2471 on the basis of the test procedure in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3340 and 3341, the following criteria apply:

A substance shall be assigned to Class 4.3 if:

(a) during any stage of the test the gas emitted ignites spontaneously, or

(b) the rate of emission of flammable gas per hour is equal to or greater than 1 litre per kilogramme per hour of the substance to be tested.

(6) When substances not specifically named are assigned to the letters of the items in marginal 2471 on the basis of the test procedure in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3340 and 3341, the following criteria shall apply:

(a) Any substance which reacts vigorously with water at ambient temperature to produce gas which ignites spontaneously, or one which reacts readily with water at ambient temperatures such that the rate of emission of flammable gas within one minute is equal to or greater than 10 litres per kilogramme of substance, shall be assigned to letter (a);

(b) Any substance which reacts readily with water at ambient temperature such that the maximum rate of emission of flammable gas per hour is equal to or greater than 20 litres per kilogramme of substance, and which does not meet the criteria of letter (a), shall be assigned to letter (b);

(c) Any substance which reacts slowly with water at ambient temperature such that the maximum rate of emission of flammable gas per hour is equal to or greater than 1 litre per kilogramme of substance, and which does not meet the criteria of letters (a) or (b), shall be assigned to letter (c).

(7) If substances of Class 4.3, as a result of admixtures, come into different categories of risk from those to which the substances of marginal 2471 belong, these mixtures shall be assigned to the items and letters to which they belong on the basis of their actual degree of danger.

Note: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) see also marginal 2002 (8).

(8) When substances are specifically named under more than one letter of the same item of marginal 2471, the relevant letter may be determined on the basis of the results of the test procedure in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3340 and 3341, and the criteria set out in paragraph (6).

(9) On the basis of the test procedure in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3340 and 3341, and the criteria set out in paragraph (6), it may also be determined whether the nature of a specifically named substance is such that the substance is not subject to the provisions for this Class (see marginal 2484).

(10) Substances and mixtures of substances having a melting point hìgher than 45 °C shall be considered as solids for the purposes of the conditions of packing in marginals 2474 (2), 2475 (3) and 2476 (2).

(11) Water-reactive solids, flammable, assigned to identification number 3132, water-reactive solids, oxidizing, assigned to identification number 3133 and water-reactive solids, self-heating, assigned to identification number 3135 of the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods shall not be accepted for carriage (see, however, marginal 2002 (8), footnote (¹) in the table in paragraph 2.3.1).

A. Organic substances, organometallic compounds and substances in organic solvents

which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases

2471 1° Chlorosilanes:

(a) 1183 ethyldichlorosilane, 1242 methyldichlorosilane, 1295 trichlorosilane, 2988 chlorosilanes, water-reactive, flammable, corrosive, n.o.s.

Note: 1. Special packing conditions are applicable to these substances [see marginal 2473 (1)].

2. Chlorosilanes having a flash point of less than 23 °C and which, in contact with water, do not emit flammable gases are substances of Class 3 [see marginal 2301, 21° (a)].

3. Chlorosilanes having a flash point equal to or greater than 23 °C and which, in contact with water, do not emit flammable gases are substances of Class 8 (see marginal 2801, 37°).

2° The following boron trifluoride complex:

(a) 2965 boron trifluoride dimethyletherate.

3 ° Organometallic compounds and their solutions:

(a) 1928 methylmagnesium bromide in ethyl ether, 3207 organometallic compound, water-reactive, flammable, n.o.s. or 3207 solution of organometallic compound, water-reactive, flammable, n.o.s. or 3207 dispersion of organometallic, compound, water-reactive, flammable, n.o.s.;

Note: Special packing conditions are applicable to these substances [see marginal 2473 (2)].

(b) 3207 organometallic compound, water-reactive, flammable, n.o.s. or 3207 solution of organometallic compound, water-reactive, flammable, n.o.s. or 3207 dispersion of organometallic compound, water-reactive, flammable, n.o.s.;

(c) 3207 organometallic compound, water-reactive, flammable, n.o.s. or 3207 solution of organometallic compound, water-reactive, flammable, n.o.s. or 3207 dispersion of organometallic compound, water-reactive, flammable, n.o.s.

Note: 1. Organometallic compounds and their solutions which ignite spontaneously are substances of Class 4.2 (see marginal 2431, 31° to 33°).

2. Flammable solutions with organometallic compounds in concentrations which, in contact with water, neither emit flammable gases in dangerous quantities nor ignite spontaneously are substances of Class 3.

B. Inorganic substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases

Note: 1. The term 'alkali metals` includes the elements lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium and caesium.

2. The term 'alkaline-earth` metals includes the elements magnesium, calcium, strontium and barium.

11° Alkali metals and alkaline-earth metals and their alloys and metallic compounds:

(a) 1389 alkali metal amalgam, 1391 alkali metal dispersion or 1391 alkaline-earth metal dispersion, 1392 alkaline-earth metal amalgam, 1407 caesium, 1415 lithium, 1420 potassium metal alloys, 1422 potassium sodium alloys, 1423 rubidium, 1428 sodium, 2257 potassium, 1421 alkali metal alloy, liquid, n.o.s.;

(b) 1400 barium, 1401 calcium, 1393 alkaline-earth metal alloy, n.o.s.;

(c) 2950 magnesium granules, coated with a particle size not less than 149 microns.

Note: 1. Alkaline-earth metals and alkaline-earth metal alloys in pyrophoric form are substances of Class 4.2 (see marginal 2431, 12°).

2. 1869 magnesium or 1869 magnesium alloys containing more than 50 % magnesium as pellets, shavings or strips, are substances of Class 4.1 [see marginal 2401, 13° (c)].

3. 1418 magnesium powder and 1418 magnesium alloys in powder form are substances of 14°.

12° Silicon alloys and metal silicides:

(b) 1405 calcium silicide, 1417 lithium silicon, 2624 magnesium silicide, 2830 lithium ferrosilicon;

(c) 1405 calcium silicide, 2844 calcium manganese silicon.

Note: For substances of (c) see also marginal 2471a.

13° Other metals, metal alloys and mixtures, non-toxic, which in contact with water, emit flammable gases:

(a) 3208 metallic substance, water-reactive, n.o.s.;

(b) 1396 aluminium powder, uncoated, 3078 cerium, turnings or gritty powder, 3170 aluminium processing by-products, 3208 metallic substance, water-reactive, n.o.s.;

(c) 1398 aluminium silicon powder, uncoated, 1435 zinc ashes, 3170 aluminium processing by-products, 3208 metallic substance, water-reactive, n.o.s.

Note: 1. Dust and powder of metals in pyrophoric form are substances of Class 4.2 (see marginal 2431, 12°).

2. Aluminium silicon powder, coated, is not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

3. 1333 cerium in slabs, rods or ingots is a substance of Class 4.1 [see marginal 2401, 13° (b)].

14° Metals and metal alloys in the form of powder or in any other form, which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases and are capable of self-heating:

(a) 1436 zinc powder or 1436 zinc dust, 3209 metallic substance, water-reactive, self-heating, n.o.s.;

(b) 1418 magnesium powder or 1418 magnesium alloys powder, 1436 zinc powder or 1436 zinc dust, 3209 metallic substance, water-reactive, self-heating, n.o.s.;

(c) 1436 zinc powder or 1436 zinc dust, 3209 metallic substance, water-reactive, self-heating, n.o.s.

Note: 1. Metals and metal alloys in pyrophoric form are substances of Class 4.2 (see marginal 2431, 12°).

2. Metals and metal alloys which, in contact with water, do not emit flammable gases and are not pyrophoric or self-heating, but which are easily ignited, are substances of Class 4.1 (see marginal 2401, 13°).

15° Metals and metal alloys, toxic:

(b) 1395 aluminium ferrosilicon powder;

(c) 1408 ferrosilicon with 30 % or more but less than 90 % silicon.

Note: Ferrosilicon containing less than 30 % or not less than 90 % (mass) silicon is not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

16° Metal hydrides:

(a) 1404 calcium hydride, 1410 lithium aluminium hydride, 1411 lithium aluminium hydride, ethereal, 1413 lithium borohydride, 1414 lithium hydride, 1426 sodium borohydride, 1427 sodium hydride, 1870 potassium borohydride, 2010 magnesium hydride, 2463 aluminium hydride, 1409 metal hydrides, water-reactive, n.o.s.;

(b) 2805 lithium hydride, solid, castings, 2835 sodium aluminium hydride, 1409 metal hydrides, water-reactive, n.o.s.

Note: 1. 1871 titanium hydride and 1437 zirconium hydride are substances of Class 4.1 (see marginal 2401, 14°).

2. 2870 aluminium borohydride is a substance of Class 4.2 [see marginal 2431, 17° (a)].

17° Metal carbides and metal nitrides:

(a) 2806 lithium nitride;

(b) 1394 aluminium carbide, 1402 calcium carbide.

18° Metal phosphides, toxic:

(a) 1360 calcium phosphide, 1397 aluminium phosphide, 1419 magnesium aluminium phosphide, 1432 sodium phosphide, 1433 stannic phosphides, 1714 zinc phosphide, 2011 magnesium phosphide, 2012 potassium phosphide, 2013 strontium phosphide.

Note: 1. Compounds of phosphorus with heavy metals such as iron, copper, etc., are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

2. 3048 aluminium phosphide pesticides, with additives inhibiting the emission of flammable gases are substances of Class 6.1 [see marginal 2601, 43°, (a)].

19° Metal amides and metal cyanamides:

(b) 1390 alkali metal amides;

(c) 1403 calcium cyanamide with more than 0.1 % (mass) calcium carbide.

Note: 1. Calcium cyanamide containing not more than 0.1 % (mass) calcium carbide is not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

2. 2004 magnesium diamide is a substance of Class 4.2 [see marginal 2431, 16° (b)].

20° Inorganic solid substances and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, non-toxic and non-corrosive, and which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 2813 water-reactive solid, n.o.s.;

(b) 1340 phosphorus pentasulphide (P2S5) free from yellow and white phosphorus, 2813 water-reactive solid, n.o.s.;

Note: Phosphorus pentasulphide not free from yellow and white phosphorus is not to be accepted for carriage.

(c) 2968 maneb [manganese ethylene 1,2-bis(dithiocarbamate)], stabilized against self-heating, or 2968 maneb preparation, stabilized against self-heating, 2813 water-reactive solid, n.o.s.

Note: 2210 maneb or 2210 maneb preparations in self-heating form are substances of Class 4.2 [see marginal 2431, 16° (c)], however, see also marginal 2471a, (c).

21° Inorganic liquid substances and solutions of inorganic substances (such as preparations and wastes) which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, non-toxic and non-corrosive, and which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3148 water-reactive liquid, n.o.s.;

Note: Special packing conditions are applicable to this substance [see marginal 2473 (2)].

(b) 3148 water-reactive liquid, n.o.s.;

(c) 3148 water-reactive liquid, n.o.s.

22° Inorganic solid substances and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, toxic, and which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3134 water-reactive solid, toxic, n.o.s.;

(b) 3134 water-reactive solid, toxic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3134 water-reactive solid, toxic, n.o.s.

Note: For toxicity criteria, see marginal 2600 (3).

23° Inorganic liquid substances and solutions of inorganic substances (such as preparations and wastes) which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, toxic, and which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3130 water-reactive liquid, toxic, n.o.s.;

Note: Special packing conditions are applicable to this substance [see marginal 2473 (2)].

(b) 3130 water-reactive liquid, toxic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3130 water-reactive liquid, toxic, n.o.s.

Note: For toxicity criteria, see marginal 2600 (3).

24° Inorganic solid substances and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, corrosive, and which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3131 water-reactive solid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(b) 3131 water-reactive solid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(c) 3131 water-reactive solid, corrosive. n.o.s.

Note: For corrosivity criteria, see marginal 2800 (3).

25° Inorganic liquid substances and solutions of inorganic substances (such as preparations and wastes) which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, corrosive, and which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3129 water-reactive liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

Note: Special packing conditions are applicable to this substance [see marginal 2473 (2)].

(b) 3129 water-reactive liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(c) 3129 water-reactive liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.

Note: For corrosivity criteria, see marginal 2800 (3).

C. Empty packagings

31° Empty packagings, including empty intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks and empty tank-containers, uncleaned, as well as empty vehicles for carriage in bulk and empty small bulk containers, uncleaned, which have contained substances of Class 4.3.

2471a Substances of the various items carried under the following conditions are not subject to the provisions for this Class contained in this Annex and in Annex B:

(a) Substances classified under (a) of each item are not covered by this marginal;

(b) Substances classified under (b) of each item:

liquids: up to 500 ml per inner packaging;

aluminium powder of 13° (b): up to 1 kg per inner packaging;

other solids: up to 500 g per inner packaging;

(c) Substances classified under (c) of each item:

liquids: up to 1 litre per inner packaging;

solids: up to 1 kg per inner packaging.

These quantities of substances shall be carried in combination packagings which at least meet the conditions of marginal 3538. A package shall not weigh more than 30 kg.

The 'General packing conditions` of marginal 3500 (1), (2) and (5) to (7) shall be observed.

2. Provisions

A. Packages

1. General conditions of packing

2472 (1) Packagings shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.5, unless special conditions for the packing of certain substances are prescribed in marginal 2473.

Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.6.

(2) Packagings shall be hermetically closed so as to prevent any infiltration of humidity or any loss of the contents. They shall not have vents in accordance with marginals 3500 (8) or 3601 (6).

(3) In accordance with the provisions of marginals 2470 (3) and 3511 (2) or 3611 (2) respectively, the following shall be used:

- packagings of packing group I, marked with the letter 'X`, for very dangerous substances classified under (a) of each item,

- packagings of packing group II or I, marked with the letter 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs of packing group II, marked with the letter 'Y`, for dangerous substances classified under (b) of each item,

- packagings of packing group III, II or I, marked with the letter 'Z`, 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs of packing group III or II, marked with the letter 'Z` or 'Y`, for less dangerous substances classified under (c) of each item.

Note: For the carriage of substances of Class 4.3 in tank-vehicles, demountable tanks or tank-containers, and for carriage in bulk, see Annex B.

2. Special conditions for packing of certain substances

2473 (1) Chlorosilanes of 1° (a) shall be packed in corrosion-resistant steel receptacles with a maximum capacity of 450 litres. The receptacles shall be subjected to the initial test and periodic tests every five years at a pressure of not less than 0.4 MPa (4 bar) (gauge pressure). The closing device of the receptacle shall be protected by a cap. The maximum permissible mass of filling per litre of capacity for trichlorosilane, ethyldichlorosilane and methyldichlorosilane shall not exceed 1.14 kg, 0.93 kg or 0.95 kg respectively, if the filling is carried out by mass; if the filling is by volume, the degree of filling shall not exceed 85 %. Receptacles shall also carry a plate showing the following particulars in a durable form:

- chlorosilanes, Class 4.3;

- description of the chlorosilane(s) accepted for carriage;

- tare () of the receptacle, including accessories;

- test pressure () (gauge pressure);

- date (month, year) of the last test undergone;

- stamp of the expert who carried out the test;

- capacity () of the receptacle;

- maximum degree of filling allowed by mass () for each substance accepted for carriage.

(2) Substances of 3° (a), 21° (a), 23° (a) and 25° (a) shall be packed in hermetically closing metal receptacles which are not affected by the contents and have a capacity of not more than 450 litres. The receptacles shall be subjected to the initial test and periodic tests every five years at a pressure of at least 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure).

The receptacles shall not be filled to more than 90 % of their capacity; however, a space of 5 % shall remain empty for safety when the liquid is at an average temperature of 50 °C. During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas, the gauge pressure of which shall be not less than 50 kPa (0.5 bar). The receptacles shall carry a plate showing the following particulars in a durable form:

- substance or substances () accepted for carriage;

- tare () of the receptacle, including accessories;

- test pressure () (gauge pressure);

- date (month, year) of the last test undergone;

- stamp of the expert who carried out the test;

- capacity () of the receptacle;

- maximum mass of filling allowed ().

(3) Substances referred to in paragraph (2) above may also be packed combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538 with a glass inner packaging and a steel or aluminium outer packaging conforming to marginal 3532.

Receptacles shall not be filled to more than 90 % of their capacity. A package shall contain only a single inner packaging. Such combination packagings shall conform to a design type which has been tested and approved in accordance with Appendix A.5 for packing group I.

2474 (1) Substances classified under (a) of 2°, 11°, 13°, 14°, 16° to 18°, 20°, 22° and 24°, shall be packed in:

(a) non-removable head steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) non-removable head aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) non-removable head steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) non-removable head plastics drums with a maximum capacity of 60 litres and non-removable head plastics jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537, or

(f) combination packagings with glass, plastics material or metal inner receptacles conforming to marginal 3538.

(2) Solids as defined in marginal 2470 (10) may also be packed in:

(a) removable head drums conforming to marginal 3520 for steel, marginal 3521 for aluminium, marginal 3526 for plastics material, or in removable head jerricans conforming to marginal 3522 for steel or marginal 3526 for plastics material, or

(b) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538 with one or more sift-proof inner bags.

2475 (1) Substances classified under (b) of the various items shall be packed in:

(a) steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) plastics drums and jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537, or

(f) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538, or

(g) composite packagings (glass, porcelain, stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539.

(2) Substances of 12° to 17° and 20° may also be packed in:

(a) metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622, or

(b) rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624, or

(c) composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625, with the exception of types 11HZ2 and 31HZ2.

(3) Solids as defined in marginal 2470 (10) may also be packed in:

(a) plywood drums conforming to marginal 3523 or in fibre drums conforming to marginal 3525, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags, or

(b) plastics film bags conforming to marginal 3535, provided that they make up a full load or are loaded on pallets.

2476 (1) Substances classified under (c) of the various items shall be packed in:

(a) steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) plastics drums and jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537, or

(f) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538, or

(g) composite packagings (glass, porcelain, stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539, or

(h) light gauge metal packagings conforming to marginal 3540, or

(i) metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622, or

(j) rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624, or

(k) composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625 with the exception of types 11HZ2 and 31HZ2.

(2) Solids as defined in marginal 2470 (10) may also be packed in:

(a) plywood drums conforming to marginal 3523 or fibre drums conforming to marginal 3525, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags, or

(b) plastics film bags conforming to marginal 3535, or

(c) flexible IBCs conforming to marginal 3623, with the exception of types 13H1, 13L1 and 13M1.

Note: Substances of 15° (c) may also be packed in packagings, which need only meet the requirement of marginal 3500 (1), (2) and (5) to (7), and they may in addition be packed in IBCs of type 13H1.

2477 The openings of receptacles for substances of 23° shall be tightly closed by means of two devices in series, one of which shall be screwed or secured in an equivalent manner.

Note: For IBCs, see, however, marginal 3621 (8).

2478-

2480

3. Mixed packing

2481 (1) Substances classified under the same item may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538.

(2) Substances classified under (a) of the various items may not be packed together with substances of the various items of Class 4.3, with substances and articles of other classes or with goods which are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

(3) With the exception of the substances referred to in (2), substances of the various items of Class 4.3, in quantities not exceeding 3 litres for liquids and/or 6 kg for solids per receptacle, may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538 with each other, with substances or articles of other classes - provided that mixed packing is also permitted for substances and articles of those classes - and/or with goods not subject to the provisions of this Directive, provided they do not react dangerously with one another.

(4) The following shall be considered dangerous reactions:

(a) combustion and/or giving off considerable heat;

(b) emission of flammable and/or toxic gases;

(c) formation of corrosive liquids;

(d) formation of unstable substances.

(5) The provisions of marginals 2001 (7), 2002 (6) and (7) and 2472 shall be observed.

(6) If wooden or fibreboard cases are used, a package shall not weigh more than 100 kg.

4. Marking and danger labels on packages (see Appendix A.9)

Marking

2482 (1) Each package shall be clearly and durably marked with the identification number of the goods to be entered in the transport document, preceded by the letters 'UN`.

Danger labels

(2) Packages containing substances of Class 4.3 shall bear a label conforming to model No 4.3.

(3) Packages containing substances of 1° and 2° shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to models Nos. 3 and 8.

(4) Packages containing substances of 3° and lithium aluminium hydride, ethereal, of 16° (a) shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 3.

(5) Packages containing substances of 14° shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 4.2.

(6) Packages containing substances of 15°, 18°, 22° and 23° shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 6.1.

(7) Packages containing substances of 24° and 25° shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 8.

(8) Packages containing fragile receptacles not visible from the outside shall, in addition, bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 12.

(9) Packages containing liquids in receptacles the closures of which are not visible from the outside shall bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 11.

2483

B. Particulars in the transport document

2484 The description of the goods in the transport document shall conform to one of the identification numbers and names printed in italics in marginal 2471.

If the substance is not mentioned by name, but is assigned to an n.o.s. entry, the description of the goods shall consist of the identification number and the n.o.s. designation, followed by the chemical or technical name of substance ().

The description of the goods shall be followed by particulars of the class, the item number, if applicable, the letter, and the initials 'ADR` (or 'RID`) e.g. '4.3, 1° (a), ADR`.

For the carriage of wastes [see marginal 2000 (5)], the description of the goods shall be: 'Waste containing `, the component(s) used for the classification of the waste under marginal 2002 (8) to be entered under its/their chemical name(s), e.g. 'Waste, earth containing 1428 sodium, 4.3, 11° (a), ADR.`

For the carriage of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) containing several components subject to the provisions of this Directive, it will not in general be necessary to refer to more than two components which predominantly contribute to the danger or dangers of the solutions and mixtures.

If a named substance in accordance with marginal 2470 (9) is not subject to the conditions of this Class, the consignor may enter in the transport document: 'Not goods of Class 4.3`.

For the solutions and mixtures containing only one component subject to the provisions of this Directive, the word 'solution` or 'mixture` shall be added as part of the name in the transport document [see marginal 2002 (8) (a)].

When a solid is handed over for carriage in the molten state the description of the goods shall further specify 'molten`, unless the term already appears in the name.

2485-

2491

C. Empty packagings

2492 (1) Uncleaned empty packagings, including empty IBCs, of 31° shall be closed in the same manner and be leakproof to the same degree as if they were full.

(2) Uncleaned empty packagings, including empty IBCs, of 31° shall bear the same danger labels as if they were full.

(3) The description in the transport document shall conform to one of the names printed in italics in 31°, e.g. 'Empty packaging, 4.3, 31°, this Directive`.

In the case of empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks, empty tank-containers and empty small containers, uncleaned, this description shall be completed by the words 'Last load` together with the name and item number of the goods last loaded, e.g. 'Last load: 1295 trichlorosilane, 1° (a)`.

2493-

2499

CLASS 5.1 OXIDIZING SUBSTANCES

1. List of substances

2500 (1) Among the substances covered by the title of Class 5.1, those which are listed in marginal 2501 or are covered by a collective heading in that marginal are subject to the conditions set out in marginals 2500 (2) to 2522 and to the provisions of this Annex and of Annex B. They are then considered as substances of this Directive.

Note: For the quantities of substances listed in marginal 2501 which are not subject to the provisions for this Class, either in this Annex or in Annex B, see marginal 2501a.

(2) The title of Class 5.1 covers substances which, while in themselves not necessarily combustible, may, generally by yielding oxygen, cause or contribute to the combustion of other material.

(3) The substances of Class 5.1 are subdivided as follows:

A. Liquid oxidizing substances and their aqueous solutions

B. Solid oxidizing substances and their aqueous solutions

C. Empty packagings

Substances of Class 5.1 (other than the substances of 5° and 20°) which are classified under the various items of marginal 2501 shall be assigned to one of the following groups designated by the letter (a), (b) or (c) according to their degree of danger.

(a) highly oxidizing;

(b) oxidizing;

(c) slightly oxidizing.

(4) Solid oxidizing substances not specifically named may be assigned to Class 5.1 either on the basis of experience, or in accordance with the test method, procedure and criteria set out in Appendix A.3, marginals 3350 and 3351. In the event of divergence between test results and known experience, judgement based on known experience shall take precedence over test results. Liquid oxidizing substances not specifically named shall be assigned to Class 5.1 on the basis of experience.

(5) When substances not specifically named are assigned to the items of marginal 2501 on the basis of the test procedure in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3350 and 3351, the following criterion applies:

A substance shall be assigned to Class 5.1 if, in either concentration tested, the mean burning time of the sawdust, established from three tests, is equal to or less than that of the average of the three tests with ammonium persulphate mixture.

(6) When substances not specifically named are assigned to the letters of the items of marginal 2501 on the basis of the test procedure in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3350 and 3351, the following criteria apply:

- a substance shall be assigned to letter (a) when, in either concentration tested, it exhibits a burning time less than with potassium bromate;

- a substance shall be assigned to letter (b) when, in either concentration tested, it exhibits a burning time equal to or less than with potassium perchlorate and the criteria for letter (a) are not met;

- a substance shall be assigned to letter (c) when, in either concentration tested, it exhibits a burning time equal to or less than with ammonium persulphate and the criteria for groups letters (a) or (b) are not met.

(7) If substances of Class 5.1, as a result of admixtures, come into different categories of risk from those to which the substances of marginal 2501 belong, these mixtures or solutions shall be assigned to the items and letters to which they belong on the basis of their actual degree of danger.

Note: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), see also marginal 2002 (8).

(8) When substances are specifically named under more than one letter of the same item of marginal 2501, the relevant letter may be determined on the basis of the results of the test procedure in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3350 and 3351, and the criteria set out in paragraph (6).

(9) On the basis of the test procedure in accordance with Appendix A.3, marginals 3350 and 3351, and the criteria set out in paragraph (6), it may also be determined whether the nature of a specifically named substance is such that the substance is not subject to the provisions for this Class (see marginal 2514).

(10) For the packaging requirements of marginals 2506 (2), 2507 (2) and 2508 (2), substances or mixtures of substances having a melting point above 45 °C are considered to be solids.

(11) The chemically unstable substances of Class 5.1 shall be accepted for carriage only if the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition or polymerization during carriage. To this end it shall in particular be ensured that receptacles do not contain any material liable to promote these reactions.

(12) Oxidizing solids, self-heating, assigned to identification number 3100, oxidizing solids, water-reactive, assigned to identification number 3121 and oxidizing solids, flammable, assigned to identification number 3137 of the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods shall not be accepted for carriage (see, however, marginal 2002 (8), footnote (¹) to the table contained in paragraph 2.3.1).

A. Liquid oxidizing substances and their aqueous solutions

2501 1° Hydrogen peroxide and its solutions, or mixtures of hydrogen peroxide with another liquid in aqueous solution:

a) 2015 hydrogen peroxide, stabilized, or 2015 hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution, stabilized with more than 60 % hydrogen peroxide;

Notes: 1. Special packing conditions are applicable to these substances (see marginal 2503).

2. Hydrogen peroxide, not stabilized or hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solutions, not stabilized containing more than 60 % hydrogen peroxide, are not to be accepted for carriage.

b) 2014 hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution with not less than 20 % but not more than 60 % hydrogen peroxide (stabilized as necessary); 3149 hydrogen peroxide and peroxyacetic acid mixture, stabilized, with acid(s), water and not more than 5 % peroxyacetic acid;

Note: This mixture of hydrogen peroxide and peroxyacetic acid (No 3149) shall, in laboratory testing (), neither detonate in the cavitated state nor deflagrate at all and shall show no effect when heated under confinement nor any explosive power. The formulation shall be thermally stable (self-accelerating decomposition temperature 60 °C or higher for a 50 kg package), and a liquid compatible with peroxyacetic acid shall be used for desensitization. Formulations not meeting these criteria are to be regarded as substances of Class 5.2 [see Appendix A.1, marginal 3106 (2) (g)].

c) 2984 hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solutions, with not less than 8 % but less than 20 % hydrogen peroxide (stabilized as necessary).

Note: Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solutions containing less than 8 % hydrogen peroxide are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

2° Tetranitromethane:

a) 1510 tetranitromethane.

Note: Tetranitromethane not free from combustible impurities is not to be accepted for carriage.

3° Perchloric acid solution:

a) 1873 perchloric acid in aqueous solution with more than 50 % but not more than 72 % acid, by mass.

Notes: 1. Perchloric acid solutions containing more than 72 % (mass) acid, or mixtures of perchloric acid with any liquid other than water, are not to be accepted for carriage.

2. 1802 perchloric acid with not more than 50 %, by mass, in aqueous solution, acid is a substance of Class 8 [see marginal 2801, 4° (b)].

4° Chloric acid solution:

b) 2626 chloric acid, aqueous solution, with not more than 10 % chloric acid.

Note: Chloric acid solution containing more than 10 % chloric acid or mixtures of chloric acid with any liquid other than water is not to be accepted for carriage.

5° The following halogenated compounds of fluorine:

1745 bromine pentafluoride, 1746 bromine trifluoride, 2495 iodine pentafluoride.

Notes: 1. Special packing conditions are applicable to these substances (see marginal 2504).

2. Other halogenated compounds of fluorine are not to be accepted for carriage as substances of Class 5.1.

B. Solid oxidizing substances and their aqueous solutions

11° Chlorates and mixtures of chlorates with borates or hygroscopic chlorides (such as magnesium chloride or calcium chloride):

b) 1452 calcium chlorate, 1458 chlorate and borate mixture, 1459 chlorate and magnesium chloride mixture, 1485 potassium chlorate, 1495 sodium chlorate, 1506 strontium chlorate, 1513 zinc chlorate, 2427 potassium chlorate, aqueous solution, 2428 sodium chlorate, aqueous solution, 2429 calcium chlorate, aqueous solution, 2721 copper chlorate, 2723 magnesium chlorate, 1461 chlorates, inorganic, n.o.s., 3210 chlorates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. See also 29°.

2. Ammonium chlorate and mixtures of a chlorate with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for carriage.

12° Ammonium perchlorate:

b) 1442 ammonium perchlorate.

Note: Classification of this substance shall be in accordance with the results of the tests under Appendix A.1. Depending on the particle size and the packaging of the substance, see also Class 1 (marginal 2101, 4°, No 0402).

13° Perchlorates (with the exception of ammonium perchlorate, see 12°):

b) 1455 calcium perchlorate, 1475 magnesium perchlorate, 1489 potassium perchlorate, 1502 sodium perchlorate, 1508 strontium perchlorate, 1481 perchlorates, inorganic, n.o.s., 3211 perchlorates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s.

Note: See also 29°.

14° Chlorites:

b) 1453 calcium chlorite, 1496 sodium chlorite, 1462 chlorites, inorganic, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. 1908 chlorite solution is a substance of Class 8 [see marginal 2801, 61° (b) or (c)].

2. Ammonium chlorite and mixtures of a chlorite with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for carriage.

15° Hypochlorites:

b) 1471 lithium hypochlorite, dry or 1471 lithium hypochlorite mixtures, 1748 calcium hypochlorite, dry or 1748 calcium hypochlorite mixture, dry with more than 39 % available chlorine (8,8 % available oxygen), 2880 calcium hypochlorite, hydrated or 2880 calcium hypochlorite, hydrated mixture with not less than 5,5 % but not more than 10 % water, 3212 hypochlorites, inorganic, n.o.s.;

c) 2208 calcium hypochlorite mixture, dry with more than 10 % but not more than 39 % available chlorine.

Notes: 1. Calcium hypochlorite mixtures, dry, containing not more than 10 % available chlorine are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

2. 1791 hypochlorite solution is a substance of Class 3 [see marginal 2801, 61° (b) or (c)].

3. Mixtures of a hypochlorite with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for carriage.

4. See also 29°.

16° Bromates:

b) 1473 magnesium bromate, 1484 potassium bromate, 1494 sodium bromate, 1450 bromates, inorganic, n.o.s., 3213 bromates, inorganic, aqueous solutions, n.o.s.;

c) 2469 zinc bromate, 3213 bromates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. Ammonium bromate and mixtures of a bromate with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for carriage.

2. See also 29°.

17° Permanganates:

b) 1456 calcium permanganate, 1490 potassium permanganate, 1503 sodium permanganate, 1515 zinc permanganate, 1482 permanganates, inorganic, n.o.s., 3214 permanganates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s.

Note: 1. Ammonium permanganate and mixtures of a permanganate with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for carriage.

2. See also 29°.

18° Persulphates:

c) 1444 ammonium persulphate, 1492 potassium persulphate, 1505 sodium persulphate, 3215 persulphates, inorganic, n.o.s., 3216 persulphates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s.

19° Percarbonates:

c) 2467 sodium percarbonates, 3217 percarbonates, inorganic, n.o.s.

Note: Sodium carbonate peroxyhydrate is not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

20° Ammonium nitrate solutions:

2426 ammonium nitrate, liquid, hot concentrated solution, in a concentration of more than 80 % but not more than 93 %, provided that:

1. the pH is between 5 and 7 measured in an aqueous solution of 10 % of the substance carried,

2. the solution does not contain more than 0,2 % combustible material or chlorine compounds in quantities such that the chlorine level exceeds 0,02 %.

Note: Aqueous solutions of ammonium nitrate, in a concentration not exceeding 80 %, are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

21° Ammonium nitrate and ammonium nitrate fertilizers ():

c) 1942 ammonium nitrate with not more than 0,2 % combustible substances, including any organic substance calculated as carbon, to the exclusion of any other added substance,

2067 ammonium nitrate fertilizers, type A1: uniform non-segregating mixtures of ammonium nitrate with added matter which is inorganic and chemically inert towards ammonium nitrate, with not less than 90 % ammonium nitrate and not more than 0,2 % combustible material (including organic material calculated as carbon), or with more than 70 % but less than 90 % ammonium nitrate and not more than 0,4 % total combustible material,

2068 ammonium nitrate fertilizers, type A2: uniform non-segregating mixtures of ammonium nitrate with calcium carbonate and/or dolomite, with more than 80 % but less than 90 % ammonium nitrate and not more than 0,4 % total combustible material,

2069 ammonium nitrate fertilizers, type A3: uniform non-segregating mixtures of ammonium nitrate and ammonium sulphate, with more than 45 % but not more than 70 % ammonium nitrate and not more than 0,4 % total combustible material,

2070 ammonium nitrate fertilizers, type A4: uniform non-segregating mixtures of nitrogen phosphate or nitrogen potash types or complete fertilizers of nitrogen phosphate potash type, with more than 70 % but less than 90 % ammonium nitrate and not more than 0,4 % total combustible material.

Notes: 1. Ammonium nitrate containing more than 0,2 % combustible substances (including any organic substance calculated as carbon) is not to be accepted for carriage unless it is a constituent of a substance or article of Class 1.

2. In determining the ammonium nitrate content, all nitrate ions for which a molecular equivalent of ammonium ions is present in the mixture shall be calculated as ammonium nitrate.

3. Fertilizers having an ammonium nitrate content or a content in combustible substances exceeding the values shown are not to be accepted for carriage except under the conditions applicable to Class 1. See also Note 5.

4. Fertilizers having an ammonium nitrate content below the limit values indicated are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

5. Ammonium nitrate fertilizers, uniform non-segregating mixtures of nitrogen phosphate or nitrogen potash types or complete fertilizers of nitrogen phosphate potash type whose molecular excess of nitrate ions over ammonium ions (calculated as potassium nitrate) is less than 10 % are not subject to the provisions of this Directive, provided that:

a) their ammonium nitrate content is not more than 70 % and their total content of combustible material is not more than 0,4 %, or

b) their ammonium nitrate content is not more than 45 % irrespective of their content of combustible material.

22° Nitrates (with the exception of substances of 20°, 21° and 29°):

b) 1493 silver nitrate, 1514 zinc nitrate, 1477 nitrates, inorganic, n.o.s., 3218 nitrates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s.;

c) 1438 aluminium nitrate, 1451 caesium nitrate, 1454 calcium nitrate, 1465 didymium nitrate, 1466 ferric nitrate, 1467 guanidine nitrate, 1474 magnesium nitrate, 1486 potassium nitrate, 1498 sodium nitrate, 1499 sodium nitrate and potassium nitrate mixtures, 1507 strontium nitrate, 2720 chromium nitrate, 2722 lithium nitrate, 2724 manganese nitrate, 2725 nickel nitrate, 2728 zirconium nitrate, 1477 nitrates, inorganic, n.o.s., 3218 nitrates, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. 1625 mercuric nitrate, 1627 mercurous nitrate and 2727 thallium nitrate are substances of Class 6.1 [see marginal 2601, 52° (b) and 68° (b)]. 2976 thorium nitrate, solid, 2980 uranyl nitrate hexahydrate solution and 2981 uranyl nitrate, solid are substances of Class 7 (see marginal 2704, schedules 5, 6, 9, 10, 11 and 13).

2. The commercial grade of calcium nitrate fertilizer, consisting mainly of a double salt (calcium nitrate and ammonium nitrate) and containing not more than 10 % ammonium nitrate and at least 12 % water of crystallization, is not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

23° Nitrites:

b) 1488 potassium nitrite, 1512 zinc ammonium nitrite, 2627 nitrites, inorganic, n.o.s., 3219 nitrites, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s.;

c) 1500 sodium nitrite, 2726 nickel nitrite, 3219 nitrites, inorganic, aqueous solution, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. Ammonium nitrite and mixtures of an inorganic nitrite with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for carriage.

2. Zinc ammonium nitrite is not permitted for carriage on sea routes.

24° Mixtures of nitrates and nitrites of items 22° and 23°.

b) 1487 potassium nitrate and sodium nitrite mixture.

Note: Mixtures with an ammonium salt are not to be accepted for carriage.

25° Peroxides and superoxides:

a) 1491 potassium peroxide, 1504 sodium peroxide, 2466 potassium superoxide, 2547 sodium superoxide;

b) 1457 calcium peroxide, 1472 lithium peroxide, 1476 magnesium peroxide, 1509 strontium peroxide, 1516 zinc peroxide, 1483 peroxides, inorganic, n.o.s.

Note: See also 29°.

26° Chloroisocyanuric acids and their salts:

b) 2465 dichloroisocyanuric acid, dry or 2465 dichloroisocyanuric acid salts, 2468 trichloroisocyanuric acid, dry.

Note: The dihydrated sodium salt of dichloroisocyanuric acid is not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

27° Solid oxidizing substances, non-toxic, non-corrosive, and mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 1479 oxidizing solid, n.o.s.;

(b) 1439 ammonium dichromate, 3247 sodium peroxoborate, anhydrous, 1479 oxidizing solid, n.o.s.;

(c) 1479 oxidizing solid, n.o.s.

28° Aqueous solutions of solid oxidizing substances, non-toxic, non-corrosive, and of mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(b) 3139 oxidizing liquid, n.o.s.;

(c) 3139 oxidizing liquid, n.o.s.

29° Solid oxidizing substances, toxic, and mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3087 oxidizing solid, toxic, n.o.s.;

(b) 1445 barium chlorate, 1446 barium nitrate, 1447 barium perchlorate, 1448 barium permanganate, 1449 barium peroxide, 1469 lead nitrate, 1470 lead perchlorate, 2464 beryllium nitrate, 2573 thallium chlorate, 2719 barium bromate, 2741 barium hypochlorite with more than 22 % available chlorine, 3087 oxidizing solid, toxic, n.o.s.;

(c) 1872 lead dioxide, 3087 oxidizing solid, toxic, n.o.s.

Note: For toxicity criteria, see marginal 2600 (3).

30° Aqueous solutions of solid oxidizing substances, toxic, and of mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3099 oxidizing liquid, toxic, n.o.s.;

(b) 3099 oxidizing liquid, toxic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3099 oxidizing liquid, toxic, n.o.s.

Note: For toxicity criteria, see marginal 2600 (3).

31° Solid oxidizing substances, corrosive, and mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3085 oxidizing solid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(b) 1463 chromium trioxide, anhydrous (solid chromic acid), 3085 oxidizing solid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(c) 1511 urea hydrogen peroxide, 3085 oxidizing solid, corrosive, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. For corrosivity criteria, see marginal 2800 (3).

2. 1755 chromic acid solution is a substance of Class 8 [see marginal 2801, 17° (b) or (c)].

32° Aqueous solutions of solid oxidizing substances, corrosive, and of mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3098 oxidizing liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(b) 3098 oxidizing liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(c) 3098 oxidizing liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.

Note: For corrosivity criteria, see marginal 2800 (3).

C. Empty packagings

Note: Empty packagings with residues from their previous contents adhering to the outside are not to be accepted for carriage.

41° Empty packagings, including empty intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks and empty tank-containers, uncleaned as well as empty vehicles for carriage in bulk and empty small bulk containers, uncleaned, which have contained substances of Class 5.1.

2501a Substances of the various items, carried in conformity with the following provisions, are subject neither to the provisions for this Class contained in this Annex nor to those contained in Annex B:

(a) Substances classified under (a) of each item are not covered by this marginal.

(b) Substances classified under (b) of each item:

liquids: not more than 500 ml per inner packaging;

solids: not more than 500 g per inner packaging;

(c) Substances classified under (c) of each item:

liquids: not more than 1 litre per inner packaging;

solids: not more than 1 kg per inner packaging.

These quantities of substances shall be carried in combination packagings which at least meet the conditions of marginal 3538. A package shall not weigh more than 30 kg.

The 'General conditions of packing` of marginal 3500(1), (2) and (5) to (7) shall be observed.

2. Provisions

A. Packages

1. General conditions of packing

2502 (1) Packagings shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.5, unless special conditions for the packing of certain substances are prescribed in marginals 2503 and 2504.

(2) Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.6.

(3) In accordance with the provisions of marginals 2500(3) and 3511(2) or 3611(2) respectively the following shall be used:

- packagings of packing group I, marked with the letter 'X` for the strongly oxidizing substances classified under the letter (a) of each item;

- packagings of packing group II or I, marked with the letter 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs of packing group II, marked with the letter 'Y`, for the oxidizing substances classified under the letter (b) of each item;

- packagings of packing group III, II or I, marked with the letter 'Z`, 'Y`, or 'X`, or IBCs of packing group III or II, marked with the letter 'Z` or 'Y`, for the slightly oxidizing substances classified under the letter (c) of each item.

Note: For the carriage of substances of Class 5.1 in tank-vehicles,demountable tanks or tank-containers, and for the carriage in bulk of solids of this Class, see Annex B.

2. Special conditions for packing of certain substances

2503 (1) Substances of 1° (a) shall be packed in:

(a) non-removable head drums of aluminium of at least 99.5 % purity, conforming to marginal 3521, or in non-removable head drums of special steel not liable to cause decomposition of the hydrogen peroxide, conforming to marginal 3520; or

(b) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538 with inner packagings of glass, plastics or metal not liable to cause decomposition of the hydrogen peroxide. An inner packaging made of glass or plastics shall not contain more than 2 litres: one of metal not more than 5 litres.

Packagings shall be fitted with a vent conforming to marginal 3500 (8). These combination packagings shall conform to a design type which has been tested and approved in accordance with Appendix A.5 for packing group I.

(2) Packagings shall not be filled to more than 90 % of their capacity.

(3) A package shall not weigh more than 125 kg.

2504 Substances of 5° shall be carried in cylinders with a capacity of not more than 150 litres, or receptacles with a capacity of not more than 1 000 litres (e.g. cylindrical receptacles with rolling hoops or spherical receptacles), made of carbon steel or of a suitable alloy steel.

(a) The receptacles shall comply with the relevant provisions of Class 2 [see marginals 2211 and 2213(1) and (2)]. The receptacles shall be designed for a calculation pressure of not less than 2,1 MPa (21 bar) (gauge pressure). The wall thickness of the receptacles shall not, however, be less than 3 mm. Before their first use, the receptacles shall be subjected to a hydraulic pressure test with a gauge pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar). This test shall be repeated every 8 years, accompanied by an internal inspection of the receptacles and a check of the fittings. The receptacles shall in addition be inspected for corrosion every 2 years by means of suitable measuring apparatus (e.g. ultrasound) and also with regard to the condition of the fittings. For the tests and inspections the relevant provisions of Class 2 shall be applicable (see marginals 2215 and 2216).

(b) The receptacles shall not be filled to more than 92 % of their capacity.

(c) The following particulars shall be shown on receptacles in a clearly legible and permanent manner:

- name of the manufacturer or the manufacturing mark and the number of the receptacle,

- description of the substance conforming to marginal 2501, 5°,

- tare mass of the receptacle and the permissible maximum mass of the filled receptacle,

- date (month, year) of the initial test and of the latest periodical test,

- stamp of the expert who carried out the tests and inspections.

2505 Ammonium nitrate solutions of 20° shall be carried only in tank-vehicles and demountable tanks (see Appendix B.1a) or in tank-containers (see Appendix B.1b).

2506 (1) Substances classified under (a) of the various items, other than 1° (a), of marginal 2501 shall be packed in:

(a) non-removable head steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) non-removable head aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) non-removable head steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) non-removable head plastics drums of a capacity not exceeding 60 litres or non-removable head plastics jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537, or

(f) combination packagings with inner packagings of glass, plastics or metal conforming to marginal 3538.

(2) Perchloric acid of 3° (a) may also be packed in composite packagings (glass) conforming to marginal 3539.

(3) Solid substances within the meaning of marginal 2500 (10) may also be packed in:

(a) removable head drums conforming to marginals 3520 for steel, 3521 for aluminium, 3523 for plywood, 3525 for fibreboard, or 3526 for plastics material, or in removable-head jerricans conforming to marginals 3522 for steel or 3526 for plastics material, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags; or

(b) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538, with one or more sift-proof inner bags.

2507 (1) Substances classified under (b) of the various items of marginal 2501 shall be packed in:

(a) steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) plastics drums or plastics jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537, or

(f) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538, or

(g) composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539, or

(h) metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622, or

(i) rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624, or

(j) composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625 with the exception of types 11HZ2 and 31HZ2.

Note to (a), (b), (c) and (d): Simplified conditions are applicable to removable head drums and jerricans for viscous substances having a viscosity of more than 200 mm2/s at 23 °C and for solid substances (see marginals 3512, 3553, 3554 and 3560).

(2) Solid substances within the meaning of marginal 2500 (10) may also be packed in:

(a) drums conforming to marginal 3523 for plywood or 3525 for fibreboard, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags, or

(b) sift-proof bags conforming to marginals 3533 for textile material, 3534 for woven plastics material or 3535 for plastics film or 3536 for water-resistant paper, provided the goods are carried as a full load or the bags secured on pallets, or

(c) flexible IBCs conforming to marginal 3623 with the exception of types 13H1, 13L1 and 13M1, provided that carriage is limited to full loads.

2508 (1) Substances classified under (c) of the various items of marginal 2501 shall be packed in:

(a) steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) plastics drums or plastics jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537, or

(f) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538, or

(g) composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539, or

(h) light gauge metal packagings conforming to marginal 3540, or

(i) metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622, or

(j) rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624, or

(k) composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625, with the exception of types 11HZ2 and 31HZ2.

Note to (a), (b), (c), (d) and (h): Simplified conditions are applicable to removable head drums, jerricans and light gauge metal packagings for viscous substances having a viscosity of more than 200 mm2/s at 23 °C and for solid substances (see marginals 3512, 3552 to 3554 and 3560).

(2) Solid substances within the meaning of marginal 2500 (10) may also be packed in:

(a) drums conforming to marginal 3523 for plywood or 3525 for fibreboard, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags, or

(b) sift-proof bags conforming to marginals 3533 for textile material, 3534 for woven plastics material or 3535 for plastics film or 3536 for water-resistant paper, or

(c) flexible intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) with the exception of types 13H1, 13L1 and 13M1, conforming to marginal 3623. Substances of 21° and 22° (c) may be carried in all types of flexible IBCs conforming to marginal 3623.

2509 Packagings or IBCs containing substances of 1° (b) or 1° (c) shall be fitted with a vent conforming to marginal 3500 (8) or 3601 (6) respectively.

2510

3. Mixed packing

2511 (1) Substances covered by the same item number may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538.

(2) Substances of different items of this Class in quantities not exceeding, per receptacle, 3 litres for liquids and/or 5 kg for solids, may be packed together and/or with goods not subject to the provisions of ADR, in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538 provided they do not react dangerously with one another.

(3) Except as otherwise specially provided under paragraph (7), substances of this Class, in quantities not exceeding, per receptacle, 3 litres for liquids and/or 5 kg for solids, may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538, with substances or articles of other classes, provided that mixed packing is also permitted for the substances and articles of these classes, and/or with goods which are not subject to the provisions of this Directive, provided they do not react dangerously with one another.

(4) The following are considered dangerous reactions:

(a) combustion and/or giving off considerable heat,

(b) emission of flammable and/or toxic gases,

(c) formation of corrosive liquids,

(d) formation of unstable substances.

(5) The provisions of marginals 2001 (7), 2002 (6) and (7) and 2502 shall be complied with.

(6) If wooden or fibreboard boxes are used, a package shall not weigh more than 100 kg.

(7) For substances of 1° (a), 2°, 4°, 5°, 11°, 12°, 13°, 14°, 16° (b), 17°, 25° and 27° to 32° and substances classified under (a) in the remaining items, mixed packing is not allowed. However, for perchloric acid with more than 50 % acid of 3° (a), mixed packing is permitted with perchloric acid of Class 8, marginal 2801, 4° (b).

4. Marking and danger labels on packages (see Appendix A.9)

Marking

2512 (1) Each package shall be clearly and durably marked with the identification number of the goods to be entered in the transport document, preceded by the letters 'UN`.

Danger labels

(2) Packages containing substances of Class 5.1 shall bear a label conforming to model No 5.1.

(3) Packages containing substances of 2°, 5°, 29° or 30° shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 6.1. Packages containing substances of 1° (a), 1° (b), 3° (a), 5°, 31° or 32° shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 8.

(4) Packages containing fragile receptacles not visible from the outside shall bear on two lateral opposite sides a label conforming to model No 12.

(5) Packages containing liquid substances in receptacles, the closures of which are not visible from the outside, as well as packages containing vented receptacles or vented receptacles without outer packaging, shall bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 11.

2513

B. Particulars in the transport document

2514 The description of the goods in the transport document shall conform to one of the identification numbers and one of the names printed in italics in marginal 2501.

If the substance is not mentioned by name but is assigned to an n.o.s. entry the description of the goods shall consist of the identification number and the n.o.s. designation, followed by the chemical or technical name of the substance ().

The description of the goods shall be followed by particulars of the class, the item number, if applicable, the letter, and the initials 'ADR` (or 'RID`.), e.g.'5.1, 11° (b), ADR`.

For the carriage of wastes [see marginal 2000 (4)] the description of the goods shall be: 'Waste, containing `, the component(s) used for the classification of the waste under marginal 2002 (8) to be entered under its/their chemical name(s) e.g. 'Waste earth containing 1513 zinc chlorate, 5.1, 11° (b), ADR`.

For the carriage of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) containing several components subject to the provisions of this Directive, it will not in general be necessary to refer to more than two components which predominantly contribute to the danger or dangers of the solutions and mixtures.

If a named substance in accordance with marginal 2500 (9), is not subject to the conditions of this Class, the consignor may enter in the transport document: 'Not goods of Class 5.1`.

For the solutions and mixtures containing only one component subject to the provisions of this Directive, the word 'solution` or 'mixture` shall be added as part of the name in the transport document [see marginal 2002 (8) (a)].

When a solid is handed over for carriage in the molten state the description of the goods shall further specify 'molten`, unless the term already appears in the name.

2515-

2521

C. Empty packagings

2522 (1) Uncleaned empty packagings, including empty IBCs, of 41° shall be closed in the same manner and with the same degree of leakproofness as if they were full.

(2) Uncleaned empty packagings, including empty IBCs, of 41° shall bear the same danger labels as if they were full.

(3) The description in the transport document shall conform to one of the names printed in italics in 41°, e.g. 'Empty packagings, 5.1, 41°, ADR`. In the case of empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks, empty tank containers and empty small bulk containers, uncleaned, this description shall be completed by adding the words 'Last load` together with the name and item number of the goods last loaded, e.g. 'Last load: 2015 hydrogen peroxide, inhibited 1° (a)`.

2523-

2549

CLASS 5.2 ORGANIC PEROXIDES

1. List of substances

2550 (1) Among the substances and articles covered by the title of Class 5.2, only those which are listed in marginal 2551 or are covered by a collective heading of that marginal are subject to the conditions set out in marginals 2550 (4) to 2567 and to the provisions of this Annex and of Annex B. They are then considered as substances and articles of this Directive ().

Note: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), see also marginal 2002 (8).

(2) Organic peroxides and formulations of organic peroxides are not considered to be substances of Class 5.2, if:

- they contain not more than 1,0 % available oxygen from the organic peroxides when containing not more than 1,0 % hydrogen peroxide;

- they contain not more than 0,5 % available oxygen from the organic peroxides when containing more than 1,0 % but not more than 7,0 % hydrogen peroxide; or

- tests have proved that they are of type G [see paragraph (6)].

Note: The available oxygen content ( %) of an organic peroxide formulation is given by the formula 16 × Ó (ni × ci/mi) where:

ni

- number of peroxygen groups per molecule of organic peroxide i;

Ci

- concentration (mass %) of organic peroxide i; and

mi

- molecular mass of organic peroxide i.

(3) The following organic peroxides are not to be permitted for carriage under the provisions of Class 5.2:

- organic peroxides type A [see Appendix A.1, marginal 3104 (2)(a)].

Definition

(4) Class 5.2 covers organic substances which contain the bivalent -O-O- structure and may be considered derivatives of hydrogen peroxide, where one or both of the hydrogen atoms have been replaced by organic radicals.

Properties

(5) Organic peroxides are thermally unstable substances which are liable to exothermic self-accelerating decomposition at normal or elevated temperatures. The decomposition can be initiated by heat, contact with impurities (e.g. acids, heavy-metal compounds, amines), friction or impact. The rate of decomposition increases with temperature and varies with the organic peroxide formulation. Decomposition may result in the evolution of harmful, or flammable, gases or vapours. Some organic peroxides may decompose explosively, particularly if confined. This characteristic may be modified by the addition of diluents or by the use of appropriate packagings. Many organic peroxides burn vigorously. Contact of organic peroxides with the eyes shall be avoided. Some organic peroxides will cause serious injury to the cornea, even after brief contact, or will be corrosive to the skin.

Classification of organic peroxides

(6) Organic peroxides are classified into seven types according to the degree of danger. The principles to be applied to the classification of substances not listed in marginal 2551 are set out in Appendix A.1, marginal 3104. The types of organic peroxide range from type A, which is not accepted for carriage in the packaging in which it is tested, to type G, which is not subject to the provisions of Class 5.2 [see marginal 2561 (5)]. The classification of types B to F is directly related to the maximum quantity allowed in one packaging.

(7) Organic peroxides and formulations of organic peroxides listed in marginal 2551 are assigned to collective headings:

- 1° to 20°, identification numbers 3101 to 3120.

The collective headings specify:

- the type (B to F) of organic peroxide, see paragraph (6);

- physical state (liquid/solid), see marginal 2553 (1); and

- temperature control (when required), see paragraph (16) to (19).

Mixtures of these formulations may be classified as the same type of organic peroxide as that of the most dangerous component and be transported under the conditions of transport given for this type. However, as two stable components can form a thermally less stable mixture, the selfaccelerating decomposition temperature of the mixture should be determined and, if necessary, the control and emergency temperature derived from the SADT in accordance with marginal 2550 (17).

(8) Classification of organic peroxides, formulations or mixtures of organic peroxides not listed in marginal 2551 and assignment to a collective heading shall be made by the competent authority of the country of origin.

(9) Samples of organic peroxides or formulations of organic peroxides not listed in marginal 2551, for which a complete set of test results in not available and which are to be carried for further testing or evaluation, shall be assigned to one of the appropriate entries for organic peroxides type C provided the following conditions are met:

- the available data indicate that the sample whould be no more dangerous than organic peroxides type B;

- the sample is packaged in accordance with packing method OP2A or OP2B and the quantity per transport unit is limited to 10 kg;

- the available data indicate that the control temperature, if any, is sufficiently low to prevent any dangerous decomposition and sufficiently high to prevent any dangerous phase separation.

Desensitization of organic peroxides

(10) In order to ensure safety during carriage, organic peroxides are in many cases desensitized by organic liquids or solids, inorganic solids or water. Where a percentage of a substance is stipulated, this refers to the percentage by mass, rounded to the nearest whole number. In general, desensitization shall be such that, in case of spillage, the organic peroxide will not concentrate to a dangerous extent.

(11) Unless otherwise stated for the individual organic peroxide formulation, the following definition(s) shall apply to diluents used for desensitization:

- diluents type A are organic liquids which are compatible with the organic peroxide and which have a boiling point of not less than 150 °C. Type A diluents may be used for desensitizing all organic peroxides,

- diluents type B are organic liquids which are compatible with the organic peroxide and which have a boiling point of less than 150 °C but not less than 60 °C and a flash-point of not less than 5 °C.

Type B diluents may only be used for desensitization of organic peroxides for which temperature control is required. The boiling point of the liquid shall be at least 50 °C higher than the control temperature of the organic peroxide.

(12) Diluents, other than type A or B, may be added to organic peroxide formulations as listed in marginal 2551 provided that they are compatible and do not change the classification.

(13) Water may only be used for the desensitization of organic peroxides which are listed in marginal 2551 or in the competent authority decision according to paragraph (8) as being 'with water` or 'as a stable dispersion in water`. Samples of organic peroxides or formulations of organic peroxides not listed in marginal 2551 may also be desensitised with water provided the requirements of paragraph (9) are met.

(14) Organic and inorganic solids may be used for desensitization of organic peroxides provided that they are compatible.

(15) Compatible liquids and solids are those which have no detrimental influence on the thermal stability and hazard type of the organic peroxide formulation.

Temperature control provisions

(16) Certain organic peroxides may only be carried under temperature-controlled conditions. The control temperature is the maximum temperature at which the organic peroxide can be safely carried. It is assumed that the temperature of the immediate surroundings of a package only exceeds 55 °C during carriage for a relatively short time in a 24 hour period. In the event of loss of temperature control, it may be necessary to implement emergency procedures. The emergency temperature is the temperature at which such procedures shall be implemented.

(17) The control and emergency temperatures are derived from the self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) which is defined as the lowest temperature at which self-accelerating decomposition may occur with a substance in the packaging as used during carriage (see Table 1). The SADT shall be determined in order to decide whether a substance shall be subjected to temperature control during carriage. Provisions for the determination of the SADT are given in Appendix A.1, marginal 3103.

>TABLE>

(18) The following organic peroxides shall be subject to temperature control during carriage:

- organic peroxides types B and C with an SADT ≤ 50 °C;

- organic peroxides type D showing a violent or medium effect when heated under confinement with an SADT ≤ 50 °C or showing a low or no effect when heated under confinement with an SADT ≤ 45 °C; and

- organic peroxides types E and F with an SADT ≤ 45 °C.

Note: Provisions for the determination of the effects of heating under confinement are given in Appendix A.1, marginal 3103.

(19) Where applicable, control and emergency temperatures are listed in marginal 2551. The actual temperature during carriage may be lower than the control temperature but shall be selected so as to avoid dangerous separation of phases.

2551 A. Organic peroxides not requiring temperature control

1° (b) 3101 organic peroxide type B, liquid, such as:

>TABLE>

2° (b) 3102 organic peroxide type B, solid, such as:

>TABLE>

3° (b) 3103 organic peroxide type C, liquid, such as:

>TABLE>

4° (b) 3104 organic peroxide type C, solid, such as:

>TABLE>

5° (b) 3105 organic peroxide type D, liquid, such as:

>TABLE>

6° (b) 3106 organic peroxide type D, solid, such as:

>TABLE>

7° (b) 3107 organic peroxide type E, liquid, such as:

>TABLE>

8° (b) 3108 organic peroxide type E, solid, such as:

>TABLE>

9° (b) 3109 organic peroxide type F, liquid, such as:

>TABLE>

10° (b) 3110 organic peroxide type F, solid, such as:

>TABLE>

B. Organic peroxides requiring temperature control

Note: Substances of 11° to 20° are organic peroxides which decompose easily at normal temperatures and shall therefore be carried only under conditions of adequate refrigeration. For these organic peroxides, the maximum temperature during carriage shall not exceed the control temperature indicated.

11° (b) 3111 organic peroxide type B, liquid, temperature controlled, such as:

>TABLE>

12° (b) 3112 organic peroxide type B, solid, temperature controlled, such as:

>TABLE>

13° (b) 3113 organic peroxide type C, liquid, temperature controlled, such as:

>TABLE>

14° (b) 3114 organic peroxide type C, solid, temperature controlled, such as:

>TABLE>

15° (b) 3115 organic peroxide type D, liquid, temperature controlled, such as:

>TABLE>

16° (b) 3116 organic peroxide type D, solid, temperature controlled, such as:

>TABLE>

17° (b) 3117 organic peroxide type E, liquid, temperature controlled, such as:

>TABLE>

18° (b) 3118 organic peroxide type E, solid, temperature controlled, such as:

>TABLE>

19° (b) 3119 organic peroxide type F, liquid, temperature controlled, such a:

>TABLE>

20° (b) 3120 organic peroxide type F, solid, temperature controlled

No organic peroxides are currently included under this item.

C. Empty packagings

31° Empty packagings, including empty intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks and empty tank-containers, uncleaned, having contained substances of Class 5.2.

2551a Test or repair kits, or other articles, containing small quantities of substances indicated below, carried in conformity with the following provisions, are not subject to the provisions for this Class contained in this Annex or in Annex B:

(a) liquids of 1°, 3°, 5°, 7°, or 9°: not more than 25 ml per inner packaging;

(b) solids of 2°, 4°, 6°, 8°, or 10°: not more than 100 g per inner packaging.

These quantities of substances shall be carried in combination packagings which at least meet the conditions of marginal 3538. The total gross mass of the package shall not exceed 30 kg. These quantities of substances may be packed together with other articles or substances provided that they will not interact dangerously in the event of leakage.

The following are considered dangerous reactions:

(a) combustion and/or giving off considerable heat;

(b) emission of flammable and/or toxic gases;

(c) formation of corrosive liquids;

(d) formation of unstable substances.

The 'General conditions of packing` of marginal 3500 (1), (2) and (5) to (7) shall be observed.

2. Provisions

A. Packages

1. General conditions of packing

2552 (1) Packagings shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.5 and shall be so constructed that none of the materials which are in contact with the contents will dangerously affect the contents. The degree of filling shall not exceed 93 %. For conbination packagings, cushioning materials shall not be readily combustible and shall not cause decomposition of the organic peroxide if leakage occurs.

(2) Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.6.

(3) In accordance with the provisions of marginals 3511 (2) or 3611 (2), packagings of packing groups II or I marked with the letter 'Y` or 'X` or IBCs of packing group II, marked with the letter 'Y`, shall be used. Metal packagings of packing group I, however, shall not be used.

Note: For the carriage of substances of Class 5.2 in tank vehicles, demountable tanks or tank-containers, see Annex B.

2. Special conditions for packing of certain substances and articles

2553 (1) The packing methods for substances of Class 5.2 are listed in Table 2 and are designated OP1A to OP8A for liquids and OP1B to OP8B for solids. Viscous substances with an outflow time from a DIN-CUP with 4 mm Ø outlet at 20 °C exceeding 10 minutes (corresponding to an outflow time of more than 690 seconds at 20 °C from a Ford cup 4, or to more than 2,68 × 10-3 m2/s) shall be considered as solids.

(2) Substances and articles shall be packed as indicated in marginal 2551 and as set out in detail in Table 2(A) and 2(B). A packing method for a package of a smaller size (i.e. with a lower OP number) may be used; this provision is not applicable, however, to a packing method for a package of a larger size (i.e. with a higher OP number).

(3) Packages bearing a label conforming to model No. 01 shall comply with the provisions of marginal 2102 (4) and (6).

(4) Receptacles or IBCs, containing substances of 1° (b), 3° (b), 5° (b), 7° (b), 9° (b), 11° (b), 13° (b), 15° (b), 17° (b) or 19° (b), which give off small quantities of gases, shall be vented, in accordance with marginal 3500 (8) or 3601 (6).

2554 (1) For organic peroxides or formulations of organic peroxides not listed in marginal 2551, the following procedure shall be used to assign the appropriate packing method:

(a) Organic peroxides type B:

Substances and articles shall be assigned packing method OP5A or OP5B provided that they satisfy the criteria of Appendix A.1, marginal 3104 (2) (b) in one of the packagings indicated. If the organic peroxide can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging than those listed for packing method OP5A or OP5B (i.e. one of the packagings listed for OP1A to OP4A or OP1B to OP4B), then the corresponding packing method with the lower OP number shall be assigned.

(b) Organic peroxides type C:

Substances and articles shall be assigned packing method OP6A or OP6B provided that they satisfy the criteria of Appendix A.1, marginal 3104 (2)(c) in one of the packagings indicated. If the organic peroxide can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging than those listed for packing method OP6A or OP6B then the corresponding packing method with the lower OP number shall be assigned.

(c) Organic peroxides type D:

Packing method OP7A or OP7B shall be assigned.

(d) Organic peroxides type E:

Packing method OP8A or OP8B shall be assigned.

(e) Organic peroxides type F:

Packing method OP8A or OP8B shall be assigned.

>TABLE>

>TABLE>

2555 (1) The substances of marginal 2551, 9° (b), 10° (b), 19° (b) or 20° (b) may be carried in IBCs under conditions laid down by the competent authority of the country of origin when, on the basis of testing, the competent authority is satisfied that such carriage may be safely conducted. The tests shall include those necessary:

- to prove that the organic peroxide complies with the principles for classification given in Appendix A.1, marginal 3104 (2) (f);

- to prove the compatibility with all materials normally in contact with the substance during carriage;

- to determine, when applicable, the control and emergency temperatures associated with the carriage of the substance in the IBC concerned as derived from the SADT;

- to design, when applicable, emergency-relief devices; and

- to determine if any special requirements are necessary.

(2) The following organic peroxides of type F may be carried in IBCs of the type shown, without complying with the conditions of paragraph (1):

>TABLE>

(3) To prevent explosive rupture of metal IBCs or composite IBCs with full wall metal casing, the emergency-relief devices shall be designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during a period of not less than one hour of fire engulfment (heat load 110 kW/m2) or self-accelerating decomposition.

2556-

2557

3. Mixed packing

2558 Substances of Class 5.2 shall not be packed together with substances or articles of other classes or with goods which are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

4. Marking and danger labels on packages (see Appendix A.9)

Marking

2559 (1) Each package shall be clearly and durably marked with the identification number of the goods to be entered in the transport document preceded by the letters 'UN`.

Danger labels

(1) Packages containing substances of Class 5.2 shall bear a label conforming to model No 5.2.

(2) Packages containing organic peroxides of 1°, 2°, 11° and 12° shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No. 01 unless the competent authority has permitted this label to be dispensed with for the type of packaging tested because the results have proved that the organic peroxide in such a packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour [see marginal 2561 (4)].

(3) When a substance is highly corrosive or corrosive according to the criteria of Class 8 [see marginal 2800 (1)], packages shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 8. This is indicated in marginal 2551 (additional labelling) or, when required, in the approved conditions of carriage [see marginal 2550 (8)].

(4) Packages containing fragile receptacles not visible from the outside shall bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 12.

(5) Packages containing liquids in packagings the closures of which are not visible from the outside, packages containing vented packagings or vented packagings without outer packagings shall bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 11.

2560

B. Particulars in the transport document

2561 (1) The description of the goods in the transport document shall conform to one of the identification numbers and the corresponding collective heading printed in italics in marginal 2551 followed by the chemical name (in brackets).

This description shall be followed by particulars of the class, the item number, if applicable, the letter and the initials 'ADR` (or 'RID`), e.g. '3108, organic peroxide type E, solid, (dibenzoyl peroxide), 5.2, 8° (b), ADR`.

For the carriage of wastes [see marginal 2000 (5)], the description of the goods shall be: 'Waste, containing `, the component(s) which has/have been used for the classification of the waste under marginal 2002 (8) to be entered under its/their chemical name(s), e.g. 'Waste, containing 3107 organic peroxide type E, liquid, (peroxyacetic acid), 5.2, 7° (b), ADR`. In general, not more than the two components which predominantly contribute to the danger or dangers of the waste need be shown.

(2) When substances and articles are carried under conditions fixed by the competent authority (see marginals 2550 (8), 2555 (1), 211 511 and 212 511, the following statement shall be included in the transport document:

'Carriage in accordance with marginal 2561 (2)`.

A copy of the decision of the competent authority with the conditions of carriage shall be attached to the transport document.

(3) When a sample of an organic peroxide is carried in accordance with marginal 2550 (9), the following statement shall be included in the transport document:

'Carriage in accordance with marginal 2561 (3)`.

(4) When, by permission of the competent authority in accordance with marginal 2559 (2), a label conforming to model No. 01 is not required, the following statement shall be included in the transport document:

'The danger label conforming to model No. 01 is not required`.

(5) When organic peroxides type G [see Appendix A.1, marginal 3104 (2)(g)] are carried, the following statement may be given in the transport document:

'Not a substance of Class 5.2`.

(6) For organic peroxides requiring temperature control during carriage, the following statement shall be given in the transport document:

'Control temperature: °C

Emergency temperature: °C`.

2562-

2566

C. Empty packagings

2567 (1) Empty packagings, including empty IBCs, uncleaned, of 31° shall be closed in the same manner and with the same degree of leakproofness as if they were full.

(2) Empty packagings including empty IBCs, uncleaned, of 31° shall bear the same danger labels as if they were full.

(3) The description in the transport document shall conform to one of the names printed in italics in 31°, e.g. 'Empty packagings, 5.2, 31°, ADR`. In the case of empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks, empty tank-containers, uncleaned, this description shall be completed by adding the words 'Last load` together with the chemical name and item number of the goods last loaded, e.g. 'Last load: 3109 organic peroxide type F, liquid, (tert-butyl hydroperoxide), 9° (b)`.

2568-

2599

CLASS 6.1 TOXIC SUBSTANCES

1. List of substances

2600 (1) Among the substances and articles covered by the title of Class 6.1, those which are listed in marginal 2601 or are covered by a collective heading of that marginal are subject to the conditions set out in marginals 2600(2) to 2622 and to the provisions of this Annex and of Annex B. They are then considered as substances and articles of this Directive.

Note: For the quantities of substances of marginal 2601 which are not subject to the provisions for this class either in this Annex or in Annex B, see marginal 2601a.

(2) The title of Class 6.1 covers the toxic substances of which it is known by experience or regarding which it is presumed from experiments on animals that in relatively small quantity they are able by a single action or by action of short duration to cause damage to human health, or death, by inhalation, by cutaneous absorption or by ingestion.

Substances of Class 6.1 are subdivided as follows:

A. Substances which are highly toxic on inhalation with a flash-point below 23 °C which are not substances of Class 3;

B. Organic substances which have a flash-point of not less than 23 °C or non-flammable organic substances;

C. Organometallic compounds or carbonyls;

D. Inorganic substances which may release toxic gases on contact with water (or atmospheric humidity), aqueous solutions or acids and other toxic water-reactive () substances;

E. Other inorganic substances and metallic salts of organic substances;

F. Substances and preparations used as pesticides;

G. Substances intended for laboratories and experiments and for the manufacture of pharmaceutical products, if not listed in other items of this Class;

H. Empty packagings.

(3) Substances and articles of Class 6.1, other than the substances of 1° to 5°, which are classified under the various items of marginal 2601, shall be assigned to one of the following groups designated by the letters (a), (b) or (c), according to their degree of toxicity:

(a) highly toxic substances

(b) toxic substances

(c) slightly toxic substances

Substances, mixtures and solutions, including pesticides of 71° to 87°, not expressly mentioned shall be classified under the appropriate item and letter according to the following criteria:

1 To assess the degree of toxicity, account shall be taken of human experience of instances of accidental poisoning, as well as special properties possessed by any individual substances: liquid state, high volatility, any special likelihood of cutaneous absorption, and special biological effects.

2. In the absence of observations on humans, the degree of toxicity shall be assessed using the available data from animal experiments in accordance with the table below:

>TABLE>

2.1. Where a substance exhibits different degrees of toxicity for two or more kinds of exposure, it shall be classified under the highest such degree of toxicity.

2.2. Substances meeting the criteria of Class 8 and with an inhalation toxicity of dusts and mists (LC50) leading to Packing Group I shall only be accepted for an allocation to class 6.1 if the toxicity through oral ingestion or dermal contact is at least in the range of Group (a) or (b). Otherwise an assignment to Class 8 shall be made if appropriate (see footnote 1) marginal 2800).

LD50 value for acute oral toxicity

2.3. That dose of the substance administered which is most likely to cause death within 14 days in one half of both male and female young adult albino rats. The number of animals tested shall be sufficient to give a statistically significant result and shall be in conformity with good pharmacological practices. The result is expressed in mg per kg body mass.

LD50 value for acute dermal toxicity

2.4. That dose of the substance which, administered by continuous contact for 24 hours with the bare skin of albino rabbits, is most likely to cause death within 14 days in one half of the animals tested. The number of animals tested shall be sufficient to give a statistically significant result and shall be in conformity with good pharmacological practices. The result is expressed in mg per kg body mass.

LC50 value for acute toxicity on inhalation

2.5. That concentration of vapour, mist or dust which, administered by continuous inhalation for one hour to both male and female young adult albino rats, is most likely to cause death within 14 days in one half of the animals tested. If the substance is administered to the animals as dust or mist, more than 90 % of the particles available for inhalation in the testshall have a diameter of 10 ìm or less, provided that it is reasonably foreseeable that such concentrations could be encountered by humans during carriage. The result is expressed in mg per litre of air for dusts and mists and in ml per m3 of air (ppm) for vapours.

2.6. These criteria for inhalation toxicity of dusts and mists are based on LC50 data relating to 1-hour exposure, and where such information is available it shall be used. However, where only LC50 data relating to 4-hour exposure are available, such figures can be multiplied by four and the product substituted in the above criteria, i.e. LC50 value multiplied by four (4 hour) is considered the equivalent of LC50 (1 hour).

Inhalation toxicity of vapours

3. Liquids giving off toxic vapours shall be classified into the following groups where 'V` is the saturated vapour concentration (in ml/m3 of air) (volatility) at 20 °C and standard atmospheric pressure:

>TABLE>

These criteria for inhalation toxicity of vapours are based on LC50 data relating to 1-hour exposure, and where such information is available, it shall be used.

However, where only LC50 data relating to 4-hour exposure to the vapours are available, such figures can be multiplied by two and the product substituted in the above criteria, i.e. LC50 (4 hour) × 2 is considered the equivalent of LC50 (1 hour).

Inhalation toxicity of vapours

Group borderlines

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

In this figure, the criteria are expressed in graphical form, as an aid to easy classification. However, due to approximations inherent in the use of graphs, substances falling on or near group borderlines shall be checked using numerical criteria.

Mixtures of liquids

4. Mixtures of liquids which are toxic on inhalation shall be assigned to danger categories according to the following criteria:

4.1. If LC50 is known for each of the toxic substances constituting the mixture, the group may be determined as follows:

(a) calculation of the LC50 of the mixture:

LC50 (mixture) = where

fi = molar fraction of constituent i of the mixture.

LC50i = average lethal concentration of constituent i in ml/m3.

(b) calculation of volatility of each mixture constituent:

Vi = Pi × >NUM>106

>DEN>101,3

ml/m3

where

Pi = partial pressure of constituent i in kPa at 20 °C and at standard atmospheric pressure.

(c) calculation of the ratio of volatility to LC50:

R = (d) the values calculated for LC50 (mixture) and R are then used to determine the group of the mixture:

Group (a): R ≥ 10 and LC50 (mixture) ≤ 1 000 ml/m3.

Group (b): R ≥ and LC50 (mixture) ≤ 3 000 ml/m3, if the mixture does not meet the criteria for (a)

Group (c): R ≥ 1/5 and LC50 (mixture) ≤ 5 000 ml/m3, if the mixture does not meet the criteria of group (a) or group (b).

4.2. In the absence of LC50 data on the toxic constituent substances, the mixture may be assigned to a group based on the following simplified threshold toxicity tests. When these threshold tests are used, the most restrictive group shall be determined and used for carrying the mixture.

4.3. A mixture is assigned to group (a) only if it meets both of the following criteria:

(i) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 1 000 ml/m3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (5 male and 5 female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for 1 hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than 1 000 ml/m3.

(ii) A sample of vapour in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is diluted with 9 equal volumes of air to form a test atmosphere. Ten albino rats (5 male and 5 female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for 1 hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 10 times the mixture LC50.

4.4. A mixture is assigned to group (b) only if it meets both of the following criteria, and does not meet the criteria for group (a):

(i) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 3 000 ml/m3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (5 male and 5 female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for 1 hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than 3 000 ml/m3.

(ii) A sample of the vapour in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is used to form a test atmosphere. Ten albino rats (5 male and 5 female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for 1 hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than the mixture LC50.

4.5. A mixture is assigned to group (c) only if it meets both of the following criteria, and does not meet the criteria for groups (a) or (b):

(i) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 5 000 ml/m3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (5 male and 5 female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for 1 hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than 5 000 ml/m3.

(ii) The vapour concentration (volatility) of the liquid mixture is measured and if the vapour concentration is equal to or greater than 1 000 ml/m3, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 1/5 the mixture LC50.

(4) When, as a result of additions, substances of Class 6.1 pass into other danger categories than those to which the substances mentioned by name in marginal 2601 belong, these mixtures or solutions shall be listed under the items and letters to which they belong, based on their actual degree of danger.

Note: For classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), see also marginal 2002 (8).

(5) On the basis of the criteria of paragraph (3), it may also be determined whether the nature of a solution or mixture mentioned by name or containing a substance mentioned by name is such that the solution or mixture is not subject to the requirements for this Class.

(6) Flammable liquids which are toxic on inhalation, having a flash-point below 23 °C, except substances of 1° to 10°, are substances of Class 3 (see marginal 2301, 11° to 19°).

(7) Flammable liquids slightly toxic, with the exception of substances and preparations used as pesticides, having a flash-point between 23 °C to 61 °C, inclusive, are substances of Class 3 (see marginal 2301).

(8) Self-heating substances slightly toxic are substances of Class 4.2 (see marginal 2431).

(9) Water-reactive substances slightly toxic are substances of Class 4.3 (see marginal 2471).

(10) Oxidizing substances slightly toxic are substances of Class 5.1 (see marginal 2501).

(11) Substances slightly toxic and slightly corrosive are substances of Class 8 (see marginal 2801).

(12) Chemically unstable substances of Class 6.1 shall not be accepted for carriage unless the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition or polymerization during carriage. To this end, it shall in particular be ensured that receptacles do not contain any substance(s) likely to cause such a reaction.

(13) Substances and mixtures of substances having a melting point above 45 °C are considered as solids within the meaning of the packing requirements of marginals 2606 (2), 2607 (4) and

(14) The flash-point referred to below shall be determined in the manner described in Appendix A.3.

A. Highly toxic substances having a flash-point below 23 °C

which are not substances of Class 3

2601 1° Hydrogen cyanide, stabilized:

1051 hydrogen cyanide, stabilized, containing not more than 3 % water, 1614 hydrogen cyanide, stabilized, containing not more than 3 % water and absorbed in a porous inert material.

Notes: 1. Special conditions of packing are applicable to this substance [see marginal 2603 (1)].

2. Anhydrous hydrogen cyanide not satisfying these conditions is not to be accepted for carriage.

3. Hydrogen cyanide (Hydrocyanic acid) containing less than 3 % water is stable, if the pH-value is 2,5 ± 0,5 and the liquid is clear and colourless.

2° Hydrogen cyanide solutions:

1613 hydrogen cyanide, aqueous solution (hydrocyanic acid), with not more than 20 % hydrogen cyanide, 3294 hydrogen cyanide, solution in alcohol, with not more than 45 % hydrogen cyanide.

Notes: 1. Special conditions of packing are applicable to these substances [see marginal 2603 (2)].

2. Solutions of hydrogen cyanide which do not conform to these conditions are not to be accepted for carriage.

3° Metal carbonyls:

1259 nickel carbonyl, 1994 iron pentacarbonyl.

Notes: 1. Special conditions of packing are applicable to these substances (see marginal 2604).

2. Other metal carbonyls having a flash-point below 23 °C are not to be accepted for carriage.

4° 1185 ethyleneimine, inhibited.

Note: Special conditions of packing are applicable to this substance [see marginal 2605 (1)].

5° 2480 methyl isocyanate.

Note: Special conditions of packing are applicable to this substance [see marginal 2605 (2)].

6° Other isocyanates having a flash-point below 23 °C:

(a) 2482 n-propyl isocyanate, 2484 tert-butyl isocyanate, 2485 n-butyl isocyanate.

7° Nitrogenous substances:

(a) 1. 1163 dimethylhydrazine, unsymmetrical, 1244 methylhydrazine;

2. 2334 allylamine, 2382 dimethylhydrazine, symmetrical.

8° Oxygenated substances:

(a) 1092 acrolein, inhibited, 1098 allyl alcohol, 1143 crotonaldehyde, stabilized, 2606 methyl orthosilicate.

9° Halogenated substances:

(a) 1239 methyl chloromethyl ether.

10° Corrosive halogenated substances:

(a) 1182 ethyl chloroformate, 1238 methyl chloroformate, 2407 isopropyl chloroformate, 2438 trimethylacetyl chloride.

B. Organic substances which have a flash-point of 23 °C or over

or non-flammable organic substances

Note: Organic substances and preparations used as pesticides are substances of 71° to 78° and 81° to 87°.

11° Nitrogenous substances having a flash-point between 23 °C and 61 °C inclusive:

(a) 3275 nitriles, toxic, flammable, n.o.s.;

(b) 2668 chloroacetonitrile, 3073 vinylpyridines, inhibited, 3275 nitriles, toxic, flammable, n.o.s.

12° Nitrogenous substances having a flash-point above 61 °C:

(a) 1541 acetone cyanohydrin, stabilized, 3276 nitriles, toxic, n.o.s.;

(b) 1547 aniline, 1577 chlorodinitrobenzenes, 1578 chloronitrobenzenes, 1590 dichloroanilines, 1596 dinitroanilines, 1597 dinitrobenzenes, 1598 dinitro-o-cresol, 1599 dinitrophenol solution, 1650 beta-naphthylamine, 1652 naphthylurea, 1661 nitroanilines (o-,m-,p-), 1662 nitrobenzene, 1664 nitrotoluenes (o-,m-,p-), 1665 nitroxylenes, (o-,m-,p-) 1708 toluidines, 1711 xylidines, 1843 ammonium dinitro-o-cresolate, 1885 benzidine, 2018 chloroanilines, solid, 2019 chloroanilines, liquid, 2038 dinitrotoluenes, 2224 benzonitrile, 2253 N,N-dimethylaniline, 2306 nitrobenzotrifluorides, 2307 3-nitro-4-chlorobenzotrifluoride, 2522 dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate, 2572 phenylhydrazine, 2647 malononitrile, 2671 aminopyridines (o-,m-,p-), 2673 2-amino-4-chlorophenol, 2690 N,n-butylimidazole, 2738 N-butylaniline, 2754 N-ethyltoluidines, 2822 2-chloropyridine, 3276 nitriles, toxic, n.o.s.;

(c) 1548 aniline hydrochloride, 1599 dinitrophenol solution, 1663 nitrophenols (o-,m-,p-), 1673 phenylenediamines (o-,m-,p-), 1709 2,4-toluylenediamine, 2074 acrylamide, 2077 alpha-naphthylamine, 2205 adiponitrile, 2272 N-ethylaniline, 2273 2-ethylaniline, 2274 N-ethyl-Nbenzylaniline, 2294 N-methylaniline, 2300 2-methyl-5-ethylpyridine, 2311 phenetidines, 2431 anisidines, 2432 N,N-diethylaniline, 2446 nitrocresols, 2470 phenylacetonitrile, liquid, 2512 aminophenols (o-,m-,p-), 2651 4,4'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 2656 quinoline, 2660 nitrotoluidines (mono), 2666 ethyl cyanoacetate, 2713 acridine, 2730 nitroanisole, 2732 nitrobromobenzene, 2753 N-ethylbenzyltoluidines, 2873 dibutylaminoethanol, 2941 fluoroanilines, 2942 2-trifluoromethylaniline, 2946 2-amino-5-diethylaminopentane, 3276 nitriles, toxic, n.o.s.

Note: Isocyanates having a flash-point above 61 °C are substances of 19°.

13° Oxygenated substances having a flash-point between 23 °C and 61 °C inclusive:

(a) 2521 diketene, inhibited.

14° Oxygenated substances having a flash-point above 61 °C:

(b) 1594 diethyl sulphate, 1671 phenol, solid, 2261 xylenols, 2587 benzoquinone, 2669 chlorocresols, 2821 phenol solution, 2839 aldol;

(c) 2369 ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, 2525 ethyl oxalate, 2609 triallyl borate, 2662 hydroquinone, 2716 1,4-butynediol, 2821 phenol solution, 2874 furfuryl alcohol, 2876 resorcinol, 2937 alpha-methylbenzyl alcohol, 2938 methyl benzoate.

15° Halogenated hydrocarbons:

(a) 1605 ethylene dibromide, 1647 methyl bromide and ethylene dibromide mixture, liquid, 2646 hexachlorocyclopentadiene;

Note: Mixtures of ethylene dibromide (sym-dibromoethane) with methyl bromide having, at 50 °C, a vapour pressure greater than 300 kPa (3 bar) are substances of Class 2 [see marginal 2201, 4° (bt)].

(b) 1669 pentachloroethane, 1701 xylyl bromide, 1702 1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane, 1846 carbon tetrachloride, 1886 benzylidene chloride, 1891 ethyl bromide, 2322 trichlorobutene, 2644 methyl iodide, 2653 benzyl iodide;

(c) 1591 o-dichlorobenzene, 1593 dichloromethane (methylene chloride), 1710 trichloroethylene, 1887 bromochloromethane, 1888 chloroform, 1897 tetrachloroethylene, 2279 hexachlorobutadiene, 2321 trichlorobenzenes, liquid, 2504 tetrabromoethane, 2515 bromoform, 2516 carbon tetrabromide, 2664 dibromoethane, 2688 1-bromo-3-chloropropane, 2729 hexachlorobenzene, 2831 1,1,1-trichloroethane, 2872 dibromochloropropanes.

Note: Mixtures of methyl chloride with methylene chloride (dichloromethane) having, at 50 °C, a vapour pressure greater than 300 kPa (3 bar) are substances of Class 2 [see marginal 2201, 4° (bt)].

16° Other halogenated substances having a flash-point between 23 °C and 61 °C inclusive:

(a) 1135 ethylene chlorohydrin, 2558 epibromohydrin;

(b) 1181 ethyl chloroacetate, 1569 bromoacetone, 1603 ethyl bromoacetate, 1916 2,2'-dichlorodiethyl ether, 2023 epichlorohydrin, 2295 methyl chloroacetate, 2589 vinyl chloroacetate, 2611 propylene chlorohydrin.

17° Other halogenated substances having a flash-point above 61 °C:

(a) 1580 chloropicrin, 1670 perchloromethyl mercaptan, 1672 phenylcarbylamine chloride, 1694 bromobenzyl cyanides, 2232 chloroacetaldehyde, 2628 potassium fluoroacetate, 2629 sodium fluoroacetate, 2642 fluoroacetic acid, 1583 chloropicrin mixture, n.o.s., 1610 halogenated irritating liquid, n.o.s.;

Note: Mixtures of methyl bromide or methyl chloride with chloropicrin , having, at 50 °C, a vapour pressure greater than 300 kPa (3 bar) are substances of Class 2 [see marginal 2201, 4° (at) or 4° (bt)].

(b) 1695 chloroacetone, stabilized, 1697 chloroacetophenone, 2075 chloral, anhydrous, inhibited, 2490 dichloroisopropyl ether, 2552 hexafluoroacetone hydrate, 2567 sodium pentachlorophenate, 2643 methyl bromoacetate, 2645 phenacyl bromide, 2648 1,2-dibromobutan-3-one, 2649 1,3-dichloroacetone, 2650 1,1-dichloro-1-nitroethane, 2750 1,3-dichloropropanol-2, 2948 3-trifluoromethylaniline, 3155 pentachlorophenol, 1583 chloropicrin mixture, n.o.s., 1610 halogenated irritating liquid, n.o.s.;

(c) 1579 4-chloro-o-toluidine hydrochloride, 2020 chlorophenols, solid, 2021 chlorophenols, liquid, 2233 chloroanisidines, 2235 chlorobenzyl chlorides, 2237 chloronitroanilines, 2239 chlorotoluidines, 2299 methyl dichloroacetate, 2433 chloronitrotoluenes, 2533 methyl trichloroacetate, 2659 sodium chloroacetate, 2661 hexachloroacetone, 2689 glycerol alpha-monochlorohydrin, 2747 tert-butylcyclohexyl chloroformate, 2849 3-chloropropoanol-1, 2875 hexachlorophene, 3241 2-bromo-2-nitropropane-1,3-diol, 1583 chloropicrin mixture, n.o.s., 1610 halogenated irritating liquid, n.o.s.

Note: Chloroformates having predominantly corrosive properties are substances of Class 8 (see marginal 2801, 64°).

18° Isocyanates having a flash-point between 23 °C and 61 °C inclusive:

(b) 2285 isocyanatobenzotrifluorides, 2487 phenyl isocyanate, 2488 cyclohexyl isocyanate, 3080 isocyanates, toxic, flammable, n.o.s. or 3080 isocyanate solution, toxic, flammable, n.o.s.

Note: Solutions of these isocyanates having a flash-point below 23 °C are substances of Class 3 [see marginal 2301, 14° (b)].

19° Isocyanates having a flash-point above 61 °C:

(b) 2078 toluene diisocyanate and isomer mixtures, 2236 3-chloro-4-methylphenyl isocyanate, 2250 dichlorophenyl isocyanates, 2281 hexamethylene diisocyanate, 2206 isocyanates, toxic, n.o.s. or 2206 isocyanate solution, toxic, n.o.s.;

Notes: 1. Solutions of these isocyanates having a flash-point below 23 °C are substances of Class 3 (see marginal 2301, 14°).

2. Solutions of these isocyanates having a flash-point between 23 °C and 61 °C inclusive are substances of 18° (b).

(c) 2290 isophoronediisocyanate, 2328 trimethylhexamethylene diisocyanate and isomer mixtures, 2489 diphenylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate, 2206 isocyanates, toxic, n.o.s. or 2206 isocyanate solution, toxic, n.o.s.

20° Substances containing sulphur and having a flash-point between 23 °C and 61 °C inclusive:

(a) 2337 phenyl mercaptan;

(b) 1545 allyl isothiocyanate, inhibited, 2477 methyl isothiocyanate, 3023 tert-octyl mercaptan, 3071 mercaptans, liquid, toxic, flammable, n.o.s. or 3071 mercaptan mixture, liquid, toxic, flammable, n.o.s.

21° Substances containing sulphur and having a flash-point above 61 °C:

(b) 1651 naphthylthiourea, 2474 thiophosgene, 2936 thiolactic acid, 2966 thioglycol;

(c) 2785 4-thiapentanal.

22° Substances containing phosphorus and having a flash-point between 23 °C and 61 °C inclusive:

(a) 3279 organophosphorus compound, toxic, flammable, n.o.s.;

(b) 3279 organophosphorus compound, toxic, flammable, n.o.s.

23° Substances containing phosphorus and having a flash-point above 61 °C:

(a) 3278 organophosphorus compound, toxic, n.o.s.;

(b) 1611 hexaethyl tetraphosphate, 1704 tetraethyl dithiopyrophosphate, 2501 tris-(1-aziridinyl) phosphine oxide, solution, 2574 tricresyl phosphate with more than 3 % ortho isomer, 3278 organophosphorus compound, toxic, n.o.s.;

(c) 2501 tris-(1-aziridinyl) phosphine oxide, solution, 3278 organophosphorus compound, toxic, n.o.s.

24° Toxic organic substances carried in the molten state:

(b) 1. 1600 dinitrotoluenes, molten, 2312 phenol, molten;

2. 3250 chloroacetic acid, molten.

25° Organic substances and articles and solutions and mixtures of organic substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under another collective heading:

(a) 1601 disinfectant, solid, toxic, n.o.s., 1602 dye, liquid, toxic, n.o.s. or 1602 dye intermediate, liquid, toxic, n.o.s., 1693 tear gas substance, liquid orsolid, n.o.s., 3142 disinfectant, liquid, toxic, n.o.s., 3143 dye, solid, toxic, n.o.s. or 3143 dye intermediate, solid, toxic, n.o.s., 2810 toxic liquid, organic, n.o.s., 2811 toxic solid, organic, n.o.s.;

Note: 2,3,7,8-tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (TCDD) in concentrations considered highly toxic according to the criteria in marginal 2600(3) is not to be accepted for carriage.

(b) 2016 ammunition, toxic, non-explosive without burster or expelling charge, non-fused, 1601 disinfectant, solid, toxic, n.o.s., 1602 dye, liquid, toxic, n.o.s. or 1602 dye intermediate, liquid, toxic, n.o.s., 1693 tear gas substance, liquid or solid, n.o.s., 3142 disinfectant, liquid, toxic, n.o.s., 3143 dye, solid, toxic, n.o.s., or 3143 dye intermediate, solid, toxic, n.o.s., 2810 toxic liquid, organic, n.o.s., 2811 toxic solid, organic, n.o.s.;

(c) 2518 1,5,9-cyclododecatriene, 2667 butyltoluenes, 1601 disinfectant, solid, toxic, n.o.s., 1602 dye, liquid, toxic, n.o.s. or 1602 dye intermediate, liquid, toxic, n.o.s., 3142 disinfectant, liquid, toxic, n.o.s., 3143 dye, solid, toxic, n.o.s. or 3143 dye intermediate, solid, toxic, n.o.s., 2810 toxic liquid, organic, n.o.s., 2811 toxic solid, organic, n.o.s.;

26° Flammable toxic organic substances, articles containing flammable toxic organic substances and solutions and mixtures of flammable toxic organic substances (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under another collective heading:

(a) 1. 2929 toxic liquid, flammable, organic, n.o.s.;

2. 2930 toxic solid, flammable, organic, n.o.s.;

Note: Dichloromethyl ether, symmetrical, (identification No 2249), is not to be accepted for carriage.

(b) 1. 2929 toxic liquid, flammable, organic, n.o.s.;

2. 1700 tear gas candles, 2930 toxic solid, flammable, organic, n.o.s.;

27° Corrosive toxic organic substances, articles containing such substances and solutions and mixtures of corrosive toxic organic substances (such as preparations and wastes):

(a) 1595 dimethyl sulphate, 1752 chloroacetyl chloride, 1889 cyanogen bromide,3246 methanesulphonyl chloride, 2927 toxic liquid, corrosive, organic, n.o.s., 2928 toxic solid, corrosive, organic, n.o.s;

(b) 1737 benzyl bromide, 1738 benzyl chloride, 1750 chloroacetic acid solution, 1751 chloroacetic acid, solid, 2017 ammunition, tear-producing, non-explosive without burster or expelling charge, non-fuzed, 2022 cresylic acid, 2076 cresols (o-,m-,p-), 2267 dimethyl thiophosphoryl chloride, 2745 chloromethyl chloroformate, 2746 phenyl chloroformate, 2748 2-ethylhexyl chloroformate, 3277 chloroformates, toxic, corrosive, n.o.s., 2927 toxic liquid, corrosive, organic, n.o.s., 2928 toxic solid, corrosive, organic, n.o.s.

Note: Chloroformates having predominantly corrosive properties are substances of Class 8 (see marginal 2801, 64°).

28° Flammable corrosive toxic chloroformates:

(a) 1722 allyl chloroformate, 2740 n-propyl chloroformate;

(b) 2743 n-butyl chloroformate, 2744 cyclobutyl chloroformate, 2742 chloroformates, toxic, corrosive, flammable, n.o.s.

Note: Chloroformates having predominantly corrosive properties are substances of Class 8 (see marginal 2801, 64°).

C. Organometallic compounds and carbonyls

Notes: 1. Toxic organometallic compounds used as pesticides are substances of 75° and 76°.

2. Spontaneously combustible organometallic compounds are substances of Class 4.2 (see marginal 2431, 31° to 33°).

3. Water-reactive organometallic compounds, flammable, are substances of Class 4.3 (see marginal 2471, 3°).

31° Organic lead compounds:

(a) 1649 motor fuel anti-knock mixture (tetraethyl lead, tetramethyl lead).

32° Organic tin compounds:

(a) 2788 organotin compound, liquid, n.o.s., 3146 organotin compound, solid, n.o.s.;

(b) 2788 organotin compound, liquid, n.o.s., 3146 organotin compound, solid, n.o.s.;

(c) 2788 organotin compound, liquid, n.o.s., 3146 organotin compound, solid, n.o.s.

33° Organic mercury compounds:

(a) 2026 phenylmercuric compound, n.o.s.;

(b) 1674 phenylmercuric acetate, 1894 phenylmercuric hydroxide, 1895 phenylmercuric nitrate, 2026 phenylmercuric compound, n.o.s.;

(c) 2026 phenylmercuric compound, n.o.s.

34° Organic arsenic compounds:

(a) 1698 diphenylamine chloroarsine, 1699 diphenylchloroarsine, 1892 ethyldichloroarsine, 3280 organoarsenic compound, n.o.s.;

(b) 3280 organoarsenic compound, n.o.s.;

(c) 2473 sodium arsanilate, 3280 organoarsenic compound, n.o.s.

35° Other organometallic compounds:

(a) 3282 organometallic compound, toxic, n.o.s.;

(b) 3282 organometallic compound, toxic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3282 organometallic compound, toxic, n.o.s.

36° Carbonyls:

(a) 3281 metal carbonyls, n.o.s.;

(b) 3281 metal carbonyls, n.o.s.;

(c) 3281 metal carbonyls, n.o.s.

D. Inorganic substances which, on contact with water (or atmospheric humidity), may emit (cont'd) toxic gases, aqueous solutions or acids and other toxic water-reactive substances

41° Inorganic cyanides:

(a) 1565 barium cyanide, 1575 calcium cyanide, 1626 mercuric potassium cyanide, 1680 potassium cyanide, 1689 sodium cyanide, 1713 zinc cyanide, 2316 sodium cuprocyanide,solid, 2317 sodium cuprocyanide, solution, 1588 cyanides, inorganic, solid, n.o.s., 1935 cyanide solution, n.o.s.;

(b) 1587 copper cyanide, 1620 lead cyanide, 1636 mercury cyanide, 1642 mercury oxycyanide, desensitized, 1653 nickel cyanide, 1679 potassium cuprocyanide, 1684 silver cyanide, 1588 cyanides, inorganic, solid, n.o.s.; 1935 cyanide solution, n.o.s.;

(c) 1588 cyanides, inorganic, solid, n.o.s., 1935 cyanide solution, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. Ferricyanides, ferrocyanides, alkaline thiocyanates and ammonium thiocyanate are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

2. Solutions of inorganic cyanides with a total cyanide ion content of more than 30 % shall be classified under letter (a), solutions with a total cyanide ion content of more than 3 % and not more than 30 % under letter (b) and solutions with a cyanide ion content of more than 0.3 % and not more than 3 % under letter (c).

42° Azides:

(b) 1687 sodium azide.

Notes: 1. 1571 barium azide, wetted, is a substance of Class 4.1 (see marginal 2401, 25°).

2. Barium azide in the dry state or with less than 50 % water or alcohol is not to be accepted for carriage.

43° Preparations of phosphides containing additives inhibiting the emission of flammable gases:

(a) 3048 aluminium phosphide pesticide.

Notes: 1. These preparations are not to be accepted for carriage unless they contain additives inhibiting the emission of flammable gases.

2. 1397 aluminium phosphide, 2011 magnesium phosphide, 1714 zinc phosphide, 1432 sodium phosphide, 1360 calcium phosphide and 2013 strontium phosphide are substances of Class 4.3 (see marginal 2471, 18°).

44° Other water-reactive toxic substances:

(b) 3123 toxic liquid, water-reactive, n.o.s., 3125 toxic solid, water-reactive, n.o.s.;

(c) 3123 toxic liquid, water-reactive, n.o.s., 3125 toxic solid, water-reactive, n.o.s.

Note: The term 'water-reactive` denotes a substance which, in contact with water, emits flammable gases.

E. Other inorganic substances and metallic salts of organic substances

51° Arsenic and arsenical compounds:

(a) 1553 arsenic acid, liquid, 1560 arsenic trichloride, 1556 arsenic compound, liquid, n.o.s., (arsenates, arsenites, and arsenic sulphides), 1557 arsenic compound, solid, n.o.s., (arsenates, arsenites, and arsenic sulphides);

(b) 1546 ammonium arsenate, 1554 arsenic acid, solid, 1555 arsenic bromide, 1558 arsenic, 1559 arsenic pentoxide, 1561 arsenic trioxide, 1562 arsenical dust, 1572 cacodylic acid, 1573 calcium arsenate, 1574 calcium arsenate and calcium arsenite mixture, solid, 1585 copper acetoarsenite, 1586 copper arsenite, 1606 ferric arsenate, 1607 ferric arsenite, 1608 ferrous arsenate, 1617 lead arsenates, 1618 lead arsenites, 1621 london purple, 1622 magnesium arsenate, 1623 mercuric arsenate, 1677 potassium arsenate, 1678 potassium arsenite, 1683 silver arsenite, 1685 sodium arsenate, 1686 sodium arsenite, aqueous solution, 1688 sodium cacodylate, 1691 strontium arsenite, 1712 zinc arsenate or 1712 zinc arsenite or 1712 zinc arsenate and zinc arsenite mixture, 2027 sodium arsenite, solid, 1556 arsenic compound, liquid, n.o.s. (arsenates, arsenites, and arsenic sulphides), 1557 arsenic compound, solid, n.o.s. (arsenates, arsenites, and arsenic sulphides);

(c) 1686 sodium arsenite, aqueous solution, 1556 arsenic compound, liquid, n.o.s. (arsenates, arsenites, and arsenic sulphides), 1557 arsenic compound, solid, n.o.s. (arsenates, arsenites, and arsenic sulphides).

Note: Substances and preparations containing arsenic and used as pesticides are substances of 79°.

52° Mercury compounds:

(a) 2024 mercury compound, liquid, n.o.s., 2025 mercury compound, solid, n.o.s.;

(b) 1624 mercuric chloride, 1625 mercuric nitrate, 1627 mercurous nitrate, 1629 mercury acetate, 1630 mercury ammonium chloride, 1631 mercury benzoate, 1634 mercury bromides, 1637 mercury gluconate, 1638 mercury iodide, 1639 mercury nucleate, 1640 mercury oleate, 1641 mercury oxide, 1643 mercury potassium iodide, 1644 mercury salicylate, 1645 mercury sulphate, 1646 mercury thiocyanate, 2024 mercury compound, liquid, n.o.s., 2025 mercury compound, solid, n.o.s.;

(c) 2024 mercury compound, liquid, n.o.s., 2025 mercury compound, solid, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. Substances and preparations containing mercury and used as pesticides are substances of 75°.

2. Mercurous chloride (calomel) is a substance of Class 9 [see marginal 2901, 12 °(c)]. Cinnabar is not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

3. Fulminates of mercury are not to be accepted for carriage.

53° Thallium compounds:

(b) 1707 thallium compound, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. Substances and preparations containing thallium and used as pesticides are substances of 85°.

2. 2727 thallium nitrate is a substance of 68°.

54° Beryllium and beryllium compounds:

(b) 1. 1567 beryllium, powder;

2. 1566 beryllium compound, n.o.s.;

(c) 1566 beryllium compound, n.o.s.

Note: 2464 beryllium nitrate is a substance of Class 5.1 [see marginal 2501, 29° (b)].

55° Selenium and selenium compounds:

(a) 2630 selenates or 2630 selenites, 3283 selenium compound, n.o.s.;

(b) 2657 selenium disulphide, 3283 selenium compound, n.o.s.;

(c) 2658 selenium powder, 3283 selenium compound, n.o.s.

Note: 1905 selenic acid is a substance of Class 8 [see marginal 2801, 16° (a)].

56° Osmium compounds:

(a) 2471 osmium tetroxide.

57° Tellurium compounds:

(b) 3284 tellurium compound, n.o.s.;

(c) 3284 tellurium compound, n.o.s.

58° Vanadium compounds:

(b) 2859 ammonium metavanadate, 2861 ammonium polyvanadate, 2862 vanadium pentoxide, non-fuzed form, 2863 sodium ammonium vanadate, 2864 potassium metavanadate, 2931 vanadyl sulphate, 3285 vanadium compound, n.o.s.;

(c) 3285 vanadium compound, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. 2443 vanadium oxytrichloride, 2444 vanadium tetrachloride and 2475 vanadium trichloride are substances of Class 8 (see marginal 2801, 11° and 12°).

2. Vanadium pentoxide, fused and solidified, is not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

59° Antimony and antimony compounds:

(c) 1550 antimony lactate, 1551 antimony potassium tartrate, 2871 antimony powder, 1549 antimony compound, solid, n.o.s., 3141 antimony compound, inorganic, liquid, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. 1730 antimony pentafluoride, liquid, 1731 antimony pentafluoride solution, 1733 antimony trichloride and 1732 antimony pentafluoride are substances of Class 8 (see marginal 2801, 10°, 11° and 12°).

2. Antimony oxides and antimony sulphide with an arsenic content not exceeding 0,5 % of the total mass, are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

60° Barium compounds:

(b) 1564 barium compound, n.o.s.;

(c) 1884 barium oxide, 1564 barium compound, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. 1445 barium chlorate, 1446 barium nitrate, 1447 barium perchlorate, 1448 barium permanganate and 1449 barium peroxide are substances of Class 5.1 (see marginal 2501, 29°).

2. 1571 barium azide, wetted, is a substance of Class 4.1 (see marginal 2401, 25°).

3. Barium stearate, barium sulphate and barium titanate are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

61° Cadmium compounds:

(a) 2570 cadmium compound;

(b) 2570 cadmium compound;

(c) 2570 cadmium compound.

Note: Cadmium pigments, such as cadmium sulphides, cadmium sulphoselenides and cadmium salts of higher fatty acids (e.g. cadmium stearate), are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

62° Lead compounds:

(c) 1616 lead acetate, 2291 lead compound, soluble, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. 1469 lead nitrate and 1470 lead perchlorate are substances of Class 5.1 (see marginal 2501, 29°).

2. Lead salts and lead pigments which, when mixed in a ratio of 1:1 000 with 0,07 M hydrochloric acid and stirred for one hour at a temperature of 23 °C ± 2 °C, exhibit a solubility of 5 % or less are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

63° Fluorides soluble in water:

(c) 1690 sodium fluoride, 1812 potassium fluoride, 2505 ammonium fluoride.

Note: Corrosive fluorides are substances of Class 8 (see marginal 2801, 6° to 10°).

64° Fluorosilicates:

(c) 2655 potassium fluorosilicate, 2674 sodium fluorosilicate, 2853 magnesium fluorosilicate, 2854 ammonium fluorosilicate, 2855 zinc fluorosilicate, 2856 fluorosilicates, n.o.s.

65° Inorganic substances and solutions and mixtures of inorganic substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under another collective heading:

(a) 3287 toxic liquid, inorganic, n.o.s., 3288 toxic solid, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(b) 3243 solids containing toxic liquid, n.o.s., 3287 toxic liquid, inorganic, n.o.s., 3288 toxic solid, inorganic, n.o.s.;

Note: Mixtures of solids and toxic liquids which are not subject to the provisions of this Directive may be carried under number 3243 without the classification criteria for Class 6.1 being applied to them, provided that no liquid overflow is visible during loading or when the packaging or transport unit is closed. Each packaging shall correspond to a design type which has passed the leakproofness test for packing group II. This number shall not be used for solids containing a liquid classified under letter (a).

(c) 3293 hydrazine aqueous solution, with not more than 37 % hydrazine by mass, 3287 toxic liquid, inorganic, n.o.s., 3288 toxic solid, inorganic, n.o.s.

Note: 2030 hydrazine hydrate and 2030 hydrazine aqueous solution, with not less than 37 % and not more than 64 % hydrazine, by mass, are substances of Class 8 [see marginal 2801, 44°(b)].

66° Toxic, self-heating substances:

(a) 3124 toxic solid, self-heating, n.o.s.;

(b) 3124 toxic solid, self-heating, n.o.s.

67° Toxic substances, corrosive:

(a) 3289 toxic liquid, corrosive, inorganic, n.o.s., 3290 toxic solid, corrosive, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(b) 3289 toxic liquid, corrosive, inorganic, n.o.s., 3290 toxic solid, corrosive, inorganic, n.o.s.

68° Toxic substances, oxidizing:

(a) 3086 toxic solid, oxidizing, n.o.s., 3122 toxic liquid, oxidizing, n.o.s.;

(b) 2727 thallium nitrate, 3086 toxic solid, oxidizing, n.o.s., 3122 toxic liquid, oxidizing, n.o.s.

F. Substances and preparations used as pesticides

Notes: 1. Flammable liquid substances and preparations, used as pesticides, which are highly toxic, toxic or harmful and have a flash-point below 23 °C, are substances of Class 3 (see marginal 2301, 41° to 57°).

2. (a) Articles impregnated with substances and preparations used as pesticides of 71° to 87°, such as fibreboard plates, paper strips, cotton-wool balls, sheets of plastics material, etc., in airtight, hermetically closed wrappings are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

(b) Substances such as baits and cereals impregnated with substances and preparations used as pesticides of 71° to 87° or other substances of Class 6.1 shall be classified according to their toxicity (see marginal 2600(3) and Note 3 below).

71° to 87°: In these items, substances and preparations used as pesticides are tabulated under groups designated by the letters (a), (b), (c):

(a) highly toxic substances and preparations;

(b) toxic substances and preparations;

(c) slightly toxic substances and preparations.

Notes: 1. All active substances and their preparations used as pesticides shall be classified under 71° to 87° (a), (b) and (c) in accordance with marginal 2600 (3).

2. If only the LD50 value of the active substance is known and not that of the preparations of the active substance, the preparations may be classified under 71° to 87° (a), (b) or (c) using the following tables, where the figures shown in columns (a), (b) and (c) of 71° to 87° represent the percentage of active pesticide substance in the preparations.

3. The aim of the following tables is to show the range of pesticides and their preparations corresponding to the different packing groups according to the concentration of active substance. If the LD50 of the preparation is known and if the packing groups determined by applying the criteria in marginal 2600 (3) do not correspond to the packing groups indicated in the following tables based on the concentration of active substance in the preparation, the packing group determined in accordance with the criteria in marginal 2600 (3) shall take precedence.

4. For substances which are not named in the list, and for which only the LD50 value of the active substance is known and not the LD50 value of the various preparations, the classification of a preparation may be determined from the table in marginal 2600 (3), using an LD50 value obtained by multiplying the LD50 value of the active substance by: 100/X, X being the percentage of active substance by mass according to the following formula:

LD50-of the preparation = LD50-value of the activa substance × 100

% of active substance by mass

5. The classification according to Notes 2, 3 and 4 above shall not be used when the preparations contain additives which affect the toxicity of the active substance or when a preparation contains more than one active substance. In such cases, the classification shall be based on the LD50 value of the preparation in question according to the criteria in marginal 2600 (3). If the LD50 value is not known, the substance shall be classified under (a) of 71° to 87°.

71° 2783 organophosphorus pesticide, solid, toxic, 3017 organophosphorus pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flashpoint not less than 23 °C, 3018 organophosphorus pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

72° 2761 organochlorine pesticide, solid, toxic,

2995 organochlorine pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C,

2996 organochlorine pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

73° 2765 phenoxy pesticide, solid, toxic

2999 phenoxy pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C,

3000 phenoxy pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

74° 2757 carbamate pesticide, solid, toxic,

2991 carbamate pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C,

2992 carbamate pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

75° 2777 mercury based pesticide, solid, toxic,

3011 mercury based pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C,

3012 mercury based pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

76° 2786 organotin pesticide, solid, toxic,

3019 organotin pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C,

3020 organotin pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

77° 3025 coumarin derivative pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C,

3026 coumarin derivative pesticide, liquid, toxic,

3027 coumarin derivative pesticide, solid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

78° 2781 bipyridilium pesticide, solid, toxic,

3015 bipyridilium pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C,

3016 bipyridilium pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

79° 2759 arsenical pesticide, solid, toxic,

2993 arsenical pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C

2994 arsenical pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

80° 2775 copper based pesticide, solid, toxic,

3009 copper based pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C,

3010 copper based pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

81° 2779 substituted nitrophenol pesticide, solid, toxic,

3013 substituted nitrophenol pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C,

3014 substituted nitrophenol pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

82° 2763 triazine pesticide, solid, toxic,

2997 triazine pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C,

2998 triazine pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

83° 2769 benzoic derivative pesticide, solid, toxic,

3003 benzoic derivative pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C,

3004 benzoic derivative pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

84° 2773 phthalimide derivative pesticide, solid, toxic,

3007 phthalimide derivative pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C,

3008 phthalimide derivative pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

85° 2767 phenyl urea pesticide, solid, toxic,

3001 phenyl urea pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C,

3002 phenyl urea pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

86° 2771 dithiocarbamate pesticide, solid, toxic,

3005 dithiocarbamate pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, flash-point not less than 23 °C,

3006 dithiocarbamate pesticide, liquid, toxic, such as:

>TABLE>

87° Pesticides which cannot be classified under items 71° to 86°:

2588 pesticide, solid, toxic, n.o.s.,

2902 pesticide, liquid, toxic, n.o.s.,

2903 pesticide, liquid, toxic, flammable, n.o.s., flash-point not less than 23 °C, such as:

Organonitrogenous compounds

>TABLE>

Alkaloïds

>TABLE>

Other organometallic compounds

>TABLE>

Inorganic fluorine compounds

>TABLE>

Inorganic thallium compounds

>TABLE>

Other pesticides

>TABLE>

Pyrethrinoids

>TABLE>

Note: Aluminium phosphide pesticides are substances of 43° (a).

G. Active substances such as those intended for laboratories and experiments and for the manufacture of pharmaceutical products, if not listed under other items of this Class

90° Active substances, including:

(a) 1570 brucine, 1692 strychnine or 1692 strychnine salts,

1544 alkaloids, solid, n.o.s. or 1544 alkaloid salts, solid, n.o.s.,

1655 nicotine compound, solid, n.o.s. or 1655 nicotine preparation, solid, n.o.s.,

3140 alkaloids, liquid, n.o.s. or 3140 alkaloid salts, liquid, n.o.s.,

3144 nicotine compound, liquid, n.o.s. or 3144 nicotine preparation, liquid, n.o.s.,

3172 toxins, extracted from living sources, n.o.s.

(b) 1654 nicotine, 1656 nicotine hydrochloride or 1656 nicotine hydrochloride solution, 1657 nicotine salicylate, 1658 nicotine sulphate, solid or 1658 nicotine sulphate solution, 1659 nicotine tartrate,

1544 alkaloids, solid, n.o.s. or 1544 alkaloid salts, solid, n.o.s.,

1655 nicotine compound, solid, n.o.s. or 1655 nicotine preparation, solid, n.o.s.,

1851 medicine, liquid, toxic, n.o.s.,

3140 alkaloids, liquid, n.o.s. or 3140 alkaloid salts, liquid, n.o.s.,

3144 nicotine compound, liquid, n.o.s. or 3144 nicotine preparation, liquid, n.o.s.,

3172 toxins extracted from living sources, n.o.s.,

3249 medicine, solid, toxic, n.o.s.

(c) 1544 alkaloids, solid, n.o.s. or 1544 alkaloids salts, solid, n.o.s.,

1655 nicotine compound, solid, n.o.s. or 1655 nicotine preparation, solid, n.o.s.,

1851 medicine, liquid, toxic, n.o.s.,

3140 alkaloids, liquid, n.o.s. or 3140 alkaloid salts, liquid, n.o.s.,

3144 nicotine compound, liquid, n.o.s. or 3144 nicotine preparation, liquid, n.o.s.,

3172 toxins extracted from living sources, n.o.s.,

3249 medicine, solid, toxic, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. The active substances and triturations or mixtures of substances of 90° with other substances shall be classified according to their toxicity [see marginal 2600 (3)].

2. Pharmaceutical products ready for use, e.g. cosmetics, drugs and medicines, which are substances manufactured and packed in packagings of a type intended for retail sale or distribution for personal or household consumption, which would otherwise be substances of 90° are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

3. Substances and preparations containing alkaloids or nicotine used as pesticides are substances of 87°.

H. Empty packagings

Note: Empty packagings with residues from their previous contents adhering to the outside are not to be accepted for carriage.

91° Empty packagings, including empty intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks, empty tank-containers, empty bulk vehicles and empty bulk containers, uncleaned, which have contained substances of Class 6.1.

2601a Substances of 11°, 12°, 14° to 28°, 32° to 36°, 41°, 42°, 44°, 51° to 55°, 57° to 68°, 71° to 87° and 90° carried in conformity with the following provisions are subject neither to the provisions for this Class contained in this Annex nor to those contained in Annex B:

(a) Substances classified under (b) of each item:

- liquids: not more than 500 ml per inner packaging and not more than 2 litres per package;

- solids: not more than 1 kg per inner packaging and not more than 4 kg per package.

(b) Substances classified under (c) of each item:

- liquids: not more than 3 litres per inner packaging and not more than 12 litres per package.

- solids: not more than 6 kg per inner packaging and not more than 24 kg per package.

These quantities of substances shall be carried in combination packagings conforming at least to the conditions of marginal 3538.

The 'General conditions of packing` of marginal 3500 (1), (2) and (5) to (7) shall be observed.

2. Provisions

A. Packages

1. General conditions of packing

2602 (1) Packagings shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.5, unless special conditions for the packing of certain substances are prescribed in marginals 2603 to 2608.

(2) Intermediate Bulk Containers (IBCs) shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.6.

(3) In accordance with the provisions of marginals 2600 (3) and 3511 (2) or 3611 (2) the following shall be used:

- packagings of packing group I, marked with the letter 'X`, for the highly toxic substances classified under the letter (a) of each item;

- packagings of packing group II or I, marked with the letter 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs of packing group II, marked with the letter 'Y`, for the toxic substances classified under the letter (b) of each item;

- packagings of packing group III, II or I, marked with the letter 'Z`, 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs of packing group III or II, marked with the letter 'Z` or 'Y`, for the slightly toxic substances classified under the letter (c) of each item.

Note: For the carriage of substances of Class 6.1 in tank-vehicles, demountable tanks or tank-containers, and for the carriage in bulk of solids of this Class, see Annex B.

2. Special conditions for packing of certain substances

2603 (1) Stabilized hydrogen cyanide of 1° shall be packed:

(a) when completely absorbed by an inert porous material: in strong metal receptacles of a capacity of not more than 7,5 litres, placed in wooden cases in such a manner that they cannot come into contact with one another. Such a combination packaging shall comply with the following conditions:

1. the receptacles shall be tested at a pressure of not less than 0,6 MPa (6 bar) (gauge pressure);

2. the receptacles shall be entirely filled with the porous material. The porous material shall not shake down or form dangerous spaces even after prolonged use or under impact, even at temperatures of up to 50 °C. The date of filling shall be durably marked on the lid of each receptacle;

3. the combination packaging shall be tested and approved, in accordance with Appendix A.5, for packing group I. The package shall not weigh more than 120 kg;

(b) when liquid, but not absorbed by a porous material: in carbon-steel pressure-resistant cylinders which shall satisfy the following conditions:

1. before being used for the first time, the pressure-resistant cylinders shall undergo a hydraulic pressure test at a pressure of not less than 10 MPa (100 bar) (gauge pressure). The pressure test shall be repeated every two years and shall include a meticulous inspection of the inside of the receptacle and a check of the tare;

2. the cylinders shall comply with the relevant provisions of Class 2 (see marginals 2211, 2212 (1) (a), 2213, 2215 and 2218);

3. maximum permissible mass of the contents: 0,55 kg per litre of capacity.

(2) Solutions of hydrocyanic acid of 2° shall be packed in flame-sealed glass ampoules, containing not more than 50 g, or in glass bottles so closed as to be leakproof and containing not more than 250 g.

The ampoules or bottles shall be carried in combination packagings which meet the following conditions:

(a) The ampoules and bottles shall be secured by absorbent cushioning materials in leakproof steel or aluminium outer packagings; a package shall not weigh more than 15 kg; or

(b) The ampoules and bottles shall be secured by absorbent cushioning materials in wooden cases with a leakproof tin-plate lining; a package shall not weigh more than 75 kg.

The combination packagings referred to in(a) and (b) shall be tested and approved, in accordance with Appendix A.5, for packing group I.

2604 Iron pentacarbonyl and nickel tetracarbonyl of 3° shall be packed as follows:

(1) In seamless moulded bottles made of pure aluminium of a capacity not exceeding 1 litre and a wall thickness not less than 1 mm, which shall be tested at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure). The bottles shall be closed by means of a metal screw-threaded plug with an inert gasket, the screw-threaded plug being screwed firmly into the neck of the bottle and so secured that it cannot work loose under normal conditions of carriage.

A maximum of four aluminium bottles of this type may be secured in outer packagings of wood or fibreboard by non-flammable absorbent cushioning material. Such a combination packaging shall conform to a design type which has been tested and approved for packing group I in accordance with Appendix A.5.

A package shall not weigh more than 10 kg.

(2) In metal receptacles fitted with completely leakproof closing devices which shall, if necessary, be secured against mechanical damage by protective caps. Steel receptacles of a capacity not exceeding 150 litres shall have a minimum wall thickness of 3 mm, and larger steel receptacles and receptacles made of other materials shall have walls at least thick enough to guarantee equivalent mechanical strength. The maximum capacity of receptacles permitted shall be 250 litres. The mass of the contents shall be not more than 1 kg of liquid per litre of capacity.

Before being used for the first time, the receptacles shall undergo a hydraulic pressure test at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure). The pressure test shall be repeated every five years and shall include a meticulous inspection of the inside of the receptacle and a check of the tare. Metal receptacles shall bear the following particulars in clearly legible and durable characters:

(a) the name of the substance in full (the names of both substances may also be shown side by side in the event of alternative use);

(b) the name of the owner of the receptacle;

(c) the tare of the receptacle, including such fittings and accessories as valves, protective caps, etc.;

(d) the date (month, year) of the initial test and of the most recent test, and the stamp of the expert who carried out the test;

(e) the maximum permissible mass of the contents of the receptacle in kg;

(f) the internal pressure (test pressure) to be applied in the hydraulic pressure test.

2605 (1)

(a) Ethyleneimine, inhibited, of 4° shall be packed in steel receptacles of sufficient thickness, which shall be closed by a screw-threaded bung or plug rendered leakproof both to liquid and to vapour by means of a suitable gasket. The receptacles shall initially and periodically, at least every five years, be tested at a pressure of not less than 0,3 MPa (3 bar) (gauge pressure) in accordance with marginals 2215 (1) and 2216. Each receptacle shall be secured by absorbent cushioning materials in a strong leakproof protective metal packaging. The protective packaging shall be hermetically closed and its closure shall be secured against any inadvertent opening. The mass of the contents shall not exceed 0,67 kg per litre of capacity. A package shall not weigh more than 75 kg. Packages weighing more than 30 kg, other than those forwarded as a full load, shall be fitted with means of handling.

(b) Ethyleneimine, inhibited, of 4° may also be packed in steel receptacles of sufficient thickness, which shall be closed by a screw-threaded bung and a screw-threaded protective cap or equivalent device leakproof both to liquid and to vapour. The receptacles shall initially and periodically, at least every five years, be tested at a pressure of at least 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure) in accordance with marginals 2215 (1) and 2216. The mass of the contents shall not exceed 0,67 kg per litre of capacity. A package shall not weigh more than 75 kg.

(c) Receptacles in conformity with (a) and (b) shall bear, in clearly legible and durable characters:

- the name or mark of the manufacturer and the number of the receptacle;

- the word 'ethyleneimine`;

- the tare of the receptacle and its maximum permitted mass when filled;

- the date (month and year) of the initial test and of the most recent test undergone;

- the stamp of the expert who carried out the tests and examinations.

(2) Methyl isocyanate of 5° shall be packed:

(a) in hermetically closed receptacles made of pure aluminium and having a capacity not exceeding one litre, which shall not be filled beyond 90 % of their capacity. The receptacles shall be secured, not more than 10 to a box, with appropriate cushioning material in a wooden box. Packages of this kind shall satisfy the test requirements for combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538 for packing group I, and shall not weigh more than 30 kg; or

(b) in receptacles made of pure aluminium having a wall thickness of not less than 5 mm or in receptacles of stainless steel. The receptacles shall be fully welded and shall initially and periodically, at least every five years, be tested at a pressure of at least 0,5 MPa (5 bar) (gauge pressure) in accordance with marginals 2215 (1) and 2216. They shall be so closed as to be leakproof by means of two closures one above the other, one of which shall be screw-threaded or secured in an equally effective manner. The degree of filling shall be not more than 90 %.

Drums weighing more than 100 kg shall be fitted with rolling hoops or stiffening ribs.

(c) Receptacles in conformity with (b) shall bear, in clearly legible and durable characters:

- the name or mark of the manufacturer and the number of the receptacle;

- the words 'methyl isocyanate`;

- the tare of the receptacle and its maximum permitted mass when filled;

- the date (month and year) of the initial test and of the most recent test undergone;

- the stamp of the expert who carried out the tests and examinations.

2606 (1) Substances classified under (a) of the various items shall be packed:

(a) in non-removable head steel drums conforming to marginal 3520; or

(b) in non-removable head aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521; or

(c) in non-removable head steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522; or

(d) in non-removable head plastics drums of a capacity not exceeding 60 litres or non-removable head plastics jerricans conforming to marginal 3526; or

(e) in composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537; or

(f) in combination packagings with inner packaging of glass, plastics or metal conforming to marginal 3538.

(2) Solid substances within the meaning of marginal 2600 (13) may also be packed:

(a) in removable head drums conforming to marginals 3520 for steel, 3521 for aluminium, 3523 for plywood, 3525 for fibreboard, or 3526 for plastics material, or in removable head jerricans conforming to marginals 3522 for steel or 3526 for plastics material, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags; or

(b) in combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538, with one or more sift-proof inner bags.

(3) Sodium cyanide of 41° (a) may also be packed in metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622 or in wooden IBCs with a sift-proof inner liner conforming to marginal 3627, provided it is carried as a full load.

2607 (1) Substances classified under (b) of the various items shall be packed:

(a) in steel drums conforming to marginal 3520; or

(b) in aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521; or

(c) in steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522; or

(d) in plastics drums or plastics jerricans conforming to marginal 3526; or

(e) in composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537; or

(f) in combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538.

Note to (a), (b), (c) and (d): Simplified conditions are applicable to removable-head drums and jerricans for viscous substances having a viscosity of more than 200 mm2/s at 23 °C and for solids (see marginals 3512, 3553, 3554 and 3560).

(2) Substances classified under (b) of the various items which have a vapour pressure at 50 °C of not more than 110 kPa (1,10 bar) may also be packed in metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622 or in rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624 or in composite IBCs with rigid plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625.

(3) Substances classified under 15°(b) may also be packed in composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539.

(4) Solid substances within the meaning of marginal 2600 (13) may also be packed:

(a) in removable-head drums conforming to marginal 3523 for plywood or 3525 for fibreboard, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags; or

(b) in water-resistant bags conforming to marginals 3533 for textile material, 3534 for woven plastics material, 3535 for plastics film or 3536 for water-resistant paper, provided the goods are carried as a full load or the bags secured on pallets; or

(c) in composite IBCs with flexible plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625, fibreboard IBCs conforming to marginal 3626 or wooden IBCs conforming to marginal 3627; or

(d) in flexible IBCs conforming to marginal 3623, with the exception of IBCs of types 13H1, 13L1, 13M1, provided that the goods are carried as a full load or the flexible IBCs are loaded on pallets.

2608 (1) Substances classified under (c) of the various items shall be packed:

(a) in steel drums conforming to marginal 3520; or

(b) in aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521; or

(c) in steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522; or

(d) in plastics drums or plastics jerricans conforming to marginal 3526; or

(e) in composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537; or

(f) in combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538; or

(g) in composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539; or

(h) in light gauge metal packagings conforming to marginal 3540.

Note to (a), (b), (c), (d), and (h): Simplified conditions are applicable to removable-head drums, jerricans and light gauge metal packagings for viscous substances having a viscosity of more than 200 mm2/s at 23 °C and for solids (see marginals 3512, 3552 to 3554 and 3560).

(2) Substances classified under (c) of the various items which have a vapour pressure at 50 °C of not more than 110 kPa (1,10 bar) may also be packed in metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622, in rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624 or in composite IBCs with rigid plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625.

(3) Solid substances within the meaning of marginal 2600 (13) may also be packed:

(a) in movable-head drums conforming to marginal 3523 for plywood, or 3525 for fibreboard, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags; or

(b) in water-resistant bags conforming to marginals 3533 for textile material, 3534 for woven plastics material, 3535 for plastics film or 3536 for water-resistant paper; or

(c) in flexible IBCs conforming to marginal 3623 with the exception of IBCs of types 13H1, 13L1 and 13M1, in composite IBCs with flexible plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625, in fibreboard IBCs conforming to marginal 3626 or in wooden IBCs conforming to marginal 3627.

2609-

2610

3. Mixed packing

2611 (1) Substances covered by the same item number may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538.

(2) Substances of different items of Class 6.1 in quantities not exceeding, per inner packaging, 3 litres for liquids and/or 5 kg for solids, may be packed together and/or with goods not subject to the provisions of this Directive, in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538, provided they do not react dangerously with one another.

(3) Substances of 1°, 3°, 4° and 5° shall not be packed with other goods.

(4) Substances of 2° and substances classified under (a) of the various items shall not be packed together with substances and articles of classes 1 and 5.2 and material of class 7.

(5) Except as otherwise specially provided, substances of 2° and liquid substances classified under (a) of the various items, in quantities not exceeding 0,5 litre per inner packaging and 1 litre per package, and substances classified under (b) and (c) of the various items, in quantities not exceeding, per inner packaging, 3 litres for liquids and/or 5 kg for solids, may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538, with substances or articles of other classes, provided that mixed packing is also permitted for the substances of these classes, and/or with goods which are not subject to the provisions of this Directive, provided they do not react dangerously with one another.

(6) The following are considered dangerous reactions:

(a) combustion and/or giving off considerable heat;

(b) emission of flammable and/or toxic gases;

(c) formation of corrosive liquids;

(d) formation of unstable substances.

(7) The mixed packing of acid substances with basic substances in a package shall not be permitted if the two substances are packed in fragile receptacles.

(8) The provisions of marginals 2001 (7), 2002 (6) and (7) and 2602 shall be complied with.

(9) If wooden or fibreboard boxes are used, a package shall not weigh more than 100 kg.

4. Marking and danger labels on packages (See Appendix A.9)

Marking

2612 (1) Each package shall be clearly and durably marked with the identification number of the goods to be entered in the transport document, preceded by the letters 'UN`.

Danger labels

(2) Packages containing substances or articles of this Class shall bear a label conforming to model No 6.1.

(3) Packages containing substances of 1° to 6°, 7° (a) 2., 8°, 9°, 11°, 13°, 16°, 18°, 20°, 22° or 26° (a) 1. or (b) 1. shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 3.

(4) Packages containing flammable pesticides of 71° to 87° having a flashpoint of 23 °C or above shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 3.

(5) Packages containing substances of 7° (a) 1., 10° or 28° shall, in addition, bear labels conforming to models Nos 3 and 8.

(6) Packages containing substances of 26° (a) 2. or (b) 2. or 54° (b) 1. shall, in addition, bear labels conforming to model Nos 4.1.

(7) Packages containing substances of 66° shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 4.2.

(8) Packages containing substances of 44° shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 4.3.

(9) Packages containing substances of 68° shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 05.

(10) Packages containing substances of 24° (b) 2., 27° or 67° shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 8.

(11) Packages containing fragile receptacles not visible from the outside shall, in addition, bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 12.

(12) Packages containing liquids in receptacles the closures of which are not visible from the outside, packages containing receptacles with vents, and receptacles with vents but without outer packaging, shall, in addition, bear on two opposite sides label conforming to model No 11.

2613

B. Particulars in the transport document

2614 The description of the goods in the transport document shall conform to one of the substance identification numbers and one of the names printed in italics in marginal 2601.

If the substance is not mentioned by name but is assigned to an n.o.s. entry, or to another collective entry the description of the goods shall consist of the identification number, the n.o.s. designation or the collective entry designation, followed by the chemical or technical name ().

The description of the goods shall be followed by particulars of the class, the item number, if applicable, the letter, and the initials 'ADR` (or 'RID`) e.g. '6.1, 11°(a), ADR`.

For the carriage of wastes [see marginal 2000 (5)], the description of the goods shall be: 'Waste containing `, the component(s) used for the classification of the waste under marginal 2002 (8) to be entered under its/their chemical name(s), e.g. 'Waste, containing 2570 cadmium compounds, 6.1, 61°(c) ADR`.

For the carriage of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) containing several components subject to the provisions of this Directive, it will not in general be necessary to refer to more than two components which most predominantly contribute to the danger or dangers of the solutions and mixtures.

For the carriage of solutions and mixtures containing only one component subject to the provisions of this Directive, the words 'solution` or 'mixture` should be added as part of the name in the transport document [see marginal 2002 (8)].

When a solid substance is handed over for carriage in the molten state, the description of the goods shall be completed by the word 'molten`, unless it is already included in the name.

If a solution or mixture containing a named substance in accordance with marginal 2600 (5), is not subject to the conditions of this Class the consignor may enter in the transport document 'Not goods of Class 6.1`.

2615-

2621

C. Empty packagings

2622 (1) If the empty packagings, uncleaned, of 91° are bags or flexible IBCs, these shall be placed in boxes or waterproof bags to prevent any leakage of substance.

(2) Other empty packagings, including uncleaned empty IBCs of 91° shall be closed in the same manner and with the same degree of leakproofness as if they were full.

(3) Empty packagings, including uncleaned empty IBCs of 91° shall bear the same danger labels as if they were full.

(4) The description in the transport document shall conform to one of the names printed in italics in 91°, e.g.: 'Empty packaging, 6.1, 91° ADR`.

In the case of empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks, empty tank-containers as well as empty vehicles for carriage in bulk and empty bulk containers, uncleaned, this description shall be completed by adding the words 'Last load` together with the name and item of the goods last loaded, e.g.: 'Last load: 2312 phenol, molten, 24° (b)`.

2623-

2624

D. Transitional measures

2625 Substances of class 6.1 may be carried until 30 June 1995 in accordance with the requirements for Class 6.1 applicable until 31 December 1994. The transport document shall, in such cases, bear the inscription 'Carriage in accordance with the ADR in force before 1 January 1995`.

2626-

2649

CLASS 6.2 INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCES

1. List of substances

2650 (1) Among the substances () covered by the title of Class 6.2, those which are listed in marginal 2651 or are covered by a collective heading of that marginal are subject to the conditions set out in marginal 2650 (2) to marginal 2675 and the provisions of this Annex and of Annex B. They are then considered as substances of this Directive.

(2) Class 6.2 comprises substances containing viable micro-organisms, including bacteria, viruses, rickettsia, parasites, fungi, also as recombinant, hybrid or mutant micro-organisms, that are known or reasonably believed to cause disease in animals or humans. They are subject to the provisions of this Class if they are capable of spreading diseases to humans or animals when exposure to them occurs.

Notes: 1. Genetically modified micro-organisms and organisms, biological products, diagnostic specimens and infected live animals shall be assigned to this Class if they meet the conditions for this Class.

2. Toxic toxins from plant, animal or bacterial sources which do not contain any infectious substances or organisms or which are not contained in them are substances of Class 6.1 (see marginal 2601, 90°, identification number 3172).

(3) Substances of Class 6.2 are subdivided as follows:

A. Infectious substances with a high risk potential

B. Other infectious substances

C. Empty packagings.

The substances of marginal 2651, 3° and 4°, are assigned to the group designated by the letter (b) on the basis of their degree of danger:

(b) dangerous substances.

(4) The assignment of substances which are not listed by name to 1°, 2° and 3° of marginal 2651, shall be made, on the basis of current scientific knowledge, in accordance with the following risk groups ():

(i) Risk group IV (high individual risk, high community risk) covers micro-organisms that can cause severe human or animal disease, which may present a high risk of spreading, and for which there is usually no effective prophylaxis or treatment available;

(ii) Risk group III (high individual risk, low community risk) covers micro-organisms that can cause severe human or animal disease and may present a high risk of spreading, but for which there is usually effective prophylaxis or treatment available;

(iii) Risk group II (moderate individual risk, limited community risk) covers micro-organisms that can cause human or animal disease, which are unlikely to spread, and for which there is usually effective prophylaxis or treatent available;

(iv) Risk group I (low individual and community risk) covers micro-organisms that are unlikely to cause human or animal disease.

Notes: 1. Micro-organisms of risk group I are not infectious substances within the meaning of this Class.

2. Genetically modified micro-organisms and organisms () are micro-organisms and organisms in which the genetic material has been deliberately altered by technical methods or by means that cannot occur naturally in nature.

3. Genetically modified micro-organisms which are infectious within the meaning of this Class, are substances of 1°, 2° or 3°. They may not however be assigned to 4°. Genetically modified micro-organisms which are not infectious substances within the meaning of this Class, may be substances of Class 9 (see marginal 2901, 13°, identification number 3245).

4. Genetically modified organisms, which are known or suspected to be dangerous to humans, animals or the environment, shall be carried in accordance with conditions specified by the competent authority of the country of origin.

(5) Substances and mixtures of substances of this Class shall be considered as solids for the packaging provisions of marginals 2654 and 2655 as long as they do not contain free liquid at a temperature of less than 45 °C.

(6) 'Biological products` are:

- finished biological preparations for human or veterinary use manufactured in accordance with the requirements of national public health authorities and moving under special approval or licence from such authorities, if required; or

- biological products transported prior to licensing for research or development purposes; or

- finished preparations for use in the experimental treatment of humans or animals and manufactured in accordance with the requirements of national public health authorities.

They also cover unfinished biological products prepared in accordance with procedures of specialized government agencies.

Diagnostic specimens are any human or animal material including, but not limited to, excreta, secreta, blood and its components, tissue and tissue fluids being transported for purposes of diagnosis or research, but excluding live infected animals.

Note: 'Biological products` and 'diagnostic specimens` are not considered as substances of this Class if they are known not to contain infectious substances.

(7) Live vertebrate or invertebrate animals shall not be used to carry an infectious agent unless the agent cannot be carried by any other means. Such animals shall be packed, marked, indicated, and carried in accordance with the relevant regulations governing the carriage of animals ().

(8) For the carriage of substances of this Class, the maintenance of a specified temperature may be necessary.

A. Infectious substances with high risk potential

2651 1° 2814 infectious substance, affecting humans,

2900 infectious substance, affecting animals only.

Notes: 1. Substances which, in accordance with marginal 2650 (4), are assigned to risk group IV, shall be assigned to this item.

2. Special conditions of packing are applicable to these substances (see marginals 2653 and 2654).

2° 2814 infectious substance, affecting humans,

2900 infectious substance, affecting animals only.

Notes: 1. Substances which, in accordance with marginal 2650 (4), are assigned to risk group III, shall be assigned to this item.

2. Special conditions of packing are applicable to these substances (see marginals 2653 and 2654).

B. Other infectious substances

3° (b) 2814 infectious substance, affecting humans,

2900 infectious substance, affecting animals only.

Note: Substances which, in accordance with marginal 2650 (4), are assigned to risk group II, shall be assigned to this item.

4° (b) 3291 clinical waste, unspecified, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. Unspecified wastes resulting from medical/veterinary treatment of humans/animals or from biological research, and which are unlikely to contain substances of this Class shall be assigned to this item.

2. Specified wastes shall be assigned to 1°, 2° or 3°.

3. Decontaminated clinical wastes or wastes resulting from biological research which previously contained infectious substances are not subject to the provisions of this Class.

C. Empty packagings

11° Uncleaned empty packagings, including empty intermediate bulk containers (IBC), empty tank vehicles, empty demountable tanks and empty tank-containers, uncleaned, which have contained substances of Class 6.2 (see marginal 2672).

2. Provisions

A. Packages

1. General conditions of packing

2652 (1) Packagings shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.5, unless special conditions for the packing of certain substances are prescribed in marginals 2653 and 2656.

Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.6.

(2) In accordance with the provisions of marginals 2650 (3) and 3511 (2) or 3611 (2), the following shall be used:

- packagings of packing group II or I, marked with the letter 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs of packing group II, marked with the letter 'Y` for dangerous substances classified under the letter (b) of each item;

Note: For the carriage of substances of Class 6.2 in tank-vehicles, demountable tanks or tank-containers see Annex B.

2. Special conditions for packing of certain substances

2653 (1) Packagings for substances of 1° and 2° shall include the following essential elements:

(a) An inner packaging comprising:

- a leakproof primary receptacle;

- a leakproof secondary packaging;

- absorbent material placed between the primary receptacle and the secondary packaging: if several primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be individually wrapped so as to prevent contact between them. The absorbent material, such as cotton wool,shall be in sufficient quantity to absorb the entire contents of the primary receptacles.

Whatever the intended temperature of the consignment, the primary receptacle or the secondary packaging shall be capable of withstanding without leakage an internal pressure producing a pressure differential of not less than 95 kPa (0,95 bar) and temperatures in the range P 40 °C to + 55 °C.

Note: Inner packagings containing infectious substances shall not be consolidated in an outer packaging with other types of goods.

(b) An outer packaging of adequate strength for its capacity, mass and intended use, and with a minimum external dimension of 100 mm.

(2) Packagings conforming to paragraph (1) shall be tested in accordance with the provisions of marginal 2654; the packaging design type shall be one permitted by the competent authority. Every packaging manufactured in accordance with the approved design type shall be marked in accordance with marginal 3512.

Tests for packagings in accordance with marginal 2653

2654 (1) Other than for packagings for live animals and organisms, samples of each packaging shall be prepared for testing as described in paragraph (2) and then subjected to the tests in paragraphs (3) to (5). If the nature of the packaging makes it necessary, equivalent preparation and tests are permitted, provided that these may be demonstrated to be at least as effective.

(2) Samples of each packaging shall be prepared as for carriage, except that the substance to be carried shall be replaced by water, or, where conditioning at P 18 °C is specified, by a mixture water/antifreeze. Each primary receptacle shall be filled to 98 % capacity.

(3) Packagings prepared as for carriage shall be subjected to the tests in the table, which, for test purposes, categorizes packagings according to their material characteristics. For outer packagings, the headings in the table relate to:

- fibreboard or similar materials whose performance may be rapidly affected by moisture;

- plastics which may embrittle at low temperature; and

- other materials such as metal whose performance is not affected by moisture or temperature.

If a primary receptacle and a secondary packaging [see marginal 2653 (1) (a)] are made of different materials, the material of the primary receptacle determines the appropriate test. In instances where a primary receptacle is made of two materials, the material most liable to damage shall determine the appropriate tests.

>TABLE>

(a) Samples shall be subjected to free-fall drops on to a rigid, non-resilient, flat, horizontal surface from a height of 9 m. Where the samples are in the shape of a box five shall be dropped in sequence:

- one flat on to the bottom,

- one flat on to the top,

- one flat on to the long side,

- one flat on to the short side,

- one on to a corner.

Where the samples are in the shape of a drum, three shall be dropped in sequence:

- one diagonally on to the top chime, with the centre of gravity directly above the point of impact,

- one diagonally on to the base chime,

- one flat on to the side.

Following the appropriate drop sequence, there shall be no leakage from the primary receptacle(s) which shall remain protected by absorbent material in the secondary packaging.

(b) The samples shall be fully immersed in water for a period of at least 5 minutes and then allowed to drain for not more than 30 minutes at 23 °C and 50 ± 2 % relative humidity. It shall then be subjected to the test described in (a).

(c) The samples shall be conditioned in an atmosphere of P 18 °C or less for a period of at least 24 hours and within 15 minutes of removal from that atmosphere be subjected to the test described in (a). Where the samples contains dry ice, the conditioning period may be reduced to four hours.

(d) Where the packaging is intended to contain dry ice, a test additional to that specified in (a) or (b) or (c) shall be carried out. One sample shall be stored so that all the dry ice dissipates and then be subjected to the test described in (a).

(4) Packagings with a gross mass of 7 kg or less shall be subjected to the tests described in (a) below and packagings with a gross mass exceeding 7 kg to the tests in (b) below.

(a) Samples shall be placed on a level hard surface. A cylindrical steel rod with a mass of at least 7 kg, and a diameter not exceeding 38 mm, and whose impact end edges have a radius not exceeding 6 mm, shall be dropped in a vertical free fall from a height of 1 m, measured from the impact end to the impact surface of the sample. One sample shall be placed on its base. A second sample shall be placed in an orientation perpendicular to that used for the first. In each instance, the steel rod shall be aimed to impact the primary receptacle. Following each impact, penetration of the secondary packaging is acceptable, provided that there is no leakage from the primary receptacle(s).

(b) Samples shall be dropped on to the end of a cylindrical steel rod. The rod shall be set vertically in a level hard surface. It shall have a diameter of 38 mm and the edges of the upper end a radius not exceeding 6 mm. The rod shall protrude from the surface a distance at least equal to that between the primary receptacle(s) and the outer surface of the outer packaging with a minimum of 200 mm. One sample shall be dropped in a vertical freefall from a height of 1 m, measured from the top of the steel rod. A second sample shall be dropped from the same height in an orientation perpendicular to that used for the first. In each instance, the packaging shall be so orientated that the steel rod could penetrate the primary receptacle(s). Following each impact, penetration of the secondary packaging is acceptable, provided that there is no leakage from the primary receptacle(s).

(5) As long as an equivalent level of performance is maintained, the following variations in the primary receptacles placed within the secondary packaging are allowed without the need for further testing of the completed packaging.

Primary receptacles of equivalent or smaller size as compared to the tested primary receptacles may be used provided:

(a) the primary receptacles are of similar design to the primary receptacle tested (e.g. rounded, rectangular);

(b) the material of construction of the primary receptacles (e.g. glass, plastics, metal) has a resistance to impact and stacking pressure equivalent to or better than that of the primary receptacles initially tested;

(c) primary receptacles have the same or smaller openings and the closure is of equivalent design (e.g. screw-threaded plug, bung);

(d) sufficient additional cushioning material is used to fill up empty space and to prevent significant movement of the primary receptacles; and

(e) primary receptacles are oriented within the secondary packagings in the same manner as in the tested package.

2655 (1) Substances classified under 3° (b) and 4° (b) shall be packed in:

(a) steel drums conforming to marginal 3520; or

(b) aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521; or

(c) steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522; or

(d) plastics drums or jerricans conforming to marginal 3526; or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537; or

(f) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538; or

(g) composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539; or

(h) metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622; or

(i) rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624; or

(j) (reserved)

(k) composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacles conforming to marginal 3625, with the exception of IBCs of types 11HZ2 and 31HZ2.

(2) Solid substances within the meaning of marginal 2650 (5) may also be packed in plywood drums conforming to marginal 3523 or in fibre drums conforming to marginal 3525, if necessary with one or more leakproof inner bags.

2656 Biological products and diagnostic specimens of 1° to 3° where a relatively low probability exists that infectious substances are present e.g. for routine screening tests or initial diagnosis, must meet all the provisions of this class except where the following conditions are met:

(1) The primary receptacles do not contain more than 50 ml for biological products, 100 ml for diagnostic specimens;

(2) The outer packaging does not contain more than:

- 50 ml for biological products when fragile primary receptacles are used;

- 100 ml for biological products when other than fragile primary receptacles are used;

- 500 ml for diagnostic specimens.

(3) The primary receptacles are leakproof; and

(4) The packaging is in accordance with the provisions of this class; however it need not be subjected to the tests.

2657 When substances of this Class are carried in deeply refrigerated liquid nitrogen, the inner packagings shall conform to the provisions for this Class and the containers for the nitrogen shall conform to the provisions of Class 2.

2658 (1) The openings of primary receptacles for liquids of 1° and 2° shall be closed so as to be leakproof by means of two devices placed in series, one of which shall be screw-threaded or secured in an equivalent manner.

(2) Receptacles for substances of 3° and 4° which evolve gases and which are carried at ambient temperature of more than 15 °C shall be fitted with a specific pathogen-tight vent in the lid, which shall be protected against external mechanical stresses.

With reusable receptacles, the filter of the vent shall be replaced before refilling.

(3) Plastics or fibreboard packagings intended for the carriage of wastes of 4° shall be resistant and, if the wastes contain sharp objects, shall be impenetrable to such objects.

(4) The closure of packagings for substances of 4° shall be so constructed that they are hermetically closed after filling and so designed that any subsequent opening is immediately evident.

2659-

2660

3. Mixed packing

2661 (1) Substances covered by the same item number may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538.

(2) Substances of 1°, 2° and 3° may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538, if the package is tested and approved in accordance with the provisions for substances of 1° and 2°.

(3) Substances of Class 6.2 shall not be packed together with substances and articles of other classes, nor with goods not subject to the provisions of this Directive. This does not apply to biological products and diagnostic specimens which are packed in accordance with marginal 2656 or to substances being carried as coolants, e.g. ice, dry ice or deeply refrigerated liquid nitrogen.

(4) The provisions of marginals 2001 (7), 2002 (6) and (7) and 2652 shall be observed.

(5) If wooden or fibreboard boxes are used, a package shall not weigh more than 100 kg.

4. Marking and danger labels on packages (See Appendix A.9)

Marking

2662 (1) Each package shall be clearly and durably marked with the identification number of the goods to be entered in the transport document, preceded by the letters 'UN`.

Danger labels

(2) Packages containing substances of this Class shall bear a label conforming to model No 6.2.

(3) Packages containing substances of this Class carried in deeply refrigerated liquid nitrogen shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 2.

(4) Packages containing substances of 3° and 4° in fragile receptacles which are not visible from the outside shall, in addition, bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 12.

(5) Packages containing liquid substances of 3° in receptacles the closures of which are not visible from the outside, as well as packages containing vented receptacles and vented receptacles without outer packaging, shall, in addition, bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 11.

2663

B. Particulars in the transport document

2664 The description of the goods in the transport document shall conform to one of the identification numbers and names printed in italics in marginal 2651, followed by the biological name of the substance () for substances of 1° to 3°.

(1) If the infectious substance is a genetically modified substance, the words 'genetically modified micro-organisms` shall be added.

(2) For biological products and diagnostic specimens which are offered for transport under the conditions of marginal 2656, the description of the goods shall be: 'Biological product/diagnostic specimen, containing ` the infectious substance determining the classification under 1°, 2° or 3° to be entered.

The description of the goods shall be followed by particulars of the Class, the item number, if applicable, the letter and the initials 'this Directive` (or 'RID`), e.g. '6.2, 3° (b), ADR.`

For the carriage of wastes [see marginal 2000 (5)] the description of the goods shall be: 'waste, containing ,`, the component(s) determining the classification of the waste under marginal 2002(8) to be entered under its/their chemical or biological name(s), e.g.: 'Waste, containing 2814. Infectious substance, affecting humans, Marburg virus, 6.2, 2° ADR`.

For the carriage of solutions or mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) containing two or more components subject to this Directive, in general not more than the two components which most predominantly contribute to the danger(s) of the solutions or mixtures need be shown. For wastes of 4°, the description printed in italics is sufficient: '3291 Clinical Waste, unspecified, n.o.s. 6.2, 4° (b), ADR`.

For the carriage of easily perishable substances, appropriate information shall be provided, e.g. 'Cool at +2/+4 °C` or 'carry in frozen state` or 'do not freeze`.

2665-

2671

C. Empty packagings

2672 (1) Empty packagings, including empty IBCs, uncleaned, of 11° shall be closed in the same manner and with the same degree of leakproofness as if they were full.

(2) Empty packagings, including empty IBCs, uncleaned, of 11° shall bear the same danger (cont'd) labels as if they were full.

(3) The description in the transport document shall conform to one of the descriptions printed in italics under 11°, e.g. 'Empty packagings, 6.2, 11°, ADR`. In the case of empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks, empty tank-containers and empty small containers, uncleaned, this description shall be completed by adding the words 'Last load`, together with the name and item number of the goods last loaded, e.g.: 'Last load: 2900 Infectious substance, affecting animals, 3° (b)`.

2673

D. Other provisions

2674 Other provisions for substances of this Class which are enacted for reasons other than those of safety, are not affected (e.g. those concerning import and export, marketing or distribution, protection at work, veterinary purposes).

E. Transitional provisions

2675 Substances of Class 6.2 may be carried until 31 December 1995 in accordance with the provisions applicable for Class 6.2 until 31 December 1994. In such cases, the transport document shall bear the inscription: 'Carriage in accordance with the ADR in force before 1 January 1995`.

2676-

2699

CLASSE 7 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL

Introduction

2700 (1) Scope

(a) Among the materials with a specific activity of more than 70 kBq/kg [2 nCi/g)] and articles containing such materials, only those listed in or assigned to an n.o.s. entry in marginal 2701 are to be accepted for carriage and then only under the conditions () set out in the appropriate schedules of marginal 2704 and in Appendix A.7 (marginals 3700 to 3799).

(b) The materials and articles referred to in (a) are materials and articles of this Directive.

Note: Cardiac pacemakers containing radioactive material, when they have been surgically implanted in medical patients, or radio-pharmaceuticals administered to a patient in the course of medical treatment, are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

(2) Definitions and Explanations

A1 and A2

1. A1 shall mean the maximum activity of special form radioactive material permitted in a Type A package. A2 shall mean the maximum activity of radioactive material, other than special form radioactive material, permitted in a Type A package. (See Appendix A.7, Table 1).

Alpha Emitters of Low Toxicity

2. Low toxicity alpha emitters shall mean natural uranium; depleted uranium; natural thorium; uranium-235 or uranium-238; thorium-232; thorium-228 and thorium-230 when contained in ores and physical or chemical concentrates; radionuclides with a half life of less than ten days.

Approval

3. Multilateral approval shall mean approval by the relevant competent authority both of the country of origin of the design or shipment and of each country through or into which the consignment is to be transported.

4. Unilateral approval shall mean an approval of a design which is required to be given by the competent authority of the country of origin of the design only.

Container

5. A container for the carriage of material of this class shall be of a permanent enclosed character, rigid and strong enough for repeated use. It may be used as a packaging if the applicable provisions are met, and it may also be used to perform the functions of an overpack.

Containment system

6. Containment system shall mean the assembly of components of the packaging specified by the designer as intended to retain the radioactive material during transport.

Contamination

7. Contamination shall mean the presence of a radioactive substance on a surface in quantities in excess of 0,4 Bq/cm2 (10-5 ìi/cm2) for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 0,04 Bq/cm2 (10-6 ìi/cm2) for all other alpha emitters.

Fixed contamination shall mean contamination other than non-fixed contamination.

Non-fixed contamination shall mean contamination that can be removed from a surface during normal handling.

Design

8. Design shall mean the description of special form radioactive material, package, or packaging which enables such an item to be fully identified. The description may include specifications, engineering drawings, reports demonstrating compliance with regulatory provisions, and other relevant documentation.

Exclusive use

9. Exclusive use shall mean the sole use, by a single consignor, of a vehicle or of a large container with a minimum length of 6 m, in respect of which all initial, intermediate, and final loading and unloading is carried out in accordance with the directions of the consignor or consignee.

Fissile material

10. Fissile material shall mean uranium-233, uranium-235, plutonium-238, plutonium-239, plutonium-241, or any combination of these radionuclides. Unirradiated natural uranium and depleted uranium, and natural uranium or depleted uranium which has been irradiated in thermal reactors only, are not included in this definition.

Low specific activity material

11. Low specific activity (LSA) material shall mean radioactive material which by its nature has a limited specific activity, or radioactive material for which limits of estimated average specific activity apply. External shielding materials surrounding the LSA material shall not be considered in determining the estimated average specific activity.

LSA material shall be in one of three groups:

(a) LSA-I

(i) Ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides (e.g. uranium, thorium), and uranium or thorium concentrates of such ores;

(ii) Solid unirradiated natural uranium or unirradiated depleted uranium or unirradiated natural thorium or their solid or liquid compounds or mixtures; or

(iii) Radioactive material, other than fissile material, for which the A2 value is unlimited.

b) LSA-II

(i) Water with tritium concentration up to 0,8 TBq/l (20 Ci/l); or

(ii) Other material in which the activity is distributed throughout and the estimated average specific activity does not exceed 10-4 A2/g for solids and gases, and 10-5 A2/g for liquids.

(c) LSA-III

Solids (e.g. consolidated wastes, activated material) in which:

(i) The radioactive material is distributed throughout a solid or a collection of solid objects, or is essentially uniformly distributed in a solid compact binding agent (such as concrete, bitumen, ceramic, etc.);

(ii) The radioactive material is relatively insoluble, or it is intrinsically contained in a relatively insoluble matrix, so that, even under loss of packaging, the loss of radioactive material per package by leaching when placed in water for seven days would not exceed 0,1 A2; and

(iii) The estimated average specific activity of the solid, excluding any shielding material, does not exceed 2 × 10-3 A2/g.

Maximum normal operating pressure

12. Maximum normal operating pressure shall mean the maximum pressure above atmospheric pressure at mean sea-level that would develop in the containment system in a period of one year under the conditions of temperature and solar radiation corresponding to environmental conditions of transport in the absence of venting, external cooling by an ancillary system, or operational controls during transport.

Overpack

13. Overpack shall mean an enclosure, such as a box or bag, which need not meet the provisions for a container and which is used by a single consignor to consolidate into one handling unit a consignment of two or more packages for convenience of handling, stowage, and carriage. Overpack is not identical to outer packaging as defined in marginal 3510.

Package

14. Package shall mean the packaging with its radioactive contents as presented for transport. Package and packaging performance standards, in terms of retention of integrity of containment and shielding, depend upon the quantity and nature of the radioactive material transported.

Performance standards applied to packages are graded to take into account conditions of transport characterized by the following severity levels:

- conditions likely to be encountered in routine transport (in incident-free conditions);

- conditions of transport taking minor mishaps into account; and

- accident conditions of transport.

The performance standards include design provisions and tests. Each package shall be classified as follows:

(a) Excepted package is a packaging containing radioactive material (see Appendix A.7, Table V) that is designed to meet the general design provisions for all packagings and packages (see marginal 3732).

(b) (I) Industrial Package Type 1 (IP-1) is a packaging, tank or container containing LSA material or SCO, (see definitions 11 and 22) that is designed to meet the general design provisions for all packagings and packages (see marginal 3732) and, in addition, for the specific design provision (see marginal 3733).

(II) Industrial Package Type 2 (IP-2) is a packaging, tank or container containing LSA material or SCO (see definitions 11 and 22) that is designed to meet the general design provisions for all packagings and packages (see marginal 3732) and, in addition, the following specific design provisions:

(i) for a package, see marginal 3734;

(ii) for a tank, see marginal 3736 and Appendices B.1a and B.1b;

iii) for a container, see marginal 3736.

(III) Industrial Package Type 3 (IP-3) is a packaging, tank or container containing LSA material or SCO, (see definitions 11 and 22) that is designed to meet the general design provisions for all packagings and packages (see marginal 3732) and, in addition, the following specific design provisions:

(i) for a package, see marginal 3735;

(ii) for a tank, see marginal 3736 and Appendices B.1a and B.1b;

iii) for a container, see marginal 3736.

(c) Type A Package is a packaging, tank or container containing an activity up to A1 if Special Form Radioactive Material, or up to A2 if not Special Form Radioactive Material, that is designed to meet the general design provisions for all packagings and packages (see marginal 3732) and the specific design provisions in marginal 3737 as appropriate.

(d) Type B Package is a packaging, tank or container containing an activity that may be in excess of A1, if Special Form Radioactive Material, or in excess of A2 if not Special Form Radioactive Material, that is designed to meet the general design provisions for all packagings and packages (see marginal 3732) and the specific design provisions in marginal 3737 and, as appropriate, marginals 3738-3740.

Packaging

15. Packaging shall mean the assembly of components necessary to enclose the radioactive contents completely. It may, in particular, consist of one or more receptacles, absorbent materials, spacing structures, radiation shielding, service equipment for filling, emptying, venting and pressure relief, and devices for cooling, for absorbing mechanical shocks, for providing handling and tiedown capability, for thermal insulation, and service devices integral to the package. The packaging may be a box, drum or similar receptacle, or may also be a container or tank consistent with definition 14.

Quality assurance

16. Quality assurance shall mean a systematic programme of controls and inspections applied by any organisation or body involved in the transport of radioactive material which is aimed at providing adequate confidence that the standard of safety prescribed in Appendix A.7 is achieved in practice.

Radiation level

17. Radiation level shall mean the corresponding dose equivalent rate expressed in millisievert (millirem) per hour ().

Radioactive contents

18. Radioactive contents shall mean the radioactive material together with any contaminated solids, liquids and gases within the packaging.

Speciale arrangement

19. Special arrangement shall mean those provisions, approved by the competent authority, under which a consignment which does not satisfy all the applicable provisions of Schedules 5-12 of marginal 2704 may be transported. Consignments of this type require multilateral approval.

Special form radioactive material

20. Special form radioactive material shall mean either an indispersible solid radioactive material or a sealed capsule containing radioactive material (see marginal 3731).

Specific activity

21. Specific activity shall mean the activity of a radionuclide per unit mass of that nuclide. The specific activity of a material in which the radionuclide is essentially uniformly distributed is the activity per unit mass of the material.

Surface contaminated object

22. Surface contaminated object (SCO) shall mean a solid object which is not itself radioactive but which has radioactive material distributed on its surfaces. SCO shall be in one of two groups:

(a) SCO-I: A solid object on which:

(i) the non-fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 4 Bq/cm2 (10-4 ìCi/cm2) for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters or 0,4 Bq/cm2 (10-5 ìCi/cm2) for all other alpha emitters; and

(ii) the fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm2(or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 4 × 104 Bq/cm2 (1 ìCi/cm2) for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters or 4 × 103 Bq/cm2 (0,1 ìCi/cm2) for all other alpha emitters; and

(iii) the non-fixed contamination plus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 4 × 104 Bq/cm2 (1 ìCi/cm2 ) for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters or 4 × 103 Bq/cm2 (0,1 ìCi/cm2) for all other alpha emitters.

(b) SCO-II: A solid object on which either the fixed or non-fixed contamination on the surface exceeds the applicable limits specified for SCO-I in (a) above and on which:

(i) the non-fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 400 Bq/cm2 (10 P2 ìCi/cm2) for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters or 40 Bq/cm2 (10 P3 ìCi/cm2) for all other alpha emitters; and

(ii) the fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 8 × 105 Bq/cm2 (20 ìCi/cm2) for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters or 8 × 104 Bq/cm2 (2 ìCi/cm2) for all other alpha emitters; and

(iii) the non-fixed contamination plus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 8 × 105 Bq/cm2 (20 ìCi/cm2) for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters or 8 × 104 Bq/cm2 (2 ìCi/cm2) for all other alpha emitters.

Transport index

23. Transport index (TI) shall mean a single number assigned to a package, overpack, tank or container, orr to unpackaged LSA-I or SCO-I, which is used to provide control over both nuclear criticality safety and radiation exposure (see marginal 3715). It is also used to establish content limits on certain packages, overpacks, tanks and containers; to establish categories for labelling; to determine whether transport under exclusive use shall be required; to establish spacing provisions during storage in transit; to establish mixed loading restrictions during transport under special arrangement and during storage in transit; and to define the number of packages allowed in a container or aboard a vehicle (see Section II of Appendix A.7).

Unirradiated thorium

24. Unirradiated thorium shall mean thorium containing not more than 10 P7 g of uranium-233 per gram of thorium 232.

Unirradiated uranium

25. Unirradiated uranium shall mean uranium containing not more than 10 P6 g of plutonium per gram of uranium-235 and not more than 9 MBq (0,20 mCi) of fission products per gram of uranium-235.

Uranium - natural, depleted, enriched

26. Natural uranium shall mean chemically separated uranium containing the naturally occurring distribution of uranium isotopes ( approximately 99,28 % uranium-238, and 0,72 % uranium-235). Depleted uranium shall mean uranium containing a lesser mass percentage of uranium-235 than in natural uranium. Enriched uranium shall mean uranium containing a greater mass percentage of uranium-235 than in natural uranium. In all cases, a very small mass percentage of uranium-234 is present.

2701 (1) List of Substances:

>TABLE>

(2) The materials and articles of this Class contain one or more of the radionuclides referred to in Section I of Appendix A.7 (marginals 3700 and 3701).

(3) The list hereunder sets out the schedules of marginal 2704:

1. Limited Quantities of Radioactive Material in Excepted Packages.

2. Instruments or Articles in Excepted Packages.

3. Articles Manufactured from Natural Uranium, Depleted Uranium or Natural Thorium as Excepted Packages.

4. Empty Packagings as Excepted Packages.

5. Low Specific Activity Material (LSA-I).

6. Low Specific Activity Material (LSA-II).

7. Low Specific Activity Material (LSA-III).

8. Surface Contaminated Objects (SCO-I and SCO-II).

9. Radioactive Material in Type A Packages.

10. Radioactive Material in Type B(U) Packages.

11. Radioactive Material in Type B(M) Packages.

12. Fissile Material.

13. Radioactive Material Transported under Special Arrangement.

(4) The provisions for the various types of consignment are contained in 13 headings in accordance with marginal 2003 (3):

(i) Common provisions for Schedules 1 to 4 are summarised in marginal 2702;

(ii) Common provisions for Schedules 5 to 13 are summarised in marginal 2703.

Common Provisions for Schedules 1 to 4 of marginal 2704

2702 1. Materials

See appropriate schedule.

2. Packaging/Package

See appropriate schedule.

3. Maximum Radiation Level

5 ìSv/h (0,5 mrem/h) at any point on the external surface of the package.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

Non-fixed contamination on all external surfaces and in addition on the internal surfaces of vehicles, containers, tanks and overpacks used for carrying excepted packages shall be kept as low as practicable and shall not exceed the following limits:

(a) Beta/gamma/low-toxicity alpha emitters

0,4 Bq/cm2 (10 P5 ìCi/cm2)

(b) All other alpha emitters

0,04 Bq/cm2 (10 P6 ìCi/cm2)

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

Vehicles, equipment or parts thereof which have become contaminated shall be decontaminated as soon as possible, and in any case before re-use, to levels not exceeding:

(a) for non-fixed contamination,

0,4 Bq/cm2 (10 P5 ìCi/cm2) for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters; and

0,04 Bq/cm2 (10 P6 ìCi/cm2) for all other alpha emitters.

(b) a radiation level of 5 ìSv/h (0,5 mrem/h) at the surface due to fixed contamination.

6. Mixed Packing

No provisions.

7. Mixed Loading

No provisions.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

See appropriate schedule.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

See appropriate schedule.

10. Transport Documents

See appropriate schedule.

11. Storage and Despatch

No provisions.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

No provisions.

13. Other Provisions

(a) Accident provisions: see marginals 2710 and 3712.

(b) Damaged or leaking packages: see marginal 3712.

(c) Contamination surveys: see marginal 3712 (3).

(d) Quality assurance: see marginal 3766.

(e) Undeliverable consignments: see marginal 2715.

Common Provisions for Schedules 5 to 13 of marginal 2704

2703 1. Materials

See appropriate schedule.

2. Packaging/Package

See appropriate schedule.

3. Maximum Radiation Level

(a) The radiation levels for packages or overpacks not transported under exclusive use shall not exceed:

(i) 2 mSv/h (200 mrem/h) at any point on any external surface, and

(ii) 0,1 mSv/h (10 mrem/h) at 1 metre from that surface.

(b) The surface radiation levels for packages or overpacks transported under exclusive use may exceed 2 mSv/h (200 mrem/h) but under no circumstances shall exceed 10 mSv/h (1 000 mrem/h), provided that:

(i) the vehicle is equipped with an enclosure which prevents unauthorized access to the load during transport; and

(ii) the package or overpack is secured to retain its position within the enclosure during routine transport; and

(iii) there are no loading or unloading operations between the beginning and end of the shipment.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

Non-fixed contamination on all external surfaces and in addition on the internal surfaces of vehicles, containers, tanks and overpacks used for transporting packages shall be kept as low as practicable and shall not exceed the following limits:

(a) Beta/gamma/low-toxicity alpha emitters:

0,4 Bq/cm2 (10 P5 ìCi/cm2) for consignments which also include excepted packages and/or non-radioactive goods;

4 Bq/cm2 (10 P4 ìCi/cm2) for all other consignments.

(b) All other alpha emitters:

0,04 Bq/cm2 (10 P6 ìCi/cm2) for consignments which also include excepted packages and/or non-radioactive goods;

0,4 Bq/cm2 (10 P5 ìCi/cm2) for all other consignments.

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

Vehicles, equipment or parts thereof which have become contaminated above the limits in paragraph 4, or which show a surface radiation level in excess of 5ìSv/h (0,5 mrem/h) shall be decontaminated as soon as possible, and in any case before re-use, to levels not exceeding:

(a) for non-fixed contamination, see provisions under 4,

(b) a radiation level of 5 ìSv/h (0,5 mrem/h) at the surface due to fixed contamination.

6. Mixed Packing

See marginal 3711 (1).

7. Mixed Loading

(a) Packages bearing a label conforming to models Nos 7A, 7B or 7C shall not be loaded together on the same vehicle with packages bearing a label conforming to models Nos l, l.4, l.5, 1.6 or 01.

(b) In all other cases mixed loading is permitted. However, mixed loading in a consignment under exclusive use shall only be arranged for by the consignor.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

The following provisions apply to packages, containers, tanks and overpacks with non-fissile material.

For packages containing fissile material and for containers and overpacks which contain packages with fissile material, see in addition Schedule 12.

(a) Packages and overpacks, other than containers or tanks.

(i) Such packages and overpacks shall, depending on the category (see marginal 3718), bear labels conforming to models Nos 7A, 7B or 7C, completed in accordance with marginal 2706 (3). The labels shall be affixed to two opposite sides of the packages and overpacks.

(ii) Each label shall be marked with the maximum activity of the radioactive contents during transport.

(iii) Each yellow label shall be marked with the transport index for the package or overpack.

(iv) In the case of substances of the following identification numbers listed in marginal 2701 (1), the following additional labels shall also be affixed:

2975 Thorium metal, pyriphoric } Model No 4.2

2979 Uranium metal, pyrophoric

2976 Thorium nitrate, solid } Model No 05

2981 Uranyl nitrate, solid

2977 Uranium hexafluoride fissile, containing more than 1 % uranium 235 }

2978 Uranium hexafluoride, fissile excepted or non-fissile Model No 8

2980 Uranyl nitrate hexahydrate solution

v) Packages with a gross mass exceeding 50 kg shall be plainly and durably marked with their permissible gross mass on the outside.

(vi) Each package except tank containers and overpacks shall be clearly marked with the identification number of the goods to be entered in the transport document, preceded by the letters 'UN`.

(vii) Any labels which do not relate to the contents shall be removed or covered.

(b) Containers, also when used as overpacks, and tanks.

(i) Such containers and tanks shall, depending on the category (see marginal 3718), bear labels conforming to models Nos 7A, 7B or 7C, completed in accordance with marginal 2706 (3).

Tanks, as well as large containers containing packages other than excepted packages, shall in addition bear labels conforming to model No 7D.

Instead of using labels conforming to model Nos 7A, 7B or 7C, and in addition labels conforming to model No 7D, enlarged labels conforming to model Nos 7A, 7B or 7C with the dimensions of model No 7D may alternatively be used.

The labels shall be affixed to all four sides of containers and tank-containers, and to both sides and the rear of tank-vehicles.

(ii) In the case of substances of the following identification numbers listed in marginal 2701 (1), the following additional labels shall also be affixed:

2975 Thorium metal, pyriphoric } Model No 4.2

2979 Uranium metal, pyrophoric

2976 Thorium nitrate, solid } Model No 05

2981 Uranyl nitrate, solid

2977 Uranium hexafluoride fissile, containing more than 1 % uranium 235 }

2978 Uranium hexafluoride, fissile excepted or non-fissile Model No 8

2980 Uranyl nitrate hexahydrate solution

(iii) Tank-vehicles and tank-containers as well as vehicles and containers for carriage in bulk shall be marked in accordance with marginal 10 500 and Appendix B.5.

(iv) Except for mixed loads, each label shall be marked with the maximum activity of the radioactive contents of the container or overpack during transport, totalled for the entire contents. For mixed loads, see marginal 2706 (3).

(v) Each yellow label shall be marked with the transport index for the container or overpack.

(vi) Containers and tanks shall be plainly and durably marked on the outside with their permissible gross mass.

(vii) Any marking or danger label which does not relate to the contents shall be removed or covered.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

(a) (i) For consignments of packaged or unpackaged radioactive material, labels conforming to model No 7D shall be affixed in a vertical orientation to the two side walls and the rear wall of the transport unit.

(ii) In the case of substances of the following identification numbers listed in marginal 2701 (1), the following additional labels shall also be affixed:

2975 Thorium metal, pyriphoric } Model No 4.2

2979 Uranium metal, pyrophoric

2976 Thorium nitrate, solid } Model No 05

2981 Uranyl nitrate, solid

2977 Uranium hexafluoride fissile, containing more than 1 % uranium 235 }

2978 Uranium hexafluoride, fissile excepted or non-fissile Model No 8

2980 Uranyl nitrate hexahydrate solution

(b) Any danger label which does not relate to the contents shall be removed or covered.

10. Transport Documents

See appropriate schedule.

11. Storage and Despatch

(a) Segregation during storage is required from other dangerous goods, and from persons and undeveloped photographic plates and films:

(i) for segregation from other dangerous goods - see the provisions under heading 7;

(ii) for segregation from persons, from packages marked 'FOTO` and from mailbags - see marginal 2711 for segregation tables.

(b) Total transport index limitation for storage except LSA-I:

(i) The number of category II-yellow and category III-yellow packages, overpacks, tanks and containers stored in any one place shall be so limited that the total sum of the transport indexes in any individual group of such packages, overpacks, tanks or containers does not exceed 50. Such groups shall be stored so as to maintain a spacing of at least 6 m from each other.

(ii) Where the transport index of a single package, overpack, tank or container exceeds 50 or the total transport index on a vehicle exceeds 50, storage shall be such as to maintain a spacing of at least 6 m from other packages, overpacks, tanks, containers or vehicles carrying radioactive material.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(1) See appropriate schedule.

(2) (a) Segregation during transport is required from other dangerous goods and from persons and undeveloped photographic films and plates:

(i) for segregation from other dangerous goods - see the provisions under heading 7;

(ii) for segregation from persons, from packages marked 'FOTO` and from mailbags - see marginal 2711 for segregation tables.

(b) Total transport index limitation for carriage except LSA-I:

The total number of packages, overpacks, tanks and containers on a single vehicle shall be so limited, that the sum of the transport indexes does not exceed 50. For consignments under exclusive use this limit does not apply - see marginal 3711 (3).

(c) Any package or overpack having a transport index greater than 10 shall be transported only under exclusive use.

(d) Maximum radiation levels for vehicles:

(i) 2 mSv/h (200 mrem/h) at surface of vehicles;

(ii) 0,1 mSv/h (10 mrem/h) at 2 metres from surface of vehicles;

(iii) 0,02 mSv/h (2 mrem/h) at any normally occupied position in a vehicle, if personal monitoring devices are not used.

13. Other Provisions

(a) Determination of transport index: see marginal 3715.

(b) Accident provisions: see marginals 2710, 3712 and 10 385.

(c) Damaged or leaking packages: see marginal 3712.

(d) Contamination surveys: see marginal 3712 (3).

(e) Quality Assurance: see marginal 3766.

(f) Undeliverable consignments: see marginal 2715.

(g) Transport equipment and operations: see Annex B, Part I and marginal 71 000 et seq.

2704 Schedule 1

Limited quantities of radioactive material in excepted packages

Notes: 1. Radioactive material in quantities which offer a very limited radiation risk, may be transported in excepted packages.

2. For other hazardous properties, see the provisions in marginals 2002 (12) and (13), and 3770.

1. Materials

2910 Radioactive material, excepted package, limited quantity of material.

(a) Non-fissile radioactive material in amounts which do not exceed the limits specified in Table 1.

(b) Fissile material with an activity which does not exceed the limits specified in Table 1, and in addition, satisfying with regard to amounts, form and packaging the provisions given in marginal 3741 of Appendix A.7 allowing them to be regulated as non-fissile radioactive material packages.

>TABLE>

2. Packaging/Package

Radioactive material in limited quantities may be transported in packagings, tanks and containers, provided that:

(a) The packaging shall be in accordance with the general provisions for all packagings and packages given in marginal 3732 of Appendix A.7 and in addition, for tanks, Appendices B.1a and B.1b.

(b) Packages containing fissile material shall meet at least one of the provisions specified in marginal 3741 of Appendix A.7.

(c) In particular, the package shall be designed so that during routine transport there shall be no leakage of radioactive contents. Radioactive material shall not be carrried in bulk.

3. Maximum Radiation Level

See marginal 2702.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

See marginal 2702.

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

See marginal 2702.

6. Mixed Packing

No provisions.

7. Mixed Loading

No provisions.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) Packages

(i) Marking: see marginal 2702

Labelling: No provisions

(ii) The packaging shall be marked 'Radioactive` on an internal surface as a warning of the presence of radioactive material on opening the package.

(b) Containers

No provisions.

(c) Tanks

See Appendix B.1a/B.1b, marginal 211 760/ 212 760 and Appendix B.5.

(d) Overpacks

No provisions.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

No provisions.

10. Transport Documents

The transport document shall include the description '2910 Radioactive material, excepted package, limited quantity of material, 7, Schedule 1, ADR (or RID )`.

11. Storage and Despatch

No provisions.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

No provisions.

13. Other Provisions

See marginal 2702.

Schedule 2

Instruments or articles in excepted packages

Notes: 1. Specified quantities of radioactive material, which are enclosed in or form a component part of an instrument or other manufactured article, and which offer a very limited radiation risk, may be transported in excepted packages.

2. For other hazardous properties, see also the provisions in marginal 3770.

1. Materials

2910 Radioactive material, excepted package, instruments or articles.

(a) Instruments and manufactured articles such as clocks, electronic tubes or apparatus having as a component part radioactive material in amounts which do not exceed the item and package limits specified in columns 2 and 3 of Table 2, provided the radiation level at 10 cm from the external surface of any unpackaged instrument or article does not exceed 0,1 mSv/h (10 mrem/h).

(b) Instruments and manufactured articles having fissile material in amounts not exceeding the limits specified in Table 2, and in addition, satisfying with regard to amounts, form and packaging the provisions given in marginal 3741 of Appendix A.7 allowing them to be regulated as non-fissile radioactive material packages, provided the radiation level at 10 cm from the external surface of any unpackaged instrument or article does not exceed 0,1 mSv/h (10 mrem/h).

2. Packaging/Package

(a) The packaging shall be in accordance with the general provisions for all packagings and packages given in marginal 3732 of Appendix A.7.

(b) Packages containing fissile material shall meet at least one of the provisions specified in marginal 3741 of Appendix A.7.

(c) The instruments and articles shall be securely packed.

(d) Transport of unpackaged radioactive material is not allowed.

>TABLE>

3. Maximum Radiation Level

See marginal 2702.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

See marginal 2702.

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

See marginal 2702.

6. Mixed Packing

No provisions.

7. Mixed Loading

No provisions.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) Instruments or articles

Each instrument or article (except radio-luminescent time-pieces or devices) shall bear the marking 'Radioactive`.

(b) Packages

See marginal 2702

(c) Containers

No provisions.

(d) Tanks

Not applicable.

(e) Overpacks

No provisions.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

No provisions.

10. Transport Documents

The transport document shall include the description '2910 Radioactive materia, excepted package, instruments or articles, 7, Schedule 2, ADR (or RID)`.

11. Storage and Despatch

No provisions.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

No provisions.

13. Other Provisions

See marginal 2702.

Schedule 3

Articles manufactured from natural uranium, depleted uranium or natural thorium as excepted packages

Notes: 1. Articles manufactured from unirradiated natural uranium, unirradiated depleted uranium or unirradiated natural thorium which offer a very limited radiation risk may be transported as excepted packages.

2. For other hazardous properties, see also the provisions in marginal 3770.

1. Materials

2910 Radioactive material, excepted package, articles manufactured from natural uranium or depleted uranium or natural thorium.

Manufactured articles in which the sole radioactive material is unirradiated natural uranium, unirradiated depleted uranium or unirradiated natural thorium,provided that the outer surface of the uranium or thorium is enclosed in an inactive sheath made of metal or some other substantial material.

Note: Such articles may for example be unused packagings intended for the transport of radioactive material.

2. Packaging/Package

The article serving as a packaging shall be in accordance with the general provisions for all packagings and packages given in marginal 3732 of Appendix A.7.

3. Maximum Radiation Level

See marginal 2702.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

See marginal 2702.

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

See marginal 2702.

6. Mixed Packing

No provisions.

7. Mixed Loading

No provisions.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) Packages

See marginal 2702

(b) Containers

No provisions.

(c) Tanks

Not applicable.

(d) Overpacks

No provisions.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

No provisions.

10. Transport Documents

The transport document shall include the description '2910 Radioactive material, excepted package, articles manufactured from natural uranium or depleted uranium or natural thorium, 7, Schedule 3, ADR (or RID)`.

11. Storage and Despatch

No provisions.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

No provisions.

13. Other Provisions

See marginal 2702.

Schedule 4

Empty packagings as excepted packages

Notes: 1. Empty uncleaned packagings which have been used for the transport of radioactive material and which offer a very limited radiation risk, may be transported as excepted packages.

2. (a) Empty uncleaned packagings which, as a result of damage or other mechanical defects, can no longer be closed securely shall, if they cannot be carried in other packagings in accordance with the provisions of this Class, be carried under special arrangements (Schedule 13);

(b) Empty uncleaned packagings on which the internal non-fixed contamination (activity of the residue) exceeds the maximum values given in Section 1 (c) may only be carried as packages in accordance with the various schedules [marginal 2701 (3)], depending on the amount and form of their residual activity and contamination;

(c) Empty packagings which have been cleaned to such an extent that no further contamination exists in excess of the value of 0,4 Bq/cm2 (10 P5ì Ci/cm2) for beta- or gamma-emitters and 0,04 Bq/cm2 (10 P6ì Ci/cm2) for alpha-emitters and which do not contain any radioactive material with a specific activity of more than 70 kBq/kg (2 nCi/g) are no longer subject to the provisions of this Class.

3. For other hazardous properties, see also the provisions in marginal 3770.

1. Materials

2910 Radioactive material, excepted package, empty packaging

(a) Empty uncleaned packagings include empty uncleaned containers or tanks which have been used for the transport of radioactive material.

(b) If the packaging contains any uranium or thorium in its structure, the provision specified in paragraph 2 (c) below shall apply.

(c) The internal non-fixed contamination levels (activity of the residual contents) shall not exceed:

(i) for beta/gamma/low-toxicity alpha emitters,

400 Bq/cm2 (10 P2 ìCi/cm2);

(ii) for all other alpha emitters,

40 Bq/cm2 (10 P3 ìCi/cm2).

2. Packaging/Package

(a) The packaging shall be in accordance with the general provisions for all packagings and packages given in marginal 3732 of Appendix A.7.

(b) The packaging shall be in a well-maintained condition and securely closed.

(c) If the empty packaging includes natural uranium or depleted uranium or natural thorium in its structure, the outer surface of the uranium or thorium shall be covered with an inactive sheath made of metal or some other substantial material.

(d) Any labels displayed to meet marginal 2706 shall no longer be visible.

3. Maximum Radiation Level

See marginal 2702.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

See marginal 2702.

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

See marginal 2702.

6. Mixed Packing

No provisions.

7. Mixed Loading

No provisions.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) Packages

(i) Marking: see marginal 2702

Labelling: No provisions

(ii) Packages permanently marked in accordance with marginal 2705 need not have these markings removed.

(b) Containers

No provisions.

(c) Tanks

See Appendix B.1a/B.1b, marginal 211 760/ 212 760 and Appendix B.5.

(d) Overpacks

No provisions.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

No provisions.

10. Transport Documents

The transport document shall include the description '2910 Radioactive material, excepted package, empty packaging, 7, Schedule 4, ADR (or RID)`.

11. Storage and Despatch

No provisions.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

No provisions.

13. Other Provisions

See marginal 2702.

Schedule 5

Low specific activity material (LSA-I)

Notes: 1. LSA-I is the first of three groups of radioactive material which by its nature has a limited specific activity or for which limits of estimated average specific activity apply.

2. Fissile material is not permitted to be transported as LSA-I material.

3. For other hazardous properties, see also the provisions in marginal 3770.

1. Materials

2912 Radioactive material, low specific activity (LSA-I), n.o.s.

2976 Thorium nitrate, solid.

2978 Uranium hexafluoride, fissile excepted or non-fissile.

2980 Uranyl nitrate hexahydrate solution.

2981 Uranyl nitrate, solid.

Low specific activity material (LSA-I): radioactive material for which the radiation level at 3 m from the unshielded contents of a single package or in a single load of unpackaged material shall not exceed 10 mSv/h (1 000 mrem/h) and meeting also one of the following descriptions:

(a) ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides (e.g. uranium, thorium); or

(b) uranium and thorium concentrates of ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides; or

(c) solid unirradiated natural uranium or depleted uranium or natural thorium; or

(d) solid or liquid compounds or mixtures of unirradiated natural uranium or depleted uranium or natural thorium; or

(e) non-fissile radioactive material for which the A2 value is unlimited.

2. Packaging/Package

(a) LSA-I material may be transported in packagings, tanks and containers, provided that:

(i) the packaging, which may be a tank or container, meets the design provisions for industrial packages IP-1 or IP-2 (see marginal 3733 or 3734 and in addition, for tanks, marginal 3736 and Appendices B.1a and B.1b) as appropriate for the form of the LSA-I material as specified in Table 3; and

(ii) the material is loaded into the packaging so that, in routine transport, there will be no escape of contents and no loss of shielding.

>TABLE>

(b) LSA-I material may be transported in bulk if:

(i) for other than natural ores, it is transported so that, in routine transport, there will be no escape of contents from the vehicle and no loss of shielding, and it is transported under exclusive use; or

(ii) for natural ores, it is transported in a vehicle under exclusive use.

3. Maximum Radiation Level

See marginal 2703.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) Overpacks or containers dedicated to the transport of LSA-I material under exclusive use shall be excepted from (a) above with regard to internal contamination only for as long as they remain under that exclusive use.

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) A vehicle dedicated to the transport of LSA-I material under exclusive use shall be excepted from (a) above with regard to internal contamination only for as long as it remains in that exclusive use.

6. Mixed Packing

See marginal 2703.

7. Mixed Loading

See marginal 2703.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) For tanks, see Appendix B.1a/B.1b, marginal 211 760/ 212 760 and Appendix B.5.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

See marginal 2703.

10. Transport Documents

(a) For a summary of the approval and notification provisions, see marginal 2716.

(b) The transport document shall include:

(i) the identification number and the name as per heading 1, together with the words 'Radioactive material, low specific activity (LSA-I), 7, Schedule 5, ADR (or RID)`, e.g. '2976 Thorium nitrate, solid, radioactive material, low specific activity (LSA-I), 7, Schedule 5, ADR (or RID)`; or

(ii) in the case of material not otherwise specified, '2912 Radioactive material, low specific activity (LSA-I), n.o.s., 7, Schedule 5, ADR (or RID)`.

Further details specified in marginals 2709 and 2710 shall also be included.

11. Storage and Despatch

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) Total transport index limitation for storage: none.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703 12. (2), (a) to (d).

(b) Total activity in a single vehicle: no limit.

13. Other Provisions

See marginal 2703.

Schedule 6

Low specific activity material (LSA-II)

Notes: 1. LSA-II is the second of three groups of radioactive material which, by its nature, has a limited specific activity or for which limits of estimated average specific activity apply.

2. If fissile material is present, the provisions of Schedule 12 shall be met in addition to the provisions of this Schedule.

3. For other hazardous properties, see also the provisions in marginal 3770.

1. Materials

2912 Radioactive material, low specific activity (LSA-II), n.o.s.

2976 Thorium nitrate, solid.

2978 Uranium hexafluoride, fissile excepted or non-fissile.

2980 Uranyl nitrate hexahydrate solution.

2981 Uranyl nitrate, solid.

Low Specific Activity Material (LSA-II): radioactive material for which the radiation level at 3 m from the unshielded contents of a single package shall not exceed 10 mSv/h (1 000 mrem/h) and meeting one of the following descriptions:

(a) water with tritium concentration up to 0,8 TBq/l (20 Ci/l); or

(b) solids and gases with activity distributed throughout of not more than 10 P4 A2/g; or

(c) liquids with activity distributed throughout of not more than 10 P5 A2/g.

2. Packaging/Package

(a) LSA-II material must be transported in packagings, which may be tanks or containers.

(b) The packaging, tank or container shall meet the design provisions for industrial packages IP-2 or IP-3 (see marginal 3734 or 3735 and in addition, for tanks, marginal 3736 and Appendices B.1a and B.1b) as appropriate for the form of the LSA-II material as specified in Table 4.

(c) The material shall be loaded into the packaging, tank or container so that, in routine transport, there will be no escape of contents and no loss of shielding.

>TABLE>

3. Maximum Radiation Level

See marginal 2703.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) Overpacks or containers dedicated to the transport of LSA-II material under exclusive use may be excepted from (a) above with regard to internal contamination only for as long as they remain under that exclusive use.

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) A vehicle dedicated to the transport of LSA-II material under exclusive use shall be excepted from (a) above with regard to internal contamination only for as long as it remains in that exclusive use.

6. Mixed Packing

See marginal 2703.

7. Mixed Loading

See marginal 2703.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) For tanks, see Appendix B.1a/ B.1b, marginal 211 760/ 212 760 and Appendix B.5.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

See marginal 2703.

10. Transport Documents

(a) For a summary of the approval and notification provisions see marginal 2716.

(b) The transport document shall include:

(i) the identification number and the name as per heading 1, together with the words 'Radioactive material, low specific activity (LSA-II), 7, Schedule 6, ADR (or RID)` e.g. '2976 Thorium nitrate, solid, radioactive material, low specific activity (LSA-II), 7, Schedule 6, ADR (or RID)`; or

(ii) in the case of material not otherwise specified, '2912 Radioactive material, low specific activity (LSA-II), n.o.s., 7, Schedule 6, ADR (or RID)`.

Further details specified in marginals 2709 and 2710 shall also be included.

11. Storage and Despatch

See marginal 2703.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703 12. (2), (a) to (d).

(b) Total activity in a single vehicle shall not exceed the values specified in Table 5.

>TABLE>

13. Other Provisions

See marginal 2703.

Schedule 7

Low specific activity material (LSA-III)

Notes: 1. LSA-III is the third of three groups of radioactive material which, by its nature, has a limited specific activity or for which limits of estimated average specific activity apply.

2. If fissile material is present, the provisions of Schedule 12 shall be met in addition to the provisions of this Schedule.

3. For other hazardous properties, see also the provisions in marginal 3770.

1. Materials

2912 Radioactive material, low specific activity (LSA-III), n.o.s.

Low Specific Activity Material (LSA-III): solid radioactive material for which the radiation level at 3 m from the unshielded contents of a single package shall not exceed 10 mSv/h (1 000 mrem/h) and meeting the following conditions:

(a) the radioactive material is distributed throughout a solid or collection of solid objects or is essentially uniformly distributed in a solid compact binding agent, (e.g. concrete, bitumen, ceramic); and

(b) the radioactive material is relatively insoluble, or is intrinsically contained in a relatively insoluble matrix; and

(c) the estimated average specific activity does not exceed 2 × 10 P3 A2/g.

2. Packaging/Package

(a) LSA-III material must be transported in packagings which may be containers. Transport in tanks is not applicable.

(b) The packaging or container shall meet the design provisions for industrial packages IP-2 (see marginal 3734) if transported in exclusive use, or IP-3 (see marginal 3735) if not transported in exclusive use.

(c) The material shall be loaded into the packaging or container so that, in routine transport, there will be no escape of contents and no loss of shielding.

3. Maximum Radiation Level

See marginal 2703.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) Overpacks or containers dedicated to the transport of LSA-III material under exclusive use may be excepted from (a) above with regard to internal contamination only for as long as they remain under that exclusive use.

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) A vehicle dedicated to the transport of LSA-III material under exclusive use shall be excepted from (a) above with regard to internal contamination only for as long as it remains in that exclusive use.

6. Mixed Packing

See marginal 2703.

7. Mixed Loading

See marginal 2703.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

See marginal 2703.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

See marginal 2703.

10. Transport Documents

(a) For a summary of the approval and notification provisions see marginal 2716.

(b) The transport document shall include the description: '2912, Radioactive Material, Low Specific Activity (LSA-III) n.o.s., 7, Schedule 7, ADR (or RID)`. Further details specified in marginals 2709 and 2710 shall also be included.

11. Storage and Despatch

See marginal 2703.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703 12. (2), (a) to (d).

(b) Total activity in a single vehicle shall not exceed the values specified in Table 6.

>TABLE>

13. Other Provisions

See marginal 2703.

Schedule 8

Surface contaminated objects (SCO-i and SCO-II)

Notes: 1. A surface contaminated object (SCO) is a solid object which is not itself radioactive but which has radioactive material distributed on its surfaces. Surface contaminated objects shall be in one of two groups, either SCO-I or SCO-II, depending on the maximum allowable contamination level (see Table 7).

2. If fissile material is present the provisions of Schedule 12 shall be met in addition to the provisions of this Schedule.

3. For other hazardous properties, see also the provisions in marginal 3770.

1. Materials

2913 Radioactive material, surface contaminated objects (SCO-I or SCO-II)

(a) Solid, non-radioactive objects contaminated on the surface to a level not exceeding the contamination levels specified in Table 7 when the contamination is averaged over an area of 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2).

>TABLE>

(b) The radiation level at 3 m from the unshielded content of a single package or from a single object or collection of objects, if unpackaged, shall not exceed 10 mSv/h (1 000 mrem/h).

2. Packaging/Package

(a) SCO-I and SCO-II may be transported in packagings provided that:

(i) the packaging, which may be a container, meets the design provisions for industrial packages IP-1 (see marginal 3733) for SCO-I, or IP-2 (see marginal 3734) for SCO-II; and

(ii) the objects are loaded into the packaging so that, in routine transport, there will be no escape of contents and no loss of shielding.

(b) SCO-I may be transported unpackaged, provided that:

(i) it is transported in a vehicle or container so that, in routine transport, there will be no escape of contents and no loss of shielding; and

(ii) it shall be transported under exclusive use if the contamination on the accessible and the inaccessible surfaces is greater than 4 Bq/cm2 (10 P4 ìCi/cm2) for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters or 0,4 Bq/cm2 (10 P5 ìCi/cm2) for all other alpha emitters; and

(iii) measures shall be taken to ensure that radioactive material is not released into the vehicle if it is expected that non-fixed contamination exists on inaccessible surfaces in excess of 4 Bq/cm2 (10 P4 ìCi/cm2) for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 0,4 Bq/cm2 (10 P5 ìCi/cm2) for all other alpha emitters.

(c) SCO-II shall not be transported unpackaged.

3. Maximum Radiation Level

See marginal 2703.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) Overpacks or containers dedicated to the transport of SCO under exclusive use may be excepted from (a) above with regard to internal contamination only for as long as they remain under that exclusive use.

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) A vehicle dedicated to the transport of SCO under exclusive use shall be excepted from (a) above with regard to internal contamination only for as long as it remains in that specific exclusive use.

6. Mixed Packing

See marginal 2703.

7. Mixed Loading

See marginal 2703.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

See marginal 2703.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

See marginal 2703.

10. Transport Documents

(a) For a summary of the approval and notification provisions see marginal 2716.

(b) The transport document shall include the description: '2913 Radioactive material, Surface Contaminated Object (SCO-I) or (SCO-II), 7, Schedule 8, ADR (or RID)`. Further details specified in marginals 2709 and 2710 shall also be included.

11. Storage and Despatch

See marginal 2703.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703 12. (2), (a) to (d).

(b) Total activity in a single vehicle shall not exceed 100 A2.

13. Other Provisions

See marginal 2703.

Schedule 9

Radioactive material in type a packages

Notes: 1. Radioactive material in quantities which offer a limited radiological risk (see marginal 2700 (2) 1.) may be carried in Type A packages, which shall be designed to withstand conditions of transport including minor mishaps.

2. If fissile material is present the provisions of Schedule 12 shall be met in addition to the provisions of this Schedule.

3. For other hazardous properties, see also the provisions in marginal 3770.

1. Materials

2974 Radioactive material, special form, n.o.s.

2975 Thorium metal, pyrophoric.

2976 Thorium nitrate, solid.

2979 Uranium metal, pyrophoric.

2980 Uranyl nitrate hexahydrate solution.

2981 Uranyl nitrate, solid.

2982 Radioactive material, n.o.s.

The contents of a Type A package shall be restricted to radioactive material:

(a) with an activity not exceeding A1 (see marginals 3700 and 3701) if in special form; or

(b) with an activity not exceeding A2 (see marginals 3700 and 3701) if other than in special form.

2. Packaging/Package

(a) The packaging, which may also be a tank or container, shall meet the provisions for Type A packages specified in marginal 3737 and in addition, for tanks, Appendices B.1a and B.1b.

(b) In particular, the Type A package shall be designed so that, under conditions of transport including minor mishaps, it will prevent loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents, and loss of shielding integrity which would result in more than a 20 % increase in the external radiation level at any point.

(c) If the radioactive contents are special form radioactive material, competent authority approval of the design for the special form radioactive material is required.

(d) The outside of the Type A package shall incorporate a feature such as a seal, which is not readily breakable and which, while intact, will be evidence that it has not been opened.

3. Maximum Radiation Level

See marginal 2703.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

See marginal 2703.

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

See marginal 2703.

6. Mixed Packing

See marginal 2703.

7. Mixed Loading

See marginal 2703.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) Each Type A package shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside with the words 'Type A`.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

See marginal 2703.

10. Transport Documents

(a) For a summary of the approval and notification provisions see marginal 2716.

(b) The transport document shall include:

(i) the identification number and the name as per heading 1, together with the words 'Radioactive material in Type A package, 7, Schedule 9, ADR (or RID)`, e.g. '2976 Thorium nitrate, solid, radioactive material in Type A package, 7, Schedule 9, ADR (or RID)`; or

(ii) in the case of material not otherwise specified, '2974 Radioactive material, special form, n.o.s., in Type A package, 7, Schedule 9, ADR (or RID)`, or '2982 Radioactive material, n.o.s., in Type A package, 7, Schedule 9, ADR (or RID)`, as the case may be.

Further details specified in marginals 2709 and 2710 shall also be included.

11. Storage and Despatch

See marginal 2703.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

See marginal 2703.

13. Other Provisions

See marginal 2703.

Schedule 10

Radioactive material in Type B(U) packages

Notes: 1. Radioactive material which exceeds in quantity the Type A package limits may be carried in a Type B(U) package which shall be designed so that it is unlikely to release its radioactive contents or lose its shielding in accident conditions of transport.

2. If fissile material is present the provisions of Schedule 12 shall be met in addition to the provisions of this Schedule.

3. For other hazardous properties, see also the provisions in marginal 3770.

1. Materials

2974 Radioactive material, special form, n.o.s.

2975 Thorium metal, pyrophoric.

2976 Thorium nitrate, solid.

2979 Uranium metal, pyrophoric.

2980 Uranyl nitrate hexahydrate solution.

2981 Uranyl nitrate, solid.

2982 Radioactive material, n.o.s.

The limit on the total activity in a Type B(U) package shall be as is prescribed in the design approval certificate for that package.

2. Packaging/Package

(a) The packaging, which may also be a tank or container, shall meet the provisions for Type B packages specified in marginal 3738, the provisions for Type B(U) packages specified in marginal 3739 and in addition, for tanks, Appendices B.1a and B.1b.

(b) In particular, the Type B(U) package shall be designed so that:

(i) under conditions of transport including minor mishaps, it will restrict the loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents to no more than A2 x 10-6 per hour, and prevent loss of shielding integrity which would result in more than a 20 % increase in the external radiation level at any point; and

(ii) it will be capable of withstanding the damaging effects of a transport accident as demonstrated by retaining containment and shielding integrity to the extent required by marginals 3738 and 3739.

(c) Approval of the design of Type B(U) packages in accordance with marginal 3752 is required by the competent authority of the country of origin of the design (unilateral approval).

(d) If the radioactive contents are special form radioactive material competent authority approval of the design for the special form radioactive material is required.

(e) The outside of the Type B(U) package shall incorporate a feature such as a seal, which is not readily breakable and which, while intact, will be evidence that it has not been opened.

3. Maximum Radiation Level

See marginal 2703.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

See marginal 2703.

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

See marginal 2703.

6. Mixed Packing

See marginal 2703.

7. Mixed Loading

See marginal 2703.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) Each Type B(U) package shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside with:

(i) the identification mark allocated to that design by the competent authority;

(ii) a serial number to uniquely identify each packaging which conforms to that design;

(iii) the wording 'TYPE B(U)`; and

(iv) the trefoil symbol shown in marginal 2705 (5) embossed or stamped on the outermost fire and water- resistant receptacle.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

See marginal 2703.

10. Transport Documents

(a) For a summary of the approval and notification provisions see marginal 2716.

(b) The transport document shall include:

(i) the identification number and the name as per heading 1, together with the words 'Radioactive material in Type B(U) package, 7, Schedule 10, ADR (or RID)`, e.g. '2976 Thorium nitrate, solid, radioactive material in Type B(U) package, 7, Schedule 10, ADR (or RID)`; or

(ii) in the case of material not otherwise specified, '2974 Radioactive material, special form, n.o.s., in Type B(U) package, 7, Schedule 10, ADR (or RID)`, or '2982 Radioactive material, n.o.s., in Type B(U) package, 7, Schedule 10, ADR (or RID)`, as the case may be.

Further details specified in marginals 2709 and 2710 shall also be included.

(c) The unilateral approval certificate for the package design is required.

(d) Before each shipment of any Type B(U) package, the consignor shall be in possession of all the relevant competent authority approval certificates and shall ensure that copies of them have been submitted, before the first shipment, to the competent authority of each country through or into which the package is to be transported.

(e) Before each shipment where the activity is greater than 3 × 103 A2 or 3 × 103 A1, as appropriate, or 1 000 TBq (20 kCi), whichever is the lower, the consignor must notify the competent authorities of all countries affected by the movement, preferably at least seven days in advance.

11. Storage and Despatch

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) The consignor shall have complied with the relevant pre-use and pre-shipment provisions of marginal 3710.

(c) Any provisions in the competent authority approval certificates shall be observed.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703 12. (2), (a) to (d).

(b) If the average surface heat flux from a Type B(U) package could exceed 15 W/m2, any special stowage provisions specified in the competent authority package approval certificate must be observed.

(c) If the temperature of the accessible surface of the Type B(U) package could exceed 50 °C in the shade, carriage is permitted only under exclusive use, for which the surface temperature is limited to 85 °C. Account may be taken of barriers or screens intended to give protection to transport workers without the barriers or screens being subject to any test.

13. Other Provisions

See marginal 2703.

Schedule 11

Radioactive material in Type B(M) packages

Notes: 1. Radioactive material which exceeds in quantity the Type A package limits may be carried in a Type B(M) package which shall be designed so that it is unlikely to release its radioactive contents or lose its shielding integrity in accident conditions of transport.

2. If fissile material is present the provisions of Schedule 12 shall be met in addition to the provisions of this Schedule.

3. For other hazardous properties, see also the provisions in marginal 3770.

1. Materials

2974 Radioactive material, special form, n.o.s.

2975 Thorium metal, pyrophoric.

2976 Thorium nitrate, solid.

2979 Uranium metal, pyrophoric.

2980 Uranyl nitrate hexahydrate solution.

2981 Uranyl nitrate, solid.

2982 Radioactive material, n.o.s.

The limit on the total activity in a Type B(M) package shall be as is prescribed in the design approval certificate for that package.

2. Packaging/Package

(a) The packaging, which may also be a tank or container, shall meet the provisions for Type B packages specified in marginal 3738, the provisions for Type B(M) packages specified in marginal 3740 and in addition, for tanks, Appendices B.1a and B.1b.

(b) In particular, the Type B(M) package shall be designed so that:

(i) under conditions of transport including minor mishaps, it will restrict the loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents to no more than A2 × 10-6 per hour, and prevent loss of shielding which would result in more than a 20 % increase in the external radiation level at any point; and

(ii) it will be capable of withstanding the damaging effects of a transport accident as demonstrated by retaining containment and shielding integrity to the extent required by marginals 3738 and 3739.

(c) Intermittent venting during transport may be permitted if compensating operational controls are approved by all the competent authorities involved.

(d) Supplementary operational controls necessary to ensure safety of the Type B(M) package during transport or to compensate for the deficiencies from the Type B(U) provisions and any restrictions on mode or conditions of transport shall be approved by all the competent authorities involved.

(e) Approval of the design of Type B(M) packages in accordance with marginal 3753 is required both by the competent authority of the country of origin of the design and of each country through or into which the packages are transported (multilateral approval).

(f) If the radioactive contents are special form radioactive material, competent authority approval of the design for the special form radioactive material is required.

(g) The outside of the Type B(M) package shall incorporate a feature such as a seal, which is not readily breakable and which, while intact, will be evidence that it has not been opened.

3. Maximum Radiation Level

See marginal 2703.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

See marginal 2703.

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

See marginal 2703.

6. Mixed Packing

See marginal 2703.

7. Mixed Loading

See marginal 2703.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) Each Type B(M) package shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside with:

(i) the identification mark allocated to that design by the competent authority;

(ii) a serial number to uniquely identify each packaging which conforms to that design;

(iii) the wording 'TYPE B(M)`; and

(iv) the trefoil symbol shown in marginal 2705 (5) embossed or stamped on the outermost fire and water-resistant receptacle.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

See marginal 2703.

10. Transport Documents

(a) For a summary of the approval and notification provisions see marginal 2716.

(b) The transport document shall include:

(i) the identification number and the name as per heading 1, together with the words 'Radioactive material in Type B(M) package, 7, Schedule 11, ADR (or RID )`, e.g. '2976 Thorium nitrate, solid, radioactive material in Type B(M) package, 7, Schedule 11, ADR (or RID )`; or

(ii) in the case of material not otherwise specified, '2974 Radioactive material, special form, n.o.s., in Type B(M) package, 7, Schedule 11, ADR (or RID)`, or '2982 Radioactive material, n.o.s., in Type B(M) package, 7, Schedule 11, ADR (or RID)`, as the case may be.

Further details specified in marginals 2709 and 2710 shall also be included.

(c) The multilateral approval certificates for the package design are required.

(d) If the package is designed to allow for controlled intermittent venting or if the total contents exceed 3 × 103 A2 or 3 × 103 A1, as appropriate, or 1 000 TBq (20 kCi), whichever is the lower, certificates of multilateral approval of shipment are required unless the competent authorities involved authorize transport by a specific provision in the certificates for approval of the package design.

(e) Before each shipment of any Type B(M) package, the consignor shall be in possession of all relevant approval certificates.

(f) Before each shipment, the consignor shall notify the competent authorities of all countries affected by the movement, preferably at least seven days in advance.

11. Storage and Despatch

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) The consignor shall have complied with the relevant pre-use and pre-shipment provisions of marginal 3710.

(c) Any provisions in the certificates of approval of the design or the shipment issued by the competent authorities involved must be observed.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703 12. (2), (a) to (d).

(b) If the average surface heat flux from a Type B(M) package could exceed 15 W/m2, any special stowage provisions specified in the competent authority package design approval certificate must be observed.

(c) If the temperature of the accessible surface of the Type B(M) package could exceed 50 °C in the shade, carriage is permitted only under exclusive use, for which the surface temperature is limited to 85 °C. Account may be taken of barriers or screens intended to give protection to transport workers without the barriers or screens being subject to any test.

13. Other Provisions

See marginal 2703.

Schedule 12

Fissile material

Notes: 1. Radioactive material which is also fissile material must be packaged, transported and stored so as to meet the provisions for nuclear criticality safety, as stated in this Schedule, and the provisions appropriate to its radioactivity, as stated in Schedules 6 to 11, as appropriate.

2. For other hazardous properties, see also the provisions in marginal 3770.

1. Materials

2918 Radioactive material, fissile, n.o.s.

2977 Uranium hexafluoride, fissile containing more than 1,0 % uranium-235.

Fissile material is uranium-233, uranium-235, plutonium-238, plutonium-239, plutonium-241, or any combination of the foregoing, except for unirradiated natural or depleted uranium and natural or depleted uranium which has been irradiated in thermal reactors only.

Consignments of fissile material shall also be in full compliance with the provisions of one of the other Schedules, as appropriate to the radioactivity of the consignment.

2. Packaging/Package

(a) The following materials are excepted from the special packaging provisions stated in this Schedule, but must meet the provisions of one of the other Schedules appropriate to the radioactivity of the material:

(i) Fissile material in quantity not exceeding 15 g per package under conditions fully described in marginal 3741 of Appendix A.7.

(ii) Homogeneous hydrogenous solutions in concentrations and quantities limited in accordance with Table III of marginal 3703 of Appendix A.7.

(iii) Enriched uranium distributed homogeneously with not more than 1 % of uranium-235, and with a total plutonium and uranium-233 content not exceeding 1 % of the mass of uranium-235, provided that if the uranium-235 is present in metallic, oxide or carbide forms, it must not form a lattice arrangement within the package.

(iv) Material containing not more than 5 g of fissile material in any 10 litre volume.

(v) Packages containing not more than 1 kg of plutonium in which not more than 20 % by mass consists of plutonium-239, plutonium-241 or any combination of those radionuclides.

(vi) Solutions of uranyl nitrate enriched in uranium-235 to a maximum of 2 % by mass with total plutonium and uranium-233 content not exceeding 0,1 % of the mass of uranium-235, and a minimum nitrogen to uranium atomic ratio of 2.

(b) Otherwise packages for fissile material shall meet the design provisions for the type of package necessary for the radioactivity of the fissile material and, in addition, shall meet the additional provisions for packages containing fissile material stated in marginal 3741 of Appendix A.7.

(c) Each design of package for fissile material must be approved by the competent authority of the country of origin of the design and by the competent authorities of each of the countries through or into which the package is to be transported, i.e. multilateral approval is required.

(d) The outside of packages for fissile material shall incorporate a feature such as a seal, which is not readily breakable and which, while intact, will be evidence that it has not been opened.

3. Maximum Radiation Level

See appropriate Schedule.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

See appropriate Schedule.

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

See appropriate Schedule.

6. Mixed Packing

Only articles or documents which are necessary for the use of the radioactive material are permitted in the package, provided that there is no interaction between them and the packaging or its contents that would reduce the safety (including nuclear criticality safety) of the package.

7. Mixed Loading

See marginal 2703.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See appropriate Schedule.

(b) Packages shall be legibly and durably marked externally with:

(i) 'TYPE A`, 'TYPE B(U)`, 'TYPE B(M)` as appropriate;

(ii) competent authority identification mark.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

See marginal 2703.

10. Transport Documents

(a) For a summary of the approval and notification provisions see marginal 2716.

(b) The transport document shall include the description: '2918 Radioactive material, fissile, n.o.s., in Type IF or Type AF or Type B(U)F or Type B(M)F package, 7, Schedule 12, ADR (or RID)`; or '2977 Uranium hexafluoride, fissile, containing more than 1,0 % uranium-235, radioactive material in approved package, 7, Schedule 12, ADR (or RID)`, as the case may be. Further details specified in marginals 2709 and 2710 shall also be included.

(c) The multilateral approval certificates for the fissile material package design are required.

(d) Before each shipment of any fissile material package, the consignor shall be in possession of all relevant approval certificates.

(e) Certificates of multilateral shipment approval are required for packages containing fissile material if the sum of the transport indexes of the packages in the consignment exceeds 50.

(f) For additional documentation provisions, see appropriate Schedule.

11. Storage and Despatch

See marginal 2703.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703, 12 (2), (a) to (d).

(b) For consignments under exclusive use, the total transport index limit shall be 100.

(c) Packages of fissile material for which the transport index for nuclear criticality control exceeds 0 shall not be carried in an overpack.

13. Other Provisions

See marginal 2703.

Schedule 13

Radioactive material transported under special arrangement

Note: Consignments of radioactive material which do not satisfy all of the applicable provisions of the Schedules 5-12 may be transported under 'special arrangement` () subject to the implementation of special provisions approved by the competent authorities. These provisions shall ensure that the overall level of safety in transport and in-transit storage is at least equivalent to that which would be provided if all the applicable provisions had been met.

1. Materials:

Materials with substance identification numbers 2912, 2913, 2918, 2974, 2975, 2976, 2977, 2978, 2979, 2980, 2981 and 2982, see marginal 2701.

Radioactive materials which may be shipped under special arrangement include any of those materials covered by Schedules 5-11 and, if applicable, Schedule 12.

2. Packaging/Package

(a) As authorised by the competent authority approval certificate for special arrangement.

(b) Multilateral approval is required.

3. Maximum Radiation Level

As authorised by the competent authority approval certificate for special arrangement.

4. Contamination on Packages, Vehicles, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

As authorised by the competent authority approval certificate for special arrangement.

5. Decontamination and Use of Vehicles, Equipment or Parts thereof

See marginal 2703.

6. Mixed Packing

As authorised by the competent authority approval certificate for special arrangement.

7. Mixed Loading

Mixed loading is only permitted if specially authorized by the competent authorities.

8. Marking and Danger Labels on Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703. However consignments under special arrangement shall always bear III-YELLOW labels conforming to model No 7C.

(b) In addition, other labelling and marking provisions approved by the competent authorities shall be fulfilled.

9. Danger Labels on Vehicles other than Tank-Vehicles

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) In addition, other provisions approved by the competent authorities shall be fulfilled.

10. Transport Documents

(a) For a summary of the approval and notification provisions see marginal 2716.

(b) The transport document shall include:

(i) the identification number as per heading 1 and the name as per marginal 2701, together with the words 'Radioactive material, under special arrangement, 7, Schedule 13, ADR (or RID)`, e.g. '2976 Thorium nitrate, solid, radioactive material, under special arrangement, 7, Schedule 13, ADR (or RID)`; or

(ii) in the case of material not otherwise specified, the identification number as per heading 1 and the name as per marginal 2701, together with the words 'under special arrangement, 7, Schedule 13, ADR ( or RID )`, e.g. '2918 Radioactive material, fissile, n.o.s., under special arrangement, 7, Schedule 13, ADR (or RID)`.

Further details specified in marginals 2709 and 2710 shall also be included.

(c) Each consignment shall require multilateral approval.

(d) Before each shipment, the consignor shall be in possession of all relevant approval certificates.

(e) Before each shipment the consignor must notify the competent authorities of all countries affected by the movement, preferably at least seven days in advance.

11. Storage and Despatch

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) Specific storage and despatch provisions approved by the competent authorities shall be fulfilled.

(c) Unless specifically excepted by the competent authority approval certificates, the consignor shall have complied with the relevant pre-use and pre-shipment provisions of marginal 3710.

12. Carriage of Packages, Containers, Tanks and Overpacks

(a) See marginal 2703.

(b) Specific carriage provisions approved by the competent authorities shall be fulfilled.

13. Other Provisions

See marginal 2703.

Marking and Labelling

Note: For radioactive materials having other hazardous properties, the labelling shall also be in accordance with the provisions for the other hazardous properties [see marginal 3770 (3)].

Marking of Packages, including Tanks and Containers

2705 (1) Each package of gross mass exceeding 50 kg shall have its permissible gross mass legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging.

(2) Each package, except tanks, containers and overpacks and excepted packages of schedules 1 to 4 shall be clearly and durably marked with the identification number of the goods to be entered in the transport document preceded by the letters 'UN`.

(3) Each package which conforms to a Type A package design shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with 'TYPE A`.

(4) Each package which conforms to a design approved under marginals 3752-3755 shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with:

(a) the identification mark allocated to that design by the competent authority;

(b) a serial number to identify uniquely each packaging which conforms to that design; and

(c) in the case of a Type B(U) or Type B(M) package design, with 'TYPE B(U)` or 'TYPE B(M)`.

(5) Each package which conforms to a Type B(U) or Type B(M) package design shall have the outside of the outermost receptacle which is resistant to the effects of fire and water plainly marked by embossing, stamping, or other means resistant to the effects of fire and water with the trefoil symbol shown in the model below.

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

Basic trefoil symbol with proportions based on a central circle of radius X. The minimum allowable size of X shall be 4 mm.

Labelling of Packages, including Tanks and Containers, and of Overpacks

2706 (1) Each package, overpack, tank and container shall bear the labels which conform to the model No 7A, 7B or 7C according to the appropriate category. Any labels which do not relate to the contents shall be removed or covered. For radioactive materials having other dangerous properties see marginal 3770.

(2) The labels shall be affixed to two opposite sides of the outside of a package or overpack, on the outside of all four sides of a container or tank-container, or in the case of tank-vehicles to the two side walls and the rear wall of the transport unit.

(3) Each label shall be completed with the following information in a clear and indelible manner:

(a) Contents:

(i) Except for LSA-I material, the name of the radionuclide as taken from Table I of Appendix A.7, using the symbols prescribed therein. For mixtures of radionuclides, the most restrictive nuclides must be listed to the extent the space on the line permits. The group of LSA or SCO shall be shown following the name of the radionuclide. The terms 'LSA-II`, 'LSA-III`, 'SCO-I` and 'SCO-II` shall be used for this purpose;

(ii) For LSA-I material, the term 'LSA-I` is all that is necessary: the name of the radionuclide is not necessary.

(b) Activity:

The maximum activity of the radioactive contents during transport expressed in units of becquerel (Bq) [and, if desired curie (Ci)] with the appropriate SI prefix. [See marginal 2001 (1)]. For fissile material, the total mass in units of gram (g) or multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity.

(c) For overpacks, tanks, and containers, the 'contents` and 'activity` entries on the label shall bear the information required in (a) and (b) of this paragraph respectively, totalled together for the entire contents of the overpack, tank, or container except that on labels for overpacks or containers containing mixed loads of packages with different radionuclides, such entries may read 'see transport document`.

(d) Transport index:

See marginal 3715 (3) (no transport index entry required for category I-WHITE).

Additional Marking of Tanks and Vehicles

2707 See marginal 10 500 and Appendix B.5.

Additional Labelling of Containers for carriage in bulk, Containers, Tanks and Vehicles

2708 (1) Tanks and large containers carrying packages other than excepted packages shall bear labels conforming to model No 7D. However, instead of using a label conforming to model Nos 7A, 7B or 7C together with a label conforming to model No 7D, it is permitted as an alternative to use enlarged labels conforming to model Nos 7A, 7B or 7C with the dimensions of model No 7D. Every label shall be affixed in a vertical orientation on all four sides of a container or of a tank-container or, in the case of a tank-vehicle, to the two side walls and the rear wall of the transport unit.

(2) Vehicles carrying packages, overpacks, tank-containers or containers bearing any of the labels conforming to model Nos 7A, 7B or 7C shall display the label conforming to model No 7D on both sides and at the rear. In addition vehicles carrying consignments under exclusive use shall display the label conforming to model No 7D on both sides and at the rear.

(3) Any labels which do not relate to the contents shall no longer be visible.

Additional Particulars of Consignment

2709 In addition to the description of the goods given in the relevant schedule, the consignor shall include in the transport document for each consignment of radioactive material the following information:

(a) the words 'The nature of the goods and the packaging are in conformity with the provisions of ADR.`;

(b) the name or symbol of each radionuclide or, for mixture of radionuclides, an appropriate general description or a list of the most restrictive nuclides;

(c) a description of the physical and chemical form of the material, or a statement that the material is special form radioactive material. A generic description is acceptable for chemical form;

(d) the maximum activity of the radioactive contents during transport expressed in units of becquerel (Bq) [and, if desired, curie (Ci)] with the appropriate SI prefix, see marginal 2001 (1). For fissile material, the total mass of fissile material in units of gram (g), or appropriate multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity;

(e) the category of the package, i.e. I-WHITE, II-YELLOW or III-YELLOW;

(f) the transport index (for categories II-YELLOW and III-YELLOW only);

(g) for a consignment of fissile material, where all of the packages in the consignment are excepted under marginal 3703, the words 'Fissile excepted`;

(h) the identification mark for each competent authority approval certificate (special form radioactive material, special arrangement, package design, or shipment) applicable to the consignment;

(i) for consignments of packages in an overpack or container, a detailed statement of the contents of each package within the overpack or container and, where appropriate, of each overpack or container in the consignment. If packages are to be removed from the overpack or container at a point of intermediate unloading, appropriate transport documentation shall be made available;

(j) when a consignment is required to be shipped under exclusive use, the statement 'Exclusive use shipment`.

Instruction to Carriers

2710 (1) The consignor shall provide with the transport document information regarding actions, if any, that are required to be taken by the carrier. The information shall include at least the following points:

(a) supplementary operational provisions for loading, stowage, transport, handling and unloading of the package, overpack, container, or tank including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation of heat [see marginal 2712 (2)] or a statement that no such provisions are necessary;

(b) any necessary routeing instructions;

(c) written instructions appropriate to the consignment. See marginal 10 385 (1), (2) and (3) and marginal 71 385.

(2) In all cases where approval of the shipment or prior notification to the competent authority is required, the carriers must be informed, if possible, at least 15 days in advance and in any case at least 5 days in advance, in order that they may take in good time any measures required for the transport.

(3) The consignor shall be in a position to provide the certificates of the competent authorities to the carriers before loading, unloading, and any trans-shipment.

Transport

Segregation during transport

2711 (1) Packages, overpacks, containers and tanks shall be segregated during transport:

(a) for radiation control purposes, from places occupied by persons in accordance with Table 8 and from undeveloped photographic film and mailbags, in accordance with Table 9;

Note: Mailbags shall be assumed to contain undeveloped film and plates and therefore be separated from radioactive material in the same way.

and

(b) from other dangerous goods in accordance with marginal 2703, heading 7.

>TABLE>

Note: The above table is based upon a dose limit of 5 mSv (500 mrem) in any 12 month period.

>TABLE>

Stowage for Transport

2712 (1) Packages shall be so loaded in vehicles that they cannot shift dangerously, upset or fall.

(2) Provided that its average surface heat flux does not exceed 15 W/m2 and that the immediately surrounding cargo is not in sacks or bags, a package or overpack may be carried among packaged general cargo without any special stowage provisions except as may be specifically required by the competent authority in an applicable approval certificate.

(3) Except in the case of shipment under special arrangement, mixing of packages of different kinds of radioactive material, including fissile material, and mixing of different kinds of packages with different transport indexes is permitted without specific competent authority approval. In the case of shipments under special arrangement, mixing shall not be permitted except as specifically authorized under the special arrangement.

(4) The following provisions shall apply to the loading of tank-vehicles and the loading of packages, overpacks, tank-containers and containers on to vehicles:

(a) The transport index of a tank-vehicle shall not exceed the limits in Table 10. The total number of packages, overpacks, tanks and containers aboard a single vehicle shall be so limited that the total sum of the transport indexes aboard the vehicle does not exceed the values shown in Table 10.

For consignments of LSA-I material there shall be no limit on the sum of the transport indexes.

(b) The radiation level under conditions likely to be encountered in routine transport shall not exceed 2 mSv/h (200 mrem/h) at any point on, and 0,1 mSv/h (10 mrem/h) at 2 m from, the external surface of the vehicle.

(5) Any package or overpack having a transport index greater than 10 shall be transported only under exclusive use.

>TABLE>

Additional Provisions

2713 (1) For consignments under exclusive use, the radiation level shall not exceed:

(a) 10 mSv/h (1 000 mrem/h) at any point on the external surface of any package or overpack, and may only exceed 2 mSv/h (200 mrem/h ) provided that:

(i) the vehicle is equipped with an enclosure which prevents unauthorized access to the load during transport; and

(ii) provisions are made to secure the package or overpack so that its position within the vehicle remains fixed during routine transport; and

(iii) there are no loading or unloading operations between the beginning and end of the shipment;

(b) 2 mSv/h (200 mrem/h) at any point on the outer surfaces of the vehicle including the upper and lower surfaces, or, in the case of an open vehicle at any point on the vertical planes projected from the outer edges of the vehicle, on the upper surface of the load, and on the lower external surface of the vehicle; and

(c) 0,1 mSv/h (10 mrem/h) at any point 2 m from the vertical planes represented by the outer lateral surfaces of the vehicle, or, if the load is transported in an open vehicle, at any point 2 m from the vertical planes projected from the outer edges of the vehicle.

(2) The radiation level at any normally occupied position of the vehicle shall not exceed 0,02 mSv/h (2 mrem/h) unless the persons occupying such positions are provided with personal monitoring devices.

Storage in transit

2714 (1) Packages, overpacks, containers and tanks shall be segregated during storage in transit:

(a) for radiation exposure control purposes, from places occupied by persons, in accordance with Table 8 of marginal 2711 and from undeveloped photographic film and mailbags, in accordance with Table 9 of marginal 2711;

Note: Mailbags shall be assumed to contain undeveloped film and plates and therefore be separated from radioactive material in the same way.

(b) from other dangerous goods in accordance with marginal 2703, heading 7.

(2) The number of category II-YELLOW and category III-YELLOW packages, overpacks, tanks and containers stored in any one place shall be so limited that the total sum of the transport indexes in any individual group of such packages, overpacks, tanks or containers does not exceed 50. Groups of such packages, overpacks, tanks and containers shall be stored so as to maintain a spacing of at least 6 m from other groups of such packages, overpacks, tanks or containers.

(3) If the transport index of a single package, overpack, tank or container exceeds 50 or the total transport index of a vehicle exceeds 50, as permitted in Table 10, storage shall be such as to maintain a spacing of at least 6 m from other groups of packages, overpacks, tanks, containers or vehicles carrying radioactive material.

(4) Consignments in which the only radioactive contents are LSA-I materials shall be excepted from the provisions of paragraphs (2) and (3) above.

(5) Except in the case of shipment under special arrangement, mixed loading of packages of different kinds of radioactive material, including fissile material, and mixed loading of different kinds of packages with different transport indexes is permitted without specific competent authority approval. In the case of shipment under special arrangement, mixed loading shall not be permitted except as specifically authorized under the special arrangement.

Undeliverable Consignments

2715 If neither the consignor nor the consignee can be identified, or if the consignment cannot be delivered to the consignee and the carrier has no instructions from the consignor the consignment shall be placed in a safe location and the competent authority shall be informed as soon as possible, and a request made for instructions on further action.

Summary of approval and prior notification provisions

2716

>TABLE>

Notes: 1. Before first shipment of any package requiring competent authority approval of the design, the consignor must ensure that a copy of the approval certificate for that design has been submitted to the competent authority of each country en route: see marginal 3719 (1).

2. Notification required if contents exceed 3 × 103 A1, or 3 × 103 A2, or 1 000 TBq (20 kCi); see marginal 3719 (2).

3. Multilateral approval of shipment required if contents exceed 3 × 103 A1, or 3 × 103 A2, or 1 000 TBq (20 kCi); or if controlled intermittent venting is allowed, see marginal 3757.

4. See approval and prior notification provisions for the applicable package.

2717-

2799

CLASS 8 CORROSIVE SUBSTANCES

1. List of substances

2800 (1) Among the substances and articles covered by the title of Class 8, those which are listed in marginal 2801 or are covered by a collective heading in that marginal are subject to the conditions set out in marginals 2800 (2) to 2822 and to the provisions of this Annex and of Annex B. They are then considered as substances and articles of this Directive.

Note: For the quantities of substances listed in marginal 2801 which are not subject to the provisions for this Class, either in this Annex or in Annex B, see marginal 2801a.

(2) The title of Class 8 covers substances which by chemical action attack epithelial tissue - of skin or mucous membranes - with which tey are in contact, and substances which in the event of leakage are capable of damaging or destroying other goods, or means of transport, and may also cause other hazards. The title of this Class also covers other substances which form a corrosive liquid only in the presence of water, or which produce corrosive vapour or mist in the presence of natural moisture of the air.

(3)

(a) Substances and articles of Class 8 are subdivided as follows:

A. Acid substances;

B. Basic substances;

C. Other corrosive substances;

D. Articles containing corrosive substances;

E. Empty packagings.

(b) Substances and articles of Class 8 which are classified under the various items of marginal 2801 other than substances of 6°, 14° and 15° shall be assigned to one of the following groups designated by the letter (a), (b) and (c) according to their degree of corrosivity:

(a) highly corrosive;

(b) corrosive;

(c) slightly corrosive.

(c) Allocation of substances to groups (a), (b) and (c) has been on the basis of experience taking into account such additional factors as inhalation risk () and reactivity with water (including the formation of dangerous decomposition products). The degree of corrosivity of substances not specifically named, including mixtures, can be judged by the length of time of contact necessary to produce full thickness destruction of human skin.

Substances which are judged not to cause full thickness destruction of human skin shall still be considered for their potential to cause corrosion to certain metal surfaces. In making this grouping, account should be taken of human experience in instances of accidental exposure. In the absence of human experience, the grouping should be based on data obtained from animal experiments in accordance with OECD Guideline 404 ().

(d) Substances that cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within an observation period up to 60 minutes starting after the exposure time of 3 minutes or less are substances of group (a).

(e) Substances that cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within an observation period up to 14 days starting after the exposure time of more than 3 minutes but not more than 60 minutes are substances of group (b).

(f) The following are substances of group (c):

- substances that cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within an observation period up to 14 days starting after the exposure time of more than 60 minutes but not more than 4 hours;

- substances which are judged not to cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue, but which exhibit a corrosion rate on steel or aluminium surfaces exceeding 6,25 mm a year at a test temperature of 55 °C. For the purposes of testing steel, type P3 (ISO 2604 (IV); 1975) or a similar type, and for testing aluminium, non-clad types 7075-T6 or AZ5GU-T6 shall be used.

(4) If substances of Class 8, as a result of admixtures, come into different categories of risk from those to which the substances specifically named in marginal 2801 belong, these mixtures or solutions shall be assigned to the items and groups to which they belong on the basis of their actual degree of danger.

Note: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), see also marginal 2002 (8).

(5) On the basis of the criteria set out in (3), it may also be determined whether the nature of a solution or a mixture specifically named or containing a specifically named substance is such that the solution or mixture is not subject to the provisions for this class.

(6) For the packaging requirements of marginals 2805 (2), 2806 (3) and 2807 (3), substances and mixtures of substances having a melting point above 45 °C are considered to be solids.

(7)

(a) Flammable corrosive liquids having a flashpoint below 23 °C, other than substances of 54° (a) and 68° (a), are substances of Class 3 (see marginal 2301, items 21° to 26°).

(b) Flammable, slightly corrosive liquids having a flashpoint between 23 °C and 61 °C, are substances of Class 3 (see marginal 2301, 33°).

(c) Corrosive substances which are highly toxic by inhalation, as defined in marginal 2600 (3), are substances of Class 6.1 (see marginal 2601).

(8) The chemically unstable substances of Class 8 are to be accepted for carriage only if the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition or polymerization during carriage. To this end it should in particular be ensured that receptacles do not contain any substance liable to promote these reactions.

(9) 1910 calcium oxide and 2812 sodium aluminate, identification numbers assigned in the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

(10) The flashpoint referred to below shall be determined in the manner described in Appendix A.3.

A. Acid substances

Inorganic substances

2801 1° Sulphuric acid and similar substances:

(a) 1829 sulphur trioxide, inhibited (sulphuric anhydride, inhibited), 1831 sulphuric acid, fuming (oleum), 2240 chromosulphuric acid;

(b) 1794 lead sulphate with more than 3 % free acid, 1830 sulphuric acid with more than 51 % acid, 1832 sulphuric acid, spent, 1833 sulphurous acid, 1906 sludge acid, 2308 nitrosylsulphuric acid, 2583 alkylsulphonic acids, solid with more than 5 % free sulphuric acid or 2583 arylsulphonic acids, solid with more than 5 % free sulphuric acid, 2584 alkylsulphonic acids, liquid with more than 5 % free sulphuric acid or 2584 arylsulphonic acids, liquid with more than 5 % free sulphuric acid, 2796 sulphuric acid with not more than 51 % acid or 2796 battery fluid, acid, 2837 bisulphates, aqueous solution (hydrogensulphate, aqueous solution).

Notes: 1. 2585 alkylsulphonic or arylsulphonic acids, solid and 2586 alkylsulphonic or arylsulphonic acids, liquid with not more than 5 % free sulphuric acid are substances of item 34°.

2. Lead sulphate with not more than 3 % free acid is not subject to the provisions of ADR.

3. Chemically unstable mixtures of sulphuric acid, spent, are not to be accepted for carriage.

(c) 2837 bisulphates, aqueous solution (hydrogensulphate, aqueous solution).

2° Nitric acids:

(a) 1. 2031 nitric acid, other than red fuming, with more than 70 % acid.

2. 2032 nitric acid, red fuming;

(b) 2031 nitric acid, other than red fuming, with not more than 70 % acid.

3° Nitrating acid mixtures:

(a) 1796 nitrating acid mixture with more than 50 % nitric acid, 1826 nitrating acid mixture, spent with more than 50 % nitric acid;

(b) 1796 nitrating acid mixture with not more than 50 % nitric acid, 1826 nitrating acid mixture, spent with not more than 50 % nitric acid.

Notes: 1. 1798 nitrohydrochloric acid is not to be accepted for carriage.

2. Chemically unstable mixtures of nitrating acid or mixtures of residual sulphuric and nitric acids, not denitrated, are not to be accepted for carriage.

4° Perchloric acid solution:

(b) 1802 perchloric acid with not more than 50 % acid, by mass in aqueous solution.

Notes: 1. 1873 perchloric acid aqueous solution with more than 50 % but not more than 72 % pure acid, by mass are substances of Class 5.1 [(see marginal 2501, item 3° (a)].

2. Perchloric acid aqueous solution with more than 72 % pure acid, by mass, or mixtures of perchloric acid with any liquid other than water, are not to be accepted for carriage.

5° Aqueous solutions of hydrogen halides, with the exception of hydrofluoric acid:

(b) 1787 hydriodic acid, 1788 hydrobromic acid, 1789 hydrochloric acid;

(c) 1787 hydriodic acid, 1788 hydrobromic acid, 1789 hydrochloric acid, 1840 zinc chloride solution, 2580 aluminium bromide solution, 2581 aluminium chloride solution, 2582 ferric chloride solution (iron trichloride solution).

Note: Hydrogen bromide, anhydrous and hydrogen chloride, anhydrous are substances of Class 2 [see marginal 2201, 3° (at) and 5° (at)].

6° Hydrogen fluoride and hydrofluoric acid solutions with more than 85 % hydrogen fluoride:

1052 hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous, 1790 hydrofluoric acid with more than 85 % hydrogen fluoride.

Note: Special packing provisions are applicable to these substances (see marginal 2803).

7° Solutions of hydrogen fluoride with not more than 85 % hydrogen fluoride:

(a) 1786 hydrofluoric acid and sulphuric acid mixture, 1790 hydrofluoric acid with more than 60 % but not more than 85 % hydrogen fluoride;

(b) 1790 hydrofluoric acid with not more than 60 % hydrogen fluoride, 2817 ammonium hydrogendifluoride solution (ammonium bifluoride solution);

(c) 2817 ammonium hydrogendifluoride solution (ammonium bifluoride solution).

8° Fluoro-acid substances:

(a) 1777 fluorosulphonic acid;

(b) 1757 chromic fluoride solution, 1768 difluorophosphoric acid, anhydrous, 1775 fluoroboric acid, 1776 fluorophosphoric acid, anhydrous, 1778 fluorosilicic acid, 1782 hexafluorophosphoric acid;

(c) 1757 chromic fluoride solution.

9° Solid fluorides and other solid fluorinated substances which, in contact with moist air or water, emit hydrogen fluoride:

(b) 1727 ammonium hydrogendifluoride, solid, 1756 chromic fluoride, solid, 1811 potassium hydrogendifluoride (potassium bifluoride), 2439 sodium hydrogendifluoride (sodium bifluoride), 1740 hydrogendifluorides, n.o.s.;

(c) 1740 hydrogendifluorides, n.o.s.

Note: 2505 ammonium fluoride, 1812 potassium fluoride, 1690 sodium fluoride, 2674 sodium fluorosilicate and 2856 fluorosilicates, n.o.s. are substances of Class 6.1 [see marginal 2601, 63° (c), 64° (c) or 87° (c)].

10° Liquid fluorides and other liquid fluorinated substances which, in contact with moist air or water, emit hydrogen fluoride:

(b) 1732 antimony pentafluoride, 2851 boron trifluoride dihydrate.

Note: 1745 bromine pentafluoride, 1746 bromine trifluoride and 2495 iodine pentafluoride are substances of Class 5.1 (see marginal 2501, 5°).

11° Solid halides and other solid halogenated substances, with the exception of fluorine compounds, which, in contact with moist air or water, emit acid fumes:

(b) 1725 aluminium bromide, anhydrous, 1726 aluminium chloride anhydrous, 1733 antimony trichloride, 1806 phosphorus pentachloride, 1939 phosphorus oxybromide, 2691 phosphorus pentabromide, 2869 titanium trichloride mixture.

Note: Solid hydrated forms of aluminium bromide and aluminium chloride are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

(c) 1773 ferric chloride, anhydrous (iron (III) chloride, anhydrous), 2331 zinc chloride, anhydrous, 2440 stannic chloride pentahydrate, 2475 vanadium trichloride, 2503 zirconium tetrachloride, 2508 molybdenum pentachloride, 2802 copper chloride, 2869 titanium trichloride mixture.

Note: Ferric chloride hexahydrate is not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

12° Liquid halides and other liquid halogenated substances, with the exception of fluorine compounds, which, in contact with moist air or water, emit acid fumes:

(a) 1754 chlorosulphonic acid with or without sulphur trioxide, 1758 chromium oxychloride (chromyl chloride), 1809 phosphorus trichloride, 1828 sulphur chlorides, 1834 sulphuryl chloride, 1836 thionyl chloride, 2444 vanadium tetrachloride, 2692 boron tribromide (boron bromide), 2879 selenium oxychloride;

(b) 1730 antimony pentachloride, liquid, 1731 antimony pentachloride solution, 1792 iodine monochloride, 1808 phosphorus tribromide, 1810 phosphorus oxychloride (phosphoryl chloride), 1817 pyrosulphuryl chloride, 1818 silicon tetrachloride, 1827 stannic chloride, anhydrous, 1837 thiophosphoryl chloride, 1838 titanium tetrachloride, 2443 vanadium oxytrichloride;

(c) 1731 antimony pentachloride solution.

13° Solid hydrogen sulphates:

(b) 2506 ammonium hydrogen sulphate (ammonium bisulphate), 2509 potassium hydrogen sulphate (potassium bisulphate).

14° Bromine or bromine solutions:

1744 bromine or 1744 bromine solution.

Note: Special packing provisions are applicable to these substances (see marginal 2804).

15° Inorganic acid substance in molten form:

2576 phosphorus oxybromide, molten.

16° Solid inorganic acid substances and mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 1905 selenic acid, 3260 corrosive solid, acidic, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(b) 1807 phosphorus pentoxide (phosphoric acid, anhydrous), 3260 corrosive solid, acidic, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(c) 2507 chloroplatinic acid, solid, 2578 phosphorus trioxide, 2834 phosphorous acid, 2865 hydroxylamine sulphate, 2967 sulphamic acid, 3260 corrosive solid, acidic, inorganic, n.o.s.

17° Liquid inorganic acid substances and solutions and mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3264 corrosive liquid, acidic, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(b) 1755 chromic acid solution, 3264 corrosive liquid, acidic, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(c) 1755 chromic acid solution, 1805 phosphoric acid, 2693 bisulphites, aqueous solution, n.o.s., 3264 corrosive liquid, acidic, inorganic, n.o.s.

Note: 1463 chromium trioxide, anhydrous (chromic acid, solid) is a substance of Class 5.1 [(see marginal 2501, 31° (b)].

Organic substances

31° Solid carboxylic acids and anhydrides and solid halogenated carboxylic acids and anhydrides:

(b) 1839 trichloroacetic acid, 1938 bromoacetic acid;

(c) 2214 phthalic anhydride with more than 0,05 % of maleic anhydride, 2215 maleic anhydride, 2698 tetrahydrophthalic anhydrides with more than 0,05 % of maleic anhydride, 2823 crotonic acid.

Notes: 1. Phthalic anhydride and tetrahydrophthalic anhydrides with not more than 0,05 % of maleic anhydride are not subject to the provisions of this class.

2. Phthalic anhydride with not more than 0,05 % of maleic anhydride carried or handed over for carriage in the molten state at a temperature above its flashpoint is a substance of Class 3 (see marginal 2301, 61°).

32° Liquid carboxylic acids and anhydrides and liquid halogenated carboxylic acids and anhydrides:

(a) 2699 trifluoroacetic acid;

(b) 1. 1764 dichloroacetic acid, 1779 formic acid, 1940 thioglycolic acid, 2564 trichloroacetic acid solution, 2790 acetic acid solution with not less than 50 % but not more than 80 % acid, by mass;

2. 1715 acetic anhydride, 2218 acrylic acid, inhibited, 2789 acetic acid, glacial or 2789 acetic acid solution, with more than 80 % acid, by mass;

(c) 1848 propionic acid, 2496 propionic anhydride, 2511 2-chloropropionic acid, 2531 methacrylic acid, inhibited, 2564 trichloroacetic acid solution, 2739 butyric anhydride, 2790 acetic acid solution with more than 25 % but less than 50 % acid, by mass, 2820 butyric acid, 2829 caproic acid.

Note: Acetic acid solutions with not more than 25 % pure acid by mass, are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

33° Complex compounds of boron trifluoride:

(a) 2604 boron trifluoride diethyl etherate (boron trifluoride ether complex);

(b) 1742 boron trifluoride acetic acid complex, 1743 boron trifluoride propionic acid complex.

Note: 2965 boron trifluoride dimethyl etherate is a substance of Class 4.3 [see marginal 2471, 2° (b)].

34° Alkylsulphonic and arylsulphonic acids and alkylsulphuric acids:

(b) 1803 phenolsulphonic acid, liquid, 2305 nitrobenzenesulphonic acid, 2571 alkylsulphuric acids;

(c) 2585 alkylsulphonic acids, solid with not more than 5 % free sulphuric acid or 2585 arylsulphonic acids, solid with not more than 5 % free sulphuric acid, 2586 alkylsulphonic acids, liquid with not more than 5 % free sulphuric acid or 2586 arylsulphonic acids, liquid with not more than 5 % free sulphuric acid.

Note: 2583 alkylsulphonic or arylsulphonic acids, solid and 2584 alkylsulphonic or arylsulphonic acids, liquid with more than 5 % free sulphuric acid are substances of 1° (b).

35° Organic acid halides:

(b) 1. 1716 acetyl bromide, 1729 anisoyl chloride, 1736 benzoyl chloride, 1765 dichloroacetyl chloride, 1780 fumaryl chloride, 1898 acetyl iodide, 2262 dimethylcarbamoyl chloride, 2442 trichloroacetyl chloride, 2513 bromoacetyl bromide, 2577 phenylacetyl chloride, 2751 diethylthiophosphoryl chloride, 2798 phenylphosphorus dichloride, 2799 phenylphosphorus thiodichloride.

2. 2502 valeryl chloride;

(c) 2225 benezenesulphonyl chloride.

36° Alkyl and aryl chlorosilanes having a flashpoint above 61 °C:

(b) 1728 amyltrichlorosilane, 1753 chlorophenyltrichlorosilane, 1762 cyclohexenyltrichlorosilane, 1763 cyclohexyltrichlorosilane, 1766 dichlorophenyltrichlorosilane, 1769 diphenyldichlorosilane, 1771 dodecyltrichlorosilane, 1781 hexadecyltrichlorosilane, 1784 hexyltrichlorosilane, 1799 nonyltrichlorosilane, 1800 octadecyltrichlorosilane, 1801 octyltrichlorosilane, 1804 phenyltrichlorosilane, 2434 dibenzyldichlorosilane, 2435 ethylphenyldichlorosilane, 2437 methylphenyldichlorosilane, 2987 chlorosilanes, corrosive, n.o.s.

Note: Chlorosilanes which emit flammable gases in contact with water or moist air are substances of Class 4.3 (see marginal 2471, 1°).

37° Alkylchlorosilanes and arylchlorosilanes, having a flashpoint between 23 °C and 61 °C inclusive:

(b) 1724 alkyltrichlorosilane, stabilized, 1747 butyltrichlorosilane, 1767 diethyldichlorosilane, 1816 propyltrichlorosilane, 2986 chlorosilanes, corrosive, flammable, n.o.s.

Note: Chlorosilanes which emit flammable gases in contact with water or moist air are substances of Class 4.3 (see marginal 2471, 1°).

38° Alkylphosphoric acids:

(c) 1718 butyl acid phosphate, 1793 isopropyl acid phosphate, 1902 diisooctyl acid phosphate, 2819 amyl acid phosphate.

39° Solid organic acid substances and mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 2430 alkylphenols, solid, n.o.s. (including C2-C12 homologues), 3261 corrosive solid, acidic, organic, n.o.s.;

(b) 2430 alkylphenols, solid, n.o.s. (including C2-C12 homologues), 2670 cyanuric chloride, 3261 corrosive solid, acidic, organic, n.o.s.;

(c) 2430 alkylphenols, solid, n.o.s. (including C2-C12 homologues), 3261 corrosive solid, acidic, organic, n.o.s.

40° Liquid organic acid substances and solutions and mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3145 alkylphenols, liquid, n.o.s. (including C2-C12 homologues), 3265 corrosive liquid, acidic, organic, n.o.s.;

(b) 3145 alkylphenols, liquid, n.o.s. (including C2-C12 homologues), 3265 corrosive liquid, acidic, organic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3145 alkylphenols, liquid, n.o.s. (including C2-C12 homologues), 3265 corrosive liquid, acidic, organic, n.o.s.

B. Basic substances

Inorganic substances

41° Basic solid compounds of alkali metals:

(b) 1813 potassium hydroxide, solid (caustic potash), 1823 sodium hydroxide, solid (caustic soda), 1825 sodium monoxide (sodium oxide), 2033 potassium monoxide (potassium oxide), 2678 rubidium hydroxide, 2680 lithium hydroxide monohydrate, 2682 caesium hydroxide;

(c) 1907 soda lime with more than 4 % sodium hydroxide, 3253 disodium trioxosilicate pentahydrate (sodium metasilicate pentahydrate).

Note: Soda lime with not more than 4 % sodium hydroxide is not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

42° Solutions of alkaline substances:

(b) 1814 potassium hydroxide solution (potash lye), 1819 sodium aluminate solution, 1824 sodium hydroxide solution (soda lye), 2677 rubidium hydroxide solution, 2679 lithium hydroxide solution, 2681 caesium hydroxide solution, 2797 battery fluid, alkali, 1719 caustic alkali, liquid, n.o.s.;

(c) 1814 potassium hydroxide solution (potash lye), 1819 sodium aluminate solution, 1824 sodium hydroxide solution (soda lye), 2677 rubidium hydroxide solution, 2679 lithium hydroxide solution, 2681 caesium hydroxide solution, 1719 caustic alkali liquid, n.o.s.

43° Ammonia solutions:

(c) 2672 ammonia solution, relative density between 0,88 and 0,957 at 15 °C in water with more than 10 % but not more than 35 % ammonia.

Notes: 1. Ammonia solutions with more than 35 % ammonia are substances of Class 2 [see marginal 2201, 9° (at)].

2. Ammonia solutions with not more than 10 % ammonia are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

44° Hydrazine and its aqueous solutions:

(a) 2029 hydrazine, anhydrous;

(b) 2030 hydrazine hydrate or 2030 hydrazine, aqueous solution with not less than 37 % but not more than 64 % hydrazine, by mass;

Note: 3293 hydrazine, aqueous solution with not more than 37 % hydrazine, by mass, is a substance of Class 6.1 [see marginal 2601, 65° (c)].

45° Sulphides and hydrogen sulphides and their aqueous solutions:

(b) 1. 1847 potassium sulphide, hydrated with not less than 30 % water of crystallization, 1849 sodium sulphide, hydrated with not less than 30 % water, 2818 ammonium polysulphide solution, 2949 sodium hydrosulphide, hydrated with not less than 25 % water of crystallization;

2. 2683 ammonium sulphide solution;

(c) 2818 ammonium polysulphide solution.

Note: 1382 anhydrous potassium sulphide and 1385 anhydrous sodium sulphide and their hydrates with less than 30 % water of crystallization, and 2318 sodium hydrosulphide with less than 25 % water of crystallization are substances of Class 4.2 [see marginal 2431, 13° (b)].

46° Solid inorganic basic substances and mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3262 corrosive solid, basic, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(b) 3262 corrosive solid, basic, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3262 corrosive solid, basic, inorganic, n.o.s.

47° Liquid inorganic basic substances and solutions and mixtures of these substances (such as (cont'd) preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3266 corrosive liquid, basic, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(b) 3266 corrosive liquid, basic, inorganic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3266 corrosive liquid, basic, inorganic, n.o.s.

Organic substances

51° Tetra-alkylammonium hydroxides:

(b) 1835 tetramethylammonium hydroxide.

52° Solid amines and polyamines:

(a) 3259 amines, solid, corrosive, n.o.s. or 3259 polyamines, solid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(b) 3259 amines, solid, corrosive, n.o.s. or 3259 polyamines, solid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(c) 2280 hexamethylenediamine, solid, 2579 piperazine (diethylenediamine), 3259 amines, solid, corrosive, n.o.s. or 3259 polyamines, solid, corrosive, n.o.s.

53° Liquid amines and polyamines or amino-alcohols, highly corrosive or corrosive, having a flashpoint above 61 °C:

(a) 2735 amines, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s. or 2735 polyamines, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(b) 1761 cupriethylenediamine solution, 1783 hexamethylenediamine solution, 2079 diethylenetriamine, 2259 triethylenetetramine, 2735 amines, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s. or 2735 polyamines, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(c) 1761 cupriethylenediamine solution, 1783 hexamethylenediamine solution, 2269 3,3'-iminodipropylamine (bisaminoproylamine, dipropylenetriamine), 2289 isophoronediamine, 2320 tetraethylenepentamine, 2326 trimethylcyclohexylamine, 2327 trimethylhexamethylenediamines, 2491 ethanolamine, 2491 ethanolamine solution, 2542 tributylamine, 2565 dicyclohexylamine, 2815 N-aminoethylpiperazine, 3055 2-(2-aminoethoxy)ethanol, 2735 amines, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s. or 2735 polyamines, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.

54° Liquid amines and polyamines, highly corrosive or corrosive, flammable having a boiling point greater than 35 °C:

(a) 2734 amines, liquid, corrosive, flammable, n.o.s. or 2734 polyamines, liquid, corrosive, flammable, n.o.s.;

(b) 1604 ethylenediamine, 2051 2-dimethylaminoethanol, 2248 di-n-butylamine, 2258 1,2-propylenediamine, 2264 dimethylcyclohexylamine, 2357 cyclohexylamine, 2619 benzyldimethylamine, 2685 N,N-diethylethylenediamine, 2734 amines, liquid, corrosive, flammable, n.o.s. or 2734 polyamines, liquid, corrosive, flammable, n.o.s.

55° Solid organic basic substances and mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3263 corrosive solid, basic, organic, n.o.s.;

(b) 3263 corrosive solid, basic, organic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3263 corrosive solid, basic, organic, n.o.s.

56° Liquid organic basic substances and solutions and mixtures ofthese substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3267 corrosive liquid, basic, organic, n.o.s.;

(b) 3267 corrosive liquid, basic, organic, n.o.s.;

(c) 3267 corrosive liquid, basic, organic, n.o.s.

C. Other corrosive substances

61° Chlorite and hypochlorite solutions:

(b) 1791 hypochlorite solution with not less than 16 % available chlorine, 1908 chlorite solution, with not less than 16 % available chlorine;

(c) 1791 hypochlorite solution with more than 5 % but less than 16 % available chlorine, 1908 chlorite solution, with more than 5 % but less than 16 % available chlorine.

Notes: 1. Chlorite and hypochlorite solutions with not more than 5 % available chlorine are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

2. Solid chlorites and hypochlorites are substances of Class 5.1 (see marginal 2501, 14°, 15° and 29°).

62° Chlorophenolates and phenolates:

(c) 2904 chlorophenolates, liquid or 2904 phenolates, liquid, 2905 chlorophenolates, solid or 2905 phenolates, solid.

63° Formaldehyde solutions:

(c) 2209 formaldehyde solution with not less than 25 % formaldehyde.

Notes: 1. 1198 formaldehyde solutions, flammable are substances of Class 3 [see marginal 2301, 33° (c)].

2. Formaldehyde solutions, non-flammable, with less than 25 % formaldehyde are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

64° Chloroformates and chlorothioformates:

(a) 1739 benzyl chloroformate;

(b) 2826 ethyl chlorothioformate.

Note: Chloroformates having predominantly toxic properties are substances of Class 6.1 (see marginal 2601, 10°, 17°, 27° and 28°).

65° Solid corrosive substances and mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 1759 corrosive solid, n.o.s.;

(b) 1770 diphenylmethyl bromide, 1759 corrosive solid, n.o.s., 3147 dye, solid, corrosive, n.o.s. or 3147 dye intermediate, solid, corrosive, n.o.s.; 3244 solids containing corrosive liquid, n.o.s.

Note: Mixtures of solids not subject to the provisions of this Directive and corrosive liquids may be carried under number 3244, without being subject to the classification criteria of marginal 2800 (3), provided there is no free liquid visible at the time the substance is loaded or at the time the transport unit is closed. Each packaging shall correspond to a design type which has passed the leakproofness test for group (b) level.

(c) 2803 gallium, 1759 corrosive solid, n.o.s., 3147 dye, solid, corrosive, n.o.s. or 3147 dye intermediate, solid, corrosive, n.o.s.

Note: Special conditions of packing are applicable to 2803 gallium [see marginal 2807 (4)].

66° Liquid corrosive substances and solutions and mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 1760 corrosive liquid, n.o.s., 1903 disinfectant, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(b) 2226 benzotrichloride (trichloromethylbenzene), 2705 1-pentol (3-methyl-2-pentene-4-yne-1-ol), 3066 paint (including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base) or 3066 paint related material including paint thinning or reducing compound, 1760 corrosive liquid, n.o.s., 1903 disinfectant, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s., 2801 dye, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s. or 2801 dye intermediate, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.;

(c) 2809 mercury, 3066 paint (including paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, polish, liquid filler and liquid lacquer base) or 3066 paint related material including paint thinning or reducing compound, 1760 corrosive liquid, n.o.s., 1903 disinfectant, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s., 2801 dye, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s. or 2801 dye intermediate, liquid, corrosive, n.o.s.

Notes: 1. Special conditions of packing are applicable to 2809 mercury [see marginal 2807 (4)].

2. Any substance of this Directive specifically listed by name under other items may not be carried under the entries for 3066 paint or 3066 paint related material.

Substances carried under these entries may contain 20 % or less nitrocellulose provided the nitrocellulose contains not more than 12,6 % nitrogen.

67° Solid corrosive substances and mixtures of these substances, (such as preparations and wastes), flammable, which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 2921 corrosive solid, flammable, n.o.s.;

(b) 2921 corrosive solid, flammable, n.o.s.

68° Liquid corrosive substances and solutions and mixtures of these substances, (such as preparations and wastes), flammable, having a boiling point greater than 35 °C, which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 2920 corrosive liquid, flammable, n.o.s.;

(b) 2920 corrosive liquid, flammable, n.o.s.

69° Solid corrosive substances and mixtures of these substances, self-heating, (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3095 corrosive solid, self-heating, n.o.s.;

(b) 3095 corrosive solid, self-heating, n.o.s.

70° Liquid corrosive substances and solutions and mixtures of these substances, self-heating, (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3301 corrosive liquid, self-heating, n.o.s.;

(b) 3301 corrosive liquid, self-heating, n.o.s.

71° Solid corrosive substances and mixtures of these substances, (such as preparations and wastes) which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases, and which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3096 corrosive solid, water-reactive, n.o.s.;

(b) 3096 corrosive solid, water-reactive, n.o.s.

Note: The term 'Water-reactive` denotes a substance which, in contact with water, emits flammable gases.

72° Liquid corrosive substances and solutions and mixtures of these substances (such as preparations and wastes) which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases and which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3094 corrosive liquid, water-reactive, n.o.s.;

(b) 3094 corrosive liquid, water-reactive, n.o.s.

Note: The term 'water-reactive` denotes a substance which, in contact with water, emits flammable gases.

73° Solid corrosive substances and mixtures of these substances, oxidizing, (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3084 corrosive solid, oxidizing, n.o.s.;

(b) 3084 corrosive solid, oxidizing, n.o.s.

74° Liquid corrosive substances and solutions and mixtures of these substances, oxidizing, (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 3093 corrosive liquid, oxidizing, n.o.s.;

(b) 3093 corrosive liquid, oxidizing, n.o.s.

75° Solid corrosive substances and mixtures of these substances, toxic (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 2923 corrosive solid, toxic, n.o.s.;

(b) 2923 corrosive solid, toxic, n.o.s.;

(c) 2923 corrosive solid, toxic, n.o.s.

76° Liquid corrosive substances and solutions and mixtures of these substances, toxic, (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified under other collective headings:

(a) 2922 corrosive liquid, toxic, n.o.s.;

(b) 2922 corrosive liquid, toxic, n.o.s.;

(c) 2922 corrosive liquid, toxic, n.o.s.

D. Articles containing corrosive substances

81° Batteries:

(c) 2794 batteries, wet, filled with acid, electric storage, 2795 batteries, wet, filled with alkali, electric storage, 2800 batteries, wet, non-spillable, electric storage, 3028 batteries, dry containing potassium hydroxide solid, electric storage.

Notes: 1. Special conditions of packing are applicable to these articles [see marginal 2807 (5)]

2. Batteries (identification number 2800) can be considered as non-spillable provided that they are capable of withstanding the vibration and pressure differential tests given below, without leakage of battery fluid.

Vibration test: The battery is rigidly clamped to the platform of a vibration machine and a simple harmonic motion having an amplitude of 0,8 mm (1,6 mm maximum total excursion) is applied. The frequency is varied at the rate of 1 Hz/min between the limits of 10 Hz to 55 Hz. The entire range of frequencies and return is traversed in 95 ± 5 minutes for each mounting position (direction of vibration) of the battery. The battery is tested in three mutually perpendicular positions (to include testing with fill openings and vents, if any, in an inverted position) for equal time periods.

Pressure differential test: Following the vibration test, the battery is stored for six hours at 24 °C ± 4 °C while subjected to a pressure differential of at least 88 kPa. The battery is tested in three mutually perpendicular positions (to include testing with fill openings and vents, if any, in an inverted position) for at least six hours in each position.

82° Other articles containing corrosive substances:

(b) 1774 fire extinguisher charges, corrosive liquid, 2028 bombs, smoke, non-explosive with corrosive liquid, without initiating device.

E. Empty packagings

91° Empty packagings, including empty intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), empty tankvehicles, empty demountable tanks, empty tank-containers, uncleaned, as well as empty vehicles for carriage in bulk and empty small bulk containers, uncleaned, having contained substances of Class 8.

2801a Neither the provisions of this class contained in this Annex nor those contained in Annex B are aplicable to:

(1) Substances of 1° to 5°, 7° to 13°, 16°, 17°, 31° to 47°, 51° to 56° and 61° to 76°, carried in conformity with the following provisions:

(a) Substances classified under (a) of each item:

Liquids: not more than 100 ml per inner packaging and not more than 400 ml per package;

Solids: not more than 500 g per inner packaging and not more than 2 kg per package.

(b) Substances classified under (b) of each item:

Liquids: not more than 1 litre per inner packaging and not more than 4 litres per package;

Solids: not more than 3 kg per inner packaging and not more than 12 kg per package.

(c) Substances classified under (c) of each item:

Liquids: not more than 3 litres per inner packaging and not more than 12 litres per package;

Solids: not more than 6 kg per inner packaging and not more than 24 kg per package.

These quantities of substances shall be carried in combination packagings which at least meet the conditions of marginal 3538.

The 'General conditions of packing` of marginal 3500 (1), (2) and (5) to (7) shall be observed.

(2) Non-spillable batteries with identification number 2800 of 81° if at temperature of 55 °C, the electrolyte will not flow from a ruptured or cracked case and there is no free liquid to flow and if when packaged for carriage, the terminals are protected from short circuits.

(3) Manufactured articles or instruments containing not more than 1 kg mercury of 66° (c).

2. Provisions

A. Packages

1. General conditions of packing

2802 (1) Packagings shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.5, unless special conditions for the packing of certain substances are prescribed in marginals 2803 to 2808.

(2) Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.6.

(3) In accordance with the provisions of marginals 2800 (3) (b) and 3511 (2) or 3611 (2) respectively the following shall be used:

- packagings of packing group I, marked with the letter 'X`, for the highly corrosive substances classified under the letter (a) of each item;

- packagings of packing group II or I, marked with the letter 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs of packing group II, marked with the letter 'Y`, for the corrosive substances classified under the letter (b) of each item;

- packagings of packing group III, II or I, marked with the letter 'Z`, 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs of packing group III or II, marked with the letter 'Z` or 'Y`, for the slightly corrosive substances classified under the letter (c) of each item.

Note: For the carriage of substances of Class 8 in tank-vehicles, demountable tanks or tank-containers, and for the carriage in bulk of solids of this Class, see Annex B.

2. Special conditions for packing of certain substances

2803 Hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous and hydrofluoric acid solution containing more than 85 % hydrogen fluoride of 6° shall be packed in pressure receptacles made of carbon steel or suitable alloy steel. The following pressure receptacles shall be permitted:

(a) cylinders having a capacity not exceeding 150 litres;

(b) receptacles having a capacity of not less than 100 litres and not more than 1 000 litres (for example, cylindrical receptacles fitted with rolling hoops or receptacles mounted on skids).

The pressure receptacles shall satisfy the relevant requirements of Class 2 (see marginals 2211, 2213 (1) and (2), 2215, 2216 and 2218).

The wall thickness of the pressure receptacles shall not be less than 3 mm.

Before being used for the first time, pressure receptacles shall be subjected to a hydraulic pressure test at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) gauge pressure. The pressure test shall be repeated every eight years and shall be accompanied by an internal inspection of the pressure receptacles and a check of their equipment. In addition, the resistance of the pressure receptacles to corrosion shall be checked by means of suitable instruments (e.g. by ultrasound), and the condition of the equipment verified, every two years.

The tests and inspections shall be carried out under the supervision of an expert approved by the competent authority.

The maximum mass of the contents per litre of capacity for hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous or hydrofluoric acid solution shall not exceed 0,84 kg.

2804 (1) Bromine and bromine solution of 14° shall be packed in glass inner packagings, containing not more than 2,5 litres each, or in polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) inner packagings containing not more than 15 litres each which shall be placed in combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538. The combination packagings shall be tested and approved in accordance with Appendix A.5 for packing group I.

(2) Bromine containing less than 0,005 % water, or between 0,005 % and 0,2 % water, provided that in the latter case measures are taken to prevent corrosion of the lining of the receptacles, may also be carried in receptacles satisfying the following conditions:

(a) the receptacles shall be made of steel and be equipped with a leakproof lining made of lead or of some other material affording equivalent protection and with a hermetic closure; receptacles made of monel metal or nickel, or with a nickel lining, shall also be permitted;

(b) the capacity of the receptacles shall not exceed 450 litres;

(c) the receptacles shall not be filled to more than 92 % of their capacity or more than 2,86 kg per litre of capacity;

(d) the receptacles shall be welded and designed for a calculation pressure of not less than 2,1 MPa (21 bar) gauge pressure. The materials and workmanship shall in other respects meet the relevant requirements of Class 2 [see marginal 2211 (1)]. The initial test of unlined steel receptacles shall be subject to the provisions of Class 2 [see marginals 2215 (1) and 2216 (1)];

(e) the closures shall project as little as possible from the receptacle and be fitted with protective caps. The closures and caps shall be fitted with gaskets made of a material not capable of being attacked by bromine. The closures shall be in the upper part of the receptacles in such a manner that they can in no case be in permanent contact with the liquid phase;

(f) the receptacles shall be provided with fittings enabling them to stand stably upright, and with lifting attachments (rings, flanges, etc.) at the top, which shall be tested at twice the working load.

(3) Before being put into service, receptacles in conformity with (2) above shall be subjected to a leakproofness test at a pressure of at least 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure. The leakproofness test shall be repeated every two years and shall be accompanied by an internal inspection of the receptacle and a check of its tare. The test and the inspection shall be carried out under the supervision of an expert approved by the competent authority.

(4) Receptacles in conformity with (2) shall bear, in clearly legible and durable characters:

- the name of the manufacturer or the manufacturing mark and the number of the receptacle,

- the word 'Bromine`,

- tare mass of the receptacle and the permissible maximum mass of the filled receptacle,

- date (month, year) of the initial test and of the latest periodical test,

- stamp of the expert who carried out the tests and inspections.

2805 (1) Substances classified under (a) of the various items shall be packed in:

(a) non-removable head steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) non-removable head aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) non-removable head steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) non-removable head plastics drums of a capacity not exceeding 60 litres or nonremovable head plastics jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537, or

(f) combination packagings with inner packagings of glass, plastics or metal conforming to marginal 3538, or

(g) composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539.

Note 1 to (d): The permissible period of use for packagings intended for the carriage of nitric acid of 2°(a) and hydrofluoric acid solution of 7°(a) shall be two years from the date of their manufacture.

Note 2 to (f) and (g): Inner packagings or receptacles of glass shall not be permitted for fluorides of 7°(a), 8°(a) or 33°(a).

(2) Solid substances within the meaning of marginal 2800 (5) may also be packed in:

(a) removable head drums conforming to marginals 3520 for steel, 3521 for aluminium, 3523 for plywood, 3525 for fibreboard, or 3526 for plastics material, or in removable head jerricans conforming to marginals 3522 for steel or 3526 for plastics material, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags; or

(b) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538, with one or more sift-proof inner bags.

2806 (1) Substances classified under (b) of the various items shall be packed in:

(a) steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) plastics drums or plastics jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537, or

(f) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538, or

(g) composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539.

Note 1 to (a), (b), (c) and (d): Simplified conditions are applicable to removable head drums and jerricans for viscous substances having a viscosity of more than 200 mm2/s at 23 °C and for solid substances (see marginals 3512, 3553, 3554 and 3560).

Note 2 to (d): The permissible period of use for packagings intended for the carriage of nitric acid containing more than 55 % pure acid of 2° (b) and hydrofluoric acid solution of 7° (b) shall be two years from the date of their manufacture.

Note 3 to (f) and (g): Inner packagings or receptacles of glass shall not be permitted for fluorides of 7° (b), 8° (b), 9° (b), 10° (b) or 33° (b).

(2) Substances classified under (b) of the various items which have a vapour pressure at 50 °C of not more than 110 kPa (1,10 bar) may also be packed in metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622, rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624 or composite IBCs with rigid plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625.

(3) Solid substances within the meaning of marginal 2800 (5) may also be packed in:

(a) drums conforming to marginals 3523 for plywood or 3525 for fibreboard, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags, or

(b) water-resistant bags conforming to marginals 3533 for textile material, 3534 for woven plastics material, 3535 for plastics film or 3536 for water-resistant paper, provided the goods are carried as a full load or the bags are secured on pallets, or

(c) composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625, fibreboard IBCs conforming to marginal 3626 or wooden IBCs conforming to marginal 3627, or

(d) flexible IBCs conforming to marginal 3623 with the exception of IBCs of types 13H1, 13L1 and 13M1, and provided that the goods are carried as a full load or the flexible IBCs are loaded on pallets.

(4) Articles of 82° shall be packed as follows:

(a) fire extinguisher charges, corrosive liquid, in wooden boxes conforming to marginals 3527, 3528 or 3529, or fibreboard boxes conforming to marginal 3530, or expanded plastics boxes of type 4H1 conforming to marginal 3531.

(b) bombs, smoke, non-explosive with corrosive liquid, without initiating device, individually with cushioning material in boxes, tubes or partitioned compartments in either wooden boxes conforming to marginals 3527, 3528 or 3529, or steel boxes of type 4A conforming to marginal 3532.

2807 (1) Substances classified under (c) except gallium of 65° (c) and mercury of 66° (c), of the various items shall be packed in:

(a) steel drums conforming to marginal 3520, or

(b) aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521, or

(c) steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522, or

(d) plastics drums or plastics jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, or

(e) composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537, or

(f) combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538, or

(g) composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539, or

(h) light gauge metal packagings conforming to marginal 3540.

Note to (a), (b), (c), (d) and (h): Simplified conditions are applicable to removable head drums, jerricans and light gauge metal packagings for viscous substances having a viscosity of more than 200 mm2/s at 23 °C and for solid substances (see marginals 3512, 3552 to 3554 and 3560).

(2) Substances classified under (c) except gallium of 65° (c) and mercury of 66° (c), of the various items which have a vapour pressure at 50 °C of not more than 110 kPa (1,10 bar) may also be packed in metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622, rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624 or composite IBCs with rigid plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625.

(3) Solid substances within the meaning of marginal 2800 (5) may also be packed:

(a) in drums conforming to marginals 3523 for plywood, or 3525 for fibreboard, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags, or

(b) in water-resistant bags conforming to marginals 3533 for textile material, 3534 for woven plastics material or 3535 for plastics film or 3536 for water-resistant paper, or

(c) in flexible IBCs conforming to marginal 3623 with the exception of IBCs of types 13H1, 13L1 and 13M1 or in composite IBCs with flexible plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625 or in fibreboard IBCs conforming to marginal 3626 or wooden IBCs conforming to marginal 3627.

(4)

(a) Gallium of 65° (c) and mercury of 66° (c) shall be packed in combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538. These combination packagings may consist of glass, porcelain, stoneware or plastics inner packagings, maximum net quantity of 10 kg.

The following outer packagings may be used:

- natural wood boxes conforming to marginal 3527;

- plywood boxes conforming to marginal 3528;

- reconstituted wood boxes conforming to marginal 3529;

- fibreboard boxes conforming to marginal 3530;

- plastics boxes conforming to marginal 3531;

- removable-head steel drums conforming to marginal 3520;

- removable-head steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522;

- plywood drums conforming to marginal 3523;

- fibre drums conforming to marginal 3525;

- or in removable head plastics drums conforming to marginal 3526.

(b) Mercury may also be packed in welded steel bottles with inner vaulted bottoms as single packagings. The closure shall be a bolt with a conical thread and the opening shall not exceed 20 mm.

(5)

(a) Articles of 81°, except batteries, wet, non-spillable, shall be fastened with inert cushioning material or in an equivalent manner in wooden boxes or in rigid plastics boxes or in a wooden slatted crate. Batteries shall be insulated against short-circuiting.

(b) Non-spillable type batteries (identification number 2800) shall be protected against short-circuits and shall be securely packed in strong outer packagings.

Note: Non-spillable batteries which are an integral part of, and necessary for, the operation of mechanical or electronic equipment, shall be securely fastened in the battery holder on the equipment and protected in such a manner as to prevent damage and short circuits.

(c) Articles of 81° may be carried on pallets. They shall be stacked and adequately secured in tiers separated by a layer of non-conductive material. Battery terminals shall not, in any case, support the weight of other superimposed elements. Batteries shall be isolated in such a manner as to prevent short-circuits.

Each battery need not be marked and labelled if the pallet load bears a marking and a danger label.

2808 Packagings, including IBCs, containing 1791 hypochlorite solution of 61° shall be fitted with a vent conforming to marginals 3500 (8) or 3601 (6) respectively.

2809 Molten phosphorus oxybromide of 15° may be carried only in tank vehicles (see Appendix B.1a) or in tank-containers (see Appendix B.1b).

2810

3. Mixed packing

2811 (1) Substances covered by the same item number may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538.

(2) Substances of different items of this Class in quantities not exceeding, per inner packaging, 3 litres for liquids and/or 5 kg for solids, may be packed together and/or with goods not subject to the provisions of this Directive [see marginal 2800 (8)], in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538 provided they do not react dangerously with one another.

(3) Substances of 4° shall not be packed together with other goods, except with substances of 3° of Class 5.1, marginal 2501. Substances of 6° and 14° shall not be packed together with other goods.

(4) Substances classified under (a) of the various items shall not be packed together with substances and articles of classes 1 and 5.2 and material of class 7.

(5) Except as otherwise specially provided, liquid substances classified under (a) of the various items, in quantities not exceeding 0,5 litre per inner packaging and 1 litre per package, and substances classified under (b) or (c) of the various items, in quantities not exceeding, per inner packaging, 3 litres for liquids and/or 5 kg for solids, may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538 with substances or articles of other Classes, provided that mixed packing is also permitted for the substances and articles of these Classes, and/or with goods which are not subject to the provisions of this Directive [see marginal 2800 (8)], provided they do not react dangerously with one another.

(6) The following are considered dangerous reactions:

(a) combustion and/or giving off considerable heat,

(b) emission of flammable and/or toxic gases,

(c) formation of corrosive liquids,

(d) formation of unstable substances.

(7) The mixed packing of acid substances with basic substances in a package shall not be permitted if the two substances are packed in fragile packagings.

(8) The provisions of marginals 2001 (7), 2002 (6) and (7) and 2802 shall be complied with.

(9) If wooden or fibreboard boxes are used, a package shall not weigh more than 100 kg.

4. Marking and danger labels on packages

Marking

2812 (1) Each package shall be clearly marked with the identification number of the goods to be entered in the transport document, preceded by the letters 'UN`.

Danger labels

(2) Packages containing substances or articles of Class 8 shall bear a label conforming to model No 8.

(3) Packages containing substances of 32° (b) 2., 33° (a), 35° (b) 2., 37°, 54°, 64° (b) and 68° shall, in addition bear a label conforming to model No 3.

(4) Packages containing substances of 44° (a) and 45° (b) 2. shall in addition bear labels conforming to models Nos 3 and 6.1.

(5) Packages containing substances of 67° shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 4.1.

(6) Packages containing substances of 69° and 70° shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 4.2.

(7) Packages containing substances of 71° and 72° shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 4.3.

(8) Packages containing substances of 3° (a), 4°, 73° and 74° shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 05.

(9) Packages containing substances of 2° (a) 2. shall in addition bear labels conforming to models Nos 05 and 6.1.

(10) Packages containing substances listed below shall in addition bear a label conforming to model No 6.1:

>TABLE>

(11) Packages containing fragile receptacles not visible from the outside shall in addition bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 12.

(12) Packages containing liquids in receptacles, the closures of which are not visible from the outside, as well as packages containing vented receptacles or vented receptacles without outer packaging, shall in addition bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 11.

2813

B. Particulars in transport document

2814 The description of the goods in the transport document shall conform to one of the substance identification numbers and one of the names printed in italics in marginal 2801.

If the substance is not mentioned by name but is assigned to an n.o.s. entry the description of the goods shall consist of the identification number and the n.o.s. designation, followed by the chemical or technical name ().

The description of the goods shall be followed by particulars of the Class, the item number, if applicable, the letter, and the initials 'ADR` (or 'RID`), e.g. '8, 1°(a), ADR`.

For the carriage of wastes [see marginal 2000 (5)] the description of the goods shall be: 'Waste, containing `, the component(s) which has/have been used for the classification of the waste under marginal 2002 (8) to be entered under its/their chemical name(s), e.g. 'Waste containing 1824 sodium hydroxide solution, 8, 42° (b) ADR`.

For the carriage of solutions or mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) containing several components subject to the this Directive, it will not in general be necessary to refer to more than two components which predominantly contribute to the danger or dangers of the solutions and mixtures. For the carriage of solutions and mixtures containing only one component subject to the provisions of this Directive, the words 'solution` or 'mixture` should be added as part of the name in the transport document [see marginal 2002 (8)].

When a solid substance is handed over for carriage in the molten state, the description of the goods shall be completed by the word 'molten`, unless it is already included in the name.

If a solution or mixture specifically named or containing a specifically named substance is not subject to the conditions of this Class, in accordance with marginal 2800 (5), the consignor may enter in the transport document: 'Not Goods of Class 8`.

2815-

2821

C. Empty packagings

2822 (1) Uncleaned empty packagings, including empty IBCs, of 91° shall be closed in the same manner and with the same degree of leakproofness as if they were full.

(2) Uncleaned empty packagings, including empty IBCs, of 91° shall bear the same danger labels as if they were full.

(3) The description in the transport document shall conform to one of the names printed in italics in 91°, e.g. 'Empty packagings, 8, 91°, ADR`.

In the case of empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks, empty tank-containers and empty small bulk containers, uncleaned, this description shall be completed by adding the words 'Last load` together with the name and item number of the goods last loaded, e.g. 'Last load: 1830 sulphuric acid, 1° (b)`.

2823-

2824

D. Transitional measures

2825 Substances of class 8 may be carried until 30 June 1995 in accordance with the requirements for Class 8 applicable until 31 December 1994. The transport document shall, in such cases, bear the inscription 'Carriage in accordance with the ADR in force before 1 January 1995`.

2826-

2899

CLASS 9 MISCELLANEOUS DANGEROUS SUBSTANCES AND ARTICLES

1. List of substances

2900 The heading of Class 9 covers substances and articles which, during carriage, present a danger not covered by the headings of other classes. Those substances and articles listed in marginal 2901 are subject to the conditions set out in marginals 2901 to 2920 and to the provisions of this Annex and of Annex B. They are then considered as substances and articles of this Directive ().

Substances of Class 9 which are listed under the various items of marginal 2901 shall be assigned to one of the following groups designated by the letter (b) or (c) according to their degree of danger:

letter (b) - dangerous substances

letter (c) - substances presenting a minor danger.

Note: For the classification of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes), see also marginal 2002 (8).

A. Substances which, on inhalation as fine dust, may endanger health

2901 1° Asbestos and mixtures containing asbestos, such as:

(b) 2212 Blue asbestos (crocidolite), 2212 brown asbestos (amosite or mysorite),

(c) 2590 White asbestos (chrysotile, actinolite, anthophyllite or tremolite)

Note: Talc containing tremolite and/or actinolite is a substance of 1° (c), No 2590.

B. Substances and apparatus which in the event of fire may form dioxins

2° Polychlorinated and polyhalogenated biphenyls (PCBs) and terphenyls (PCTs) and mixtures containing these substances:

(b) 2315 polychlorinated biphenyls, 3151 polyhalogenated biphenyls, liquid or 3151 polyhalogenated terphenyls, liquid, 3152 polyhalogenated biphenyls, solid or 3152 polyhalogenated terphenyls, solid.

Note: Mixtures with a PCB or PCT content of not more than 50 mg/kg are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

3° Apparatus such as transformers, condensers and apparatus containing substances of 2° (b) or mixtures thereof.

C. Substances evolving flammable vapour

4° Expandable polymers containing flammable liquids with a flash-point not exceeding 55 °C.

(c) 2211 polymeric beads, expandable, evolving flammable vapour.

D. Lithium batteries

Note: Special packing conditions are applicable to these articles (see marginal 2906).

5° 3090 lithium batteries, 3091 lithium batteries contained in equipment

Notes: 1. Each cell shall not contain more than 12 g of lithium. The quantity of lithium contained in each battery shall not be more than 500 g. With the approval of the competent authority of the country of origin, the quantity of lithium in each cell may be raised to 60 g and a package may contain up to 2 500 g of lithium; the competent authority shall determine the conditions of carriage as well as the type and duration of the test.

2. Cells and batteries shall be equipped with an effective means of preventing external short circuits. Each cell and battery shall incorporate a safety venting device or be designed in such a manner that will preclude a violent rupture under normal conditions of carriage. Batteries containing cells or series of cells connected in parallel shall be equipped with diodes to prevent reverse current flow. Batteries contained in equipment shall be protected against short circuits and be securely held in place.

3. Cells and batteries shall be so designed and constructed that they are capable of meeting the following tests:

Test 1: the cell or battery shall be subjected to a thermal stability test at 75 °C for 48 hours and show no evidence of distortion, leakage or internal heating. This test shall be performed on at least 10 cells and one battery of each type taken from production each week.

Test 2: as a result of intentional short circuiting, the cell or battery shall be rendered inert, preferably without venting (through the use of internal fusing devices). If venting does occur, an open flame shall be applied to the venting fumes to prove that an explosive condition does not exist. This test shall be performed on at least three cells and one battery of each type taken from production each week.

4. Cells which have been discharged to the extent that the open circuit voltage is less than two volts or two thirds of the voltage of the undischarged cell, whichever is the lower, or batteries containing one or more such cells are not to be accepted for carriage.

5. Cells of batteries contained in equipment shall not be capable of being discharged during carriage to the extent that the open circuit voltage falls below two volts or two thirds of the voltage of the undischarged cell, whichever is the lower.

6. Articles of 5° which do not meet these conditions are not to be accepted for carriage.

E. Life-saving appliances

Note: Special packing conditions are applicable to these articles (see marginal 2907).

6° 2990 life-saving appliances, self-inflating, such as aircraft evacuation chutes and aircraft survival kits.

Note: These appliances present a hazard if the self-inflating device is activated during carriage, and may also include one or more of the following substances or articles of this Directive as equipment:

signal devices of Class 1, such as smoke and illumination signal flares:

non-flammable, non-toxic gases of Class 2;

flammable substances of Classes 3 or 4.1;

organic peroxides of Class 5.2, as components of repair kits;

electric storage batteries of Class 8.

7° 3072 life-saving appliances, not self-inflating, including one or more of the following substances or articles of ADR as equipment:

signal devices of Class 1, such as smoke and illumination signal flares;

non-flammable, non-toxic gases of Class 2;

flammable substances of Classes 3 or 4.1;

organic peroxides of Class 5.2, as components of repair kits;

electric storage batteries or corrosive solids of Class 8.

8° Motor vehicle components

(c) 3268 air bag inflators or 3268 air bag modules or 3268 seat-belt pre-tensioners or 3268 seat-belt modules

Notes: 1. This item applies to articles which may be classified in Class 1 in accordance with marginal 2100 (2) (b), which are used as life-saving vehicle air bags or seat-belts, when carried as component parts and when the 'air bag inflators`, 'seat-belt pre-tensioners`, 'air bag modules` or 'seat-belt modules` packaged as for carriage have been tested in accordance with test series 6 (c) of part I of the Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, Tests and Criteria (), with no explosion of the device, no fragmentation of device casings, and no projection hazard or thermal effect, which would significantly hinder firefighting or other emergency response efforts in the immediate vicinity.

2. Such air bags or seat-belts installed in vehicles or in completed vehicle components such as steering columns, door panels, etc. are not subject to the provisions of this Directive.

F. Environmentally hazardous substances

Note: Assignment of a substance to 11°or 12°shall be as indicated in Appendix A.3, section G, marginals 3390 to 3396.

11° Liquid substances pollutant to the aquatic environment and solutions and mixtures of such substances (such as preparations and wastes), which cannot be classified in the other classes, or in items 1° to 8°, 13° and 14° of this Class.

(c) 3082 Environmentally hazardous substance, liquid, n.o.s., such as:

alcohol C6-C17 (secondary) poly (3-6) ethoxylate

alcohol C12-C15 poly (1-3) ethoxylate

alcohol C13-C15 poly (1-6) ethoxylate

alpha-cypermethrin

butyl benzyl phthalate

chlorinated paraffins (C10-C13)

1-chlorooctane

cresyl diphenyl phosphate

cyfluthrin

decyl acrylate

di-n-butyl phthalate

1, 6-dichlorohexane

diisopropylbenzenes

isodecyl acrylate

isodecyl diphenyl phosphate

isoctyl nitrate

malathion

resmethrin

triaryl phosphates

tricresyl phosphates

triethylbenzene

trixylenyl phosphate

12° Solid substances pollutant to the aquatic environment and mixtures of such substances (such as preparations and wastes) which cannot be classified in the other classes, or in items 1° to 8°, 13° and 14° of this class.

(c) 3077 Environmentally hazardous substance, solid, n.o.s., such as:

chlorohexidine

chlorinated paraffins (C10-C13)

p-dichlorobenzene

diphenyl

diphenyl ether

fenbutadin oxide

mercurous chloride (calomel)

tributyltin phosphate

zinc bromide

13° Genetically modified micro-organisms.

Notes: 1. Genetically modified micro-organisms are micro-organisms in which the genetic material has been deliberately altered by technical means or by such means that cannot occur naturally.

2. Genetically modified micro-organisms which are infectious are substances of Class 6.2 (see marginal 2651, items 1° to 3°, identification numbers 2814 and 2900).

3. Genetically modified micro-organisms within the meaning of this item are those which are not dangerous for humans and animals, but which could alter animals, plants, microbiological substances and ecosystems in such a way as cannot occur naturally.

(b) 3245 Genetically modified micro-organisms

Notes: 1. Genetically modified micro organisms which have received a consent for deliberate release into the environment (), are not subject to the provisions of this Class of ADR.

2. For the purpose of the packaging requirements of marginal 2903, substances and mixtures of substances are deemed to be solids if they do not contain free liquid at a temperature less than 45 °C.

3. Live vertebrate or invertebrate animals shall not be used to carry substances classified under this item unless the substance can be carried no other way.

14° Genetically modified organisms

Note: Genetically modified organisms, which are known or suspected to be dangerous to the environment shall be carried in accordance with conditions specified by the competent authority of the country of origin.

G. Empty packagings

Notes: 1. Empty packagings with residues from their previous contents adhering to the outside are not to be accepted for carriage.

2. Uncleaned empty containment vessels for apparatus of 3° are not to be accepted for carriage.

21° Empty packagings, including empty intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks and empty tank-containers, uncleaned, which have contained substances of 1° or 2° of Class 9.

2901a (1) Substances classified under (b) or (c) of 1°, 2°, 4° and 11° to 13° carried in conformity with the following provisions are not subject to the provisions for this class contained in this Annex or in Annex B:

(a) Substances classified under letter (b) of each item:

liquids, up to 500 ml per inner packaging and up to 2 litres per package;

solids, up to 1 kg per inner packaging and up to 4 kg per package.

(b) Substances classified under letter (c) of each item:

liquids, up to 3 litres per inner packaging and up to 12 litres per package:

solids, up to 6 kg per inner packaging and up to 24 kg per package.

These quantities of substances shall be carried in combination packagings conforming at least to the conditions of marginal 3538.

The 'General packing conditions` of marginal 3500 (1), (2) and (5) to (7) shall be complied with.

(2) The following substances and articles of l° are furthermore not subject to the provisions for this Class contained in this annex and in Annex B:

(a) asbestos so immersed or fixed in a natural or artificial binder material (such as cement, plastics, asphalt, resins or mineral ore) that no escape of hazardous quantities of respirable asbestos fibres can occur during carriage;

(b) finished products containing asbestos when they are so packed that no escape of hazardous quantities of respirable asbestos fibres can occur during transport.

(3) Apparatus of 3° containing liquids of 2° (b), up to 500 ml per apparatus and up to 2 litres per package, are not subject to the provisions for this Class contained in this Annex or in Annex B. The apparatus shall, however, be packed in conformity with marginal 2905 (1) (a).

(4) Lithium batteries of 5° conforming to the following provisions, and equipment containing only such batteries, are not subject to the provisions for this Class contained in this Annex and in Annex B:

(a) each cell with a liquid cathode contains not more than 0,5 g of lithium or lithium alloy, and each cell with a solid cathode contains not more than 1 g of lithium or lithium alloy;

(b) each battery with a solid cathode contains not more than an aggregate quantity of 2 g of lithium or lithium alloy and each battery with a liquid cathode contains not more than an aggregate quantity of 1 g of lithium or lithium alloy;

(c) each cell or battery containing a liquid cathode is hermetically sealed;

(d) cells are separated so as to prevent short circuits;

(e) batteries are separated so as to prevent short circuits and are packed in strong packagings, except when installed in electronic devices;

(f) if a liquid cathode battery contains more than 0,5 g of lithium or lithium alloy, or a solid cathode battery contains more than 1 g of lithium or lithium alloy, it does not contain a liquid or gas which is considered dangerous unless the liquid or gas, if free, would be completely absorbed or neutralized by other materials in the battery.

2. Provisions

A. Packages

1. General conditions of packing

2902 (1) Packagings shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.5, unless special conditions for the packing of certain substances are prescribed in section A.2.

(2) Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) shall satisfy the conditions of Appendix A.6.

(3) In accordance with the provisions of marginals 2900 and 3511 (2) or 3611 (2) the following shall be used:

packagings of packing groups II or I, marked with the letter 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs of packing group II, marked with the letter 'Y`, for the dangerous substances classified under the letter (b) of each item;

packagings of packing groups III, II or I, marked with the letter 'Z`, 'Y` or 'X`, or IBCs, marked with the letter 'Z` or 'Y`, for the less dangerous substances classified under the letter (c) of each item.

Note: For the carriage of substances of Class 9 in tank vehicles, demountable tanks or tank-containers, and for the carriage in bulk of solids of this class, see Annex B.

2. Special conditions of packing

2903 (1) Substances classified under (b) of the various items of marginal 2901 shall be packed:

(a) in steel drums conforming to marginal 3520; or

(b) in aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521; or

(c) in steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522; or

(d) in plastics drums or plastics jerricans conforming to marginal 3526; or

(e) in composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537; or

(f) in combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538; or

(g) in metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622, rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624 or composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625.

Note to (a), (b), (c) and (d): Simplified conditions are applicable to removable head drums and jerricans for viscous substances having a viscosity of more than 200 mm2/s at 23 °C (see marginals 3512, 3553, 3554 and 3560) and for solids.

(2) Solid substances with a melting-point above 45 °C may also be packed:

(a) in drums conforming to marginal 3523 for plywood or 3525 for fibreboard, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags, or

(b) in water-resistant bags conforming to marginals 3533 for textile material, 3534 for woven plastics material, 3535 for plastics film or 3536 for water-resistant paper, provided the goods are dispatched as a full load or the bags are secured on pallets, or

(c) in composite IBCs with flexible plastics inner receptacle conforming to marginal 3625, fibreboard IBCs conforming to marginal 3626 or wooden IBCs conforming to marginal 3627, or

(d) in flexible IBCs conforming to marginal 3623 with the exception of IBCs of types 13L1 and 13M1, provided that the goods are carried as a full load or the flexible IBCs are loaded on pallets.

2904 (1) Substances classified under (c) of the various items of marginal 2901 shall be packed:

(a) in steel drums conforming to marginal 3520; or

(b) in aluminium drums conforming to marginal 3521; or

(c) in steel jerricans conforming to marginal 3522; or

(d) in plastics drums or plastics jerricans conforming to marginal 3526; or

(e) in composite packagings (plastics material) conforming to marginal 3537; or

(f) in combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538; or

(g) in composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3539; or

(h) in light gauge metal packagings conforming to marginal 3540; or

(i) in metal IBCs conforming to marginal 3622, rigid plastics IBCs conforming to marginal 3624 or composite IBCs conforming to marginal 3625.

Note to(a),(b),(c),(d)and (h): Simplified conditions are applicable to removable head, jerricans and light gauge metal packagings for viscous substances having a viscosity of more than 200 mm2/s at 23 °C (see marginals 3512, 3552 to 3554 and 3560) and for solids.

(2) Solid substances with a melting-point above 45 °C may also be packed:

(a) in drums conforming to marginal 3523 for plywood or 3525 for fibreboard, if necessary with one or more sift-proof inner bags; or

(b) in water-resistant bags conforming to marginals 3533 for textile material, 3534 for woven plastics material, 3535 for plastics film or 3536 for water-resistant paper; or

(c) in flexible IBCs conforming to marginal 3623, fibreboard IBCs conforming to marginal 3626 or wooden IBCs conforming to marginal 3627.

Note: IBCs conforming to marginal 3626 containing substances of 4° (c) and transported as a full load need only meet the requirements of marginal 3621 (1) to (3), (5) and (6).

(3) Substances of 4° (c) may also be packed in tightly closed leakproof packagings which need only meet the conditions of marginal 3500 (1), (2) and (5) to (7).

(4) Articles of 8° (c) shall be packed in combination packagings conforming to marginal 3538 and to a design type tested and approved for packing group III.

2905 (1) Apparatus of 3° shall be packed:

(a) in leakproof packagings; or

(b) in leakproof containers.

(2) Apparatus of 3° may also be carried in leakproof receptacles (containment vessels) which must be able to hold, in addition to the apparatus, at least 1,25 times the substances of 2° (b) present in the apparatus. There must be sufficient inert material in the receptacles to absorb at least 1,1 times the substances of 2° (b) which are contained in the apparatus. The apparatus and the receptacles shall be so designed as to avoid any leak of liquid under normal conditions of carriage.

2906 (1) Articles of 5° shall be packed in:

(a) boxes conforming to marginal 3527 for natural wood, 3528 for plywood or 3530 for fibreboard, or

(b) in drums conforming to marginal 3523 for plywood, 3525 for fibre or 3526 for plastics, removable head; or

(c) in combination packagings with inner packagings of fibreboard and outer packagings of steel or aluminium conforming to marginal 3538. The inner packagings shall be separated from each other and from the inner surfaces of the outer packagings using non-combustible cushioning material of at least 25 mm thickness. The combination packagings shall conform to a design type which has been tested and approved, in accordance with Appendix A.5, for packing group II. No single packaging or inner packaging of a combination packaging shall contain more than 500 g of lithium (see, however, marginal 2901, 5°, Note 1).

(2) Lithium batteries of 5° shall be packed and be securely stowed so as to prevent movement which could lead to short circuits.

(3) Equipment containing lithium batteries of 5° shall be secured against movement within the packaging and be so packed as to prevent accidental operation during carriage.

2907 (1) Life-saving appliances of 6° shall be packed, individually, in strong outer packagings.

(2) Substances and articles of ADR contained within life-saving appliances of 6° or 7° as equipment shall be packed in inner packagings. These inner packagings shall be so stowed as to prevent any movement within the appliances.

(3) Non-flammable, non-toxic gases of Class 2 shall be contained in cylinders conforming to marginal 2202 which may be connected to the life-saving appliance.

(4) Signal devices of Class 1 shall be packed in plastics or fibreboard inner packagings.

(5) Strike-anywhere matches of Class 4.l (marginal 2401, 2° (c), No 1331) shall be packed in inner packagings to prevent any movement.

2908 (1) If substances of 13° are carried in deeply refrigerated nitrogen, the inner packagings shall conform to the provisions of this Class and the receptacles for the nitrogen shall satisfy the provisions of Class 2.

(2) Live animals in accordance with 13°, Note 3, shall be packed, marked, described and carried in accordance with the relevant regulations for the carriage of animals ().

2908-

2910

3. Mixed packing

2911 (1) Substances covered by the same item number may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538.

(2) Substances of different items of Class 9 except substances of 13°, in quantities not exceeding, per inner packaging, 3 litres for liquids and/or 5 kg for solids, may be packed together and/or with goods not subject to the provisions of this Directive, in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538.

(3) Substances of Class 9 except substances of 13°, in quantities not exceeding, per inner packaging, 3 litres for liquids and/or 5 kg for solids, may be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538 with substances or articles of other classes, provided that mixed packing is also permitted for the substances and articles of these classes, and/or with goods which are not subject to the provisions of this Directive, provided they do not react dangerously with one another.

(4) The following are considered dangerous reactions:

(a) combustion and/or giving off considerable heat;

(b) emission of inflammable and/or toxic gases;

(c) formation of corrosive liquids;

(d) formation of unstable substances.

(5) Substances of 13° shall not be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to marginal 3538 with other goods. This shall not apply to substances added as coolants, e.g. ice, dry ice or deeply refrigerated liquid nitrogen.

(6) The provisions of marginals 2001 (7), 2002 (6) and (7) and 2902 shall be complied with.

(7) If wooden or fibreboard boxes are used, a package shall not weigh more than 100 kg.

4. Marking and danger labels on packages (see Appendix A.9)

Marking

2912 (1) Each package shall be clearly and durably marked with the identification number of the goods to be entered in the transport document, preceded by the letters 'UN`.

(2) Packagings containing substances of 4° (c) shall bear the following marking: 'Keep away from any source of ignition`. This marking shall be in an official language of the forwarding country, and also, if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German, unless any agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise.

Danger labels

(3) Packages containing substances or articles of this Class, with the exception of substances of 4° (c), shall bear a label conforming to model No 9.

(4) Packages containing substances of 2° (b) having a flash-point up to and including 61 °C shall, in addition, bear a label conforming to model No 3.

(5) Packages containing articles of 6° or 7° shall not bear a label conforming to model No 9 unless the article is fully enclosed by packaging, crates or other means that prevent the ready identification of the article.

(6) New packages containing substances of 13° carried in deeply refrigerated nitrogen shall also bear a label conforming to model No 2.

(7) Packages containing fragile receptacles not visible from the outside shall bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 12.

(8) Packages containing liquids in receptacles the closures of which are not visible from the outside shall bear on two opposite sides a label conforming to model No 11.

2913

B. Particulars in the transport document

2914 (1) The description of the goods in the transport document shall conform to one of the identification numbers - except for substances of 14° - and one of the names printed in italics in marginal 2901. If the substance is not mentioned by name, but is assigned to an n.o.s. entry, the description of the goods shall consist of the identification number and the n.o.s. designation, followed by the chemical or technical () name of the substance, or for substances of 13°, by the biological name () of the substance. The description of the goods shall be followed by particulars of the class, the item number, if applicable, the letter, and the initials 'ADR` (or 'RID`), e.g. '9, l° (b), ADR`.

For the carriage of wastes [see marginal 2000 (5)], the description of the goods shall be: 'Waste, containing `, the component(s) used for the classification of the waste under marginal 2002 (8) to be entered under its/their chemical name(s), e.g. 'Waste containing 2212 brown asbestos, 9, l° (b), ADR`.

For the carriage of solutions and mixtures (such as preparations and wastes) containing several components subject to the provisions of this Directive, it will not in general be necessary to refer to more than two components which predominantly contribute to the danger or dangers of the solutions and mixtures.

For the carriage of solutions and mixtures containing only one component subject to the provisions of this Directive, the words 'solution` or 'mixture` shall be added as part of the name in the transport document [see marginal 2002 (8)].

When a solid substance is handed over for carriage in the molten state, the description of the goods shall be completed by the word 'molten`, unless it is already included in the name.

For the carriage of easily perishable substances of 13° appropriate information shall be given, e.g.: 'Cool at + 2°/+ 4 °C` or 'Carry in frozen state` or 'Do not freeze`.

(2) For the carriage of articles of 5° with the approval of the competent authority (see Note 1 to marginal 2901, 5°), a copy of the approval with the conditions of carriage shall be attached to the transport document. This approval shall be drawn up in an official language of the forwarding country and also, if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German, unless any agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise.

2915-

2920

C. Empty packagings

2921 (1) If the empty packagings including IBCs, uncleaned, of 21° are bags, these shall be placed in boxes or waterproof bags to prevent any leakage of the substance.

(2) Other empty packagings including IBCs, uncleaned, of 21° shall be closed in the same way and present the same degree of leakproofness as if they were full.

(3) Empty packagings, uncleaned, of 21° shall bear the same danger labels as if they were full.

(4) The description in the transport document shall conform to one of the names printed in italics in 21°, e.g. 'Empty packaging, 9, 21°, ADR`. In the case of empty tank-vehicles, empty demountable tanks and empty tank-containers uncleaned, this description shall be completed by adding the words 'Last load` together with the name and item number of the goods last loaded, e.g. 'Last load: 2212 brown asbestos, 1° (b)`.

2922-

2999

PART III

APPENDICES TO ANNEX A

APPENDIX A.1

3000-

3099

A. STABILITY AND SAFETY CONDITIONS

RELATING TO EXPLOSIVE SUBSTANCES AND ARTICLES, FLAMMABLE SOLIDS

AND ORGANIC PEROXIDES

General

3100 The following conditions are the minima for substances and articles accepted for carriage.

Conditions relating to explosive substances and articles

3101 (1) Testing for assignment to Class 1

Any substance or article having or suspected of having explosive properties shall be considered for assignment to Class 1 in accordance with the tests, procedures and criteria prescribed in Part I ('Tests and criteria for the classification of explosive substances and articles`) of the 'Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods: Tests and Criteria` published by the United Nations Organization as document ST/SG/AC.10/11, first edition (hereafter called the Test Manual).

A substance or article assigned to Class 1 can only be accepted for carriage when it has been assigned to a name or n.o.s. entry listed in marginal 2101 and meets the criteria of the Test Manual.

(2) Classification

The substances and articles of Class 1 shall be assigned to the appropriate division and compatibility group in accordance with the procedures and criteria prescribed in the Test Manual.

(3) Assignment to an item number, identification number and name

The substances and articles of Class 1 shall be assigned to an item number, an identification number and a name or n.o.s. entry listed in Table 1 of marginal 2101.

Interpretation of the names of substances and articles in the individual item numbers of Table 1 of marginal 2101 shall be based upon the glossary in marginal 3170.

Explosive substances and articles shall only be assigned to an n.o.s. entry if they cannot be assigned to a name in Table 1 of marginal 2101. Assignment to an n.o.s. entry shall be made by the competent authority of the country of origin.

(4) Exudation test

(a) Substances of item 4°, identification number 0081 (Explosive blasting, type A) shall, if they contain more than 40 % liquid nitric ester, in addition to the testing specified above satisfy the following exudation test.

(b) The apparatus for testing blasting explosive for exudation (figs. 1 to 3) consists of a hollow bronze cylinder. This cylinder, which is closed at one end by a plate of the same metal, has an internal diameter of 15,7 mm and a depth of 40 mm. It is pierced by 20 holes 0,5 mm in diameter (four sets of five holes) on the circumference. A bronze piston, cylindrically fashioned over a length of 48 mm and having a total length of 52 mm, slides into the vertically placed cylinder. The piston, whose diameter is 15,6 mm, is loaded with a mass of 2,220 g so that a pressure of 120 kPa (1,20 bar) is exerted on the base of the cylinder.

(c) A small plug of blasting explosive weighing 5 to 8 g, 30 mm long and 15 mm in diameter, is wrapped in very fine gauze and placed in the cylinder; the piston and its loading mass are then placed on it so that the blasting explosive is subjected to a pressure of 120 kPa (1,20 bar). The time taken for the appearance of the first signs of oily droplets (nitroglycerine) at the outer orifices of the cylinder holes is noted.

(d) The blasting explosive is considered satisfactory if the time elapsing before the appearance of the liquid exudations is more than five minutes, the test having been carried out at a temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C.

Test of blasting explosive for exudation

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

Figure 1: Bell-form charge, mass 2 220 g., capable of being suspended from a bronze piston

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

Figure 2: Hollow bronze cylinder, closed at one end;

Plan and cut dimensions in mm. Figure 3: Cylindrical bronze piston; dimensions in mm.

4 series of 5 holes at 0,5 copper

iron plate with centre cone at the inferieur face

4 openings, approximately 46 × 56, set at even intervals on the periphery

Conditions relating to nitrated cellulose mixtures of Class 4.1

3102 (1) Nitrocellulose of marginal 2401, 24° (a) heated for half an hour at 132 °C must not give off visible yellowish-brown nitrous fumes (nitrous gases). The ignition temperature must be above 180 °C. See paragraphs (3) to (8), (9) (a) and (10) below.

(2) 3 g of plasticized nitrocellulose, heated for one hour at 132 °C, must not give off visible yellowish-brown nitrous fumes (nitrous gases). The ignition temperature must be above 170 °C. See paragraphs (3) to (8), (9) (b) and (10) below.

(3) The test procedures set out below are to be applied when differences of opinion arise as to the acceptability of substances for carriage by road.

(4) If other methods or test procedures are used to verify the conditions of stability prescribed above in this appendix, those methods must lead to the same findings as could be reached by the methods specified below.

(5) In carrying out the stability tests by heating described below, the temperature of the oven containing the sample under test must not deviate by more than 2 °C from the prescribed temperature; the prescribed duration of a 30-minute or 60-minute test must be observed to within two minutes. The oven must be such that the required temperature is restored not more than five minutes after insertion of the sample.

(6) Before undergoing the tests in paragraphs (9) and (10), the samples must be dried for not less than 15 hours at the ambient temperature in a vacuum desiccator containing fused and granulated calcium chloride, the sample substance being spread in a thin layer; for this purpose, substances which are neither in powder form nor fibrous shall be ground, or grated, or cut into small pieces. The pressure in the desiccator must be brought below 6,5 kPa (0,065 bar).

(7) Before being dried as prescribed in paragraph (6) above, substances conforming to paragraph (2) shall undergo preliminary drying in a well-ventilated oven, with its temperature set at 70 °C, until the loss of mass per quarter-hour is less than 0,3 % of the original mass.

(8) Weakly nitrated nitrocellulose conforming to paragraph (1) shall first undergo preliminary drying as prescribed in paragraph (7) above; drying shall then be completed by keeping the nitrocellulose for at least 15 hours over concentrated sulphuric acid in a desiccator.

(9) Test of chemical stability under heat

(a) Test of the substance listed in paragraph (1) above.

(i) In each of two glass test tubes having the following dimensions:

length 350 mm

internal diameter 16 mm

thickness of wall 1,5 mm is placed 1 g of substance dried over calcium chloride (if necessary the drying must be carried out after reducing the substance to pieces weighing not more than 0,05 g each). Both test tubes, completely covered with loose-fitting closures, are then so placed in an oven that at least four-fifths of their length is visible, and are kept at a constant temperature of 132 °C for 30 minutes. It is observed whether nitrous gases in the form of yellowish-brown fumes clearly visible against a white background are given off during this time.

(ii) In the absence of such fumes the substance is deemed to be stable.

(b) Test of plasticized nitrocellulose (paragraph (2) above).

(i) 3 g of plasticized nitrocellulose are placed in glass test tubes, similar to those referred to in (a), which are then placed in an oven kept at a constant temperature of 132 °C.

(ii) The test tubes containing the plasticized nitrocellulose are kept in the oven for one hour. During this time no yellowish-brown nitrous gases fumes (nitrous gases) must be visible. Observation and appraisal as in (a).

(10) Ignition temperature (see paragraphs (1) and (2) above)

(i) The ignition temperature is determined by heating 0,2 g of substance enclosed in a glass test tube immersed in a Wood's alloy bath. The test tube is placed in the bath when the latter has reached 100 °C. The temperature of the bath is then progressively increased by 5 °C per minute.

(ii) The test tubes must have the following dimensions:

length 125 mm

internal diameter 15 mm

thickness of wall 0,5 mm

and must be immersed to a depth of 20 mm.

(iii) The test must be repeated three times, the temperature at which ignition of the substance occurs, i.e., slow or rapid combustion, deflagration or detonation, being noted each time.

(iv) The lowest temperature recorded in the three tests is the ignition temperature.

Conditions relating to self-reactive substances of Class 4.1

Testings for assignment under section E of marginal 2401

3103 Self-reactive substances of items 31° to 50° can only be accepted for carriage and when the relevant criteria in Parts II and III of the 'Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods: Tests and Criteria` (second edition published by the United Nations Organization under the reference (ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.1) are met. The principles for classification of self-reactive substances are given in marginal 3104. The test selected for determining the self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) shall be conducted in a manner which is representative, both in size and material, of the package to be carried.

Principles for classification of self-reactive substances of Class 4.1

3104 (1) A self-reactive substance or self-reactive substance formulation shall be regarded as possessing explosive properties when in laboratory testing it is liable to detonate, to deflagrate rapidly or to show a violent effect when heated under confinement.

(2) The following principles shall be applied to the classification of a self-reactive substance and self-reactive substance formulation not listed in marginal 2401:

(a) any self-reactive substance or self-reactive substance formulation which can detonate or deflagrate rapidly, as packaged for carriage, shall be prohibited from carriage in that packaging under Class 4.1 (defined as self-reactive substance type A, exit box A of figure 4);

(b) any self-reactive substance or self-reactive substance formulation possessing explosive properties and which, as packaged for carriage, neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly, but is liable to undergo a thermal explosion in that packaging, shall also bear a label conforming to model No 01. Such a self-reactive substance may be packaged in amounts of up to 25 kg unless the maximum quantity has to be limited to a lower amount to preclude detonation or rapid deflagration in the package (defined as selfreactive substance type B, exit box B of figure 4);

FIGURE 4

Classification and flow chart scheme for self-reactive substances

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

(c) any self-reactive substance or self-reactive substance formulation possessing explosive properties may be carried without a label conforming to model No 01 when the substance as packaged (maximum 50 kg) for carriage cannot detonate or deflagrate rapidly or undergo a thermal explosion (defined as self-reactive substance type C, exit box C of figure 4);

(d) any self-reactive substance or self-reactive substance formulation which in laboratory testing:

- detonates partially, does not deflagrate rapidly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement; or

- does not detonate at all, deflagrates slowly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement; or

- does not detonate or deflagrate at all and shows a medium effect when heated under confinement

may be accepted for carriage in packages containing not more than 50 kg (defined as self-reactive substance type D, exit box D of figure 4).

(e) any self-reactive substance or self-reactive substance formulation which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates nor deflagrates at all and shows low or no effect when heated under confinement may be accepted for carriage in packages containing not more than 400 kg/450 litres (defined as self-reactive substance type E, exit box E of figure 4);

(f) any self-reactive substance or self-reactive substance formulation which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows only a low or no effect when heated under confinement as well as low or no explosive power may be accepted for carriage in IBCs (defined as self-reactive substance type F, exit box F of figure 4);

(g) any self-reactive substance or self-reactive substance formulation which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows no effect when heated under confinement, nor any explosive power shall not be considered as a self-reactive substance of Class 4.1, provided that the formulation is thermally stable (self-accelerating decomposition temperature is 60 °C to 75 °C for a 50 kg package) and any compatible diluent meets the requirements of marginal 2400 (19) (defined as self-reactive substance type G, exit box G of figure 4). If the formulation is not thermally stable or a diluent having a boiling point less that 15 °C is used for desensitization, the formulation shall be defined as a self-reactive type F.

(3) Paragraph (2) refers only to those properties of self-reactive substances which are decisive for classification. A flow chart, presenting the classification principles in the form of a graphically arranged scheme of questions concerning the decisive properties together with the possible answers, is given in figure 4). These properties shall be determined experimentally in accordance with marginal 3103.

Conditions relating to organic peroxides

Testings for assignment to Class 5.2

3105 Substances and articles of Class 5.2 can only be accepted for carriage when the relevant criteria in Parts II and III of the 'Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods: Tests and Criteria` (published by the United Nations Organization under the reference ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev. 1, second edition) are met. The test selected for determining the self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) shall be conducted in a manner which is representative, both in size and material, of the package to be carried.

Principles for classification

3106 (1) An organic peroxide or organic peroxide formulation shall be regarded as possessing explosive properties when in laboratory testing it is liable to detonate, to deflagrate rapidly or to show a violent effect when heated under confinement.

FIGURE 5

Classification and flow chart scheme for organic peroxides

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

(2) The following principles shall be applied to the classification of an organic peroxide or organic peroxide formulation not listed in marginal 2551:

(a) any organic peroxide or organic peroxide formulation which can detonate or deflagrate rapidly, as packaged for carriage, shall be prohibited from carriage in that packaging under Class 5.2 (defined as organic peroxide type A, exit box A of Figure 5).

(b) any organic peroxide or organic peroxide formulation possessing explosive properties and which, as packaged for carriage, neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly, but is liable to undergo a thermal explosion in that packaging, shall also bear a label conforming to model No 01. Such an organic peroxide may be packaged in amounts of up to 25 kg unless the maximum quantity has to be limited to a lower amount to preclude detonation or rapid deflagration in the package (defined as organic peroxide type B, exit box B of Figure 5).

(c) any organic peroxide or organic peroxide formulation possessing explosive properties may be carried without a label conforming to model No 01 when the substance as packaged (maximum 50 kg) for carriage cannot detonate or deflagrate rapidly or undergo a thermal explosion (defined as organic peroxide type C, exit box C of Figure 5).

(d) any organic peroxide or organic peroxide formulation which in laboratory testing:

- detonates partially, does not deflagrate rapidly and shows no effect when heated under confinement; or

- does not detonate at all, deflagrates slowly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement; or

- does not detonate or deflagrate at all and shows a medium effect when heated under confinement may be accepted for carriage in packages containing not more than 50 kg (defined as organic peroxide type D, exit box D of Figure 5).

(e) any organic peroxide or organic peroxide formulation which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates nor deflagrates at all and shows low or no effect when heated under confinement may be accepted for carriage in packages containing not more than 400 kg/450 litres (defined as organic peroxide type E, exit box E of Figure 5).

(f) any organic peroxide or organic peroxide formulation which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows only a low or no effect when heated under confinement as well as low or no explosive power may be accepted for carriage in intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) or tanks (defined as organic peroxide type F, exit box F of Figure 5).

(g) any organic peroxide or organic peroxide formulation which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows no effect when heated under confinement, nor any explosive power shall be exempted from Class 5.2, provided that the formulation is thermally stable (self-accelerating decomposition temperature is 60 °C or higher for a 50 kg package) and for liquid formulations, a diluent type A is used for desensitization (defined as organic peroxide type G, exit box G of Figure 5).

(3) Paragraph (2) refers only to those properties of organic peroxides which are decisive for classification. A flow chart, presenting the classification principles in the form of a graphically arranged scheme of questions concerning the decisive properties together with the possible answers, is given in Figure 5. These properties shall be determined experimentally in accordance with marginal 3105.

3107-

3169

B. GLOSSARY OF NAMES IN MARGINAL 2101

[see also marginal 3101 (3)]

3170 Notes: 1. The descriptions in the glossary are not intended to replace the test procedures, nor to determine the hazard classification of a substance or article of Class 1. Assignment to the correct division and a decision on whether Compatibility Group S is appropriate must be based on testing of the product in accordance with the Test Manual mentioned in marginal 3101 (1) or by analogy with similar products which have already been tested and assigned in accordance with the procedures of the Test Manual.

2. The figures given after the names refer to the relevant item numbers (column 1) and identification numbers (column 2) of Table 1 in accordance with marginal 2101, separated by an oblique (e.g. 21°/0171).

For the classification code, see marginal 2100 (4).

Ammunition, illuminating, with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 21°/0171; 30°/0254; 43°/0297

Ammunition designed to produce a single source of intense light for lighting up an area. The term includes illuminating cartridges, grenades and projectiles; and illuminating and target identification bombs.

Note: The following articles: cartridges, signal; signal devices hand; signals, distress; flares, aerial; flares, surface are not included in this definition. They are listed separately.

Ammunition, incendiary, liquid or gel, with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 32°/0247

Ammunition containing liquid or gelatinous incendiary substance. Except when the incendiary substance is an explosive per se, it also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge.

Ammunition, incendiary, white phosphorus with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 22°/0243; 31°/0244

Ammunition containing white phosphorus as incendiary substance. It also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge.

Ammunition, incendiary with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 21°/0009; 30°/0010; 43°/0300

Ammunition containing incendiary composition. Except when the composition is an explosive per se, it also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge.

Ammunition, practice 30°/0488; 43°/0362

Ammunition without a main bursting charge, containing a burster or expelling charge. Normally it also contains a fuze and a propelling charge.

Note: Grenades, practice are not included in this definition. They are listed separately.

Ammunition, proof 43°/0363

Ammunition containing pyrotechnic substances, used to test the performance or strength of new ammunition, weapon components or assemblies.

Ammunition, smoke, white phosphorus, with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 22°/0245; 31°/0246

Ammunition containing white phosphorus as a smoke-producing substance. It also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge. The term includes grenades, smoke.

Ammunition, smoke with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 21°/0015; 30°/0016; 43°/0303

Ammunition containing a smoke-producing substance such as chlorosulphonic acid mixture or titanium tetrachloride; or a smoke-producing pyrotechnic composition based on hexachloroethane or red phosphorus. Except when the substance is an explosive per se, the ammunition also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge. The term includes grenades, smoke.

Note: Signals, smoke are not included in this definition. They are listed separately.

Ammunition, tear-producing, with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 21°/0018; 30°/0019; 43°/0301

Ammunition containing a tear-producing substance. It also contains one or more of the following: a pyrotechnic substance; a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge; a fuze with burster or expelling charge.

Articles, explosive, extremely insensitive (Articles EEI) 50°/0486

Articles containing only extremely insensitive detonating substances (EIDS) which demonstrate a negligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation under normal conditions of transport, and which have passed Test Series 7.

Articles, pyrophoric 25°/0380

Articles which contain a pyrophoric substance (capable of spontaneous ignition when exposed to air) and an explosive substance or component. The term excludes articles containing white phosphorus.

Articles, pyrotechnic, for technical purposes 9°/0428; 21°/0429; 30°/0430; 43°/0431; 47°/0432

Articles which contain pyrotechnic substances and are used for technical purposes such as heat generation, gas generation, theatrical effects, etc.

Note: The following articles: all ammunition; cartridges, signal; cutters, cable, explosive; fireworks; flares, aerial; flares, surface; release devices, explosive; rivets, explosive; signal devices, hand; signals, distress; signals, railway track, explosives; signals, smoke are not included in this definition. They are listed separately.

Black powder (gunpowder), compressed or Black powder (gunpowder), in pellets 4°/0028

Substance consisting of a pelletized form of black powder.

Black powder (gunpowder), granular or as meal 4°/0027

Substance consisting of an intimate mixture of charcoal or other carbon and either potassium nitrate or sodium nitrate, with or without sulphur.

Bombs, with inflammable liquid, with bursting charge 10°/0399; 23°/0400

Articles which are dropped from aircraft, consisting of a tank filled with inflammable liquid and bursting charge.

Bombs, photo-flash 5°/0038

Explosive articles which are dropped from aircraft to provide brief, intense illumination for photography. They contain a charge of detonating explosive without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features.

Bombs, photo-flash 7°/0037

Explosive articles which are dropped from aircraft to provide brief, intense illumination for photography. They contain a charge of detonating explosive with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features.

Bombs, photo-flash 21°/0039; 30°/0299

Explosive articles which are dropped from aircraft to provide brief, intense illumination for photography. They contain a photo-flash composition.

Bombs, with bursting charge 5°/0034; 17°/0035

Explosive articles which are dropped from aircraft, without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features.

Bombs with bursting charge 7°/0033; 19°/0291

Explosive articles which are dropped from aircraft, with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features.

Boosters, with detonator 1°/0225; 13°/0268

Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive with means of initiation. They are used to increase the initiating power of detonators or detonating cord.

Boosters, without detonator 5°/0042; 17°/0283

Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive without means of initation. They are used to increase the initiating power of detonators or detonating cord.

Bursters, explosive 5°/0043

Articles consisting of a small charge of explosive used to open projectiles or other ammunition in order to disperse their contents.

Cartridges, flash 9°/0049; 30°/0050

Articles consisting of a casing, a primer and flash powder, all assembled in one piece ready for firing.

Cartridges for weapons, blank 3°/0326; 15°/0413; 27°/0327; 37°/0338; 47°/0014

Ammunition consisting of a closed cartridge case with a centre or rim fire primer and a charge of smokeless or black powder but no projectile. It produces a loud noise and is used for training, saluting, propelling charge, starter pistols, etc. The term includes ammunition, blank.

Cartridges for weapons, inert projectile 15°/0328; 27°/0417; 37°/0339; 47°/0012

Ammunition consisting of a projectile without bursting charge but with a propelling charge with or without a primer. The articles may include a tracer, provided that the predominant hazard is that of the propelling charge.

Cartridges for weapons, with bursting charge 6°/0006; 18°/0321; 40°/0412

Ammunition consisting of a projectile with a bursting charge without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features; and a propelling charge with or without a primer. The term includes fixed (assembled) ammunition, semi-fixed (partially assembled) ammunition and separate loading ammunition when the components are packed together.

Cartridges for weapons, with bursting charge 7°/0005; 19°/0007; 41°/0348

Ammunition consisting of a projectile with a bursting charge with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features; and a propelling charge with or without a primer. The term includes fixed (assembled) ammunition, semi-fixed (partially assembled) ammunition and separate loading ammunition when the components are packed together.

Cartridges, oil well 27°/0277; 37°/0278

Articles consisting of a thin casing of fibreboard, metal or other material containing only propellant powder which projects a hardened projectile to perforate an oil well casing.

Note: Charges, shaped, commercial are not included in this definition. They are listed separately.

Cartridges, power device 15°/0381; 27°/0275; 37°/0276; 47°/0323

Articles designed to accomplish mechanical actions. They consist of a casing with a charge of deflagrating explosive and a means of ignition. The gaseous products of the deflagration produce inflation, linear or rotary motion or activate diaphragms, valves or switches or project fastening devices or extinguishing agents.

Cartridges, signal 30°/0054; 43°/0312; 47°/0405

Articles designed to fire coloured flares or other signals from signal pistols, etc.

Cartridges small arms 27°/0417; 37°/0339; 47°/0012

Ammunition consisting of a cartridge case fitted with a centre or rim fire primer and containing both a propelling charge and solid projectile. They are designed to be fired in weapons of calibre not larger than 19,1 mm. Shot-gun cartridges of any calibre are included in this description.

Note: Cartridges, small arms, blank, are not included in this definition. They are listed separately. Some military small arms cartridges are not included in this definition. They are listed under cartridges for weapons, inert projectile.

Cartridges, for weapons, blank, 27°/0338; 47°/0014

Ammunition consisting of a closed cartridge case with a centre or rim fire primer and a charge of smokeless or black powder. The cartridge cases contain no projectiles. The cartridges are designed to be fired from weapons with a calibre of at most 19,1 mm and serve to produce a loud noise and are used for training, saluting, propelling charge, starter pistols, etc.

Cases, cartridge, empty, with primer 37°/0379; 47°/0055

Articles consisting of a cartridge case made from metal, plastics or other non-inflammable material, in which the only explosive component is the primer.

Cases, combustible, empty, without primer 27°/0447; 37°/0446

Articles consisting of a cartridge case made partly or entirely from nitrocellulose.

Charges, bursting, plastics bonded 5°/0457; 17°/0458; 39°/0459; 47°/0460

Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive, plastics bonded, manufactured in a specific form without a casing and without means of initiation. They are designed as components of ammunition such as warheads.

Charges, demolition 5°/0048

Articles containing a charge of a detonating explosive in a casing of fibreboard, plastics, metal or other material. The articles are without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features.

Note: The following articles: bombs; mines; projectiles are not included in this definition. They are listed separately.

Charges, depth 5°/0056

Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive contained in a drum or projectile without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to detonate under water.

Charges, explosive, commercial, without detonator 5°/0442; 17°/0443; 39°/0444; 47°/0445

Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive without means of initiation, used for explosive welding, jointing, forming and other metallurgical processes.

Charges, propelling, for cannon 3°/0279; 15°/0414; 27°/0242

Charges of propellant in any physical form for separate-loading ammunition for cannon.

Charges, propelling 3°/0271; 15°/0415; 27°/0272; 37°/0491

Articles consisting of a charge of a propellant charge in any physical form, with or without a casing, as a component of rocket motors or for reducing the drag of projectiles.

Charges, shaped, commercial, without detonator 5°/0059; 17°/0439; 39°/0440; 47°/0441

Articles consisting of a casing containing a charge of detonating explosive with a cavity lined with rigid material, without means of initiation. They are designed to produce a powerful, penetrating jet effect.

Charges, shaped, flexible, linear, 5°/0288, 39°/0237

Articles consisting of a V-shaped core of a detonating explosive clad by a flexible sheath.

Charges, supplementary, explosive 5°/0060

Articles consisting of a small removable booster placed in the cavity of a projectile between the fuze and the bursting charge.

Components, explosive train, n.o.s. 1°/0461; 13°/0382; 35°/0383; 47°/0384

Articles containing an explosive designed to transmit detonation or deflagration within an explosive train.

Contrivances, water-activated with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge 25°/0248; 34°/0249

Articles whose functioning depends upon physico-chemical reaction of their contents with water.

Cord, detonating, flexible 5°/0065; 39°/0289

Article consisting of a core of detonating explosive enclosed in spun fabric and a plastics or other covering. The covering is not necessary if the spun fabric is sift-proof.

Cord (fuse) detonating, metal clad 5°/0290; 17°/0102

Article consisting of a core of detonating explosive clad by a soft metal tube with or without protective covering.

Cord (fuse) detonating, mild effect, metal clad 39°/0104

Article consisting of a core of detonating explosive clad by a soft metal tube with or without a protective covering. The quantity of explosive substance is so small that only a mild effect is manifested outside the cord.

Cord, igniter 43°/0066

Article consisting of textile yarns covered with black powder or another fast burning pyrotechnic composition and of a flexible protective covering; or it consists of a core of black powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric. It burns progressively along its length with an external flame and is used to transmit ignition from a device to a charge or primer.

Cutters, cable, explosive 47°/0070

Articles consisting of a knife-edged device which is driven by a small charge of deflagrating explosive into an anvil.

Detonator assemblies, non-electric, for blasting 1°/0360; 35°/0361

Non-electric detonators assembled with and activated by such means as safety fuse, shock tube, flash tube or detonating cord. They may be of instantaneous design or incorporate delay elements. Detonating relays incorporating detonating cord are included.

Detonators, electric, for blasting 1°/0030; 35°/0255; 47°/0456

Articles specially designed for the initiation of blasting explosives. These detonators may be constructed to detonate instantaneously or may contain a delay element. Electric detonators are activated by an electric current.

Detonators for ammunition 1°/0073; 13°/0364; 35°/0365, 47°/0366

Articles consisting of a small metal or plastics tube containing explosives such as lead azide, PETN or combinations of explosives. They are designed to start a detonation train.

Detonators, non-electric, for blasting 1°/0029; 35°/0267; 47°/0455

Articles specially designed for the initiation of blasting explosives. These detonators may be constructed to detonate instantaneously or may contain a delay element. Non-electric detonators are activated by such means as shock tube, flash tube, safety fuse, other igniferous device or flexible detonating cord. Detonating relays without detonating cord are included.

Explosive, blasting, type A 4°/0081

Substances consisting of liquid organic nitrates such as nitroglycerine or a mixture of such ingredients with one or more of the following: nitrocellulose; ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates; aromatic nitro-derivatives, or combustible materials, such as wood-meal and aluminium powder. They may contain inert components such as kieselguhr, and additives such as colouring agents and stabilizers. Such explosives shall be in powdery, gelatinous or elastic form. The term includes dynamite; gelatine, blasting and gelatine dynamites.

Explosive, blasting, type B 4°/0082; 48°/0331

Substances consisting of

(a) a mixture of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with an explosive such as trinitrotoluene, with or without other substances such as wood-meal and aluminium powder; or

(b) a mixture of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients. In both cases they may contain inert components such as kieselguhr, and additives such as colouring agents and stabilizers. Such explosives must not contain nitroglycerine, similar liquid organic nitrates or chlorates.

Explosive, blasting, type C 4°/0083

Substances consisting of a mixture of either potassium or sodium chlorate or potassium, sodium or ammonium perchlorate with organic nitro-derivatives or combustible materials such as wood-meal or aluminium powder or a hydrocarbon. They may contain inert components such as kieselguhr and additives such as colouring agents and stabilizers. Such explosives must not contain nitroglycerine or similar liquid organic nitrates.

Explosive, blasting, type D 4°/0084

Substances consisting of a mixture of organic nitrated compounds and combustible materials such as hydrocarbons and aluminium powder. They may contain inert components such as kieselguhr and additives such as colouring agents and stabilizers. Such explosives must not contain nitroglycerine, similar liquid organic nitrates, chlorates and ammonium nitrate. The term generally includes plastic explosives.

Explosives, blasting, type E 4°/0241; 48°/0332

Substances consisting of water as an essential ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizers, some or all of which are in solution. The other constituents may include nitro-derivatives such as trinitrotoluene, hydrocarbons or aluminium powder. They may contain inert components such as kieselguhr and additives such as colouring agents and stabilizers. The term includes explosives, emulsion, explosives, slurry and explosives, watergel.

Fireworks 9°/0333; 21°/0334; 30°/0335; 43°/0336; 47°/0337

Pyrotechnic articles designed for entertainment.

Flares, aerial 9°/0420; 21°/0421; 30°/0093; 43°/0403; 47°/0404

Articles containing pyrotechnic substances which are designed to be dropped from an aircraft to illuminate, identify, signal or warn.

Flares, surface 9°/0418; 21°/0419; 30°/0092

Articles containing pyrotechnic substances which are designed for use on the surface to illuminate, identify, signal or warn.

Flash powder 8°/0094; 29°/0305

Pyrotechnic substance which, when ignited, produces an intense light.

Fracturing devices, explosive, without detonator, for oil wells, 5°/0099

Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive contained in a casing without means of initiation. They are used to fracture the rock around a drill shaft to assist the flow of crude oil from the rock.

Fuse, igniter, tubular, metal clad 43°/0103

Article consisting of a metal tube with a core of deflagrating explosive.

Fuse, instantaneous, non-detonating (quickmatch) 30°/0101

Article consisting of cotton yarns impregnated with fine black powder. It burns with an external flame and is used in ignition trains for fireworks, etc.

Fuse, safety 47°/0105

Article consisting of a core of fine grained black powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric with one or more protective outer coverings. When ignited, it burns at a predetermined rate without any external explosive effect.

Fuzes, detonating 1°/0106; 13°/0107; 35°/0257; 47°/0367

Articles with explosive components designed to produce a detonation in ammunition. They incorporate mechanical, electrical, chemical or hydrostatic components to initiate the detonation. They generally incorporate protective features.

Fuzes, detonating, with protective features 5°/0408; 17°/0409; 39°/0410

Articles with explosive components designed to produce a detonation in ammunition. They incorporate mechanical, electrical, chemical or hydrostatic components to initiate the detonation. The detonating fuze must incorporate two or more effective protective features.

Fuzes, igniting 30°/0316; 43°/0317; 47°/0368

Articles with primary explosive components designed to produce a deflagration in ammunition. They incorporate mechanical, electrical, chemical or hydrostatic components to start the deflagration. They generally incorporate protective features.

Grenades, hand or rifle, with bursting charge 5°/0284; 17°/0285

Articles which are designed to be thrown by hand or to be projected by a rifle. They are without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features.

Grenades, hand or rifle, with bursting charge 7°/0292; 19°/0293

Articles which are designed to be thrown by hand or to be projected by a rifle. They are with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features.

Grenades, practice, hand or rifle 21°/0372; 30°/0318; 43°/0452; 47°/0110

Articles without a main bursting charge which are designed to be thrown by hand or to be projected by a rifle. They contain the priming device and may contain a spotting charge.

Hexotonal 4°/0393

Substance consisting of an intimate mixture of cyclotrimethylene-trinitramine (RDX), trinitrotoluene (TNT) and aluminium.

Hexolite (hexotol), dry or wetted with less than 15 % water, by mass 4°/0118

Substance consisting of an intimate mixture of cyclotrimethylene-trinitramine (RDX) and trinitrotoluene (TNT). The term includes 'Composition B`.

Igniters 9°/0121; 21°/0314; 30°/0315; 43°/0325; 47°/0454

Articles containing one or more explosive substances designed to produce a deflagration in an explosive train. They may be actuated chemically, electrically or mechanically.

Note: The following articles: cord, igniter; fuse, igniter; fuse, instantaneous, non-detonating; fuzes, igniting; lighters, fuse; primers, cap type; primers, tubular are not included in this definition. They are listed separately.

Jet perforating guns, charged, oil well, without detonator 5°/0124; 39°/0494

Articles consisting of a steel tube or metallic strip, into which are inserted shaped charges connected by detonating cord, without means of initiation.

Lighters, fuse 47°/0131

Articles of various design actuated by friction, percussion or electricity and used to ignite safety fuse.

Mines, with bursting charge 5°/0137; 17°/0138

Articles consisting normally of metal or composition receptacles filled with a detonating explosive, without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to be operated by the passage of ships, vehicles or personnel. The term includes 'Bangalore torpedoes`.

Mines, with bursting charge 7°/0136; 19°/0294

Articles consisting normally of metal or composition receptacles filled with a detonating explosive, with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to be operated by the passage of ships, vehicles or personnel. The term includes 'Bangalore torpedoes`.

Octolite (Octol), dry or wetted with less than 15 % water, by mass 4°/0266

Substance consisting of an intimate mixture of cyclotetramethylene-tetranitramine (HMX) and trinitrotoluene (TNT).

Octonal 4°/0496

Substance consisting of an intimat mixture of cyclotetramethylenetetranitramine (HMX), trinitrotoluene (TNT) and aluminium.

Pentolite, dry or wetted with less than 15 % water, by mass 4°/0151

Substance consisting of an intimate mixture of pentaerythrite tetranitrate (PETN) and trinitrotoluene (TNT).

Powder cake (powder paste), wetted with not less than 17 % alcohol, by mass. Powder cake (powder paste), wetted with not less than 25 % water, by mass 2°/0433; 26°/0159

Substance consisting of nitrocellulose impregnated with not more than 60 % of nitroglycerine or other liquid organic nitrates or a mixture of these.

Powder, smokeless 2°/0160; 26°/0161

Substance based on nitrocellulose used as propellant. The term includes propellants with a single base (nitrocellulose (NC) alone), those with a double base (such as NC and nitroglycerine/(NG)) and those with a triple base (such as NC/NG/nitroguanidine).

Note: Cast, pressed or bag-charges of smokeless powder are listed under charges, propelling.

Primers, cap type 1°/0377; 35°/0378; 47°/0044

Articles consisting of a metal or plastics cap containing a small amount of primary explosive mixture that is readily ignited by impact. They serve as igniting elements in small arms cartridges and in percussion primers for propelling charges.

Primers, tubular 30°/0319; 43°/0320; 47°/0376

Articles consisting of a primer for ignition and an auxiliary charge of deflagrating explosive such as black powder used to ignite the propelling charge in a cartridge case for cannon, etc.

Projectiles, inert with tracer 30°/0424; 43°/0425; 47°/0345

Articles such as a shell or bullet, which are projected from a cannon or other gun, rifle or other small arm.

Projectiles, with burster or expelling charge 17°/0346; 39°/0347

Articles such as a shell or bullet, which are projected from a cannon or other gun. They are without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. They are used to scatter dyes for spotting or other inert materials.

Projectiles, with burster or expelling charge 19°/0426; 41°/0427

Articles such as a shell or bullet, which are projected from a cannon or other gun. They are with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. They are used to scatter dyes for spotting or other inert materials.

Projectiles, with burster or expelling charge 21°/0434; 43°/0435

Articles such as a shell or bullet, which are projected from a cannon or other gun, rifle or other small arm. They are used to scatter dyes for spotting or other inert materials.

Projectiles, with bursting charge 5°/0168; 17°/0169; 39°/0344

Articles such as a shell or bullet, which are projected from a cannon or other gun. They are without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features.

Projectiles, with bursting charge 7°/0167; 19°/0324

Articles such as a shell or bullet, which are projected from a cannon or other gun. They are with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features.

Propellant, liquid 2°/0497; 26°/0495

Substance consisting of a deflagrating liquid explosive, used for propulsion.

Propellant, solid 2°/0498; 26°/0499

Substance consisting of a deflagrating solid explosive, used for propulsion.

Release devices, explosive 47°/0173

Articles consisting of a small charge of explosive with means of initiation and rods or links. They sever the rods or links to release equipment quickly.

Rivets, explosive 47°/0174

Articles consisting of a small charge of explosive inside a metallic rivet.

Rocket motors 3°/0280; 15°/0281; 27°/0186

Articles consisting of a charge of explosive, generally a solid propellant, contained in a cylinder fitted with one or more nozzles. They are designed to propel a rocket or a guided missile.

Rocket motors, liquid fuelled 23°/0395; 32°/0396

Articles consisting of a liquid fuel within a cylinder fitted with one or more nozzles. They are designed to propel a rocket or a guided missile.

Rocket motors with hypergolic liquids with or without expelling charge 25°/0322; 34°/0250

Articles consisting of a hypergolic fuel contained in a cylinder fitted with one or more nozzles. They are designed to propel a rocket or a guided missile.

Rockets, line throwing 21°/0238; 30°/0240; 43°/0453

Articles consisting of a rocket motor which is designed to extend a line.

Rockets, liquid fuelled, with bursting charge 10°/0397; 23°/0398

Articles consisting of a liquid fuel within a cylinder fitted with one or more nozzles and fitted with a warhead. The term includes guided missiles.

Rockets with bursting charge 6°/0181; 18°/0182

Articles consisting of a rocket motor and a warhead without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. The term includes guided missiles.

Rockets, with bursting charge 7°/0180; 19°/0295

Articles consisting of a rocket motor and a warhead with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. The term includes guided missiles.

Rockets, with expelling charge 15°/0436; 27°/0437; 37°/0438

Articles consisting of a rocket motor and a charge to expel the payload from a rocket head. The term includes guided missiles.

Rockets, with inert head 27°/0183

Articles consisting of a rocket motor and an inert head. The term includes guided missiles.

Signal devices, hand 43°/0191; 47°/0373

Portable articles containing pyrotechnic substances which produce visual signals or warnings. The term includes small surface flares such as highway or railway flares and small distress flares.

Signals, distress, ship 9°/0194; 30°/0195

Articles containing pyrotechnic substances designed to produce signals by means of sound, flame or smoke or any combination thereof.

Signals, railway track, explosive 9°/0192; 30°/0492; 43°/0493; 47°/0193

Articles containing a pyrotechnic substance which explodes with a loud report when the article is crushed. They are designed to be placed on a rail.

Signals, smoke, 9°/0196; 19°/0313; 30°/0487; 43°/0197

Articles containing pyrotechnic substances which emit smoke. In addition they may contain devices for emitting audible signals.

Sounding devices, explosive 5°/0374; 17°/0375

Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive, without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. They are dropped from ships and function when they reach a predetermined depth or the sea bed.

Sounding devices, explosive 7°/0296; 19°/0204

Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. They are dropped from ships and function when they reach a predetermined depth or the sea bed.

Substances, explosive, very insensitive (Substances, EVI 48°/0482)

Substances presenting a mass explosion hazard but which are so insensitive that there is very little probability of initiation or of transition from burning to detonation under normal conditions of transport, and which have passed Test Series 5.

Torpedoes, liquid fuelled, with inert head 32°/0450

Articles consisting of a liquid explosive system to propel the torpedo through the water, with an inert head.

Torpedoes, liquid fuelled, with or without bursting charge 10°/0449

Articles consisting of either a liquid explosive system to propel the torpedo through the water, with or without a warhead; or a liquid non-explosive system to propel the torpedo through the water, with a warhead.

Torpedoes, with bursting charge 5°/0451

Articles consisting of a non-explosive system to propel the torpedo through the water, and a warhead without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features.

Torpedoes, with bursting charge 6°/0329

Articles consisting of an explosive system to propel the torpedo through the water, and a warhead without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features.

Torpedoes, with bursting charge 7°/0330

Articles consisting of an explosive or non-explosive system to propel the torpedo through the water, and a warhead with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features.

Tracers for ammunition 30°/0212; 43°/0306

Sealed articles containing pyrotechnic substances, designed to reveal the trajectory of a projectile.

Tritonal 4°/0390

Substance consisting of trinitrotoluene (TNT) mixed with aluminium.

Warheads, rocket, with burster or expelling charge 39°/0370

Articles consisting of an inert payload and a small charge of detonating or deflagrating explosive, without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to be fitted to a rocket motor to scatter inert material. The term includes warheads for guided missiles.

Warheads, rocket, with burster or expelling charge 41°/0371

Articles consisting of an inert payload and a small charge of detonating or deflagrating explosive, with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to be fitted to a rocket motor to scatter inert material. The term includes warheads for guided missiles.

Warheads, rocket, with bursting charge 5°/0286; 17°/0287

Articles consisting of a detonating explosive, without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to be fitted to a rocket. The term includes warheads for guided missiles.

Warheads, rocket, with bursting charge 7°/0369

Articles consisting of a detonating explosive, with means of initiation not containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to be fitted to a rocket. The term includes warheads for guided missiles.

Warheads, torpedo, with bursting charge 5°/0221

Articles consisting of a detonating explosive, without means of initiation or with means of initiation containing two or more effective protective features. They are designed to be fitted to a torpedo.

3171-

3199

APPENDIX A.2

A. PROVISIONS RELATING TO THE NATURE OF ALUMINIUM-ALLOY RECEPTACLES FOR CERTAIN GASES OF CLASS 2

I. Quality of the material

3200 (1) The materials of aluminium-alloy receptacles which are to be accepted for the gases referred to in marginal 2203 (2) (b) shall satisfy the following requirements:

>TABLE>

The actual properties will depend on the composition of the alloy concerned and on the final treatment of the receptacle, but whatever alloy is used the thickness of the receptacle shall be calculated by the following formulae:

e = or e = where

e = minimum thickness of receptacle wall, in mm;

PMPa = test pressure, in MPa;

Pbar = test pressure, in bar;

D = nominal external diameter of the receptable, in mm; and

Re = guaranteed minimum 0,2 % proof stress, in MPa (=N/mm2).

In addition, the value of the minimum guaranteed proof stress (Re) introduced into the formula is no case to be greater than 0,85 times the guaranteed minimum tensile strength (Rm), whatever the type of alloy used.

Notes: 1. The above characteristics are based on previous experience with the following materials used for receptacles:

Column A: Aluminium, unalloyed, 99,5 % pure;

Column B: Alloys of aluminium and magnesium;

Column C: Alloys of aluminium, silicon and magnesium, such as ISO/R209-A1-Si-Mg (Aluminium Association 6351);

Column D: Alloys of aluminium, copper and magnesium.

2. The permanent elongation at fracture (1 = 5d) is measured by means of test-pieces of circular section in which the gauge length 1 is equal to five times the diameter d; if test-pieces of rectangular section are used the gauge length must be calculated by the formula: l = 5,65 F0, where F0 is the initial cross-sectional area of the test-piece.

3. (a) The bend test (see diagram) shall be carried out on specimens obtained by cutting into two equal parts of width 3e, but in no case less than 25 mm, an annular section of a cylinder. The specimens shall not be machined elsewhere than on the edges.

(b) The bend test shall be carried out between a mandrel of diameter (d) and two circular supports separated by a distance of (d + 3e). During the test the inner faces shall be separated by a distance not greater than the diameter of the mandrel.

(c) The specimen shall not exhibit cracks when it has been bent inwards around the mandrel until the inner faces are separated by a distance not greater than the diameter of the mandrel.

(d) The ratio (n) between the diameter of the mandrel and the thickness of the specimen shall conform to the values given in the table.

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

Diagram of bend test

(2) A lower minimum elongation value is acceptable on condition that an additional test approved by the competent authority of the country in which the receptacles are made proves that safety of carriage is ensured to the same extent as in the case of receptacles constructed to comply with the characteristics given in the table in paragraph (1).

(3) The wall thickness of the receptacles at the thinnest point shall be the following:

where the diameter of the receptacle is less than 50 mm: not less than 1,5 mm;

where the diameter of the receptacle is from 50 to 150 mm: not less than 2 mm; and

where the diameter of the receptacle is more than 150 mm: not less than 3 mm.

(4) The ends of the receptacles shall have a semicircular, elliptical or 'basket-handle` section; they shall afford the same degree of safety as the body of the receptacle.

II. Additional official test for aluminium alloys

3201 (1) In addition to the tests required by marginals 2215, 2216 and 2217, it is necessary to test for possible intercrystalline corrosion of the inside wall of the receptacle where use is made of an aluminium alloy containing copper, or where use is made of an aluminium alloy containing magnesium and manganese and the magnesium content is greater than 3,5 % or the manganese content lower than 0,5 %.

(2) In the case of an aluminium/copper alloy the test shall be carried out by the manufacturer at the time of approval of a new alloy by the competent authority; it shall thereafter be repeated, in the course of production, for each pour of the alloy.

(3) In the case of an aluminium/magnesium alloy the test shall be carried out by the manufacturer at the time of approval of a new alloy and of the manufacturing process by the competent authority. The test shall be repeated whenever a change is made in the composition of the alloy or in the manufacturing process.

(4) (a) Preparation of aluminium/copper alloys

Before the aluminium/copper alloy is subjected to the corrosion test, the samples shall be cleansed of grease by means of a suitable solvent, and dried.

(b) Preparation of aluminium/magnesium alloys

Before the aluminium/magnesium alloy is subjected to the corrosion test, the samples shall be heated for seven days at 100 °C; they shall then be cleansed of grease by means of a suitable solvent, and dried.

(c) Performance of test

The inner side of a specimen measuring 1 000 mm2 (33,3 × 30 mm) of the material containing copper shall be treated at ambient temperature, for 24 hours, with 1 000 ml of an aqueous solution containing 3 % NaCl and 0,5 % HCl.

(d) Examination

After being washed and dried, a section of the specimen 20 mm long shall be examined micrographically at a magnification of 100 to 500 X, preferably after electropolishing.

The depth of attack shall not go beyond the second layer of grains from the surface subjected to the corrosion test; in principle, if the entire first layer of grains is attacked, only part of the second row should be.

In the case of sections, examination shall be performed at right angles to the surface.

Where after electropolishing it is found necessary to render the grain boundaries particularly visible for subsequent examination, this shall be done by a method acceptable to the competent authority.

III. Protection of the inner surface

3202 The inner surface of aluminium-alloy receptacles shall be provided with a suitable anti-corrosion coating if the competent testing stations so consider necessary.

3203-

3249

B. REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING THE MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

OF RECEPTACLES INTENDED FOR THE CARRIAGE OF DEEPLY-REFRIGERATED

LIQUEFIED GASES OF CLASS 2

3250 (1) Receptacles shall be made of steel, aluminium, aluminium alloy, copper, or copper alloy, e.g. brass. However, receptacles, made of copper or copper alloy shall be accepted only for gases containing no acetylene.

(2) Only materials appropriate to the lowest working temperature of the receptacles, and of their fittings and accessories, may be used.

3251 The following materials shall be accepted for the manufacture of receptacles:

(a) steels not subject to brittle fracture at the lowest working temperature (see marginal 3265);

1. fine-grained unalloyed steels, down to a temperature of P 60 °C;

2. nickel steels (with a nickel content of 0,5 to 9 %) down to a temperature of P 196 °C, depending on the nickel content;

3. austenitic chrome-nickel steels, down to a temperature of P 270 °C;

(b) aluminium not less than 99,5 % pure, or aluminium alloys (see marginal 3266);

(c) deoxidized copper not less than 99,9 % pure, or copper alloys having a copper content of over 56 % (see marginal 3267).

3252 (1) Receptacles shall be either seamless or welded.

(2) Receptacles under marginal 2207 made of austenitic steel, of copper or of copper alloy may alternatively be hard-soldered.

3253 The fittings and accessories may either be screwed to the receptacles, or be affixed thereto as follows:

(a) receptacles made of steel, aluminium or aluminium alloy: by welding;

(b) receptacles made of austenitic steel, of copper or of copper alloy: by welding or hard-soldering.

3254 The construction of receptacles and their mode of affixing to the vehicle, to the underframe or in the container frame shall be such as to preclude with certainty any such reduction in the temperature of the load-bearing components as would be likely to render them brittle. The fastenings of the receptacles shall themselves be so designed that even when the receptacle is at its lowest working temperature they still possess the necessary mechanical properties.

3255-

3264

1. Materials, receptacles

(a) Steel receptacles

3265 The materials used for the manufacture of receptacles, and the weld beads, shall at their lowest working temperatures meet at least the following requirements as to impact strength.

The tests may be conducted with test-pieces having either a U-shaped or a V-shaped notch.

>TABLE>

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

In the case of austenitic steels, only the weld bead need be subjected to an impact-strength test.

For working temperatures below P 196 °C, the impact-strength test is not performed at the lowest working temperature, but at P 196 °C.

(b) Receptacles made of aluminium or aluminium alloy

3266 The seams of receptacles shall at ambient temperature meet the following requirements as to bending coefficient:

>TABLE>

(c) Receptacles made of copper or copper alloy

3267 It is not necessary to carry out tests to determine whether the impact strength is adequate.

3268-

3274

2. Tests

(a) Impact-strength tests

3275 The impact strength shown in marginal 3265 relate to test-pieces measuring 10 x 10 mm and having a U-shaped or a V-shaped notch.

Notes: 1. With regard to the shape of the test piece, see marginal 3265 [table, notes (b) and (c)].

2. For sheets less than 10 mm but not less than 5 mm thick, test-pieces having a cross-section of 10 × e mm, where 'e` represents the thickness of the sheet, shall be used. Such impact-strength tests generally yield higher values than do such tests on standard test-pieces.

3. No impact-strength test shall be carried out on sheets less than 5 mm thick, or on their seams.

3276 (1) For testing sheet metal the impact strength shall be determined on three test-pieces. The test-pieces shall be removed at right angles to the direction of rolling in the case of test-pieces with a U-shaped notch and in the direction of rolling in the case of test-pieces with a V-shaped notch.

(2) For testing seams the test-pieces shall be taken as follows:

e ≤ 10 mm

- three test-pieces from the centre of the weld;

- three test-pieces from the zone of deformation created by the weld (the notch shall be completely outside the melted area but as near to it as possible);

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

Centre of weld

Zone of deformation

i.e. six test-pieces in all.

The test-pieces shall be so machined as to have the maximum possible thickness.

10 <e ≤ 20

- three test-pieces from the centre of the weld;

- three test-pieces from the zone of deformation;

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

Centre of weld

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

Zone of deformation

i.e. six test-pieces in all.

e >20

two sets of three test-pieces (one set on the upper face, one set on the lower face) at each of the points indicated below;

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

Centre of weld

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

Zone of deformation

i.e. twelve test-pieces in all.

3277 (1) For sheet metal the average of three tests shall meet the minimum values given in marginal 3265; none of the values may be more than 30 % below the minimum specified.

(2) For welds the average values obtained from three of the test-pieces taken at the different points, centre of weld and zone of deformation, shall correspond to the minimum values shown. None of the values may be more than 30 % below the minimum specified.

3278-

3284

(b) Determination of bending coefficient

3285 (1) The bending coefficient k referred to in marginal 3266 is defined as follows:

k = 50 >NUM>e

>DEN>r

where e = thickness of sheet in mm; and

r = mean radius of curvature in mm of the test-piece when the first crack appears in the tension zone.

(2) The bending coefficient k shall be determined for the seam. The width of the test piece shall be equal to 3e.

(3) Four tests shall be performed on the seam, two with the root in the compression zone (fig. 1) and two with the root in the tension zone (fig. 2); all values obtained shall meet the minimum value requirements of marginal 3266.

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 3286-

3290

C. PROVISIONS RELATING TO TESTS ON AEROSOL DISPENSERS AND NON-REFILLABLE CONTAINERS FOR GASES UNDER PRESSURE OF CLASS 2, 10° AND 11°

1. Pressure and bursting tests on receptacle model

3291 Hydraulic pressure tests shall be carried out on at least five empty receptacles of each model;

(a) until the prescribed test pressure is reached, by which time no leakage or visible permanent deformation shall have occurred; and

(b) until leakage or bursting occurs; the dished end, if any, should yield first and the receptacle should not leak or burst until a pressure 1.2 times the test pressure has been reached or passed.

2. Tightness (leakproofness) tests on all receptacles

3292 (1) For the test on aerosol dispensers (10°) and non-refillable containers for gas under pressure (11°) in a hot-water bath, the temperature of the bath and the duration of the test shall be such that the internal pressure of each receptacle reaches at least 90 % of the internal pressure that would be reached at 55 °C.

However, if the contents are sensitive to heat or if the receptacles are made of a plastics material which softens at this test temperature, the temperature of the bath shall be from 20 °C to 30 °C; in addition, one dispenser out of every 2 000 shall be tested at the temperature prescribed in the foregoing paragraph.

(2) No leakage or permanent deformation of receptacles shall occur. The provision concerning permanent deformation is not applicable to receptacles which, being made of a plastics material, soften.

3293-

3299

APPENDIX A.3

A. TESTS RELATING TO FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS OF CLASSES 3, 6.1 AND 8

Test for determining flash-point

3300 (1) The flash-point shall be determined by means of one of the following types of apparatus:

(a) for use at temperatures not exceeding 50 °C: Abel, Abel-Pensky, Luchaire-Finances, Tag;

(b) for use at temperatures above 50 °C: Pensky-Martens, Luchaire-Finances;

(c) failing these, any other closed-cup apparatus capable of giving results within 2 °C of those which an apparatus listed above would give at the same place.

(2) To determine the flash-point of paints, gums and similar viscous products containing solvents, only apparatus and test methods suitable for determining the flash-point of viscous liquids shall be used, such as method A of IP standard 170/94 or more recent IP () standards or German standard DIN 53 213.

3301 The test procedure shall be:

(a) for the Abel apparatus, that of IP () standard 170/94; this standard may also be used with the Abel-Pensky apparatus;

(b) for the Pensky-Martens apparatus, that of IP () standard 34/88, or that of ASTM () standard D.93/80;

(c) for the Tag apparatus, that of ASTM () standard D.56/87;

(d) for the Luchaire apparatus, that of the French standard NFT 60.103.

If any other apparatus is used, the following precautions shall be taken:

1. The test shall be performed in a place free from draughts.

2. The rate of temperature increase of the liquid being tested shall never exceed 5 °C per minute.

3. The pilot-flame shall be 5 mm (± 0,5 mm) long.

4. The pilot-flame shall be applied to the opening of the receptacle at each rise of 1 °C in the temperature of the liquid.

3302 In the event of a dispute as to the classification of a flammable liquid, the item number proposed by the consignor shall be accepted if a check-test of the flash-point, yields a result not differing by more than 2 °C from the limits (23 °C, and 61 °C respectively) stated in marginal 2301. If the difference is more than 2 °C a second check-test shall be carried out, and the highest figure obtained shall be adopted.

Test for determining peroxide content

3303 To determine the peroxide content of a liquid, the procedure is as follows:

A quantity p (about 5 g, weighed to the nearest 0,01 g) of the liquid to be titrated is placed in an Erlenmeyer flask; 20 cm3 of acetic anhydride and about 1 g of powdered solid potassium iodide are added; the flask is shaken and, after 10 minutes, heated for 3 minutes to about 60 °C. When it has been left to cool for 5 minutes, 25 cm3 of water are added. After this, it is left standing for half an hour, then the liberated iodine is titrated with a decinormal solution of sodium thiosulphate, no indicator being added; complete discoloration indicates the end of the the reaction. If n is the number of cm3 of thiosulphate solution required, the percentage of peroxide (calculated as H2O2) present in the sample is obtained by the formula >NUM>7 n

>DEN>100 P

Method of testing for combustibility

3304 (1) The method describes a procedure for determining whether the substance, when heated under the test conditions and exposed to an external source of flame applied in a standard manner, sustains combustion.

(2) Principle of the method: a metal block with a concave depression (test portion well) is heated to a specified temperature. A specified volume of the substance under test is transferred to the well and its ability to sustain combustion is noted after application and subsequent removal of a standard flame under specified conditions.

(3) Apparatus: a combustibility tester consisting of a block of aluminium alloy or other corrosion-resistant metal of high thermal conductivity is used. The block has a concave well and a pocket drilled to take a thermometer. A small gas jet assembly on a swivel is attached to the block. The handle and gas inlet for the gas jet may be fitted at any convenient angle to the gas jet. A suitable apparatus is shown in figure 1 and the essential dimensions are given in figures 1 and 2.

The following equipment is needed:

(a) Gauge, for checking that the height of the centre of the gas jet above the top of the test portion well is 2,2 mm (see figure 1);

(b) Thermometer, mercury in glass, for horizontal operation, with a sensitivity not less than 1mm/°C, or other measuring device of equivalent sensitivity permitting reading at 0,5 °C intervals. When in position in the block, the thermometer bulb should be surrounded with thermally conducting thermoplastic compound;

c) Hotplate, fitted with a temperature-control device. (Other types of apparatus with suitable temperature-control facilities may be employed to heat the metal block);

(d) Stopwatch, or other suitable timing device;

(e) Syringe, capable of delivering 2 ml to an accuracy of ± 0,1 ml; and

(f) Fuel source, butane test fuel.

(4) Sampling: The sample shall be representative of the substance to be tested and shall be supplied and kept in a tightly closed container prior to test. Because of the possibility of loss of volatile constituents, the sample shall receive only the minimum treatment to ensure its homogeneity. After removing each test portion, the sample container shall be immediately closed tightly to ensure that no volatile components escape from the container; if this closure is incomplete, an entirely new sample shall be taken.

(5) Procedure: Carry out the determination in triplicate.

WARNING - Do not carry out the test in a small confined area (for example a glove box), because of the hazard of explosions.

(a) It is essential that the apparatus is set up in a completely draught-free area (see warning) and in the absence of strong light, to facilitate observation of flash, flame, etc.

(b) Place the metal block on the hotplate or heat the metal block by other suitable means so that its temperature, as indicated by the thermometer placed in the metal block, is maintained at the specified temperature with a tolerance of ± 1 °C. The test temperature is 60,5/75 °C [see (h)]. Correct this temperature for the difference in barometric pressure from the standard atmospheric pressure pressure (101,3 kPa) by raising the test temperature for a high pressure or lowering the test temperature for a lower pressure by 1,0 °C for each 4 kPa difference. Ensure that the top of the metal block is exactly horizontal. Use the gauge to check that the jet is 2,2 mm above the top of the well when in the test position.

(c) Light the butane test fuel with the jet away from the test position (i.e. in the 'off` position, away from the well). Adjust the size of the flame so that it is 8 mm to 9 mm high and approximately 5 mm wide.

(d) Using the syringe, take from the sample container at least 2 ml of the sample and rapidly transfer a test portion of 2 ml ± 0,1 ml to the well of the combustibility tester and immediately start the timing device.

(e) After a heating time of 60 s, by which time the test portion is deemed to have reached its equilibrium temperature, and if the test fluid has not ignited, swing the test flame into the test position over the edge of the pool of liquid. Maintain it in this position for 15 s and then return it to the 'off` position while observing the behaviour of the test portion. The test flame should remain alight throughout the test.

(f) For each test observe and record:

(i) whether there is ignition and sustained combustion or flashing, or neither, of the test portion before the test flame is moved into the test position;

(ii) whether the test portion ignites while the test flame is in the test position, and, if so, how long combustion is sustained after the test flame is returned to the 'off` position.

(g) If sustained combustion interpreted in accordance with paragraph (6) is not found, repeat the complete procedure with new test portions, but with a heating time of 30 s.

(h) If sustained combustion interpreted in accordance with paragraph (6) is not found at a test temperature of 60,5 °C, repeat the complete procedure with new test portions, but at a test temperature of 75 °C.

(6) Interpretation of observations: The substance shall be assessed as sustaining combustions if, for either of the heating times, one of the following occurs with either of the test portions:

(a) When the test flame is in the 'off` position, the test portion ignites and sustains combustion;

(b) The test portion ignites while the test flame is in the test position, maintained for 15 s, and sustains combustion for more than 15 s after the test flame has been returned to the 'off` position;

Intermittent flashing shall not be interpreted as sustained combustion. Normally, at the end of 15 s, the combustion has either clearly ceased or continues. In cases of doubt, the substance shall be deemed to sustain combustion;

(c) Substances are considered not to sustain combustion if their fire point according to ISO 2592:1973 is greater than 100 C° or if they are water miscible solutions with a water content of more than 90 % by mass.

Design and dimensions of the test apparatus

for determining the combustibility of flammable liquids

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

Figure 1 - Combustibility tester

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

Figure 2 - Test gas jet and flame

3305-

3309

B. TEST FOR DETERMINING FLUIDITY

3310 To determine the fluidity of liquid or viscous substances and mixtures of Class 3 and pasty substances of Class 4.1, the following test method shall be used.

(a) Test apparatus

Commercial penetrometer conforming to ISO Standard 2137-1985, with a guide rod of 47,5 g ± 0,05 g; sieve disc of duralumin with conical bores and a mass of 102,5 g ± 0,05 g (see Figure 1); penetration vessel with an inside diameter of 72 mm to 80 mm for reception of the sample.

(b) Test procedure

The sample is poured into the penetration vessel not less than half an hour before the measurement. The vessel is then hermetically closed and left standing until the measurement. The sample in the hermetically closed penetration vessel is heated to 35 °C ± 0,5 °C and is placed on the penetrometer table immediately prior to measurement (not more than two minutes). The point S of the sieve disc is then brought into contact with the surface of the liquid and the rate of penetration is measured.

(c) Evaluation of test results

A substance is not subject to the provisions of Class 3 but to those of Class 4.1 of ADR if, after the centre S has been brought into contact with the surface of the sample, the penetration indicated by the dial gauge:

(i) after a loading time of 5 s ± 0,1 s, is less than 15,0 mm ± 0,3 mm; or

(ii) after a loading time of 5 s ± 0,1 s, is greater than 15,0 mm ± 0,3 mm, but the additional penetration after another 55 s ± 0,5 s is less than 5,0 mm ± 0,5 mm.

Note: In the case of samples having a flow point, it is often impossible to produce a steady level surface in the penetration vessel and, hence, to establish satisfactory initial measuring conditions for the contact of the point S. Furthermore, with some samples, the impact of the sieve disc can cause an elastic deformation of the surface and, in the first few seconds, simulate a deeper penetration. In all these cases, it may be appropriate to make the evaluation in (b) above.

Figure 3 - Penetrometer

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

3311-

3319

C. TESTS RELATING TO FLAMMABLE SOLIDS OF CLASS 4.1

Test methods for readily combustible solids

3320 (1) Preliminary screening test

(a) The substance in its commercial form shall be formed into an unbroken strip or powder train about 250 mm long by 20 mm wide by 10 mm high on a cool, impervious, low heat-conducting base plate.

(b) A hot flame (minimum temperature 1 000 °C) from a gas burner (minimum diameter 5 mm) is applied to one end of the powder train until the powder ignites or for a maximum of 2 minutes (5 minutes for powders of metals or metal alloys). It shall be noted whether combustion propagates along 200 mm of the train within the two-minute test period (or 20 minutes for metal powders).

(c) If the substance does not ignite and propagate combustion either by burning with flame or smouldering along 200 mm of the powder train within the two-minute (or 20 minute) test period, the substance shall not be classified as a flammable solid and no further testing is required.

(d) If the substance propagates burning over a 200 mm length of the powder train in less than two minutes, or less than 20 minutes for metal powders, the full test programme below shall be carried out.

(2) Burning rate test

In order to differentiate between any substance that can be ignited and those which burn rapidly or whose burning behaviour is particularly dangerous, only substances whose burning rate exceeds a certain limit shall be classified in Class 4.1. A burning time of less than 45 s measured over a length of 100 mm according to the procedure in marginal 3320 (3) is taken as the criterion. An attempt is made to ignite the substance under the conditions defined below and the burning time is measured. The pile is wetted beyond the zone over which the burning rate is measured and the effect on flame propagation is noted.

(3) Test procedure

(a) The powdered or granular substance, in its commercial form, is loosely filled into a mould 250 mm in length with triangular cross-section of inner height 10 mm and width 20 mm. On both sides of the mould, in the longitudinal direction, two metal sheets are mounted as lateral limitations which extend 2 mm beyond the upper edge of the triangular cross-section (see Figure 2). Mould and accessories for the preparation of the pile). The mould is then dropped three times from a height of 2 cm onto a solid surface. The lateral limitations are then removed and an impervious, non-combustible, low heat-conducting plate is placed on top of the mould, the apparatus inverted and the mould removed. Pasty substances are spread on a non-combustible surface in the form of a rope 250 mm in length with a cross-section of about 1 cm2. Any suitable ignition source such as a small flame or a hot wire of minimum temperature 1 000 °C is used to ignite the pile at one end. In the case of a moisture-sensitive substance, the test shall be carried out as quickly as possible, after removal of the substance from the container.

(b) The pile shall be arranged across the draught in a fume cupboard. The air speed shall be sufficient to prevent fumes escaping into the laboratory and shall not be varied during the test. A draught screen may be erected around the apparatus.

(c) 1 ml of a wetting solution shall be added to the pile 30-40 mm beyond the 100 mm timing zone. Apply the wetting solution to the ridge drop by drop, ensuring the whole cross-section of the pile is wetted without loss of liquid from the sides (). The liquid shall be applied over the shortest possible length of the pile consistent with avoiding loss from the sides. This part of the test is not applicable to metal powders.

(d) One end of the pile shall be ignited. When the pile has burned over a length of 80 mm, measure the rate of burning over the next 100 mm. Note whether or not the wetted zone stops propagation of the flame. The test shall be performed six times using a clean cool plate each time, unless a positive result is observed earlier.

Criteria for classification

3321 (1) Powdered, granular or pasty substances shall be classified in Class 4.1 when the burning time of one or more of the tests, in accordance with the test method described in marginal 3320 (2), is less than 45 s or the rate of burning is more than 2,2 mm s. Powders of metals or metal alloys shall be classified in this class when they can be ignited and the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in 10 minutes or less.

(2) Assignment to a letter in the various items

(a) Any solid, normally wetted, which if in a dry state would be classified as an explosive shall be assigned to letter (a).

(b) The following shall be assigned to letter (b):

any self-reactive substance, any combustible solid (other than metal powders) tested in accordance with marginal 3320 if the burning time is less than 45 s and the flame passes the wetted zone, and powders of metal or metal alloys if the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in 5 minutes or less.

(c) The following shall be assigned to letter (c):

any combustible solid (other than metal powders) tested in accordance with marginal 3320 if the burning time is less than 45 s and the wetted zone stops the flame propagation for at least 4 minutes, and metal powders if the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in more than 5 minutes.

(d) For solids which may cause or contribute to a fire through friction, a letter in the various items shall be assigned by analogy with existing classifications or in accordance with any appropriate special conditions.

3322-

3329

Figure 4

Mould and accessories for the preparation of the pile

(All dimensions in millimetres)

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

D. TESTS RELATING TO SUBSTANCES LIABLE TO SPONTANEOUS COMBUSTION

OF CLASS 4.2

3330 (1) Test method and procedure for solid pyrophoric substances

1 to 2 cm3 of the powdery substance to be tested shall be poured from a height of about 1 m onto a non-combustible surface and it shall be observed whether the substance ignites during dropping or within 5 minutes of settling. This procedure shall be repeated six times unless a positive result is obtained earlier.

(2) Test method for liquid pyrophoric substances

The test for liquid substances shall be in two parts; the first to determine whether the substance ignites when added to an inert carrier and exposed to air, the second if a negative result is obtained in the first. The second part determines whether the substance chars or ignites a filter paper.

(3) Test procedure for liquid pyrophoric substances

(a) Part 1 - A porcelain cup of about 10 cm diameter shall be filled with diatomaceous earth or silica gel at room temperature to a height of about 5 mm. Approximately 5 ml of the liquid to be tested shall be poured into the prepared porcelain cup and it shall be observed whether the substance ignites within five minutes. This procedure shall be repeated six times unless a positive result is obtained earlier.

(b) Part 2 - A 0,5 ml test sample shall be delivered from a syringe to an indented dry No 3 Whatman filter paper. The test is conducted at 25 °C ± 2 °C and at a relative humidity of 50 % ± 5 %. Observations shall be made to see whether ignition or charring occurs on the filter paper within five minutes after the liquid to be tested is introduced. This procedure shall be repeated three times, using a new filter paper each time, unless a positive result is obtained earlier.

Criteria for classification

3331 (1) A solid substance shall be classified in Class 4.2 and considered to be pyrophoric if the sample ignites in one of the tests. A liquid shall be classified in Class 4.2 and considered to be pyrophoric if it ignites in Part 1 of the test, or if the filter paper is ignited or charred in Part 2 of the test.

(2) Assignment to a letter in the various items

All pyrophoric solids and liquids shall be assigned to letter (a).

3332 (1) Test method for self-heating substances

Samples in 2,5 cm and 10 cm cubes shall be kept at a constant temperature for 24 hours and observations shall be made whether the temperature of the sample exceeds 200 °C. (The test method is a modified version of the Bowes-Cameron cage test which is a self-heating test method for carbon.)

(2) Test procedure

(a) A hot-air circulating type of oven with an inner volume of more than 9 litres and capable of controlling the internal temperature at 140 °C ± 2 °C shall be used.

(b) Cubic sample containers of 2,5 cm and 10 cm side, made of stainless steel net with a mesh size of 0,053 mm (), with their top surface open, shall be used. Each container is housed in a cubic container cover made from stainless steel net with a mesh size of 0,595 mm () and slightly larger than the sample container, so that the container fits in this cover. In order to avoid the effect of air circulation, this cover is installed in a second stainless steel cage, made from a net with a mesh size of 0,595 mm () and 15 cm x 15 cm x 25 cm in size, shall be further installed to house the cover.

(c) Chromel-Alumel thermocouples of 0,3 mm diameter shall be used for temperature measurement. One is placed in the centre of the sample and another between the sample container and the oven wall. The temperatures shall be measured continuously.

(d) The sample, powdered or granular, shall be prepared in its commercial form and filled to the brim of the sample container and the container tapped several times. If the sample settles, more shall be added. If the sample is heaped it shall be levelled to the brim. The container shall be housed in the cover and hung at the centre of the oven.

(e) The oven temperature shall be raised to 140 °C test temperature and maintained for 24 hours. The temperature of the sample shall be recorded. The first test shall be conducted with a 10 cm cube sample. Observations shall be made to determine whether spontaneous ignition occurs or whether the temperature of the sample exceeds 200 °C. If negative results are obtained, no further test is necessary. If positive results are obtained, a second test shall be conducted with a 2,5 cm cube sample to determine the packing group assignment.

Criteria for classification

3333 (1) A substance shall be classified in Class 4.2 if, in the first test using a 10 cm cube sample, spontaneous ignition occurs or the temperature of the sample exceeds 200 °C during the 24 hours test period. This criterion is based on the self-ignition temperature of charcoal, which is 50 °C for a cubic volume of 27 m3 and 140 °C for a one litre sample. Substances with self-ignition temperatures higher than 50 °C for 27 m3 shall not be classified in Class 4.2.

(2) Assignment to a letter in the various items

(a) Any substance which gives a positive result when tested with the 2,5 cm cube sample shall be assigned to letter (b).

(b) Any substance which gives a positive result when tested with the 10 cm cube sample but which gives a negative result with a 2,5 cm cube sample shall be assigned to letter (c).

3334-

3339

E. TEST RELATING TO SUBSTANCES OF CLASS 4.3 WHICH,

IN CONTACT WITH WATER, EMIT FLAMMABLE GASES

3340 (1) Test method

This test method is used to determine whether the reaction of a substance with water leads to the development of a dangerous amount of flammable gases. The test method can be applied to solid and liquid substances. It is not applicable to pyrophoric substances. The substance shall be tested in its commercial form at ambient temperature (20 °C) by bringing it into contact with water. If spontaneous ignition of the gas occurs at any stage, no further testing is necessary.

(2) Test procedure

(a) A small quantity (approximately 2 mm diameter) of the test substance shall be placed in a trough of distilled water at 20 °C. It shall be noted (i) whether any gas is emitted and (ii) if spontaneous ignition of the gas occurs.

(b) A small quantity of the test substance (approximately 2 mm diameter) shall be placed at the centre of a filter paper which is floated flat on the surface of distilled water at 20 °C in a suitable vessel, e.g. a 100 mm diameter evaporating dish. The filter paper is to keep the substance in one place, under which condition the likelihood of spontaneous ignition of any gas is greatest. It shall be noted (i) whether any gas is emitted and (ii) whether spontaneous ignition of the gas occurs.

(c) The test substance shall be made into a pile approximately 2 cm high and 3 cm diameter with a hollow in the top. A few drops of water shall be added to the hollow. It shall be noted whether (i) any gas is emitted and (ii) whether spontaneous ignition occurs.

d) For solid substances, the package shall be inspected for any powder of <500 ìm. If that powder constitutes more than 1 % (mass) of the total, or if the substance is friable, then the whole of the sample shall be ground to a powder before testing to allow for a reduction in particle size during handling and carriage. Otherwise, as for liquids, the substance shall be tested in its commercial state. The test shall be performed at ambient temperature (20 °C) and atmospheric pressure, and repeated three times.

e) Water is put into the dropping funnel and enough of the substance (up to a maximum weight of 25 g) to produce between 100 cm3 and 250 cm3 of gas is weighed and placed in a conical flask. The tap of the dropping funnel is opened to let the water into the conical flask and a stop-watch is started. The volume of gas emitted is measured by any suitable means. The time taken for all the gas to be emitted is noted and, where possible, intermediate readings are taken. The rate of emission of gas is calculated over seven hours at one hour intervals. If the rate of emission is erratic or is increasing after seven hours, the measuring time shall be extended to a maximum of five days. The five-day test may be stopped if the rate of emission becomes steady or continually decreases and sufficient data have been established to be able to assign the substance to a group or to decide that the substance is not to be classified in Class 4.3. If the chemical identity of the gas is unknown, the gas shall be tested for flammability.

Criteria for classification

3341 (1) A substance shall be classified in Class 4.3 if spontaneous ignition occurs at any stage of the test procedure, or if flammable gas is emitted at a rate greater than 1 litre per kilogramme of the substance per hour.

(2) Assignment to a letter in the various items

(a) The following shall be assigned to letter (a):

any substance which reacts vigorously with water at ambient temperature and emits gas liable to ignite spontaneously, or which reacts readily with water at ambient temperature such that the rate of emission of flammable gas in one minute is equal to or greater than 10 litres per kilogramme of substance.

(b) The following shall be assigned to letter (b):

any substance which reacts readily with water at ambient temperature such that the maximum rate of emission of flammable gas is equal to or greater than 20 litres per kilogramme of substance per hour, and which does not meet the criteria for letter (a).

(c) The following shall be assigned to letter (c):

any substance which reacts slowly with water at ambient temperature such that the maximum rate of emission of flammable gas is equal to or greater than 1 litre per kilogramme of substance per hour, and which does not meet the criteria for letters (a) and (b).

3342-

3349

F. TEST RELATING TO SOLID OXIDIZING SUBSTANCES OF CLASS 5.1

3350 (1) Test method

This test method is designed to measure the potential for a solid substance to increase the burning rate or burning intensity of a combustible substance when the two are thoroughly mixed. Two tests shall be run for each substance to be evaluated, one at a 1 to 1 ratio (mass), of sample to sawdust and one at a 4 to 1 ratio (mass), of sample to sawdust. The burning characteristics of each mixture are compared with the standard 1 to 1 ratio (mass), of ammonium persulphate.

(2) Test procedure

(a) Ammonium persulphate, potassium perchlorate and potassium bromate are the reference substances. These substances shall pass through a sieve mesh size smaller than 0,3 mm and shall not be ground. The reference substances are dried at 65 °C for 12 hours and kept in a desiccator until required.

(b) Softwood sawdust is the combustible material in this test. It shall pass through a sieve mesh size smaller than 1,6 mm and contain less than 5 % of water (mass). If necessary, it is made into a layer less than 25 mm thick, dried at 105 °C for 4 hours and kept in a desiccator until required.

(c) A 30,0 g ± 0,1 g mixture of the reference substance and wood sawdust is prepared in a 1 to 1 ratio (mass). Two 30,0 g ± 0,1 g mixtures of the substance to be tested, in the particle size in which it will be carried, and the wood sawdust are prepared in ratios of 1 to 1 (mass), and 4 to 1 (mass). Each mixture shall be mixed mechanically without excessive stress as thoroughly as possible.

(d) The test shall be conducted in a draught or a place equipped with a ventilator.

(e) The conditions at normal atmospheric pressure are: temperature 20 °C ± 5 °C, humidity 50 % ± 110 %.

(f) Each of the mixtures shall be formed into a conical pile with dimensions of approximately 70 mm base diameter and 60 mm height on a cool, impervious, low heat-conducting surface. Ignition shall be provided by means of a wire of inert metal in the form of a circular loop 40 mm in diameter positioned inside the pile 1 mm above the test surface. The wire shall be heated electrically to 1 000 °C until the first signs of combustion are observed or it is clear that the pile cannot be ignited. The electrical power is turned off as soon as there is combustion.

(g) The time shall be recorded from the first observable signs of combustion to the end of all reaction: smoke, flame, incandescence.

(h) The test shall be repeated three times for each of the mixing ratios.

Criteria for classification

3351 (1) A solid substance shall be classified in Class 5.1 if, in either concentration tested, the mean burning time of the sawdust, established from three tests, is equal to or less than that of the average of the three tests with ammonium persulphate mixture.

(2) Assignment to a letter in the various items

(a) Any substance which, in either concentration tested, exhibits a burning time less than that with potassium bromate shall be assigned to letter (a).

(b) Any substance which, in either concentration tested, exhibits a burning time equal to or less than that with potassium perchlorate and does not meet the criteria for group (a) shall be assigned to letter (b).

c) Any substance which, in either concentration tested, exhibits a burning time equal to or less than that with ammonium persulphate and does not meet the criteria for letters (a) and (b) shall be assigned to letter (c).

3352-

3389

G. TEST FOR DETERMINING THE ECOTOXICITY, PERSISTENCE

AND BIOACCUMULATION OF SUBSTANCES

IN THE ACQUATIC ENVIRONMENT FOR ASSIGNMENT TO CLASS 9

Note: The test methods used shall be those adopted by the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) and the European Economic Commission (EEC). If other methods are used, they shall be internationally recognized, be equivalent to the OECD/EEC tests and be referenced in test reports.

3390 Acute toxicity for fish

The object is to determine the concentration which causes 50 % mortality in the test species; this is the (LC50), value, namely, the concentration of the substance in water which will cause the death of 50 % of a test group of fish during a continuous period of testing of at least 96 hours. Appropriate types of fish include: striped brill (Brachydanio rerio), fathead minnow (Pimephales promelas) and rainbow trout (Oncorhynchus mykiss).

The fish are exposed to the test substance added to the water in varying concentrations (+ 1 control). Observations are recorded at least every 24 hours. At the end of the 96-hour activity and, if possible, at each observation, the concentration causing the death of 50 % of the fish is calculated. The no observed effect concentration (NOEC) at 96 hours is also determined.

3391 Acute toxicity for daphnia

The object is to determine the effective concentration of the substance in water which renders 50 % of the daphnia unable to swim (EC50). The appropriate test organisms are daphnia magna and daphnia pulex. The daphnia are exposed for 48 hours to the test substance added to the water in varying concentrations. The no observed effect concentration (NOEC) at 48 hours is also determined.

3392 Algal growth inhibition

The object is to determine the effect of a chemical on the growth of algae under standard conditions. The change in biomass and the rate of growth with algae under the same conditions, but without the presence of the test chemical, are compared over 72 hours. The results are expressed as the effective concentration which reduces the rate of algal growth by 50 %, IC50r, and also the formation of the biomass, IC50b.

3393 Tests for ready biodegradability

The object is to determine the degree of biodegradation under standard aerobic conditions. The test substance is added in low concentrations to a nutrient solution containing aerobic bacteria. The progress of degradation is followed for 28 days by determining the parameter specified in the test method used. Several equivalent test methods are available. The parameters include reduction of dissolved organic carbon (DOC), carbon dioxide (CO2) generation of oxygen (O2) depletion.

A substance is considered to be readily biodegradable if within not more that 28 days the following criteria are satisfied - within 10 days from when degradation first reaches 10 %:

Reduction of DOC: 70 %

Generation of CO2: 60 % of theoretical CO2 production

Depletion of O2: 60 % of theoretical O2 requirement

The test may be continued beyond 28 days if the above criteria are not satisfied, but the result will represent the inherent biodegradability of the test substance. For assignment purposes, the 'ready` result is normally required.

Where only COD and BOD5 data are available, a substance is considered to be readily biodegradable if:

BOD5

---- ≥ 0,5

COD

BOD (Biochemical Oxygen Demand) is defined as the mass of dissolved oxygen required by a specific volume of solution of the substance for the process of biochemical oxidation under prescribed conditions. The result is expressed as grams of BOD per gram of test substance. The normal test period is five days using a national standard test procedure.

COD (Chemical Oxygen Demand) is a measure of the oxidizability of a substance, expressed as the equivalent amount in oxygen of an oxidizing reagent consumed by the substance under fixed laboratory conditions. The results are expressed in grams of COD per gram of substance. A national standard procedure may be used.

3394 Tests for bioaccumulation potential

(1) The object is to determine the potential for bioaccumulation either by the ratio at equilibrium of the concentration (c) of a substance in a solvent to that in water or by the bioconcentration factor (BCF).

(2) The ratio at equilibrium of the concentration (c) of a substance in a solvent to that in water is normally expressed as a log10. The solvent and water shall have negligible miscibility and the substance shall not ionize in water. The solvent normally used is n-octanol.

In the case of n-octanol and water, the result is:

log Pow = log10 [c°/cw]

where Pow is the partition coefficient obtained by dividing the concentration of the substance in noctanol (c°) by the concentration of the substance in water (Cw). If logPow ≥ 3,0 then the substance has a potential bioaccumulate.

(3) The bioconcentration factor (BCF) is defined as the ratio of the concentration of the test substance in the test fish (cf) to the concentration in the test water (cw) at steady state:

BCF = (cf)/(cw)

The principle of the test involves exposing fish to a solution or dispersion at known concentrations of the test substance in water. Continuous flow, static or semi-static procedures may be used according to the test procedure selected, based on the properties of the test substances. Fish are exposed to the test substances over a given period of time, followed by a period of no further exposure. During the second period, measurements are made of the rate of increase in the water of the test substance (i.e. the rate of excretion of depuration).

(Full details of the various test procedures and the calculation method for the BCF are given in the OECD Guidelines for Testing of Chemicals, methods 305A to 305E, 12 May 1981.)

(4) A substance may have a log Pow greater than 3 and a BCF less than 100 which would indicate little or no potential to bioaccumulate. In cases of doubt, the BCF value takes precedence over log Pow, as indicated in the flow chart shown in marginal 3396.

Criteria

3395 A substance may be regarded as a pollutant to the aquatic environment if it satisfies one of the following criteria:

The lowest of the values of the 96-hour LC50 for fish, the 48-hour EC50 for daphnia or the 72-hour IC50 for algae

- is less than or equal to 1 mg/L;

- is greater than 1 mg/L but less than or equal to 10 mg/L, and the substance is not biodegradable;

- is greater than 1 mg/L but less than or equal to 10 mg/L, and the log Pow is greater than or equal to 3,0 (unless the experimentally determined BCF is less than or equal to 100).

3396 Procedure to be followed

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

3397-

3399

APPENDIX A.4

3400-

3499 Reserved

APPENDIX A.5

GENERAL PACKING CONDITIONS, TYPES OF PACKAGING, REQUIREMENTS

APPLICABLE TO PACKAGINGS AND TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR PACKAGINGS

Note: These requirements apply to packagings containing substances and articles of Classes 1, 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6,2, 8 and 9.

Section I

General packing conditions

3500 (1) Packagings shall be so manufactured and closed as to prevent any leakage of contents from a package prepared for dispatch such as might be caused in normal conditions of carriage particularly by vibration or changes in temperature, humidity or pressure. No dangerous substance shall adhere to the outside of packages. These provisions apply both to new and to reused packagings.

(2) Parts of packagings which are in direct contact with dangerous substances shall not be affected by chemical or other action of those substances; where necessary, they shall be provided with a suitable inner coating or treatment. Such parts of packagings shall not incorporate constituents liable to react dangerously with the contents, to form hazardous products, or significantly to weaken them.

(3) Each packaging except inner packagings of combination packagings shall conform to a design type tested and approved in accordance with the requirements laid down in section IV. Mass-produced packagings shall conform to the approved design type.

(4) Where packagings are filled with liquid substances, sufficient ullage shall be left to ensure that no leakage of liquid substance and no permanent distortion of the packaging occurs as a result of expansion of the liquid substance, due to temperatures which may be attained during carriage. For a filling temperature of 15 °C, the degree of filling shall be determined as follows, unless otherwise provided under a particular class, either:

(a)

>TABLE>

or

(b) Degree of filling = >NUM>98

>DEN>1 + á (50-tF)

% of the capacity of the packaging.

In this formula á represents the mean coefficient of cubic expansion of the liquid substance between 15 °C and 50 °C; that is to say, for a maximum rise in temperature of 35 °C, á is calculated according to the formula:

á = >NUM>d15 P d50

>DEN>35 × d50

d15 and d50 being the relative densities () of the liquid at 15 °C and 50 °C and tF the mean temperature of the liquid at the time of filling.

(5) Inner packagings shall be packed in an outer packaging in such a way that, under normal conditions of carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the outer packaging. Inner packagings which are liable to break or be punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or stoneware or of certain plastics materials, etc., shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material. Any leakage of the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging.

(6) Inner packagings containing different substances which may react dangerously with one another and cause:

(a) combustion and/or evolution of considerable heat;

(b) emission of flammable and/or toxic gases;

(c) the formation of corrosive substances; or

(d) the formation of unstable substances,

shall not be placed in the same outer packaging (see also the mixed packing provisions under the various classes).

(7) The closure of packagings containing wetted or diluted substances shall be such that the percentage of liquid (water, solvent or phlegmatizer) does not fall below the prescribed limits during carriage.

(8) Where overpressure may develop in a package through the emission of gas from the contents (as a result of temperature increase or other causes), the packaging may be fitted with a vent provided that the gas emitted will not cause any danger on account of its toxicity, its inflammability, the quantity released, etc. The vent shall be so designed that, when the packaging is in the attitude in which it is intended to be transported, leakages of liquid and the penetration of foreign matter are prevented under normal conditions of carriage. However, a substance may be carried in such a packaging only where a vent is expressly prescribed for that substance in the conditions of carriage of the relevant class.

(9) New, remanufactured, reused or reconditioned packagings shall be capable of passing the tests prescribed in section IV. Before being filled and handed over for carriage, every packaging shall be inspected and its freedom from corrosion, contamination or other damage, verified. Any packaging which shows signs of reduced strength in comparison with the approved design type shall no longer be used or shall be so reconditioned that it is able to withstand the design-type tests.

(10) Packagings used for liquids shall undergo a leakproofness test if so required by and under the conditions prescribed in marginal 3560.

(11) Liquids shall be filled only into packagings which have an appropriate resistance to the internal pressure that may be developed under normal conditions of carriage. Packagings marked with the hydraulic test pressure as prescribed in marginal 3512 (1) (d) shall be filled only with a liquid having a vapour pressure:

(a) such that the total gauge pressure in the packaging (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling substance plus the partial pressure of air or other inert gases, less 100 kPa) at 55 °C determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with (4) above and a filling temperature of 15 °C, will not exceed two-thirds of the marked test pressure; or

(b) at 50 °C less than four-sevenths of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa; or

(c) at 55 °C less than two-thirds of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa.

(12) Packagings used for solids which may become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered during carriage shall also be capable of containing the substance in the liquid state.

(13) The packagings shall be manufactured and tested under a quality assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each manufactured packaging meets the requirements of this appendix.

(14) The requirements for packagings in section III are based on packagings currently used. In order to take into account progress in science and technology, packagings having specifications different from those in section III may be used, provided that they are equally effective, are acceptable to the competent authority and are able successfully to withstand the tests described in paragraph (10) and section IV.

3501-

3509

>TABLE>

Notes: 1. For pure liquids the vapour pressure at 55 °C (Vp55) can often be obtained from scientific tables.

2. The maximum vapour pressures in paragraphs (b) and (c) refer to the basis of the formula.

3. The table refers to the use of paragraph (c) only, which means that the marked test pressure should exceed 1.5 times the vapour pressure at 55 °C less 100 kPa. When, for example, the test pressure for n-Decane is determined according to marginal 3554 (4) (a) the minimum marked test pressure may be lower.

4. For diethyl ether (1155) (Packing group I), the required minimum test pressure under marginal 3554 (4) is 250 kPa.

Section II

Types of packaging

Definitions

3510 (1) Subject to the special provisions for each class, the packagings listed below may be used:

Drums:

flat-ended or convex-ended cylindrical packagings made of metal, fibre, plastics, plywood or other suitable materials. This definition also includes packagings of other shapes, e.g. round taper-necked packagings, or pail-shaped packagings. Wooden barrels and jerricans are not covered by this definition.

Wooden barrels: packagings made of natural wood, of round cross-section, having convex walls, consisting of staves and heads and fitted with hoops.

Jerricans: metal or plastics packagings of rectangular or polygonal cross-section with one or more orifices.

Boxes:

packagings with complete rectangular or polygonal faces, made of metal, wood, plywood, reconstituted wood, fibreboard, plastics or other suitable material. Small holes for purposes such as ease of handling or opening, or to meet classification requirements, are permitted as long as they do not compromise the integrity of the packaging during carriage;

Bags: flexible packagings made of paper, plastics film, textiles, woven material or other suitable materials.

Composite packagings (plastics material): packagings consisting of an inner plastics receptacle and an outer packaging (made of metal, fibreboard, plywood, etc.). Once assembled, such a packaging remains thereafter an inseparable unit; it is filled, stored, despatched and emptied as such.

Composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware): packagings consisting of an inner glass, porcelain or stoneware receptacle and an outer packaging (made of metal, wood, fibreboard, plastics material, expanded plastics material, etc.). Once assembled, such a packaging remains thereafter an inseparable unit; it is filled, stored, despatched and emptied as such. It shall be tested in accordance with marginals 3552 (1) (a) or (b), 3553 and 3554.

Combination

packagings: a combination of packagings for transport purposes, consisting of one or more inner packagings secured in an outer packaging in accordance with marginal 3500 (5).

Reconditioned

packagings include metal drums that are:

(i) cleaned to original materials of construction, with all former contents, internal and external corrosion, and external coatings and labels removed;

(ii) restored to original shape and contour, with chimes (if any) straightened and sealed, and all non-integral gaskets replaced; and

iii) inspected after cleaning but before painting, with rejection of packagings with visible pitting, significant reduction in material thickness, metal fatigue, damaged threads or closures, or other significant defects.

Remanufactured

packaging include metal drums that:

(i) are produced as a UN type from a non-UN type;

ii) are converted from one UN type to another UN type; or

iii) undergo the replacement of integral structural components (such as non-removable heads).

Remanufactured packagings are subject to the same requirements of this Appendix that apply to a new packaging of the same type.

Reused packagings: packagings which have been examined and found free of defects affecting the ability to withstand the performance test; the term includes those which are refilled with the same or similar compatible contents and are carried within distribution chains controlled by the consignor of the product;

(2) Subject to the special provisions for each class, the following packagings may also be used:

Composite packagings: (glass, porcelain or stoneware): if tested in accordance with marginal 3552 (1) (e).

Light gauge metal

packagings: packagings of circular, elliptical, rectangular or polygonal cross-section, (also conical) and taper-necked and pail-shaped packagings made of tinplate or light metal, having a wall thickness of less than 0,5 mm, flat or convex bottomed and with one or more orifices, which are not covered in marginal 3510 (1) as drums or jerricans.

(3) The following definitions are applicable to packagings in (1) and (2) above:

Closures: devices which close an opening in a receptacle;

Inner packagings: packagings for which an outer packaging is required for carriage.

Inner receptacles: receptacles which require an outer packaging in order to perform their containment function.

Maximum capacity (as used in Section III): the maximum inner volume of receptacles or packagings expressed in litres.

Maximum net mass: the maximum net mass of contents in a single packaging or maximum combined mass of inner packagings and the contents thereof expressed in kilogrammes.

Outer packaging: the outer protection of a composite or combination packaging together with any absorbent materials, cushioning and any other components necessary to contain and protect inner receptacles or inner packagings.

Packages: the complete product of the packing operation, consisting of the packaging and its contents prepared for dispatch.

Packagings: receptacles and any other components or materials necessary for the receptacle to perform its containment function.

Receptacles: containment vessels for receiving and holding substances or articles, including any means of closing.

Sift-proof packagings packagings impermeable to dry contents including fine solid material produced during carriage.

Note: The 'inners` of 'combination packagings` are always termed 'inner packagings` not 'inner receptacles`. A glass bottle is an example of such an 'inner packaging`. The 'inners` of 'composite packagings` are normally termed 'inner receptacles`. For example, the 'inner` of a 6HA1 composite packaging (plastics material) is such an 'inner receptacle` since it is normally not designed to perform a containment function without its 'outer packaging` and is not therefore an 'inner packaging`.

Coding of design types for packagings conforming to marginal 3510 (1) and (2)

3511 (1) The code number consists of:

an Arabic numeral indicating the kind of packaging, e.g. drum, jerrican, etc.;

a capital letter or letters (Latin characters) indicating the nature of the material, e.g. steel, wood, etc.;

where necessary, an Arabic numeral indicating the category of packaging within the type to which the packaging belongs.

In the case of composite packagings, two capital letters (Latin characters) shall be used. The first shall indicate the material of the inner receptacle and the second that of the outer packaging.

In the case of combination packagings, only the code number for the outer packaging shall be used.

The following numerals shall be used for the kind of packaging:

1. Drum

2. Wooden barrel

3. Jerrican

4. Box

5. Bag

6. Composite packaging

0. Light gauge metal packagings

The following capital letters shall be used for the types of material:

A. Steel (all types and surface treatments)

B. Aluminium

C. Natural wood

D. Plywood

F. Reconstituted wood

G. Fibreboard

H. Plastics material, including expanded plastics material

L. Textile

M. Paper, multiwall

N. Metal (other than steel or aluminium)

P. Glass, porcelain or stoneware

(2) Three packing groups are provided for in the special requirements for each class, according to the degree of danger presented by the substances to be carried:

Packing Group I: for substances of group (a);

Packing Group II: for substances of group (b);

Packing Group III: for substances of group (c) of the items in the list of substances.

The code number of the packaging shall be followed in the marking by a letter indicating the groups of substances for which the design type is approved as follows:

X for packagings for substances in packing groups I to III;

Y for packagings for substances in packing groups II and III; and

Z for packagings for substances in packing group III.

Marking

Note: The marking indicates that the packaging which bears it corresponds to a successfully tested design type and that it complies with the provisions of this Appendix which are related to the manufacture, but not to the use, of the packaging. In itself, therefore, the mark does not necessarily confirm that the packaging may be used for any substance: generally the type of packaging (e.g. steel drum), its maximum capacity and/or mass, and any special requirements are specified for each substance in the appropriate packaging marginals in the classes.

3512 (1) Each packaging shall bear markings which are durable, legible and placed in a location and of such a size relative to the packaging as to be readily visible. For packages with a gross mass of more than 30 kg, the markings or a duplicate thereof shall appear on the top or on a side of the packaging. Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at least 12 mm high, except for packagings of 30 litres or 30 kg capacity or less, when they shall be at least 6 mm in height and for packagings of 5 litres or 5 kg or less when they shall be of an appropriate size. The marking for new packagings manufactured in conformity with the approved design type consists of:

(a) (i) the symbol for packagings conforming to marginal 3510 (1).

For metal packagings on which the marking is stamped, the letters UN may be applied instead of the symbol ;

(ii) the symbol 'ADR` (or 'RID/ADR` for packagings approved for rail transport as well as road transport) instead of the symbol ;

for packagings conforming to marginal 3510 (2);

(b) the packaging code number in accordance with marginal 3511 (1);

(c) a code in two parts:

(i) a letter (X, Y or Z) designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been approved;

(ii) for packagings without inner packagings, intended to contain liquids having a viscosity at 23 °C of 200 mm2/s or less, the relative density (rounded off to the first decimal), to which the design type has been tested if more than 1,2;

For packagings intended to contain liquids having a viscosity at 23 °C of more than 200 mm2/s, solids or inner packagings, and for light gauge metal packagings, removable head, intended for substances of Class 3, 5°(c), the maximum gross mass in kilogrammes;

(iii) for packagings intended to contain substances of Class 6.2, 1° and 2°, 'Class 6.2` shall be used instead of the information required in (i) or (ii);

(d) either a letter 'S` denoting that the packaging is intended to contain liquids having a viscosity at 23 °C of more than 200 mm2/s, solids or inner packagings, and for light gauge metal packagings, removable head, intended for substances of Class 3, 5°(c), or, where a hydraulic pressure test has been successfully passed, the test pressure in kPa rounded off to the nearest 10 kPa.;

(e) the year of manufacture (last two digits); in addition for packagings of types 1H and 3H, the month of manufacture; this part of the marking may be affixed in a different place from the other particulars. A suitable method is:

>REFERENCE TO A FILM>

(f) the mark () of the State in which the approval was issued;

(g) either a registration number and the name or mark of the manufacturer or some other packaging identification mark specified by the competent authorities.

(2) Every reusable packaging liable to undergo a reconditioning process which might obliterate the packaging markings shall bear the marks indicated in (1) (a) to (e) in a permanent form. Marks are permanent if they are able to withstand the reconditioning process (e.g. embossed). For packagings other than metal drums of a capacity greater than 100 litres, these permanent marks may replace the corresponding durable markings prescribed in (1). In addition to the durable markings prescribed in (1), every new metal drum of a capacity greater than 100 litres shall, bear the marks described in (1) (a) to (e) on the base, with an indication of the nominal thickness of at least the metal used in the body (in mm, to 0,1 mm), in permanent form (e.g. embossed). When the nominal thickness of either head of a metal drum is thinner than that of a body, the nominal thicknesses of the top head, body, and bottom head shall be marked on the bottom in a permanent form (e.g. embossed), for example '1,0 - 1,2 - 1,0` or 0,9 - 1,0 - 1.0'. Nominal thicknesses of metal shall be determined according to the appropriate ISO standard, e.g. ISO 3574: 1986 steel drums. The marks indicated in (1) (f) and (g) shall not be applied in a permanent form (e.g. embossed) except as provided for below.

For manufactured metal drums, if there is no change to the packaging type and no replacement or removal of integral structural components, the required markings need not be permanent (e.g. embossed). Every other remanufactured metal drum shall bear the markings in (1) (a) to (e) in a permanent form (e.g. embossed) on the top head or side.

Metal drums made from materials (e.g. stainless steel) designed to be reused repeatedly may bear the markings indicated in 1 (f) and (g) in a permanent form (e.g. embossed).

(3) The registration number is valid for only one design type or series of design types. Different surface treatments may fall within the same design type.

A 'series of design types` means packagings of the same structural design, wall thickness, material and cross-section, which differ only in their lesser design heights from the design type approved.

The closures of receptacles shall be identifiable as those referred to in the test report.

(4) After reconditioning a packaging the reconditioner shall affix to it, near the durable marks required by (a) to (e) the following sequence of marks:

(h) the mark () of the State in whose territory the reconditioning was carried out;

(i) the name or authorized symbol of the reconditioner;

(j) the year of reconditioning, the letter 'R` and for every packaging which has successfully undergone the leakproofness test in accordance with marginal 3500 (10), the additional letter 'L`.

(l) When, after reconditioning, the markings required by (1) (a) to (d) no longer appear on the top head or the side of a metal drum, the reconditioner shall apply them in a durable form followed by the markings required in (h), (i) and (j). These markings shall not identify a greater performance capability than that for which the original design type has been tested and marked.

(5) The letters 'V` or 'W` may follow the packaging code. The letter 'V` signifies a special packaging [see 3550 (8)]. The letter 'W` signifies that the packaging, although of the same type indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different to that in section III and is considered equivalent under the provisions of marginal 3500 (14).

(6) Packagings marked in accordance with this marginal but which were approved in a State which is not a Member State may nevertheless be used for carriage under this Directive.

(7) Examples of the markings

For a new steel drum:

1A1/Y1.4/150/83

NL/VL123 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)

(f) and (g)

For a reconditioned steel drum:

1A1/Y1.4/150/83

NL/RB/84/RL (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)

(h), (i) and (j)

For a steel box of equivalent specification:

4AW/Y136/S/90

GB/MC123 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e),

(f) and (g)

For new light gauge metal packagings:

RID/ADR/0A2/Y20/S/83

NL/VL 123 (a) (ii), (b), (c), (d) and (e)

(f) and (g) Non-removable head

RID/ADR/0A2/Y/83

NL/VL 124 (a) (ii), (b), (c) and (e)

(f) and (g) Removable head, intended for liquids with a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm2/s, and for substances of Class 3, 5°(c).

For a remanufactured steel drum intended to transport liquids:

1A2/Y/100/91

USA/MM5 (a) (b), (c), (d) and (e)

(f) and (g)

For a new fibreboard box intended to contain substances of 1° and 2° of Class 6.2:

4G/Class 6.2/S/92

SP/9989-ERIKSSON (a) (i), (b), (c) (iii), (d) and (e)

(f) and (g)

For fibreboard box intended to contain inner packagings or solids:

4G/Y145/S/83

NL/VL823 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e)

(f) and (g)

Certification

3513 The manufacturer certifies, by affixing marking in accordance with marginal 3512 (1) that mass-produced packagings correspond to the approved design type and that the requirements referred to in the approval have been met.

Index of packagings

3514 The following types and codes of packaging are assigned:

>TABLE>

>TABLE>

>TABLE>

3515-

3519

Section III

Requirements for packagings

A. Packagings conforming to marginal 3510 (1)

3520 Steel drums

1A1 non-removable head

1A2 removable head

(a) The sheet metal for the body and ends shall be of suitable steel and of a gauge appropriate to the drum's capacity and intended use.

(b) Body seams shall be welded on drums intended to contain more than 40 litres of liquid. Body seams shall be mechanically seamed or welded on drums intended to contain solids or 40 litres or less of liquids.

(c) Head and chime seams shall be mechanically seamed or welded.

(d) If there are built-on rolling hoops they shall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be spot-welded.

(e) Internal coatings of lead, zinc, tin, lacquer and the like shall be tough and resilient and shall adhere to the steel at every point, including the closures.

(f) Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (1A1) drums shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable head type (1A2).

(g) Closures shall incorporate a leakproof gasket except where a taper thread ensures comparable leakproofness.

(h) Closures of non-removable-head drums shall either be of the screw-threaded type or be capable of being secured by a screw-threaded device or a device at least equally effective.

(i) Closure devices for removable head drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with all removable heads.

(j) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres.

(k) Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

3521 Aluminium drums

1B1 non-removable head

1B2 removable head

(a) The body and heads shall be of aluminium at least 99 % pure, or of an aluminium-base alloy having corrosion resistance and mechanical properties appropriate to the capacity of the drum and its intended use.

(b) Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (1B1) drums shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable head type (1B2).

(c) Aluminium drums 1B1.

End seams, if any, shall be adequately reinforced for their protection. If there are any body and end seams they shall be welded. The closure shall either be of the screw-threaded type or be capable of being secured by a screw-threaded device or a device at least equally effective. Closures shall incorporate a leakproof gasket except where a taper thread ensures comparable leakproofness.

(d) Aluminium drums 1B2.

The body of the drum shall either be seamless or have a welded seam. The closures shall be so designed and fitted that they will remain secure and the drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with all removable heads.

(e) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres.

(f) Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

3522 Steel jerricans

3A1 non-removable head

3A2 removable head

(a) Body and heads shall be constructed of steel sheet of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the jerrican and its intended use.

(b) Chimes of all jerricans shall be mechanically seamed or welded. Body seams of jerricans intended to contain more than 40 litres of liquid shall be welded. Body seams of jerricans intended to carry 40 litres or less shall be mechanically seamed or welded.

(c) Openings in jerricans (3A1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Jerricans with larger openings are considered to be of the removable head type (3A2).

(d) Closures of non-removable-head jerricans (3A1) shall either be of the screw-threaded type or be capable of being secured by a screw-threaded device or a device at least equally effective.

Closure devices of removable-head jerricans (3A2) shall be so designed and fitted that they will remain secure and that the jerricans will remain leakproof under normal conditions of carriage.

(e) Maximum capacity of jerrican: 60 litres.

(f) Maximum net mass: 120 kg.

3523 Plywood drums

1D

(a) The wood used shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from any defect likely to lessen the effectiveness of the drum for the purpose intended. If a material other than plywood is used for the manufacture of the ends, it shall be of a quality equivalent to the plywood.

(b) At least two-ply plywood shall be used for the body and at least three-ply plywood for the ends; the plies shall be firmly glued together, with their grain crosswise, by a water-resistant adhesive.

(c) The body and ends shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the drum and its intended use.

(d) In order to prevent sifting of the contents, lids shall be lined with kraft paper or some other equivalent material which shall be securely fastened to the lid and extend to the outside along its full circumference.

(e) Maximum capacity of drum: 250 litres.

(f) Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

3524 Wooden barrels

2C1 bung type

2C2 removable head

(a) The wood used shall be of good quality, straight-grained, well-seasoned and free from knots, bark, rotten wood, sapwood or other defects likely to lessen the effectiveness of the barrel for the purpose intended.

(b) The body and ends shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the barrel and its intended use.

(c) Staves and ends shall be sawn or cleft with the grain so that no annual ring shall extend over more than half the thickness of a stave or head.

(d) Barrel hoops shall be of steel or iron and of good quality. The hoops of 2C2 barrels with removable heads may be of a suitable hardwood.

(e) Wooden barrels 2C1:

The diameter of the bung-hole shall not exceed half the width of the stave in which it is placed.

(f) Wooden barrels 2C2:

Heads shall fit tightly into the crozes.

(g) Maximum capacity of barrel: 250 litres.

(h) Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

3525 Fibre drums

1G

(a) The body of the drum shall consist of multiple plies of heavy paper or fibreboard (without corrugations) firmly glued or laminated together and may include one or more protective layers of bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil, plastics material, etc.

(b) Heads shall be of natural wood, fibreboard, metal, plywood, plastics or other suitable material and may include one or more protective layers of bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil, plastics material, etc.

(c) The body and heads of the drum and their joins shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the drum and its intended use.

(d) The assembled packaging shall be sufficiently water-resistant so as not to delaminate under normal conditions of carriage.

(e) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres.

(f) Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

3526 Plastics drums and jerricans

1H1 drums, non-removable head

1H2 drums, removable head

3H1 jerricans, non-removable head

3H2 jerricans, removable head

(a) The packagings shall be capable of withstanding the physical (in particular mechanical and thermal) and chemical stresses to be expected in carriage and of remaining leakproof. They shall be capable of withstanding dangerous substances and their vapours. They shall also have the necessary degree of resistance to ageing and ultra-violet radiation. Packagings shall be safe to handle.

(b) Unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, the period of use permitted for the transport of dangerous substances shall not exceed five years, from the date of the manufacture of the packaging, except where a shorter period of use is prescribed because of the nature of the substance to be transported.

(c) If protection against ultra-violet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the packaging. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if the carbon black content does not exceed 2 % by mass or if the pigment content does not exceed 3 % by mass; the content of inhibitors of ultra-violet radiation is not limited.

(d) Additives serving purposes other than protection against ultra-violet radiation may be included in the composition of the plastics material provided that they do not adversely affect the chemical and physical properties of the material of the packaging. In such circumstances, retesting may be waived.

(e) Appropriate steps shall be taken to ensure that the plastics material to be used in the manufacture of the packaging is chemically compatible with the goods which the packaging is intended to contain, [see marginal 3551 (5)].

(f) Packagings shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material of known origin and specifications; their construction shall be fully appropriate to plastics materials and in accordance with technological developments. For new packagings, no used material other than production residues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used.

(g) The wall thickness at every point of the packaging shall be appropriate to its capacity and intended use, taking into account however the stresses to which each point is liable to be exposed.

(h) Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head drums (1H1) and jerricans (3H1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums and jerricans with larger openings are considered to be of the removable head type (1H2, 3H2).

(i) Removable head drums (1H2) and jerricans (3H2) used for solid substances shall remain leakproof at every point with respect to the filling substance.

Closures of non-removable-head drums and jerricans (1H1, 3H1) shall either be of the screw-threaded type or be capable of being secured by a screw-threaded device or a device at least equally effective. Closure devices of removable-head drums and jerricans (1H2, 3H2) shall be so designed and fitted that they will remain secure and the drums or jerricans will remain leakproof under normal conditions of carriage.

Gaskets shall be used with all removable heads unless the drum or jerrican design is such that, where the removable head is properly secured, the drum or jerrican is inherently leakproof.

(j) The maximum permissible permeation for inflammable liquids shall be 0,008g/l.h at 23 °C (see marginal 3556).

(k) Maximum capacity of drumsand jerricans:

1H1, 1H2: 450 litres

3H1, 3H2: 60 litres

(l) Maximum net mass:

1H1, 1H2: 400 kg

3H1, 3H2: 120 kg.

3527 Boxes of natural wood

4C1 ordinary

4C2 with sift-proof walls

Note: For plywood boxes, see marginal 3528: for reconstituted wood boxes, see marginal 3529.

(a) The wood used shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the box. The strength of the material used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity of the box and its intended use. The tops and bottoms may be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type.

Fastenings shall be resistant to vibration experienced under normal conditions of carriage. End grain nailing shall be avoided whenever practicable. Joins which are likely to be highly stressed shall be made using clenched or annular ring nails or equivalent fastenings.

(b) Boxes with sift-proof walls 4C2:

Each part of the box shall be in one piece or equivalent thereto. A part shall be deemed equivalent to a part in one piece if it is glued together by one of the following methods: Lindermann (dovetail) jointing, tongue-and-groove jointing, ship-lap or rabbet jointing, or butt-jointing with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint.

(c) Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

3528 Plywood boxes

4D

(a) The plywood used shall have at least three plies. It shall be made of well-seasoned rotary-cut, sliced or sawn veneer commercially dry and free from defects likely to lessen the strength of the box. All plies shall be glued by means of a water-resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used together with plywood in the manufacture of boxes. Boxes shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by other equally suitable devices.

(b) Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

3529 Reconstituted wood boxes

4F

(a) The walls of boxes shall be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type. The strength of the material used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity of the box and its intended use.

(b) Other parts of the boxes may be made of other suitable material.

(c) Boxes shall be securely assembled by means of suitable devices.

(d) Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

3530 Fibreboard boxes

4G

(a) Good quality solid or double-faced (single-wall or multiwall) corrugated fibreboard appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the boxes shall be used. The water-resistance of the outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as measured in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes by the Cobb method of water-absorption determination, is not greater than 155 g/m2 (in accordance with the International Standard ISO 535:1991). The fibreboard shall be capable of bending sufficiently without breaking. It shall be cut, creased without scoring and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking and without its surfaces tearing or bulging unduly. The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings.

(b) Ends of boxes may have a wooden frame or be entirely of wood or other suitable material. Reinforcements of wooden battens or other suitable material may be used.

(c) Joins of boxes shall be taped with adhesive tape, be lapped and glued, or be lapped and metal-stapled. Lapped joins shall have a suitable overlap. Where closure is effected by gluing or by applying adhesive tape, the adhesive shall be water-resistant.

(d) The dimensions of the box shall be appropriate for the contents.

(e) Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

3531 Plastics boxes

4H1 expanded plastics boxes

4H2 solid plastics boxes

(a) The box shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and intended use. The box shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused either by the substance contained or by ultra-violet radiation.

(b) An expanded plastics box shall comprise two parts made of a moulded expanded plastics material, a bottom section containing cavities for the inner packagings and a top section covering and interlocking with the bottom section. The top and bottom sections shall be designed so that the inner packagings fit snugly. The closure cap for any inner packaging shall not be in contact with the inside of the top section of this box.

(c) For dispatch, an expanded plastics box shall be closed with a self-adhesive tape having sufficient tensile strength to prevent the box from opening. The adhesive tape shall be weather-resistant and its adhesive compatible with the expanded plastics material of the box. Other closing devices at least equally effective may be used.

(d) For solid plastics boxes, protection against ultra-violet radiation, if required, shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the box. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if the carbon black content does not exceed 2 % by mass or if the pigment content does not exceed 3 % by mass; the content of inhibitors of ultra-violet radiation is not limited.

(e) Solid plastics boxes shall have closure devices made of a suitable material of adequate strength and so designed as to prevent the box from unintentional opening.

(f) Additives serving purposes other than protection against ultra-violet radiation may be included in the composition of the plastics material of boxes 4H1 and 4H2 provided that they do not adversely affect the chemical and physical properties of the material. In such circumstances, retesting may be waived.

(g) Maximum net mass:

4H1: 60 kg.

4H2: 400 kg.

3532 Steel or aluminium boxes

4A steel

4B aluminium

(a) The strength of the metal and the construction of the box shall be appropriate to the capacity of the box and to its intended use.

(b) Boxes shall be lined with fibreboard or felt packing pieces as required or shall have an inner liner or coating of suitable material. If a double seamed metal liner is used, steps shall be taken to prevent the ingress of substances into the recesses of the seams.

(c) Closures may be of any suitable type; they shall remain secured under normal conditions of carriage.

(d) Maximum net mass: 400 kg.

3533 Textile bags

5L1 without inner lining or coating

5L2 sift-proof

5L3 water-resistant

(a) The textiles used shall be of good quality. The strength of the fabric and the construction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use.

(b) Bags, sift-proof, 5L2.

The bag shall be made sift-proof, for example by the use of:

paper bonded to the inner surface of the bag by a water-resistant adhesive such as bitumen; or

plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or

one or more inner liners made of paper or plastics material.

(c) Bags, water-resistant, 5L3

To prevent any entry of moisture the bag shall be made waterproof, for example by the use of:

separate inner liners of water-resistant paper (e.g. waxed kraft paper, tarred paper or plastics-coated kraft paper); or

plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag;

or one or more inner liners made of plastics material.

(d) Maximum net mass: 50 kg.

3534 Woven plastics bags

5H1 without inner lining or coating

5H2 sift-proof

5H3 water-resistant

(a) Bags shall be made from stretched tapes or stretched monofilaments of a suitable plastics material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use.

(b) Bags may be fitted with an inner liner of plastics film or given a thin inner coating of plastics material.

(c) If the fabric is woven flat, the bags shall be formed by sewing or some other method ensuring closure of the bottom and one side. If the fabric is tubular, the bottom of the bag shall be closed by sewing, weaving or some other equally strong method of closure.

(d) Bags, sift-proof, 5H2:

The bag shall be made sift-proof, for example by means of:

paper or a plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or

one or more separate inner liners made of paper or plastics material.

(e) Bags, water-resistant, 5H3

To prevent any entry of moisture, the bag shall be made waterproof, e.g. by means of:

separate inner liners of water-resistant paper (e.g. waxed kraft paper, double-tarred kraft paper or plastics-coated kraft paper);

plastics film bonded to the inner or outer surface of the bag; or

one or more inner plastics liners.

(f) Maximum net mass: 50 kg.

3535 Plastics film bags

5H4

(a) Bags shall be made of suitable plastics material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use. Seams shall withstand pressures and impacts liable to occur in normal conditions of carriage.

(b) Maximum net mass: 50 kg.

3536 Paper bags

5M1 multiwall

5M2 multiwall, water-resistant

(a) Bags shall be made of a suitable kraft paper or of an equivalent paper with at least three plies. The strength of the paper and the construction of the bags shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use. Joins and closures shall be sift-proof.

(b) Paper bags 5M2:

To prevent the entry of moisture, a bag of four plies or more shall be made waterproof by the use of either a water resistant ply as one of the two outermost plies or a water barrier made of a suitable protective material between the two outermost plies; a bag of three plies shall be made waterproof by the use of water resistant ply as the outermost ply. Where there is a danger of the substance contained reacting with moisture or where it is packed damp, a waterproof ply or barrier, such as doubletarred kraft paper, plastics-coated kraft paper, plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag, or one or more inner plastics liners, shall also be placed next to the substance. Joins and closures shall be waterproof.

(c) Maximum net mass: 50 kg.

3537 Composite packagings (plastics material)

6HA1 plastics receptacle with outer steel drum

6HA2 plastics receptacle with outer steel crate () or box

6HB1 plastics receptacle with outer aluminium drum

6HB2 plastics receptacle with outer aluminium crate () or box

6HC plastics receptacle with outer wooden box

6HD1 plastics receptacle with outer plywood drum

6HD2 plastics receptacle with outer plywood box

6HG1 plastics receptacle with outer fibre drum

6HG2 plastics receptacle with outer fibreboard box

6HH1 plastics receptacle with outer plastics drum

6HH2 plastics receptacle with outer solid plastics box

(a) Inner receptacle

(1) The provisions of marginal 3526 (a) and (c) to (h) shall apply to plastics inner receptacles.

(2) The plastics inner receptacle shall fit snugly inside the outer packaging, which shall be free of any projection that might abrade the plastics material.

(3) Maximum capacity of inner receptacle:

6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1: 250 litres

6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2: 60 litres.

(4) Maximum net mass:

6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1: 400 kilogrammes

6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2: 75 kilogrammes.

(b) Outer packaging

(1) Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum 6HA1 or 6HB1; the provisions of marginal 3520 (a) to (i) or 3521 (a) to (d), as appropriate, shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

(2) Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box 6HA2 or 6HB2; the provisions of marginal 3532 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

(3) Plastics receptacle with outer wooden box 6HC; the provisions of marginal 3527 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

(4) Plastics receptacle with outer plywood drum 6HD1; the provisions of marginal 3523 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

(5) Plastics receptacle with outer plywood box 6HD2; the provisions of marginal 3528 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

(6) Plastics receptacle with outer fibre drum 6HG1; the provisions of marginal 3525 (a) to (d) shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

(7) Plastics receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6HG2; the provisions of marginal 3530 (a) to (c) shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

(8) Plastics receptacle with outer plastics drum 6HH1; the provisions of marginal 3526 (a) and (c) to (h) shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

(9) Plastics receptacle with outer solid plastics box 6HH2; the relevant provisions of marginal 3531 (a), (d), (e) and (f) shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

3538 Combination packagings

(a) Inner packagings

The following may be used:

glass, porcelain or stoneware packagings with a maximum permissible capacity of 5 litres for liquids or 5 kg for solids;

plastics packagings with a maximum permissible capacity of 30 litres for liquids or 30 kg for solids;

metal packagings with a maximum permissible capacity of 40 litres for liquids or 40 kg for solids;

paper, textile, woven plastics or plastics-film sachets and bags with a maximum permissible capacity of 5 kg for solids in sachets and 50 kg in bags;

cans, folding cartons and boxes made of fibreboard or plastics with a maximum permissible capacity of 10 kg for solids;

other types of small packagings such as tubes with a maximum permissible capacity of 1 litre for liquids or 1 kg for solids.

(b) Outer packaging

The following may be used:

steel drums, removable head (marginal 3520);

aluminium drums, removable head (marginal 3521);

steel jerricans, removable head (marginal 3522);

plywood drums (marginal 3523);

fibre drums (marginal 3525);

plastics drums, removable head (marginal 3526);

plastics jerricans, removable head (marginal 3526);

natural wood boxes (marginal 3527);

plywood boxes (marginal 3528);

reconstituted wood boxes (marginal 3529);

fibreboard boxes (marginal 3530);

plastics boxes (marginal 3531);

steel or aluminium boxes (marginal 3532).

B. Packagings which may conform to marginal 3510 (1) or (2)

3539 Composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware)

6PA1 receptacle with outer steel drum

6PA2 receptacle with outer steel crate () or box

6PB1 receptacle with outer aluminium drum

6PB2 receptacle with outer aluminium crate () or box

6PC receptacle with outer wooden box

6PD1 receptacle with outer plywood drum

6PD2 receptacle with outer wickerwork hamper

6PG1 receptacle with outer fibre drum

6PG2 receptacle with outer fibreboard box

6PH1 receptacle with outer expanded plastics packaging

6PH2 receptacle with outer solid plastics packaging

(a) Inner receptacle

(1) The receptacle shall be suitably moulded (cylindrical or pear-shaped) and be made of good quality material free from any defect that could impair its strength. The walls shall be sufficiently thick at every point and free from internal stresses.

(2) Screw-threaded plastics closures, ground glass stoppers or closures at least equally effective shall be used as closures for receptacles. Any part of the closure likely to come into contact with the contents of the receptacle shall be resistant to those contents.

Care should be taken to ensure that the closures are so fitted as to be leakproof and are suitably secured to prevent any loosening during carriage.

If vented closures are necessary, they shall be leakproof.

(3) The receptacle shall be firmly secured in the outer packaging by means of cushioning and/or absorbent materials.

(4) Maximum capacity of receptacle: 60 litres

(5) Maximum net mass: 75 kg.

(b) Outer packaging

(1) Receptacle with outer steel drum 6PA1

The provisions of marginal 3520 (a) to (i) shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. The removable lid required for this type of packaging may however be in the form of a cap.

(2) Receptacle with outer steel crate or box 6PA2

The provisions of marginal 3532 (a) to (c) shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging. For cylindrical receptacles the outer packaging should, when upright, rise above the receptacle and its closure. If the protective crate surrounds a pear-shaped receptacle and is of matching shape, the outer packaging shall be fitted with a protective cover (cap).

(3) Receptacle with outer aluminium drum 6PB1

The provisions of marginal 3521 (a) to (d) shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

(4) Receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box 6PB2

The provisions of marginal 3532 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

(5) Receptacle with outer wooden box 6PC

The provisions of marginal 3527 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

(6) Receptacle with outer plywood drum 6PD1

The provisions of marginal 3523 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

(7) Receptacle with outer wickerwork hamper 6PD2

The wickerwork hamper shall be properly made with material of good quality. It shall be fitted with a protective cover (cap) so as to prevent damage to the receptacle.

(8) Receptacle with outer fibre drum 6PG1

The provisions of marginal 3525 (a) to (d) shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

(9) Receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6PG2

The provisions of marginal 3530 (a) to (c) shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.

(10) Receptacle with outer expanded plastics or solid plastics packaging 6PH1 or 6PH2.

The materials of both outer packagings shall meet the provisions of marginal 3531 (a) to (f). Solid plastics packaging shall be made of high density polyethylene or other comparable plastics material. The removable lid for this type of packaging may however be in the form of a cap.

C. Packagings conforming only to marginal 3510 (2)

3540 Light gauge metal packagings

0A1 non-removable-head

0A2 removable-head

(a) The sheet metal for the body and ends shall be of suitable steel, and of a gauge appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the packaging.

(b) The joints shall be welded, at least double-seamed by welting or produced by a method ensuring a similar degree of strength and leakproofness.

(c) Inner coatings of zinc, tin, lacquer, etc. shall be tough and shall adhere to the steel at every point, including the closures.

(d) Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (0A1) packagings shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Packagings with larger openings shall be considered to be of the removable-head type (0A2).

(e) The closures of non-removable-head packagings (0A1) shall either be of the screw-threaded type or be capable of being secured by a screwable device or a device at least equally effective. The closures of removable-head packagings (0A2) shall be so designed and fitted that they stay firmly closed and the packagings remain leakproof in normal conditions of carriage.

(f) Maximum capacity of packagings: 40 litres

(g) Maximum net mass: 50 kg.

3541-

3549

Section IV

Test requirements for packagings

A. Design-type tests

3550 Performance and frequency of tests

(1) The design type of each packaging shall be tested and approved by the competent authority or by a body designated by that authority.

(2) Tests in accordance with (1) shall be carried out again after any modification of the design type unless the authorized testing body has agreed to the modification of the design type. In the latter event a new approval of the design type is not required. A packaging design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments. It also includes packagings which differ from the design type only in their lesser design height.

(3) The competent authority may at any time require proof, through tests in accordance with this section, that mass-produced packagings meet the requirements of the design-type tests. For such tests on paper or fibreboard packagings, preparation at ambient conditions shall be considered equivalent to the requirements of marginal 3551 (3).

(4) For verification purposes the authorized testing body shall keep a record of the materials used, through materials testing or by retaining samples or pieces of the materials.

(5) If an inner coating is required for safety reasons, it shall retain its protective properties even after the tests.

(6) The competent authority may permit the selective testing of packagings that differ only in minor respects from a tested type, e.g. smaller sizes of inner packagings or inner packagings of lower net mass; and packagings such as drum, bags and boxes which are produced with small reductions in external dimension(s).

(7) Provided the validity of the test results is not affected and with the approval of the competent authority, several tests may be made on one sample.

3551 Preparation of packagings and packages for testing

(1) Tests shall be carried out on packagings prepared as for transport including, with respect to combination packagings, the inner packagings used. Inner or single receptacles or packagings shall be filled to not less than 98 % of their maximum capacity for liquids or 95 % for solids. For combination packagings where the inner packaging is designed to carry liquids and solids, separate testing is required for both liquid and solid contents.

The substances or articles to be transported in the packagings may be replaced by other substances or articles except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. For solids, when another substance is used it shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, grain, size, etc.) as the substance to be carried. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected. Suitable mixtures of powdery solids, such as polyethylene or PVC powder with sawdust, fine sand, etc., may be used as a substitute filling substance for substances having a viscosity in excess of 2 680 mm2/s at 23 °C.

(2) In the drop tests for liquids, when another substance is used its relative density and viscosity shall be similar to those of the substance to be carried. Water may also be used for the liquid drop test under the conditions in marginal 3552 (4).

(3) Paper or fibreboard packagings shall be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a controlled temperature and relative humidity (r.h.). There are three options, one of which shall be chosen. The preferred atmosphere is 23 °C ± 2 °C and 50 % ± 2 % r.h. The two other options are 20 °C ± 2 °C and 65 % ± 2 % r.h. or 27 °C ± 2 °C and 65 % ± 2 % r.h.

Note: Average values shall fall within these limits. Short term fluctuations and measurement limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to ± 5 % relative humidity without significant impairment of test reproducibility.

(4) Bung-type barrels made of natural wood shall be left filled with water for at least 24 hours before the tests.

(5) To check that their chemical compatibility with the liquids is sufficient, plastics drums and jerricans in accordance with marginal 3526 and if necessary composite packagings (plastics material) in accordance with marginal 3537 shall be subjected to storage at ambient temperature for six months, during which time the test samples shall be kept filled with the goods they are intended to carry.

For the first and last 24 hours of storage, the test samples shall be placed with the closure downwards. However, packagings fitted with a vent shall be so placed on each occasion for five minutes only. After this storage the test samples shall undergo the tests prescribed in marginals 3552 to 3556.

When it is known that the strength properties of the plastics material of the inner receptacles of composite packagings (plastics material) are not significantly altered by the action of the filling substance, it shall not be necessary to check that the chemical compatibility is sufficient.

A significant alteration in strength properties means:

(a) distinct embrittlement; or

(b) a considerable decrease in elasticity, unless related to a not less than proportionate increase in the elongation under load.

Where the behaviour of the plastics material has been established by other means, the above compatibility test may be dispensed with. Such procedures shall be at least equivalent to the above compatibility test and be recognized by the competent authority.

Note: For plastics drums and jerricans and composite packagings (plastics material) made of high molecular mass polyethylene, see also (6) below.

(6) For high molecular mass polyethylene drums and jerricans in accordance with marginal 3526 and if necessary composite packagings of high molecular mass polyethylene in accordance with marginal 3537, conforming to the following specifications:

- relative density at 23 °C after thermal conditioning for one hour at 100 °C ≥ 0,940, in accordance with ISO Standard 1183,

- melt flow rate at 190 °C/21,6 kg load ≤ 12 g/10 min. in accordance with ISO Standard 1133,

chemical compatibility with the liquids listed in section II of the annex to this appendix may be verified as follows with standard liquids (see section I of the annex to this appendix).

The sufficient chemical compatibility of these packagings may be verified by storage for three weeks at 40 °C with the appropriate standard liquid; where this standard liquid is water, proof of chemical compatibility is not required.

For the first and last 24 hours of storage, the test samples shall be placed with the closure downwards. However, packagings fitted with a vent shall be so placed on each occasion for five minutes only. After this storage, the test samples shall undergo the tests prescribed in marginals 3552 to 3556.

When a packaging design-type has satisfied the approval tests with a standard liquid, the comparable filling substances listed in section II of the annex to this appendix may be accepted for carriage without further testing, subject to the following conditions:

the relative densities of the filling substances shall not exceed that used to determine the height for the drop test and the mass for the stacking test;

the vapour pressures of the filling substances at 50 °C or 55 °C shall not exceed that used to determine the pressure for the internal pressure test.

(7) For drums and jerricans conforming to marginal 3526, and where necessary composite packagings conforming to marginal 3537, made of high molecular mass polyethylene, which have passed the test in paragraph (6) of this marginal, filling substances other than those listed in section II of the annex may also be approved. Such approval shall be based on laboratory tests proving that the effect of such filling substances on the test specimens is less than that of the standard liquids. The processes of deterioration to be taken into account shall be the following: softening through swelling, cracking under stress and molecular degradation. The same conditions as those set out in (6) above shall apply with respect to relative density and vapour pressure.

3552 Drop test ()

(1) Number of test samples (per design type and manufacturer) and drop orientation.

For other than flat drops the centre of gravity shall be vertically over the point of impact.

>TABLE>

Where more than one orientation is possible for a given drop test, the orientation most likely to result in failure of the packaging shall be used.

(2) Special preparation of test samples for the drop test:

The temperature of the test sample and its contents shall be reduced to P18 °C or lower for the following packagings:

(a) plastics drums (see 3526)

(b) plastics jerricans (see 3526)

(c) plastics boxes other than expanded polystyrene boxes (see 3531)

(d) composite packagings (plastics material) (see 3537)

(e) combination packagings with plastics inner packagings (see 3538)

(f) textile bags with inner plastics liner (see 3533)

(g) woven plastics bags (see 3534), and

(h) plastics film bags (see 3535).

Where the test samples are prepared in this way, the conditioning in marginal 3551 (3) may be waived. Test liquids shall be kept in the liquid state by the addition of anti-freeze if necessary.

(3) Target

The target shall be a rigid, non-resilient, flat and horizontal surface.

(4) Drop height

For solids:

>TABLE>

For liquids:

If the test is performed with water:

(a) where the substances to be carried have a relative density not exceeding 1,2:

>TABLE>

(b) where the substances to be carried have a relative density exceeding 1,2, the drop height shall be calculated on the basis of the relative density of the substance to be carried, rounded up to the first decimal, as follows:

>TABLE>

(c) for light-gauge metal packagings intended for the carriage of substances having a viscosity at 23 °C greater than 200 mm2/s (corresponding to a flow time of 30 seconds with an ISO flow cup having a jet orifice of 6 mm diameter in accordance with ISO Standard 2431-1980), and for substances of Class 3, 5°(c).

(i) if the relative density does not exceed 1,2:

>TABLE>

(ii) where the substances to be carried have a relative density exceeding 1,2 the drop height shall be calculated on the basis of the relative density of the substance to be carried, rounded up to the first decimal place, as follows:

>TABLE>

If the test is performed with the substance to be carried or with a liquid of at least equal relative density:

>TABLE>

(5) Criteria for passing the test:

(a) Every packaging containing liquid shall be leakproof when equilibrium has been reached between the internal and external pressures, except for inner packagings of combination packagings or composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) when it is not necessary that the pressures be equalized.

(b) Where removable-head drums for solids undergo a drop test and their upper faces strike the target, the test sample passes the test if the entire contents are retained by an inner packaging (e.g. a plastics bag) even if the closure on the top face of the drum is no longer sift-proof.

(c) The outermost ply of a bag shall not exhibit any damage liable to affect safety in carriage.

(d) The outer packaging of a composite or combination packaging shall not exhibit any damage liable to affect safety in carriage. There shall be no leakage of the filling substance from the inner packaging.

(e) A slight discharge from the closure(s) upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the packaging provided that no further leakage occurs.

(f) No rupture is permitted in packagings for goods of Class 1 which would cause the spillage of loose explosive substances or articles from the outer packaging.

Leakproofness test

3553 (1) The leakproofness test shall be performed on all types of packagings intended to contain liquids; however, this test is not required for:

- inner packagings of combination packagings;

- inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3510 (2);

- removable head packagings intended for substance with a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mmq2/s.

- light gauge metal packagings, removable head, intended for substances of Class 3, 5°(c).

(2) Number of test samples:

Three test samples per design type and manufacturer.

(3) Special preparation of test samples for the test:

Test samples shall be pierced for entry of the compressed air at a neutral point, so as also to test the tightness of the closure. Vented closures of packagings shall be replaced by non-vented closures.

(4) Test method:

The test samples including their closures shall be restrained under water for 5 minutes while an internal air pressure is applied, the method of restraint shall not affect the results of the test. Other methods at least equally effective may be used.

(5) Air pressure to be applied:

>TABLE>

(6) Criterion for passing the test:

There shall be no leakage.

Internal pressure (hydraulic) test

3554 (1) The hydraulic pressure test shall be carried out on all types of steel, aluminium and plastics packagings, and on all composite packagings intended to contain liquids. However, this test is not required for:

- inner packagings of combination packagings;

- inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3510 (2);

- removable head packagings intended for substances with a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm2/s.

- light gauge metal packagings, removable head, intended for substances of Class 3, 5°(c).

(2) Number of test samples:

Three test samples per design type and manufacturer.

(3) Special preparation of packagings for the test:

Test samples shall be pierced for entry of the pressure at a neutral point, so as also to test the tightness of the closure. Vented closures of packagings shall be replaced by non-vented closures.

(4) Test method and pressure to be applied:

The packagings shall be subjected for five minutes (30 minutes in the case of plastics packagings) to a hydraulic gauge pressure not lower than:

(a) the total gauge pressure measured in the packaging (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling substance and the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, less 100 kPa) at 55 °C, multiplied by a safety factor of 1,5; this total gauge pressure shall be determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with marginal 3500 (4) and a filling temperature of 15 °C; or

(b) 1,75 times the vapour pressure of the filling substance at 50 °C, less 100 kPa, but at a gauge pressure of not less than 100 kPa; or

(c) 1,5 times the vapour pressure of the filling substance at 55 °C, less 100 kPa, but at a gauge pressure of not less than 100 kPa.

The manner in which the packagings are maintained in place shall not distort the results of the test. Pressure shall be applied continuously and evenly. The test pressure shall be kept constant throughout the test period.

The minimum test pressure for packagings for Packing Group I shall be 250 kPa.

(5) Criterion for passing the test:

No packaging shall leak.

Stacking test

3555 (1) All packagings other than bags and non-stackable composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3510 (2), shall be subjected to a stacking test.

(2) Number of test samples:

Three test samples per design type and manufacturer.

(3) Test method:

The test sample shall be subjected to a force applied to the top surface of the test sample equivalent to the total weight of identical packages which might be stacked on it during carriage.

The duration of the test shall be 24 hours, except that plastics drums and jerricans in accordance with marginal 3526 and composite packagings 6HH1 and 6HH2, intended for liquids, shall be subjected to the stacking test for a period of 28 days at a temperature of not less than 40 °C.

The minimum height of the stack including the test sample shall be 3 metres.

For the test in accordance with marginal 3551 (5), the original filling substance shall be used. For the test in accordance with marginal 3551 (6), a stacking test shall be carried out with a standard liquid.

Where the contents of the test samples are non-dangerous liquids with relative density different from that of the liquid to be carried, the force shall be calculated in relation to the latter.

(4) Criteria for passing the test:

No test sample shall leak. In composite packagings or combination packagings, there shall be no leakage of the filling substance from the inner receptacle or inner packaging.

No test sample shall show any deterioration which could adversely affect transport safety or any distortion liable to reduce its strength or cause instability in stacks of packages.

Stacking stability shall be considered sufficient when, after the stacking test, and in the case of plastics packagings, after cooling to ambient temperature, two filled packagings of the same type placed on the test sample maintain their position for one hour.

Supplementary permeability test for plastics drums and jerricans in accordance with marginal 3526 and for composite packagings (plastics material) in accordance with marginal 3537 intended for the carriage of liquids having a flash-point ≤ 61 °C, other than 6HA1 packagings

3556 (1) Polyethylene packagings need be subjected to this test only if they are to be approved for the carriage of benzene, toluene, xylene or mixtures and preparations containing those substances.

(2) Number of test samples:

Three packagings per design type and manufacturer.

(3) Special preparation of the test sample for the test:

The test samples are to be pre-stored with the original filling substance in accordance with marginal 3551 (5), or, for high molecular mass polyethylene packagings, with the standard liquid mixture of hydrocarbons (white spirit) in accordance with marginal 3551 (6).

(4) Test method:

The test samples filled with the substance for which the packaging is to be approved shall be weighed before and after storage for 28 days at 23 °C and 50 % relative atmospheric humidity. For high molecular mass polyethylene packagings, the test may be carried out with the standard liquid mixture of hydrocarbons (white spirit) in place of benzene, toluene or xylene.

(5) Criterion for passing the test:

Permeability shall not exceed 0,008 g/l.h

3557 Supplementary test for natural wood bung type barrels

(1) Number of test samples:

One barrel per design type and manufacturer.

(2) Test method:

Remove all hoops above the bilge of an empty barrel which has previously stood assembled for at least two days.

(3) Criterion for passing test:

The diameter of the upper part of the barrel shall not increase by more than 10 %.

Approval of combination packagings

Note: Combination packagings shall be tested in accordance with the provisions applicable to the outer packagings.

3558 (1) During design-type tests of combination packagings, approval may at the same time be given for packagings:

(a) containing inner packagings of less volume;

(b) having a lower net mass than that of the design type tested.

(2) Where several types of combination packaging having different types of inner packaging have been approved, the various inner packagings may also be assembled in a single outer packaging if the sender certifies that this package meets the test requirements.

(3) Provided that the strength properties of the plastics inner packagings of a combination packaging are not significantly altered by the action of the filling substance, proof of chemical compatibility is not necessary. A significant alteration in strength properties means:

(a) distinct embrittlement;

(b) a considerable decrease in elasticity, unless related to a not less than proportionate increase in elastic elongation.

(4) Where an outer packaging of a combination packaging has been successfully tested with different types of inner packagings, a variety of such different inner packagings shall also be assembled in this outer packaging. In addition, provided an equivalent level of performance is maintained, the following variations in inner packagings are allowed without further testing of the package:

(a) Inner packagings of equivalent smaller size shall be used provided:

(i) The inner packagings are of similar design to the tested inner packagings (e.g. shape - round, rectangular, etc.);

(ii) The material of construction of the inner packagings (glass, plastics, metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact and stacking forces equal to or greater than that of the originally tested packaging;

(iii) The inner packagings have the same or smaller openings and the closure is of similar design (e.g. screw cap, friction lid, etc.);

(iv) Sufficient additional cushioning material is used to take up void spaces and to prevent significant movement of inner packagings; and

(v) Inner packagings are oriented within the outer packaging in the same manner as in the tested package.

(b) A lesser number of the tested inner packagings, or of the alternative types of inner packagings identified in (a) above, shall be used provided sufficient cushioning is added to fill the void space(s) and to prevent significant movement of the inner packagings.

(5) Articles or inner packagings of any type for solids or liquids shall be assembled and presented for carriage without testing in an outer packaging under the following conditions:

(a) The outer packaging shall have been successfully tested in accordance with marginal 3552 with fragile (e.g. glass) inner packagings containing liquids using the packing group I drop height.

(b) The total combined gross mass of inner packagings shall not exceed one half of the gross mass of inner packagings used for the drop test in (a) above.

(c) The thickness of the cushioning material between inner packagings and the outside of the packaging shall not be reduced below the corresponding thickness in the originally tested packaging; and if a single inner packaging was used in the original test, the thickness of the cushioning between inner packagings shall not be less than the thickness of cushioning between the outside of the packaging and the inner packaging in the original test. If either fewer or smaller inner packagings are used (as compared to the inner packagings used in the drop test) sufficient additional cushioning material shall be used to take up void spaces.

(d) The outer packaging shall have passed successfully the stacking test in marginal 3555 while empty. The total mass of identical packages shall be based on the combined mass of the inner packagings used for the drop test in (a) above.

(e) Inner packagings containing liquids shall be completely surrounded with a sufficient quantity of absorbent material to absorb the entire liquid contents of the inner packagings.

(f) If the outer packaging is intended to contain inner packagings for liquids and is not leakproof, or is intended to contain inner packagings for solids and is not sift-proof, a means of containing any liquid or solid contents in the event of leakage shall be provided in the form of a leakproof liner, plastics bag or other equally efficient means of containment. For packagings containing liquids, the absorbent material required in (e) shall be placed inside the means of containing liquid contents.

(g) Packagings shall be marked in accordance with marginal 3512 as having been tested to Packing Group I performance for combination packagings. The marked gross mass in kilograms shall be the sum of the mass of the outer packagings plus one half of the mass of the inner packaging(s) as used for the drop test referred to in (a) above. The mark shall contain a letter 'V` in accordance with marginal 3512 (5) as being a special packaging.

Test report

3559 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users of the packaging:

1. Testing body;

2. Applicant;

3. Manufacturer of packaging;

4. Description of packaging (e.g. distinctive features such as material, inner lining, dimensions, wall thickness, mass, closures, colouring of plastics materials);

5. Design drawing of packaging and closures (if necessary, photographs);

6. Method of manufacture;

7. Maximum capacity;

8. Characteristics of test contents, e.g. viscosity and relative density for liquids and particle size for solids;

9. Drop height;

10. Test pressure in leakproofness test in accordance with marginal 3553;

11. Test pressure in internal pressure test in accordance with marginal 3554;

12. Stacking height;

13. Test results;

14. A unique test report identification;

15. Date of the test report;

16. The test report shall be signed with the name and status of signatory.

The test report shall contain statements that the packaging prepared as for carriage was tested in accordance with the appropriate provisions of Appendix A.5 and that the use of other packaging methods may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority.

B. Leakproofness test for all new, remanufactured or reconditioned packagings intended to contain liquids

3560 (1) Application of the test

Every packaging intended to contain liquids shall undergo the leakproofness test:

- before it is first used for carriage;

- after remanufacturing or reconditioning, before it is re-used for carriage.

For this test, packagings need not have their own closures fitted.

The inner receptacle of composite packagings may be tested without the outer packaging provided the test results are not affected.

This test is not required for:

- inner packagings of combination packagings;

- inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) conforming to marginal 3510 (2);

- removable head packagings intended for substances with a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm2/s;

light gauge metal packagings conforming to marginal 3510 (2).

(2) Test method:

Compressed air shall be introduced through the filling orifice of each packaging. The packaging shall be immersed in water; it shall be kept under water in such a way as not to distort the result of the test. The packaging may also be covered with soap solution, heavy oil or other suitable liquid on its seams or at any other place where leakage might occur. Other methods at least equally effective may also be used. Packagings need not be equipped with their own closures.

(3) Air pressure to be applied:

>TABLE>

(4) Criterion for passing the test:

There shall be no leakage.

3561-

3599

Annex to Appendix A.5

Section I Standard liquids for verifying the chemical compatibility of high molecular mass polyethylene packagings in accordance with marginal 3551 (6).

The following standard liquids shall be used for this plastics material.

(a) Wetting Solution for substances causing severe cracking in polyethylene under stress, in particular for all solutions and preparations containing wetting agents.

An aqueous solution of 1 to 10 % of a wetting agent shall be used. The surface tension of this solution shall be 31 to 35 mN/m at 23 °C.

The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density of not less than 1,20.

A compatibility test with acetic acid is not required if adequate chemical compatibility is proved with a wetting solution.

(b) Acetic acid for substances and preparations causing cracking in polyethylene under stress, in particular for monocarboxylic acids and monovalent alcohols.

Acetic acid in 98 to 100 % concentration shall be used.

Relative density = 1,05.

The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density not less than 1.1.

In the case of filling substances causing polyethylene to swell more than acetic acid and to such an extent that the polyethylene mass is increased by up to 4 %, adequate chemical compatibility may be proved after preliminary storing for three weeks at 40 °C, in accordance with marginal 3551 (6) but with the original filling matter.

(c) Normal butyl acetate/normal butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution for substances and preparations causing polyethylene to swell to such an extent that the polyethylene mass is increased by about 4 % and at the same time causing cracking under stress, in particular for phyto-sanitary products, liquid paints and esters. Normal butyl acetate in 98 to 100 % concentration shall be used for preliminary storage in accordance with marginal 3551 (6).

For the stacking test in accordance with marginal 3555, a test liquid consisting of a 1 to 10 % aqueous wetting solution mixed with 2 % normal butyl acetate conforming to (a) above shall be used.

The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density not less than 1,0.

In the case of filling substances causing polyethylene to swell more than normal butyl acetate and to such an extent that the polyethylene mass is increased by up to 7,5 %, adequate chemical compatibility may be proved after preliminary storing for three weeks at 40 °C, in accordance with marginal 3551 (6) but with the original filling matter.

(d) Mixture of hydrocarbons (white spirit) for substances and preparations causing polyethylene to swell, in particular for hydrocarbons, esters and ketones.

A mixture of hydrocarbons having a boiling range 160 °C to 220 °C, relative density 0,78-0,80, flash-point >50 °C and an aromatic content 16 % to 21 % shall be used.

The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density not less than 1,0.

In the case of filling substances causing polyethylene to swell to such an extent that the polyethylene mass is increased by more than 7,5 %, adequate chemical compatibility may be proved after preliminary storing for three weeks at 40 °C, in accordance with marginal 3551 (6) but with the original filling matter.

(e) Nitric acid for all substances and preparations having an oxidizing effect on polyethylene and causing molecular degradation identical to or less than 55 % nitric acid.

Nitric acid in a concentration of not less than 55 % shall be used.

The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density of not less than 1,4.

In the case of filling substances more strongly oxidizing than 55 % nitric acid or causing degradation of the molecular mass proceed in accordance with marginal 3551 (5).

(f) Water for substances which do not attack polyethylene in any of the cases referred to under (a) to (e), in particular for inorganic acids and lyes, aqueous saline solutions, polyvalent alcohols and organic substances in aqueous solution.

The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density of not less than 1,2.

Section II List of substances to which the standard liquids may be regarded as equivalents in accordance with marginal 3551 (6).

CLASS 3

>TABLE>

CLASS 5.1

>TABLE>

CLASS 6.1

>TABLE>

CLASS 6.2

>TABLE>

CLASS 8

>TABLE>

APPENDIX A.6

GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR THE USE OF INTERMEDIATE BULK CONTAINERS (IBCs), TYPES OF IBCs, REQUIREMENTS RELATING TO THE CONSTRUCTION OF IBCs AND TEST SPECIFICATIONS FOR IBCs

3600 'Intermediate Bulk Container` (IBC) means a rigid, semi-rigid or flexible portable packaging, other than those specified in Appendix A.5, that:

(a) has a capacity of

(i) not more than 3,0 m3 (3 000 litres) for solids and liquids of Packing Groups II and III;

(ii) not more than 1,5 m3 for solids of Packing Group I when packed in flexible, rigid plastics, composite, fibreboard and wooden IBCs;

(iii) not more than 3,0 m3 for solids of Packing Group I when packed in metal IBCs;

(b) is designed for mechanical handling;

(c) is resistant to the stresses produced in handling and transport as determined by the tests specified in this Appendix.

Notes: 1. The provisions of this Appendix apply to intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) the use of which is expressly authorized in the relevant classes for the carriage of certain dangerous substances.

2. Tank containers which meet the provisions of Appendix B.1b are not considered to be intermediate bulk containers (IBCs).

3. Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) which meet the conditions of this Appendix are not considered to be containers for the purposes of ADR.

4. The letters IBC only will be used in the rest of the text to refer to intermediate bulk containers.

Section 1

General conditions applicable to IBCs

3601 (1) IBCs shall be designed, manufactured and tested under a quality assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority, in order to ensure that each IBC meets the provisions of this Appendix.

(2) Every IBC shall correspond in all respects to its design type.

The competent authority may at any time require proof, by conducting tests in accordance with the provisions of this Appendix, that IBCs meet the requirements for design type tests.

(3) Before being filled and handed over for carriage, every IBC shall be inspected to ensure that it is free from corrosion, contamination or other damage and with regard to proper functioning of service equipment. Any IBC which shows signs of reduced strength as compared with the tested design type shall no longer be used or shall be so repaired that it is able to withstand the design type tests.

(4) Where two or more closure systems are fitted in series, that nearest to the substance being carried shall be closed first.

(5) During carriage, no dangerous residue shall adhere to the outside of the IBC.

(6) Where overpressure may develop in an IBC through the emission of gas from the contents (as a result of temperature increase or other causes), the IBC may be fitted with a vent provided that the gas emitted will not cause any danger on account of its toxicity, its flammability, the quantity released, etc. The vent shall be so designed that, when the IBC is in the position in which it is intended to be carried, leakages of liquid and the penetration of foreign matter are prevented under normal conditions of carriage. However, a substance may be carried in such an IBC only where a vent is prescribed for that substance in the conditions of carriage of the relevant class.

(7) When IBCs are filled with liquids, sufficient ullage shall be left to ensure that no leakage of liquid and no permanent distortion of the IBC occurs as a result of expansion of the liquid, due to temperatures which may be attained during carriage.

For a filling temperature of 15 °C, the maximum degree of filling shall be determined as follows, unless otherwise provided under a particular class:

Either (a)

>TABLE>

Or (b)

Degree of filling = >NUM>98

>DEN>1 + á (50 P tF)

% of the capacity of the IBC.

In this formula, á represents the mean coefficient of cubic expansion of the liquid between 15 °C and 50 °C, that is to say, for a maximum rise in temperature of 35 °C;

á is calculated according to the formula : á = >NUM>d15 P d50

>DEN>35 × d50

d15 and d50 being the relative densities of the liquid at 15 °C and 50 °C and tF the mean temperature of the liquid at the time of filling.

(8) When IBCs are used for the carriage of liquids with a flash-point of 55 °C (closed cup) or lower, or powders liable to dust explosion, measures shall be taken to prevent a dangerous electrostatic discharge during filling and emptying.

(9) The closure of IBCs containing wetted or diluted substances shall be such that the percentage of liquid (water, solvent or phlegmatizer) does not fall below the prescribed limits during carriage.

(10) Liquids shall be loaded only into rigid plastics IBCs or composite IBCs which have an adequate resistance to the internal pressure that may be developed under normal conditions of carriage. IBCs marked with the hydraulic test pressure as prescribed in marginal 3612 (2) shall be filled only with a liquid having a vapour pressure:

(a) such that the total gauge pressure in the packaging (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling substance plus the partial pressure of air or other inert gases, less 100 kPa) at 55 °C determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with paragraph (7) and a filling temperature of 15 °C, will not exceed two-thirds of the marked test pressure; or

(b) at 50 °C less than four-sevenths of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa; or

(c) at 55 °C less than two-thirds of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa.

(11) During carriage, IBCs shall be securely fastened to or retained within the transport unit so as to prevent lateral or longitudinal movement or impact, and so as to provide adequate external support.

3602-

3609

Section 2

Types of IBCs

Definitions

3610 (1) Subject to the particular provisions of each class, the IBCs mentioned below may be used:

Metal IBCs

Metal IBCs consist of a metal body together with appropriate service and structural equipment.

Flexible IBCs

Flexible IBCs consist of a body constituted of film, woven fabric or any other flexible material or combinations thereof, and if necessary an inner coating or liner, together with any appropriate service equipment and handling devices.

Rigid plastics IBCs

Rigid plastics IBCs consist of a rigid plastics body, which may have structural equipment together with appropriate service equipment.

Composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle

Composite IBCs consist of structural equipment in the form of a rigid outer casing enclosing a plastics inner receptacle together with any service or other structural equipment. They are so constructed that the inner receptacle and outer casing once assembled form, and are used as, an integrated single unit to be filled, stored, transported or emptied as such.

Fibreboard IBCs

Fibreboard IBCs consist of a fibreboard body with or without separate top and bottom caps, if necessary an inner liner (but no inner packagings), and appropriate service and structural equipment.

Wooden IBCs

Wooden IBCs consist of a rigid or collapsible wooden body, together with an inner liner (but no inner packagings) and appropriate service and structural equipment.

(2) The following definitions apply to the IBCs listed in (1):

Body (for all categories of IBC other than composite IBCs) means the receptacle proper, including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment (see below);

Service equipment (for all categories of IBC) means the filling and discharge devices and, according to the category of IBC, pressure relief or venting, safety, heating and heat-insulating devices and measuring instruments;

Structural equipment (for all categories of IBC other than flexible IBCs) means the reinforcing, fastening, handling, protective or stabilizing members of the body (including the base pallet for composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle);

Maximum permissible gross mass (for all categories of IBC other than flexible IBCs) means the mass of the body, its service equipment and structural equipment and the maximum permissible load;

Maximum permissible load (for flexible IBCs) means the maximum net mass for which the IBC is intended to be used and which it is authorized to carry;

Protected (for metal IBCs) means provided with additional protection against impact, the protection taking the form of, for example, a multi-layer (sandwich) or double-wall construction, or a frame with a metal lattice-work casing;

Woven plastics (for flexible IBCs) means a material made from stretched tapes or monofilaments of suitable plastics material;

Plastics (for composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle), when used in connection with inner receptacles for composite IBCs, is taken to include other polymeric materials such as rubber, etc.;

Handling device (for flexible IBCs) means any sling, loop, eye or frame attached to the body of the IBC or formed from a continuation of the IBC body material;

Liner (for flexible fibreboard and wooden IBCs) means a separate tube or bag inserted in the body but not forming an integral part of it, including the closures of its openings.

Coding of IBC design types

3611 (1) Code system for IBCs

The code consists of:

- two Arabic numerals indicating the type of IBC as specified under (a) below;

- a capital letter or letters (Latin characters) as specified under (b) below, indicating the nature of the material (e.g. metal, plastics, etc.);

- where necessary, an Arabic numeral indicating the category of IBC within the type to which the IBC belongs.

For composite IBCs, two capital letters (Latin characters) shall be used. The first shall indicate the material of the inner receptacle of the IBC and the second that of the outer packaging of the IBC.

(a)

>TABLE>

(b) A. Steel (all types and surface treatments)

B. Aluminium

C. Natural wood

D. Plywood

F. Reconstituted wood

G. Fibreboard

H. Plastics material

L. Textile

M. Paper, multiwall

N. Metal (other than steel or aluminium).

(2) The IBC code shall be followed in the marking by a letter indicating the groups of substances for which the design type is approved, i.e.:

X for substances of Packing groups I, II and III (IBCs for solids only);

Y for substances of packing groups II and III;

Z for substances of packing group III.

Note: For packing groups, see marginal 3511 (2).

Marking

3612 (1) Primary marking

All IBCs built and intended for use in conformity with these provisions shall bear a durable and legible marking giving the following particulars:

(a) The United Nations packaging symbol (for metal IBCs on which the marking is stamped or embossed, the letters 'UN` may be applied instead of the symbol);

(b) the code designating the type of IBC according to marginal 3611 (1);

(c) a letter (X, Y or Z) designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been approved;

(d) the month and year (last two digits) of manufacture;

(e) the mark () of the State in which the approval was issued;

(f) the name or symbol of the manufacturer or any other identification of the IBC as specified by the competent authority;

(g) the stacking test load in kg;

(h) maximum permissible gross mass or, for flexible IBCs, maximum permissible load, in kg.

The primary marking required above shall be applied in the sequence of the subparagraphs above. The marking required by paragraph (2) and any further marking authorized by a competent authority shall be arranged so as to enable the various parts of the marking to be correctly identified.

Examples of primary marking

>TABLE>

(2) Additional marking ()

For all categories of IBCs other than flexible IBCs:

(i) tare mass in kg (),

For metal IBCs, rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle:

(j) capacity in litres () at 20 °C,

(k) date of last leakproofness test (month and year), if applicable,

(l) date of last inspection (month and year),

(m) maximum filling discharge pressure in kPa (or in bar) (), if applicable,

For metal IBCs:

(n) body material and its minimum thickness in mm,

(o) serial number of the manufacturer,

For rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle:

(p) Test pressure (gauge) in kPa (or bar) (), if applicable.

(3) IBCs marked in accordance with this Appendix but approved in a State which is not a Contracting Party to ADR may also be used for carriage under ADR.

Certification

3613 The manufacturer shall certify, by affixing marking in accordance with this Appendix, that mass-produced IBCs correspond to the approved design type and that the conditions referred to in the approval certificate have been met.

Index of IBCs

3614 The codes corresponding to the various types of IBCs are as follows:

1. IBCs for solids loaded and discharged by gravity:

>TABLE>

2. IBCs for solids loaded or discharged under pressure of more than 10 kPa (0,1 bar)

>TABLE>

3. IBCs for liquids

>TABLE>

3615-

3620

Section 3

Construction requirements for IBCs

General provisions

3621 (1) IBCs shall be resistant to or adequately protected from deterioration due to the environment.

(2) IBCs shall be so constructed and closed that none of the contents can escape under normal conditions of carriage.

(3) IBCs and their closures shall be constructed of materials compatible with their contents, or be protected internally, so that they are not liable:

a) to be attacked by the contents so as to make their use dangerous;

b) to cause the contents to react or decompose, or form harmful or dangerous compounds with the IBC.

(4) Gaskets, where used, shall be made of materials not subject to attack by the contents of the IBCs.

(5) All service equipment shall be so positioned or protected as to minimize the risk of escape of the contents owing to damage during handling and transport.

(6) IBCs, their attachments and their service and structural equipment shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, the internal pressure of the contents and the stresses of normal handling and transport. IBCs intended for stacking shall be designed for stacking. Any lifting or securing features of IBCs shall be of sufficient strength to withstand the normal conditions of handling and transport without gross distortion or failure and shall be so positioned that no undue stress is caused in any part of the IBC.

(7) Where an IBC consists of a body within a framework, it shall be so constructed that:

- the body does not chafe or rub against the framework so as to cause material damage to the body,

- the body is retained within the framework at all times,

- the items of equipment are fixed in such a way that they cannot be damaged if the connections between body and frame allow relative expansion or movement.

(8) Where a bottom discharge valve is fitted, it shall be capable of being made secure in the closed position and the whole discharge system shall be suitably protected from damage. Valves having lever closures shall be able to be secured against accidental opening and the open or closed position shall be readily apparent. For IBCs containing liquids, a secondary means of sealing the discharge aperture shall also be provided, e.g. by a blank flange or equivalent device.

(9) New, reused or repaired IBCs shall be capable of passing the prescribed tests.

Special provisions for metal IBCs

3622 (1) These provisions apply to metal IBCs intended for the carriage of solids or liquids.

These IBCs are of the following types:

11A, 11B, 11N.

For solids which are loaded or discharged by gravity.

21A, 21B, 21N.

For solids which are loaded or discharged under a gauge pressure greater than 10 kPa (0,1 bar).

31A, 31B, 31N.

For liquids. Metal IBCs intended for the carriage of liquids and which comply with the provisions of this Appendix shall not be used to carry liquids having a vapour pressure of more than 110 kPa (1,1 bar) at 50 °C or more than 130 kPa (1,3 bar) at 55 °C.

(2) Bodies shall be made of a suitable ductile metal of which the weldability has been fully demonstrated. Welds shall be skilfully made and afford complete safety.

(3) If contact between the substance carried and the material used for the construction of the body entails a progressive decrease in the thickness of the walls, this thickness shall be increased at manufacture by an appropriate amount. This extra thickness to allow for corrosion shall be added to the wall thickness as determined according to paragraph (7) [see also marginal 3621 (3)].

(4) Care shall be taken to avoid damage by galvanic action due to the juxtaposition of dissimilar metals.

(5) Aluminium IBCs intended for the carriage of flammable liquids with a flash-point of not more than 55 °C shall have no movable parts, such as covers, closures etc., made of unprotected steel liable to rust, which might cause a dangerous reaction by coming into frictional or percussive contact with the aluminium.

(6) Metal IBCs shall be made of metals which meet the following requirements:

10 000 (a) for steel the elongation at fracture, in per cent, shall not be less than ---, with an absolute Rm minimum of 20 %

where Rm = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the steel used in N/mm2;

10 000 (b) for aluminium and its alloys the elongation at fracture, in per cent, shall not be less than ---, with 6 Rm an absolute minimum of 8 %.

Specimens used to determine the elongation at fracture shall be taken transversely to the direction of rolling and be so secured that:

L° = 5 d

or

L° = 5,65 A

where L° = gauge length of the specimen before the test

d = diameter

A = cross-sectional area of test specimen.

(7) Minimum wall thickness:

(a) For a reference steel having a product of Rm x A° = 10 000, the wall thickness shall not be less than:

>TABLE>

where A° = minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the reference steel used on fracture under tensile stress [see paragraph (6)].

(b) For metals other than the reference steel described in (a), the minimum wall thickness is calculated by the following equivalence formula:

21,4 × e0

e1 =

3Rm1 × A1

where e1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the metal to be used (in mm);

e0 = required minimum wall thickness for the reference steel (in mm);

Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the metal to be used (in N/mm2);

A1 = minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the metal to be used on fracture under tensile stress [see paragraph (6)].

However, in no case shall the wall thickness be less than 1,5 mm.

(8) Pressure relief requirements

IBCs for liquids shall be capable of releasing a sufficient amount of vapour to ensure that, in the event of fire engulfment, no rupture of the body will occur. This can be achieved by conventional pressure relief devices or by other constructional means.

The start-to-discharge pressure shall not be higher than 65 kPa (0,65 bar) and no lower than the total gauge pressure experienced in the IBC [i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling substance plus the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa (1 bar)] at 55 °C, determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling as defined in marginal 3601 (7). The required relief devices shall be fitted in the vapour space.

Special provisions for flexible IBCs

3623 (1) These provisions apply to flexible IBCs intended for the carriage of solids. These IBCs are of the following types:

13H1 woven plastics without coating or liner

13H2 woven plastics, coated

13H3 woven plastics with liner

13H4 woven plastics, coated and with liner

13H5 plastics film

13L1 textile without coating or liner

13L2 textile, coated

13L3 textile with liner

13L4 textile, coated and with liner

13M1 paper, multiwall

13M2 paper, multiwall, water resistant.

(2) Bodies shall be manufactured from suitable materials. The strength of the material and the construction of the flexible IBC shall be appropriate to its capacity and its intended use.

(3) All materials used in the construction of flexible IBCs of types 13M1 and 13M2 shall, after complete immersion in water for not less than 24 hours, retain at least 85 % of the tensile strength as measured originally on the material conditioned to equilibrium at 67 % relative humidity or less.

(4) Seams shall be formed by stitching, heat sealing, gluing or any equivalent method. All stitched seam-ends shall be secured.

(5) Flexible IBCs shall provide adequate resistance to ageing and degradation caused by ultraviolet radiation, climatic conditions or the substance contained, thereby rendering them appropriate to their intended use.

(6) For plastics flexible IBCs, where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the body. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction.

(7) Additives may be incorporated into the material of the body to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material.

(8) No material recovered from used receptacles shall be used in the manufacture of IBC bodies. Production residues or scrap from the same manufacturing process may, however, be used. Component parts such as fittings and pallet bases may also be used, provided such components have not been damaged in any way in previous use.

(9) When filled, the ratio of height to width shall be not more than 2:1.

(10) The liner shall be made of a suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and the intended use. Joins and closures shall be sift-proof and capable of withstanding pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and carriage.

Special provisions for rigid plastics IBCs

3624 (1) These provisions apply to rigid plastics IBCs intended for the carriage of solids or liquids. These IBCs are of the following types:

11H1 for solids which are loaded and discharged by gravity, fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked,

11H2 for solids which are loaded and discharged by gravity, freestanding,

21H1 for solids which are loaded or discharged under pressure of more than 10 kPa (0,1 bar), fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked,

21H2 for solids which are loaded or discharged under pressures of more than 10 kPa (0,1 bar), freestanding,

31H1 for liquids, fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked,

31H2 for liquids, freestanding.

(2) The body shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material of known specifications and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and its intended use.

The material shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained or, where relevant, by ultraviolet radiation.

Any permeation of the substance contained shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport.

(3) Where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the body. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors, other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction.

(4) Additives may be incorporated in the material of the body to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material.

(5) No used material other than production residues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used in the manufacture of rigid plastics IBCs.

(6) Rigid plastics IBCs for liquids shall be capable of releasing a sufficient amount of vapour to ensure that no rupture of the body will occur. This can be achieved by conventional pressure relief devices or by other constructional means. The start-to-discharge pressure shall not be higher than the pressure used in the hydraulic pressure test.

(7) Unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, the period of use permitted for the transport of dangerous liquids shall not exceed five years from the date of manufacture of the receptacle of the IBC except where a shorter period of use is prescribed because of the nature of the liquid to be transported.

Special provisions for composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle

3625 (1) These provisions apply to composite IBCs intended for the carriage of solids or liquids. These IBCs are of the following types:

(a) 11HZ1 for solids loaded and discharged by gravity, fitted with a rigid plastics inner receptacle;

11HZ2 for solids loaded and discharged by gravity, fitted with a flexible plastics inner receptacle;

21HZ1 for solids loaded or discharged under pressure of more than 10 kPa (0,1 bar), fitted with a rigid plastics inner receptacle;

21HZ2 for solids loaded or discharged under pressure of more than 10 kPa (0,1 bar), fitted with a flexible plastics inner receptacle;

31HZ1 for liquids, fitted with a rigid plastics inner receptacle;

31HZ2 for liquids, fitted with a flexible plastics inner receptacle.

(b) This code shall be completed by replacing the letter Z with a capital letter in accordance with marginal 3611 (1) (b) to indicate the nature of the material used for the outer casing.

(2) General

(a) The inner receptacle is not intended to perform a containment function without its outer casing.

(b) The outer casing normally consists of rigid material formed so as to protect the inner receptacle from physical damage during handling and transport but is not intended to perform the containment function; it includes the base pallet where appropriate.

(c) A composite IBC with a fully enclosing outer casing shall be so designed that the integrity of the inner container may be readily assessed following the leakproofness and hydraulic tests.

(3) Inner receptacle

The same requirements as provided for in marginal 3624 (2) to (6) for rigid plastics IBCs apply to the inner receptacle, on the understanding that, in this case, the requirements applicable to the body of rigid plastics IBCs are applicable to the inner receptacle of composite IBCs.

(4) Outer casing

(a) The strength of the material and the construction of the outer casing shall be appropriate to the capacity of the composite IBC and its intended use.

(b) The outer casing shall be free of any projection that might damage the inner receptacle.

(c) Full-walled or mesh-formed metal outer casings shall be constructed of a suitable material of adequate thickness.

(d) Outer casings of natural wood shall be of well seasoned wood, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the casing. The tops and bottoms may be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type.

(e) Outer casings of plywood shall be made of well seasoned rotary cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the casing. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water-resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used with plywood for the construction of casings. Casings shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices.

(f) The walls of outer casings of reconstituted wood shall be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type. Other parts of the casings may be made of other suitable material.

(g) For fireboard outer casings, strong and good quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used appropriate to the capacity of the casing and to its intended use. The water resistance of the outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in test carried out over 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m2 - see ISO International Standard 535-1976 (E). It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings.

(h) The ends of fibreboard casings may have a wooden frame or be entirely of wood. Reinforcements of wooden battens may be used.

(i) Manufacturing joins in the fibreboard casings shall be taped, lapped and glued, or lapped and stitched with metal staples. Lapped joins shall have an appropriate overlap. Where closing is effected by gluing or taping, a water-resistant adhesive shall be used.

(j) Where the outer casing is of plastics material, the relevant provisions of marginal 3624 (2) to (5) for rigid plastics IBCs apply, on the understanding that, in this case, the requirements applicable to the body of rigid plastics IBCs are applicable to the outer casing of composite IBCs.

(5) Other structural equipment

(a) Any integral pallet base forming part of an IBC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling of the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.

(b) The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might be liable to cause damage in handling.

(c) The outer casing shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and transport. Where a detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC.

(d) Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used, but shall be external to the inner receptacle.

(e) Where IBCs are intended for stacking the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner. Such IBCs shall be designed so that the load is not supported by the inner receptacle.

(6) Unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, the period of use permitted for the transport of dangerous liquids shall not exceed five years from the date of manufacture of the receptacle of the IBC except where a shorter period of use is prescribed because of the nature of the liquid to be transported.

Special provisions for fibreboard IBCs

3626 (1) These provisions apply to fibreboard IBCs for the carriage of solids which are loaded and discharged by gravity. Fibreboard IBCs are of the following type: 11G.

(2) Fibreboard IBCs shall not incorporate top lifting devices.

(3) Body

(a) Strong and good quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used, appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and its intended use. The water resistance of the outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m2 - see the International Standard ISO 535:1991. The fibreboard shall have proper bending qualities. It shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings.

(b) The walls, including top and bottom, shall have a minimum puncture resistance of 15 J measured according to ISO International Standard 3036: 1975.

(c) Manufacturing joins in the body of IBCs shall be made with an appropriate overlap and shall be taped, glued, stitched with metal staples, or fastened by other means at least equally effective. Where joins are effected by glueing or taping, a water-resistant adhesive shall be used. Metal staples shall pass completely through all pieces to be fastened and be formed or protected so that any inner liner cannot be abraded or punctured by them.

(4) Liner

The liner shall be made of a suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the IBC. Joins and closures shall be siftproof and capable of withstanding pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and transport.

(5) Structural equipment

(a) Any integral pallet base forming part of an IBC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling of the IBC filled to its maximum permissible mass.

(b) The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might be liable to damage in handling.

(c) The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and transport. Where a detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC.

(d) Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the liner.

(e) Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner.

Special provisions for wooden IBCs

3627 (1) These provisions apply to wooden IBCs for the carriage of solids which are loaded and discharged by gravity. Wooden IBCs are of the following types:

11C Natural wood with inner liner;

11D Plywood with inner liner;

11F Reconstituted wood with inner liner.

(2) Wooden IBCs shall not incorporate top lifting devices.

(3) Body

(a) The strength of the materials used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the IBC.

(b) If bodies are of natural wood, this shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the IBC. Each part of the IBC shall consist of one piece or be equivalent thereto. Parts are considered equivalent to one piece when:

- a suitable method of glued assembly (as for instance Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship-lap or rabbet joint),

- butt joint with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint,

- or other methods at least equally effective, are used.

(c) If bodies are of plywood, this shall be at least 3-ply. It shall be made of well-seasoned rotary cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the body. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water-resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used with plywood for the construction of the body.

(d) Bodies of reconstituted wood shall be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type.

(e) IBCs shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices.

(4) Liner

The liner shall be made of a suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the IBC. Joins and closures shall be siftproof and capable of withstanding pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and transport.

(5) Structural equipment

(a) Any integral pallet base forming part of an IBC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling of the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.

(b) The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might be liable to damage in handling.

(c) The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and transport. The top surface of the detachable pallet shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC.

(d) Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be external to the liner.

(e) Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe manner.

3628-

3649

Section 4

Test requirements for IBCs

A. Design type tests

General requirements

3650 (1) The design type of each IBC shall be tested and approved by the competent authority or by a body designated by that authority.

(2) For each design type, a single IBC shall successfully be subjected to the tests listed in (5) below in the order mentioned in the table and according to the provisions specified in marginals 3652 to 3660, (and, for flexible IBCs, in accordance with the procedures established by the competent authority) before such an IBC is used. An IBC design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of construction and means of filling and discharging but may include various surface treatments. It also includes IBCs which differ from the design type only in their lesser external dimensions.

The competent authority may nevertheless authorize the selective testing of IBCs which differ from a type already tested only in minor respects, for example, slight reductions in the external dimensions.

(3) Tests shall be carried out on IBCs prepared as for dispatch. IBCs shall be filled as indicated for the various tests. The substances to be carried in the IBCs may be replaced by other substances, except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. For solids, if another substance is used, it shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.) as thesubstance to be carried. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass, provided they are placed so that the test results are not affected.

(4) In the drop tests for liquids, if another substance is used, its relative density and viscosity shall be similar to those of the substance to be carried. Water may also be used for the liquid drop test under the following conditions:

(a) if the substances to be carried have a relative density not exceeding 1.2, the drop heights shall be those shown under the relevant sections for the various types of IBC;

(b) where the substances to be carried have a relative density exceeding 1.2, the drop heights shall calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be carried rounded up to the first decimal as follows:

>TABLE>

(5) Tests required for every IBC design type.

Each × indicates that the IBC category shown at the head of the column has to be subjected to the test indicated on the line in question, in the order listed.

>TABLE>

Preparation of IBCs for testing

3651 (1) Flexible IBCs, fibreboard IBCs and composite IBCs with fibreboard outer casing

Paper IBCs, fibreboard IBCs and composite IBCs with fibreboard outer casings shall be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a controlled temperature and relative humidity (r.h.). There are three options, one of which shall be chosen. The preferred atmosphere is 23 °C ± 2 °C and 50 % ± 2 % r.h. The other two options are 20 °C ± 2 °C and 65 % ± 2 % r.h. or 27 °C ± 2 °C and 65 % ± 2 % r.h.

Note: These values correspond to average values. In the short term the relative humidity values may vary by ± 5 % without this having an influence on the test.

(2) Rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle

Steps shall be taken to ascertain that the plastics material used in the manufacture of rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs complies with the provisions of marginal 3624.

To prove there is sufficient chemical compatibility with the contained goods, the sample IBC shall be subjected to a preliminary storage for six months, during which the samples remain filled with the substances they are intended to contain or with substances which are known to have at least as severe a stress-cracking, weakening or molecular degradation effect on the plastics materials in question, and after which the samples shall be subjected to the applicable tests listed in marginal 3650 (5).

Where the behaviour of the plastics material has been established by other means, the above compatibility test may be dispensed with. Such procedures shall be at least equivalent to the above compatibility test and be recognized by the competent authority.

Testing procedures

3652 Bottom lift test

(1) Applicability

For all types of IBC which are fitted with means of lifting from the base.

(2) Preparation of IBCs for test

The IBC shall be filled to 1,25 times its maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly distributed.

(3) Method of testing

The IBC shall be raised and lowered twice by a lift truck with the forks centrally positioned and spaced at three quarters of the dimension of the side of entry (unless the points of entry are fixed). The forks shall penetrate to three quarters of the direction of entry. The test shall be repeated from each possible direction of entry.

(4) Criteria for passing the test

No permanent deformation which renders the IBC (including the pallet base for composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle, fibreboard IBCs and wooden IBCs) unsafe for transport and no loss of contents.

3653 Top lift test

(1) Applicability

For all types of IBC which are fitted with means of lifting from the top or, where appropriate, from the side for flexible IBCs.

(2) Preparation of IBCs for test

Metal IBCs, rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle:

The IBC shall be filled to twice its maximum permissible gross mass.

Flexible IBCs:

The IBC shall be filled to six times its maximum permissible load, the load being evenly distributed.

(3) Method of testing

Metal and flexible IBCs:

The IBC shall be lifted in the manner for which it is designed until it is clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes.

For flexible IBCs other methods of top lift testing and preparation at least equally effective may be used.

Rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle:

The IBC shall be lifted by each pair of diagonally opposite lifting devices, so that the hoisting forces are applied vertically, for a period of five minutes; and

The IBC shall be lifted by each pair of diagonally opposite lifting devices, so that the hoisting forces are applied towards the centre at 45° to the vertical, for a period of five minutes.

(4) Criteria for passing the test

Metal IBCs, rigid plastics IBCs, composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle:

No permanent deformation which renders the IBC (including the pallet base for composite IBCs) unsafe for transport and no loss of contents.

Flexible IBCs:

No damage to the IBC or its lifting devices which renders the IBC unsafe for transport or handling.

3654 Tear test

(1) Applicability

For all types of flexible IBCs.

(2) Preparation of IBCs for test

The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95 % of its capacity and to its maximum permissible load, the load being evenly distributed.

(3) Method of testing

Once the IBC is placed on the ground, a 100 mm knife score, completely penetrating the wall of a wide face, is made at a 45° angle to the principal axis of the IBC, halfway between the bottom surface and the top level of contents. The IBC shall then be subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed load equivalent to twice the maximum permissible load. The load shall be applied for at least five minutes.

IBCs which are designed to be lifted from the top or the side shall then, after removal of the superimposed load, be lifted clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes. Other equivalent methods may be used.

(4) Criterion for passing the test

The cut shall not propagate more than 25 % of its original length.

3655 Stacking test

(1) Applicability

For all types of IBC.

(2) Preparation of IBCs for test

All categories of IBC other than flexible IBCs:

The IBC shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.

Flexible IBCs:

The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95 % of its capacity and to its maximum permissible load, the load being evenly distributed.

(3) Method of testing

The IBC shall be placed on its base on level hard ground and subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed test load (see (4) below).

>TABLE>

For all categories of IBC other than metal IBCs, the superimposed test load shall be applied by one of the following methods:

- one or more IBCs of the same type loaded to their maximum permissible gross mass (maximum permissible load in the case of flexible IBCs) are stacked on the test IBC;

- appropriate weights are loaded on to a flat plate or a reproduction of the base of the IBC, which is placed on the test IBC.

(4) Calculation of superimposed test load

The load to be placed on the IBC shall be at least 1,8 times the combined maximum permissible gross mass of the number of similar IBCs that may be stacked on top of the IBC during carriage.

(5) Criteria for passing the test

- IBCs other than flexible IBCs:

No permanent deformation which renders the IBC (including the pallet base for composite IBCs, fibreboard IBCs or wooden IBCs) unsafe for transport and no loss of contents.

- Flexible IBCs:

No deterioration of the body which renders the IBC unsafe for transport and no loss of contents.

3656 Leakproofness test

(1) Applicability

For all types of metal IBC and for types of plastics IBC and composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle for the transport of solids loaded or discharged under pressure or for the transport of liquids.

(2) Preparation of IBCs for test

Vented closures shall either be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the vent shall be sealed. In addition, for metal IBCs, the design type test shall be carried out before the fitting of any thermal insulation equipment.

For this test the IBC need not have its closures fitted. The inner receptacle of composite IBCs may be tested without the outer packaging provided the test results are not affected.

(3) Method of testing and pressure to be applied

The test shall be carried out for a period of at least 10 minutes using air at a constant gauge pressure of not less than 20 kPa (0,2 bar). The airtightness of the IBC shall be determined by a suitable method such as the air-pressure differential test or by immersing the IBC in water. In the latter case a correction factor shall be applied for the hydrostatic pressure. Other methods at least as effective may be used for rigid plastics IBCs and for composite IBCs.

(4) Criterion for passing the test

No leakage of air.

3657 Internal (hydraulic) pressure test

(1) Applicability

For IBCs of types:

- 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N

- 21H1, 21H2, 31H1, 31H2

- 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1, 31HZ2.

(2) Preparation of IBCs for test

Pressure relief devices shall be removed and their apertures plugged, or shall be rendered inoperative. In addition, for metal IBCs, the test shall be carried out before the fitting of any thermal insulation equipment.

(3) Method of testing

The test shall be carried out for a period of at least 10 minutes applying a hydraulic pressure not less than that indicated in (4). The IBCs shall not be mechanically restrained during the test.

(4) Pressures to be applied

(a) Metal IBCs:

1. For IBCs of types 21A, 21B and 21N, for Packing Group I solids, a 250 kPa (2,5 bar) gauge pressure;

2. For IBCs of types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N, for Packing Group II or III substances, a 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure;

3. In addition, for IBCs of types 31A, 31B and 31N, a 65 kPa (0,65 bar) gauge pressure. This test shall be performed before the 2 bar test.

(b) Rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs with inner plastics receptacle:

1. For IBCs of types 21H1, 21H2, 21HZ1 and 21HZ2: a gauge pressure of 75 kPa (0,75 bar);

2. For IBCs of types 31H1, 31H2, 31HZ1 and 31HZ2: whichever is the greater of the values under (i) or (ii):

(i) The total gauge pressure measured in the IBC (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling substance and the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55 °C multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5; this total gauge pressure shall be determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 3601 (7) and a filling temperature of 15 °C; or

1,75 times the vapour pressure at 50 °C of the substance to be carried minus 100 kPa, but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa; or

1,5 times the vapour pressure at 55 °C of the substance to be carried minus 100 kPa; but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa;

(ii) twice the static pressure of the substance to be carried, with a minimum of twice the static pressure of water.

(5) Criteria for passing the test(s)

- Metal IBCs:

For IBCs of types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N, when subjected to the test pressure specified in (4) (a) 1. or 2.: no leakage.

For IBCs of types 31A, 31B and 31N, when subjected to the test pressure specified in (4) (a) 3.: neither permanent deformation which would render the IBC unsafe for carriage, nor leakage.

- Rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs:

Neither permanent deformation which would render the IBC unsafe for transport, nor loss of contents.

3658 Drop test

(1) Applicability

For all types of IBC.

(2) Preparation of IBCs for test

The IBC shall be filled:

- For solids, to not less than 95 % of its capacity,

- For liquids, to not less than 98 % of its capacity in the case of metal IBCs or rigid plastics IBCs, and to not less than 90 % of its capacity in the case of composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle.

The IBC shall further be filled to its maximum permissible load in accordance with the design type.

For metal IBCs, rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle, pressure relief devices shall be removed and their apertures plugged, or shall be rendered inoperative.

For rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle, testing shall be carried out when the temperature of the test sample and its contents has been reduced to P 18 °C or lower. Where test samples are prepared in this way, the conditioning specified in 3651 (2) may be waived.

Test liquids shall be kept in the liquid state, if necessary by the addition of anti-freeze.

This conditioning may be disregarded if the ductility and tensile strength of the materials in question are not significantly reduced at P 18 °C or lower.

(3) Method of testing

The IBC shall be dropped on to a rigid, non-resilient, smooth, flat and horizontal surface, on its base (for flexible IBCs) or in such a manner as to ensure that the point of impact is on that part of the base of the IBC considered to be the most vulnerable (for all other types of IBC).

IBCs of 0,45 m3 or less capacity shall also be subject to a drop test on the most vulnerable part other than the part of the base of the IBC tested in the first drop (for metal IBCs); on the most vulnerable side (for flexible IBCs); flat on a side, flat on the top and on a corner (for all other types of IBC). The same or different IBCs may be used for each drop.

(4) Drop height

>TABLE>

(5) Criteria for passing the test

All IBCs:

No loss of contents.

IBCs other than metal IBCs:

A slight discharge from closures (or stitch holes in the case of flexible IBCs) upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC, provided that no further leakage occurs.

3659 Topple test

(1) Applicability

For all types of flexible IBCs.

(2) Preparation of IBCs for test

The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95 % of its capacity and to its maximum permissible load, the load being evenly distributed.

(3) Method of testing

The IBC shall be caused to topple on to any part of its top on to a rigid, non-resilient, smooth, flat and horizontal surface.

(4) Topple height

>TABLE>

(5) Criteria for passing the test

No loss of contents. A very slight discharge, e.g. from closures or stitch holes, upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC, provided that no further leakage occurs.

3660 Righting test

(1) Applicability

For all IBCs designed to be lifted from the top or side.

(2) Preparation of IBCs for test

The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95 % of its capacity and to its maximum permissible load, the load being evenly distributed.

(3) Method of testing

The IBC, lying on its side, shall be lifted at a speed of at least 0,1 m/s to upright position, clear of the floor, by one lifting device, or by two lifting devices when four are provided.

(4) Criterion for passing the test

No damage to the IBC or its lifting devices which renders the IBC unsafe for transport or handling.

3661 Test report

(1) A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users of the IBC:

1. Name and address of the test facility;

2. Name and address of the applicant (where appropriate);

3. A unique test report identification;

4. Date of the test report;

5. Manufacturer of the IBC;

6. Description of the IBC design type (e.g. dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.) including method of manufacture (e.g. blow moulding) and which may include drawing(s) and/or photograph(s);

7. Maximum capacity;

8. Characteristics of test contents, e.g. viscosity and relative density for liquids and particle size for solids;

9. Test descriptions and results;

10. The test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory.

(2) The test report shall contain statements that the IBC prepared as for carriage was tested in accordance with the appropriate provisions of Appendix A.6 and that the use of other packaging methods or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority.

B. Tests and inspection for every metal IBC, rigid plastics IBC and composite IBC with plastics inner receptacle

Initial and periodic tests

3662 (1) All metal IBCs of type 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N, all rigid plastics IBCs of type 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2 and all composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle of type 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1 and 31HZ2 shall successfully undergo the leakproofness test, and be capable of meeting the appropriate levels according to marginal 3656 (3) before they are used for carriage for the first time.

(2) The leakproofness test referred to in (1) shall be repeated

- at least once every two and a half years,

- after any repair, before it is reused for carriage.

(3) The results of the tests shall be entered in the test reports to be kept by the owner of the IBC.

Inspection

3663 (1) All metal IBCs, all rigid plastics IBCs and all composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacle shall be inspected to the satisfaction of the competent authority before they are put into service, and thereafter at intervals not exceeding five years, with regard to:

- conformity to design type including marking;

- internal and external condition;

- proper functioning of service equipment.

For metal IBCs, thermal insulation need be removed only to the extent necessary for a proper examination of the IBC body.

(2) All IBCs referred to in (1) shall be visually inspected to the satisfaction of the competent authority after not more than two and a half years, with reference to the external condition of the IBC and the proper functioning of service equipment.

For metal IBCs, the insulation need be removed only if this is essential for a proper examination of the IBC body.

(3) Every inspection shall be the subject of a report which shall be kept by the owner at least until the following inspection date.

(4) If the structural characteristics of an IBC have been impaired by a violent impact (for example, an accident) or other cause, the IBC shall be repaired and subjected to the leakproofness test according to marginal 3656, if it is required for the design type, and to the inspection prescribed in paragraph (1) above.

3664-

3699

APPENDIX A.7

PROVISIONS RELATING TO RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL OF CLASS 7

This Appendix comprises:

Sections:

I Activity and fissile material limits

II Preparation provisions and controls for shipment and for storage in transit

III Provisions for radioactive material, for packaging and packages and test procedures

IV Approval and administrative provisions

V Radioactive material having other hazardous properties

SECTION I

Activity and fissile material limits

Basic A1 and A2 values

3700 A1/A2 values for radionuclides are given in table I.

>TABLE>

Determination of A1 and A2

3701 (1) For individual radionuclides whose identities are known, but which are not listed in Table I, the determination of the values of A1 and A2 shall require multilateral approval. Alternatively, the values of A1 and A2 in Table II may be used without obtaining competent authority approval.

>TABLE>

(2) In the calculations of A1 and A2 for a radionuclide not in Table I, a single radioactive decay chain in which the radionuclides are present in their naturally occurring proportions and in which no daughter nuclide has a half-life either longer than 10 days or longer than that of the parent nuclide shall be considered as a single radionuclide, and the activity to be taken into account and the A1 or A2 value to be applied shall be those corresponding to the parent nuclide of that chain. In the case of radioactive decay chains in which any daughter nuclide has a half-life either longer than 10 days or greater than that of the parent nuclide, the parent and such daughter nuclides shall be considered as mixtures of different nuclides.

(3) For mixtures of radionuclides whose identities and respective activities are known, the following conditions shall apply:

(a) For special form radioactive material:

Ói >NUM>B (i)

>DEN>A1 (i)

less than or equal to 1

(b) For other forms of radioactive material:

Ói >NUM>B (i)

>DEN>A2 (i)

less than or equal to 1

where B(i) is the activity of radionuclide i and A1(i) and A2(i) are the A1 and A2 values for radionuclide i, respectively.

Alternatively, an A2 value for mixtures may be determined as follows:

A2 for a mixture = >NUM>1

>DEN>Ói >NUM>f(i)

>DEN>A2(i)

where f(i) is the fraction of activity of nuclide i in the mixture and A2(i) is the appropriate A2 value for nuclide i.

(4) When the identity of each radionuclide is known but the individual activities of some of the radionuclides are not known, the radionuclides may be grouped and the lowest A1 or A2 value, as appropriate, for the radionuclides in each group may be used in applying the formulas in paragraph (3) above. Groups may be based on the total alpha activity and the total beta/gamma activity when these are known, using the lowest A1 or A2 values for the alpha emitters or beta/gamma emitters, respectively.

(5) For individual radionuclides or for mixtures of radionuclides for which adequate data are not available, the values shown in Table II shall be used.

Contents limits for packages

3702 The quantity of radioactive material in a package shall not exceed the relevant limits specified in this marginal.

(1) Excepted packages

(a) For radioactive material other than articles manufactured of natural uranium, depleted uranium or natural thorium, an excepted package shall not contain activities greater than the following:

(i) Where the radioactive material is enclosed in or forms a component part of an instrument or other manufactured article, such as a clock or electronic apparatus, the limits specified in marginal 3713 (4) for each individual item and each package, respectively; and

(ii) Where the radioactive material is not so enclosed or manufactured, the limits specified in marginal 3713 (5).

(b) For articles manufactured of natural uranium, depleted uranium or natural thorium, an excepted package may contain any quantity of such material provided that the outer surface of the uranium or thorium is enclosed in an inactive sheath made of metal or some other substantial material.

(2) Industrial packages

The total activity in a single package of LSA material or in a single package of SCO shall be so restricted that the radiation level specified in marginal 3714 (1) shall not be exceeded, and the activity in a single package shall also be so restricted that the activity limits for a vehicle specified in marginal 3714 (6) shall not be exceeded.

(3) Type A packages

Type A packages shall not contain activities greater than the following:

(a) For special form radioactive material - A1; or

(b) For all other radioactive material - A2.

Values for A1 and A2 are listed in Tables I and II of marginals 3700 and 3701 respectively.

(4) Type B packages

Type B packages shall not contain:

(a) activities greater than those authorised for the package design,

(b) radionuclides different from those authorised for the package design, or

(c) contents in a form, or a physical or chemical state different from those authorised for the package design, as specified in their certificates of approval.

(5) Packagings containing fissile material

All packagings containing fissile material shall comply with the applicable activity limits for packages specified in paragraphs (1) to (4) above.

Packagings containing fissile material, other than those containing materials which comply with the provisions of marginal 3703 shall not contain:

(a) a mass of fissile material greater than that authorised for the package design,

(b) any radionuclide or fissile material different from those authorised for the package design, or

(c) contents in a form or physical or chemical state, or in a spatial arrangement, different from those authorised for the package design, as specified in their certificates of approval.

3703 Packages meeting one of the conditions of this marginal shall be excepted from the provisions specified in marginal 3741 and from the other provisions of this Appendix that apply specifically to fissile material; such packages, however, shall be regulated as non-fissile radioactive material packages, as applicable, and shall still be subject to those provisions of this Appendix which pertain to their radioactive nature and properties:

(a) Packages containing individually not more than 15 g of fissile material, provided that the smallest external dimension of each package is not less than 10 cm. For unpackaged material, the quantity limitation shall apply to the consignment being carried in or on the vehicle.

(b) Packages containing homogeneous hydrogenous solutions or mixtures satisfying the conditions listed in Table III. For unpackaged material, the quantity limitations in Table III shall apply to the consignment being carried in or on the vehicle.

(c) Packages containing uranium enriched in uranium-235 to a maximum of 1 % by mass, and with a total plutonium and uranium-233 content not exceeding 1 % of the mass of uranium-235, provided that the fissile material is distributed essentially homogeneously throughout the material. In addition, if uranium-235 is present in metallic, oxide, or carbide forms, it shall not form a lattice arrangement within the package.

(d) Packages containing not more than 5 g of fissile material in any 10 litre volume, provided that the radioactive material is contained in packages which will maintain the limitations on fissile material distribution under conditions likely be encountered during routine transport.

(e) Packages containing individually not more than 1 kg of total plutonium, of which not more than 20 % by mass may consist of plutonium-239, plutonium-241, or any combination of those radionuclides.

(f) Packages containing liquid solutions of uranyl nitrate enriched in uranium-235 to a maximum of 2 % by mass, with a total plutonium and uranium-233 content not exceeding 0,1 % of the mass of uranium-235, and with a minimum nitrogen to uranium atomic ratio (N/U) of 2.

>TABLE>

3704-

3709

Section II

Preparation provisions and controls for shipment and for storage in transit

Package inspection provisions

3710 (1) Before the first shipment of any package, the following provisions shall be fulfilled:

a) If the design pressure of the containment system exceeds 35 kPa (0,35 bar gauge), it shall be ensured that the containment system of each package conforms to the approved design provisions relating to the capability of that system to maintain its integrity under pressure.

b) For each Type B package and for each packaging containing fissile material, it shall be ensured that the effectiveness of its shielding and containment and, where necessary, the heat transfer characteristics, are within the limits applicable to or specified for the approved design.

c) For each packaging containing fissile material, where, in order to comply with the provisions of marginal 3741, neutron poisons are specifically included as components of the package, tests shall be performed to confirm the presence and distribution of those neutron poisons.

(2) Before each shipment of any package, the following provisions shall be fulfilled:

a) It shall be ensured that lifting attachments which do not meet the provisions of marginal 3732 have been removed or otherwise rendered incapable of being used for lifting the package.

b) For each Type B package and for each packaging containing fissile material, it shall be ensured that all the requirements specified in the approval certificates and the relevant provisions of this Appendix have been satisfied.

c) Each Type B package shall be held until equilibrium conditions have been approached closely enough to demonstrate compliance with the shipment provisions for temperature and pressure unless an exemption from these provisions has received unilateral approval.

d) For each Type B package, it shall be ensured by examination and/or appropriate tests that all closures, valves and other openings of the containment system through which the radioactive contents might escape are properly closed and, where appropriate, sealed in the manner for which the demonstrations of compliance with the provisions of marginal 3738 were made.

Transport of other goods

3711 (1) A package shall not contain any other items except such articles and documents as are necessary for the use of the radioactive material. This provision shall not preclude the transport of low specific activity material or surface contaminated objects with other items. The transport of such articles and documents in a package, or of low specific activity material or surface contaminated objects with other items may be permitted provided that there is no interaction between them and the packaging or its contents that would reduce the safety of the package.

(2) Tanks used for the transport of radioactive material shall not be used for the storage or transport of other goods.

(3) The carriage of other goods with consignments being transported under exclusive use shall be permitted provided the arrangements are controlled only by the consignor and it is not prohibited by other regulations.

(4) Consignments shall be segregated from other dangerous goods during transport and storage in accordance with the provisions of marginal 2703 under heading 7. and 71 403.

(5) Radioactive material shall be sufficiently segregated from undeveloped photographic film. The basis for determining segregation distances for this purpose shall be that the radiation exposure of undeveloped photographic film due to the transport of radioactive material be limited to 0,1 mSv (10 mrem) per consignment of such film in accordance with marginal 2711.

Requirements and controls for contamination and for leaking packages

3712 (1) The non-fixed contamination on the external surfaces of a package shall be kept as low as practicable and, under conditions likely to be encountered in routine transport, shall not exceed the levels specified in Table IV.

(2) In the case of overpacks and containers, the level of non-fixed contamination on the external and the internal surfaces shall not exceed the limits specified in Table IV.

(3) If it is evident that a package is damaged or leaking, or if it is suspected that the package may have leaked or been damaged, access to the package shall be restricted and a qualified person shall, as soon as possible, assess the extent of contamination and the resultant radiation level of the package. The scope of the survey shall include the package, the vehicle, the adjacent loading and unloading areas, and, if necessary, all other material which has been carried in the vehicle. When necessary, additional steps for the protection of human health, in accordance with provisions established by the competent authority, shall be taken to overcome and minimize the consequences of such leakage or damage.

>TABLE>

(4) Packages leaking radioactive contents in excess of allowable limits for normal conditions of transport may be removed under supervision but shall not be forwarded until repaired or reconditioned and decontaminated.

(5) A vehicle and equipment used routinely for the carriage of radioactive material shall be periodically checked to determine the level of contamination. The frequency of such checks shall be related to the likelihood of contamination and the extent to which radioactive material is carried.

(6) Except as provided in paragraph (7) below, any vehicle, equipment, or part thereof which has become contaminated above the limits specified in Table IV or which shows radiation level in excess of 5 ìSv/h (0,5 mrem/h) in the course of the carriage of radioactive material shall be decontaminated as soon as possible by a qualified person and shall not be re-used unless the non-fixed radioactive contamination does not exceed the levels specified in Table IV, and the radiation level resulting from the fixed contamination on surfaces after decontamination is less than

5 ìSv/h (0,5 mrem/h).

(7) An overpack, container or vehicle dedicated to the transport of low specific activity material or surface contaminated objects under exclusive use shall be excepted from paragraphs (2) and (6) above solely with regard to its internal surface and only for as long as it remains under that specific exclusive use.

Requirements and controls for transport of excepted packages

3713 (1) Excepted packages shall be subject only to the following provisions:

(a) In sections II, III and V, only the provisions specified in:

(i) paragraphs (2) to (6) of this marginal, as applicable, and marginal 3770 and

(ii) the general provisions for all packagings and packages specified in marginal 3732;

(b) If the excepted package contains fissile material, the provisions of marginal 3703.

(c) The provision of marginal 2705 (1).

(2) The radiation level at any point on the external surface of an excepted package shall not exceed 5 ìSv/h (0,5 mrem/h).

(3) The non-fixed radioactive contamination on any external surface of an excepted package shall not exceed the limits specified in Table IV.

(4) Radioactive material which is enclosed in or forms a component part of an instrument or other manufactured article, with activity not exceeeding the item and package limits specified in columns 2 and 3 respectively in Table V, may be transported in an excepted package provided that:

(a) the radiation level at 10 cm from any point on the external surface of any unpackaged instrument or article is not greater than 0,1 mSv/h (10 mrem/h), and

(b) each instrument or article (except radioluminescent time-pieces or devices) bears the marking 'Radioactive`.

>TABLE>

Note: For mixtures of radionuclides, see marginal 3701 (3) to (5).

(5) Radioactive material in forms other than as specified in paragraph (4) above, with an activity not exceeding the limit specified in column 4 of Table V, may be transported in an excepted package provided that:

(a) the package retains its contents under conditions likely to be encountered in routine transport, and

(b) the package bears the marking 'Radioactive` on an internal surface in such a manner that a warning of the presence of radioactive material is visible on opening the package.

(6) A manufactured article in which the sole radioactive material is unirradiated natural uranium, unirradiated depleted uranium or unirradiated natural thorium may be transported as an excepted package provided that the outer surface of the uranium or thorium is enclosed in an inactive sheath made of metal or some other substantial material.

Requirements and controls for transport of LSA material and SCO in industrial packages or unpackaged

3714 (1) The quantity of LSA material or SCO in a single industrial package (IP-1, IP-2 or IP-3) or object or collection of objects, whichever is appropriate, shall be so restricted that the external radiation level at 3 m from the unshielded material or object or collection of objects does not exceed 10 mSv/h (1 000 mrem/h).

(2) LSA material and SCO which is or contains fissile material shall meet the applicable provisions of marginals 2714 (2) and (3) and 3741.

(3) Packages, including tanks or containers, containing LSA material or SCO shall be subject to the provisions of marginal 3712 (1) and (2).

(4) LSA material and SCO in groups LSA-I and SCO-I may be transported unpackaged under the following conditions:

(a) All unpackaged material other than ores containing only naturally occurring radionuclides shall be transported in such a manner that under conditions likely to be encountered in routine transport there will be no escape of the contents from the vehicle nor will there be any loss of shielding.

(b) Each vehicle shall be under exclusive use, except when only transporting SCO-I on which the contamination on the accessible and the inaccessible surfaces is not greater than ten times the applicable level specified in marginal 2700 (2).

(c) For SCO-I where it is suspected that non-fixed contamination exists on inaccessible surfaces in excess of the values specified in marginal 2700 (2), measures shall be taken to ensure that the radioactive material is not released into the vehicle.

(5) LSA material and SCO, except as otherwise specified in paragraph (4) above, shall be packaged in accordance with the package integrity levels specified in table VI in such a manner that, under conditions likely to be encountered in routine transport, there will be no escape of contents from packages, nor will there be any loss of shielding afforded by the packaging. LSA-IImaterial, LSA-III material and SCO-II shall not be transported unpackaged.

>TABLE>

(6) The total activity of LSA material and SCO in any single vehicle shall not exceed the limits shown in table VII.

>TABLE>

Determination of transport index (TI)

3715 (1) The transport index (TI) based on radiation exposure control for a package, overpack, tank, container, or for unpackaged LSA-I or SCO-I, shall be the number derived in accordance with the following procedure:

(a) Determine the maximum radiation level at a distance of 1 m from the external surfaces of the package, overpack, tank, container, or unpackaged LSA-I and SCO-I. Where the radiation level is determined in units of millisievert per hour (mSv/h), the value determined shall be multiplied by 100. Where the radiation level is determined in units of millirem per hour (mrem/h), the value determine is not changed.

For uranium and thorium ores and concentrates, the maximum radiation dose rate at any point 1 m from the external surface of the load may be taken as:

0,4 mSv/h (40 mrem/h) for the ores and physical concentrates or uranium and thorium;

0,3 mSv/h (30 mrem/h) for chemical concentrates of thorium;

0,02 mSv/h (2 mrem/h) for chemical concentrates of uranium, other than uranium hexafluoride.

(b) For tanks, containers and unpackaged LSA-I and SCO-I, the value determined in step (a) above shall be multiplied by the appropriate factor from Table VIII.

(c) The figure obtained in steps (a) and (b) above shall be rounded up to the first decimal place (e.g. 1.13 becomes 1,2), except that a value of 0,05 or less may be considered as zero.

>TABLE>

(2) The transport index (TI) based on nuclear criticality control shall be obtained by dividing the number 50 by the value of N derived using the procedures specified in marginal 3741 (i.e. Transport Index = 50/N).

The value of the transport index for nuclear criticality control may be zero, provided that an unlimited number of packages is subcritical (i.e. N is effectively equal to infinity).

(3) The transport index for each consignment shall be determined in accordance with Table IX.

>TABLE>

Additional provisions for overpacks

3716 The following additional provisions shall be apply to overpacks:

(a) Packages of fissile material for which the transport index for nuclear criticality control is 0 and packages of non-fissile radioactive material may be combined together in an overpack for transport, provided that each package contained therein meets the applicable provision of this Appendix.

(b) Packages of fissile material for which the transport index for nuclear criticality control exceeds 0 shall not be carried in an overpack.

(c) Only the original consignor of the packages contained within the overpacks shall be permitted to use the method of direct measurement of radiation level to determine the transport index of a rigid overpack.

Limits on transport index and radiation level for packages and overpacks

3717 (1) Except for consignments under exclusive use, the transport index of any individual package or overpack shall not exceed 10.

(2) Except for packages or overpacks transported under exclusive use under the conditions specified in marginal 2713 (1) (a), the maximum radiation level at any point on any external surface of a package or overpack shall not exceed 2 mSv/h (200 mrem/h).

(3) The maximum radiation level at any point on any external surface of a package transported under exclusive use shall not exceed 10 mSv/h (1 000 mrem/h).

Categories

3718 Packages and overpacks shall be assigned to either category I-WHITE, II-YELLOW or III-YELLOW in accordance with the conditions specified in tables X and XI, as applicable, and with the following provisions:

(a) For a package, both the transport index and the surface radiation level conditions shall be taken into account in determining which is the appropriate category. Where the transport index satisfied the condition for one category but the surface radiation level satisfies the condition for a different category, the package shall be assigned to the higher category of the two. For this purpose, category I-WHITE shall be regarded as the lowest category;

(b) The transport index shall be determined following the procedures specified in marginal 3715 and subject to the limitation of marginal 3716 (c);

(c) If the transport index is greater than 10, the package or overpack shall be transpored under exclusive use;

(d) If the surface radiation level is greater than 2 mSv/h (200 mrem/h), the package or overpack shall be transported under exclusive use and under the provisions of marginal 2713 (1) (a);

(e) A package transported under a special arrangement shall be assigned to category III-YELLOW;

(f) An overpack which contains packages transported under special arrangement shall be assigned to category III-YELLOW.

>TABLE>

>TABLE>

Notification of competent authorities

3719 (1) Before the first shipment of any package requiring competent authority approval, the consignor shall ensure that copies of each applicable competent authority certificate applying to that package design have been submitted to the competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment is to be transported.

The consignor is not required to await an acknowledgement from the competent authority, nor is the competent authority required to make such acknowledgement of receipt of the certificate.

(2) For each shipment listed in (a), (b) or (c) below, the consignor shall notify the competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment is to be transported. This notification shall be in the hands of each competent authority prior to the commencement of the shipment, and preferably at least 7 days in advance.

(a) Type B(U) packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3 × 103 A1 or 3 × 103 A2, as appropriate, or 1 000 TBq (20 kCi), whichever is the lower;

(b) Type B(M) packages;

(c) Transport under special arrangement.

(3) The consignment notification shall include:

(a) Sufficient information to enable the identification of the package including all applicable certificate numbers and identification marks;

(b) Information on the date of shipment, the expected date of arrival and proposed routeing;

(c) The name of the radioactive material or nuclide;

(d) A description of the physical and chemical form of the radioactive material, or whether it is special form radioactive material, and

(e) The maximum activity of the radioactive contents during transport expressed in units of becquerel (Bq) [and, if desired, curie (Ci)] with an appropriate SI prefix [see marginal 2001 (1)]. For fissile material, the total mass of fissile material in units of gram (g), or multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity.

(4) The consignor is not required to send a separate notification if the required information has been included in the application for shipment approval. [See marginal 3757 (3)].

Possession of certificates and operating instructions

(5) The consignor shall have in his possession a copy of each certificate required under Section III of this Appendix, and a copy of the instructions with regard to the proper closing of the package and other preparations for shipment before making any shipment under the terms of the certificates.

3720-

3729

Section III

Provisions for radioactive material, for packaging and packages and test procedures

Note: The provisions in section III are the same as those prescribed in the 1985 Edition of IAEA Regulations for the safe transport of radioactive material and the 1988 Supplement. The paragraph numbers mentioned under marginals 3730 to 3742 are the numbers of the applicable paragraphs of the 1985 Edition.

3730 Provisions for LSA-III material

paragraph 501.

3731 Provisions for special form radioactive material

paragraphs 502-504.

3732 General provisions for all packaging and packages

paragraphs 505-514.

3733 Provisions for industrial packages type 1 (IP-1)

paragraph 518.

3734 Additional provisions for industrial packages type 2 (IP-2)

paragraph 519.

3735 Additional provisions for industrial packages type 3 (IP-3)

paragraph 520.

3736 Alternative provisions for tanks and containers to qualify as IP-2 and IP-3

paragraphs 521-523.

3737 Provisions for Type A packages

paragraphs 524-540.

3738 Provisions for Type B packages

paragraphs 541-548.

3739 Provisions for Type B (U) packages

paragraphs 549-556.

3740 Provisions for Type B (M) packages

paragraphs 557-558.

3741 Provisions for packages containing fissile material

paragraphs 559-568.

3742 Test procedures

paragraphs 601-633.

3743-

3749

Section IV

Approval and administrative provisions

Note: Where the provisions in Section IV are the same as those prescribed in the 1985 Edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material (as Amended 1990) the numbers mentioned under marginals 3761 to 3764 are the numbers of the applicable paragraphs of the 1985 Edition.

General

3750 Competent authority approval shall be required for the following:

(a) Special form radioactive material (see marginal 3751);

(b) All packages containing fissile material (see marginals 3754 and 3755);

(c) Type B packages - Type B(U) and Type B(M) (see marginals 3752, 3753 and 3755);

(d) Special arrangements (see marginal 3758);

(e) Certain shipments (see marginal 3757);

(f) Calculation of unlisted A1 and A2 values [see marginal 3701 (1)].

Approval of special form radioactive material

3751 (1) The design for special form radioactive material shall require unilateral approval. An application for approval shall include;

(a) A detailed description of the radioactive material or,if a capsule, the contents; particular reference shall be made to both physical and chemical states;

(b) A detailed statement of the design of any capsule to be used;

(c) A statement of the tests which have been done and their results, or evidence based on calculative methods to show that the radioactive material is capable of meeting the performance standards, or other evidence that the special form radioactive material meets the applicable provisions of this Appendix;

(d) Evidence of a quality assurance programme.

(2) The competent authority shall issue an approval certificate stating that the approved design meets the provisions for special form radioactive material and shall allocate to that design an identification mark. The certificate shall specify the details of the special form radioactive material.

Approval of package designs

Approval of Type B(U) package designs

3752 (1) Any design of Type B(U) package originating in a Member State shall be approved by the competent authority of this State; if the State where the package has been designed is not a Member State carriage is possible on condition that;

(a) a certificate has been supplied by this State, proving that the package satisfies the technical provisions of this Directive, and that this certificate is countersigned by the competent authority of the first Member State reached by the consignment;

(b) if no certificate has been supplied, the package design is approved by the competent authority of the first Member State reached by the consignment.

Any design of Type B(U) package for fissile material, which is also subject to marginal 3741 shall require multilateral approval.

(2) An application for approval shall include:

(a) A detailed description of the proposed radioactive contents with particular reference to their physical and chemical states and the nature of the radiation emitted;

(b) A detailed statement of the design, including complete engineering drawings and schedules of materials and methods of construction to be used;

(c) A statement of the tests which have been done and their results, or evidence based on calculative methods or other evidence that the design is adequate to meet the applicable provisions;

(d) The proposed operating and maintenance instructions for the use of the packaging;

(e) If the package is designed to have a maximum normal operating pressure in excess of 100 kPa (1,0 bar) gauge, the application for approval shall, in particular, state, in respect of the materials of construction of the containment system, the specifications, the samples to be taken, and the tests to be made;

(f) Where the proposed radioactive contents are irradiated fuel, the applicant shall state and justify any assumption in the safety analysis relating to the characteristics of the fuel;

(g) Any special stowage provisions necessary to ensure the safe dissipation of heat from the package; consideration shall be given to the various modes of transport to be used and type of vehicle or container;

(h) A reproducible illustration not larger than 21 cm × 30 cm showing the make-up of the package, and

(i) Evidence of a quality assurance programme.

(3) The competent authority shall issue an approval certificate stating that the design meets the provisions for Type B(U) packages.

Approval of Type B (M) package designs

3753 (1) Each Type B(M) package design, including those for fissile material which are also subject to marginal 3754 shall require multilateral approval.

(2) An application for approval of a Type B(M) package design shall include, in addition to the information required in marginal 3752 (2) for Type B(U) packages:

(a) A list of the specific provisions for Type B(U) packages specified in marginals 3738 and 3739 with which the package does not conform;

(b) Any proposed supplementary operational controls to be applied during transport not routinely provided for in this Appendix, but which are necessary to ensure the safety of the package or to compensate for the deficiencies listed in above, such as human intervention for temperature or pressure measurements or for periodic venting, taking into account the possibility of unexpected delay;

(c) Particulars of any restrictions on the mode of transport and any special loading, carriage, unloading or handling procedures, and

(d) The maximum and minimum ambient conditions (temperature, solar radiation) expected to be encountered during transport and which have been taken into account in the design.

(3) The competent authority shall issue an approval certificate stating that the design meets the applicable provisions for Type B(M) packages.

Approval of package designs for fissile material

3754 (1) Each package design for fissile material shall require multilateral approval.

(2) An application for approval shall include all information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the design meets the provisions of marginal 3741 and evidence of a quality assurance programme.

(3) The competent authority shall issue an approval certificate stating that the design meets the applicable provisions of marginal 3741.

Transitional arrangements

3755 Type B(U) and Type B(M) packages and packagings containing fissile material which do not fully conform to the provisions of this Appendix but which nevertheless could be used in accordance with the provisions of ADR applicable on 31 December 1989 for the corresponding material of Class 7 may still be used under the following conditions for the carriage of this material:

(a) multilateral approval shall be required on the expiry of the unilateral approval, and

(b) a serial number according to the provisions of marginal 2705 (3) shall be assigned to and marked on the outside of each packaging.

Changes in the design of the packaging or in the nature or quantity of the authorised radioactive contents which, as determined by the competent authority, would significantly affect safety shall meet the provisions of this Appendix.

Notification and registration of serial numbers

3756 The competent authority of the country of origin of design approval shall be informed of the serial number of each packaging manufactured to a design approved under marginals 3752, 3753 (1), 3754 (1) and 3755. The competent authority shall maintain a register of such serial numbers.

Approval of shipments

3757 (1) Except as allowed in paragraph (2) below, multilateral approval shall be required for:

(a) The shipment of Type B(M) packages especially designed to allow controlled intermittent venting;

(b) The shipment of Type B(M) packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3 × 103 A1 or 3 × 103 A2, as appropriate, or 1 000 TBq (20 kCi), whichever is the lower;

(c) The shipment of packages containing fissile material if the sum of the transport indexes of the individual packages exceeds 50 as provided in marginal 2712 (4).

(2) A competent authority may authorize transport into or through its country without shipment approval, by a specific provision in its design approval (see marginal 3759).

(3) An application for shipment approval shall include:

(a) The period of time, related to the shipment for which the approval is sought;

(b) The actual radioactive contents, the expected modes of transport, the type of vehicle and the probable or proposed route, and

(c) The details of how the special precautions and special administrative or operational controls, referred to in the package design approval certificates issued under marginals 3752 (3), 3753 (3) and 3754 (3) are to be put into effect.

(4) Upon approval of the shipment, the competent authority shall issue an approval certificate.

Approval of shipment under special arrangements

3758 (1) Each consignment shipped under special arrangement shall require multilateral approval.

(2) An application for approval of a shipment under special arrangement shall include all the information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the overall level of safety in transport is at least equivalent to that which would be provided if all the applicable provisions of this Appendix had been met. The application shall include:

(a) A statement of the respects in which, and of the reasons why, the consignment cannot be made in full accordance with the applicable provisions of this Appendix, and

(b) A statement of any special precautions or special administrative or operational controls which are to be employed during transport to compensate for the failure to meet the applicable provisions of this Appendix.

(3) Upon approval of a shipment under special arrangement, the competent authority shall issue an approval certificate.

Competent authority approval certificates

3759 Four types of approval certificates may be issued: special form radioactive material, special arrangement, shipment and package design. The package design and shipment approval certificates may be combined into a single certificate.

Competent authority identification marks

3760 (1) Each approval certificate issued by a competent authority shall be assigned an identification mark. The mark shall be of the following generalized type:

Symbol of nationality of country/number/type code:

(a) The symbol of nationality represents the distinguishing sign for motor vehicles in international traffic in the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic (1968).

(b) The number shall be assigned by the competent authority, and shall be unique and specific with regard to the particular design or shipment. The shipment approval identification mark shall be clearly related to the design approval identification mark.

(c) The following type codes shall be used in the order listed to indicate the types of approval certificates issued:

AF Type A package design for fissile material

B(U) Type B(U) package design; B(U)F if for fissile material

B(M) Type B(M) package design; B(M)F if for fissile material

IF Industrial package design for fissile material

S Special form radioactive material

T Shipment

X Special arrangement.

(d) For package design approval certificates, other than those issued under the provisions of marginal 3755, the symbol '-85` () shall be added to the type code of the package design.

(2) These type codes shall be applied as follows:

(a) Each certificate and each package shall bear the appropriate identification mark, comprising the symbols prescribed in paragraph (1) above, except that, for packages, only the applicable design type codes including, if applicable, the symbol '-85` () shall appear following the second stroke, that is, the 'T` or 'X` shall not appear in the identification marking on the package. Where the design approval and shipment approval are combined, the applicable type codes do not need to be repeated. For example:

A/132/B(M)F-85: A Type B(M) package design approved for fissile material, requiring multilateral approval, for which the competent authority of Austria has assigned the design number 132 ( to be marked on both the package and on the package design approval certificate);

A/132/B(M)F-85T: The shipment approval issued for a package bearing the identification mark elaborated above (to be marked on the certificate only);

A/137/X-85: A special arrangement approval issued by the competent authority of Austria, to which the number 137 has been assigned (to be marked on the certificate only);

A/139/IF-85: An industrial package design for fissile material approved by the competent authority of Austria, to which package design number 139 has been assigned (to be marked on both the package and on the package design approval certificate).

(b) Where multilateral approval is effected by validation, only the identification mark issued by the country of origin of the design or shipment shall be used. Where multilateral approval is effected by issue of certificates by successive countries, each certificate shall bear the appropriate mark and the package whose design was so approved shall bear all appropriate identification marks. For example:

A/132/B(M)F-85

CH/28/B(M)F-85

would be the identification mark of a package which was originally approved by Austria and was subsequently approved, by separate certificate, by Switzerland. Additional identification marks would be displayed in a similar manner on the package.

(c) The revision of a certificate shall be indicated by a parenthetical expression following the identification mark on the certificate. For example, A/132/B(M)F-85 (Rev.2) would indicate revision 2 of the Austrian package design approval certificate; or A/132/B(M)F-85 (Rev.0) would indicate the original issue of the Austrian package design approval certificate. For original issues, the parenthetical entry is optional and other words such as 'Original issue` may also be used in place of 'Rev.0`. Certificate revision numbers may only be issued by the country issuing the original approval certificate.

(d) Additional symbols (as may be necessitated by national requirements) may be added in brackets to the end of the identification mark; for example, A/132/B(M)F-85 (SP503).

(e) It is not necessary to alter the identification mark on the packaging each time that a revision to the design certificate is made. Such re-marking shall be made only in those cases where the revision to the package design certificate involves a change in the letter type codes for the package design following the second stroke.

Contents of approval certificates

(see introductory note to this section)

3761 Special form radioactive material approval certificates

paragraph 726

3762 Special arrangements approval certificates

paragraph 727

3763 Shipment approval certificates

paragraph 728

3764 Package design approval certificates

paragraph 729

Validation of certificates

3765 Multilateral approval may be by validation of the original certificate issued by the competent authority of the country of origin of the design or shipment.

Such validation may take the form of an endorsement on the original certificate or the issue of a separate endorsement, annex, supplement, etc., by the competent authority of the country through or into which the shipment is made.

General provision for quality assurance programme

3766 Quality assurance programmes shall be established for the design, manufacture, testing, documentation, use, maintenance and inspection of all packages and for transport and in-transit storage operations to ensure compliance with the relevant provisions of this Appendix. Where competent authority approval for design or shipment is required, such approval shall take into account and be contingent upon the adequacy of the quality assurance programme. Certification that the design specification has been fully i